Hyundai 2019 Ioniq Hybrid User Manual

OOWWNNEERR''SS MMAANNUUAALL

OOppeerraattiioonn

MMaaiinntteennaannccee

SSppeecciiffiiccaattiioonnss

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of pub-

lication. However, HYUNDAI reserves the right to make changes at

any time so that our policy of continual product improvement may be

carried out.

This manual applies to all HYUNDAI models and includes descrip-

tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment.

As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply

to your specific vehicle.

Your HYUNDAI should not be modified in any way.

Such modifications may adversely affect the per-

formance, safety or durability of your HYUNDAI

and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limit-

ed warranties covering the vehicle. Certain modifi-

cations may also be in violation of regulations

established by the U.S. Department of

Transportation and other federal or state agencies.

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injec-

tion and other electronic components. It is possible

for an improperly installed/adjusted two-way radio

or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic

systems. For this reason, we recommend that you

carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions

or consult your HYUNDAI dealer for precautionary

measures or special instructions if you choose to

install one of these devices.

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO

YOUR HYUNDAI

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR

TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

This manual includes information titled as DAN-

GER, WARNING, CAUTION and NOTICE.

These titles indicate the following:

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE

WARNING

DANGER indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, will result in death or

serious injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in death

or serious injury.

CAUTION indicates a hazardous situation

which, if not avoided, could result in minor or

moderate injury.

CAUTION

NOTICE indicates a situation which, if not

avoided, could result in vehicle damage.

NOTICE

WARNING

Your Hyundai vehicle may be equipped with technologies and services that use information collected,

generated, recorded or stored by the vehicle. Hyundai has created a Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy to explain

how these technologies and services collect use and share this information.

You may read our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy on the Hyundaiusa.com website at:

https://www.hyundaiusa.com/owner-privacy-policy.aspx

If you would like to receive a hard copy of our Vehicle Owner Privacy Policy, please contact our Customer

Connect Center at:

Hyundai Customer Care

P.O. Box 20850

Fountain Valley, CA 92728

800-633-5151

consumeraff[email protected]

Hyundai's Customer Connect Center representatives are available Monday through Friday,

between the hours of 5:00 AM and 7:00 PM PST and Saturday and Sunday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST

(English).

For Customer Connect Center assistance in Spanish or Korean, representatives are available Monday

through Friday between 6:30 AM and 3:00 PM PST.

HYUNDAI VEHICLE OWNER PRIVACY POLICY

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations, and thank you for choosing HYUNDAI.We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of dis-

tinguished people who drive HYUNDAIS. We are very proud of the advanced engineering and high-quality construc-

tion of each HYUNDAI we build.

Your Owner’s Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new HYUNDAI. To become familiar with

your new HYUNDAI, so that you can fully enjoy it, read this Owner’s Manual carefully before driving your new vehicle.

This manual contains important safety information and instructions intended to familiarize you with your vehicle’s con-

trols and safety features so you can safely operate your vehicle.

This manual also contains information on maintenance designed to enhance safe operation of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.HYUNDAI deal-

ers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that may be required.

This Owner’s Manual should be considered a permanent part of your vehicle, and should be kept in the vehicle so you

can refer to it at any time.The manual should stay with the vehicle if you sell it to provide the next owner with impor-

tant operating, safety and maintenance information.

HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA

in any retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of HYUNDAI

Motor America.

Severe engine and transmission damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that

do not meet HYUNDAI specifications.You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the

specifications listed on Page 8-7 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual.

CAUTION

1.What are HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are the

same parts used by HYUNDAI

Motor Company to manufacture

vehicles. They are designed and

tested for the optimum safety, per-

formance, and reliability for our

customers.

2.Why should you use genuine

parts?

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are

engineered and built to meet rigid

manufacturing requirements.

Damage caused by using imita-

tion, counterfeit or used salvage

parts is not covered under the

HYUNDAI New Vehicle Limited

Warranty or any other HYUNDAI

warranty.

In addition, any damage to or fail-

ure of HYUNDAI Genuine Parts

caused by the installation or fail-

ure of an imitation, counterfeit or

used salvage part is not covered

by any HYUNDAI Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are pur-

chasing HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts?

Look for the HYUNDAI Genuine

Parts Logo on the package (see

below).

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts export-

ed to the U.S. are packaged with

labels written only in English.

HYUNDAI Genuine Parts are only

sold through authorized

HYUNDAI Dealerships.

GUIDE TO HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS

Introduction

We want to help you get the greatest

possible driving pleasure from your

vehicle. Your Owner's Manual can

assist you in many ways. To gain an

overview of the contents of your

Owner's Manual, use the Table of

Contents in the front of the manual.

The first page of each Chapter

includes a detailed Table of Contents

of the topics in that Chapter.

To quickly locate information about

your vehicle, use the Index in the

back of the manual.It is an alphabet-

ical list of what is in this manual and

the page number where it can be

found.

For your convenience, we have

incorporated tabs on the right-hand

page edges. These tabs are coded

with the Chapter titles to assist you

with navigating through the manual.

Your safety, and the safety of others,

is very important. This Owner's

Manual provides you with many safe-

ty precautions and operating proce-

dures. This information alerts you to

potential hazards that may hurt you

or others, as well as damage to your

vehicle.

Safety messages found on vehicle

labels and in this manual describe

these hazards and what to do to

avoid or reduce the risks.

Warnings and instructions contained

in this manual are for your safety.

Failure to follow safety warnings and

instructions can lead to serious injury

or death.

Throughout this manual DANGER,

WARNING, CAUTION, NOTICE and

the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL will

be used.

This is the safety alert sym-

bol. It is used to alert you to

potential physical injury haz-

ards. Obey all safety mes-

sages that follow this symbol

to avoid possible injury or

death. The safety alert sym-

bol precedes the signal words

DANGER, WARNING and

CAUTION.

HHOOWW TTOO UUSSEE TTHHIISS MMAANNUUAALL

DANGER indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

will result in death or serious

injury.

DANGER

WARNING indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

could result in death or serious

injury.

WARNING

SSAAFFEETTYY MMEESSSSAAGGEESS

Introduction

FFUUEELL RREEQQUUIIRREEMMEENNTTSS

NOTICE indicates a situation

which, if not avoided, could result

in vehicle damage.

Your new vehicle is designed to

obtain maximum performance with

UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-

mize exhaust emissions and spark

plug fouling.

Your new vehicle is designed to use

only unleaded fuel having an octane

number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher.(Do not

use methanol blended fuels)

To prevent damage to the engine

and engine components, never

add any fuel system cleaning

agents to the fuel tank other than

what has been specified.

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for additional information.

Gasoline containing alcohol or

methanol

Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and

ethanol (also known as grain alco-

hol) are being marketed along with or

instead of leaded or unleaded gaso-

line. For example, "E15" is a gasohol

comprised of 15% ethanol and 85%

gasoline.

Do not use gasohol containing more

than 15% ethanol, and do not use

gasoline or gasohol containing any

methanol. Either of these fuels may

cause drivability problems and dam-

age to the fuel system, engine con-

trol system and emission control sys-

tem.

Discontinue using gasohol of any

kind if drivability problems occur.

NOTICE

CAUTION indicates a hazardous

situation which, if not avoided,

could result in minor or moder-

ate injury.

CAUTION

• Do not "top off" after the noz-

zle automatically shuts off

when refueling.

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

WARNING

Introduction

"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-

prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15

percent gasoline, and is manufac-

tured exclusively for use in Flexible

Fuel Vehicles. "E85" is not compati-

ble with your vehicle. Use of "E85"

may result in poor engine perform-

ance and damage to your vehicle's

engine and fuel system. HYUNDAI

recommends that customers do not

use fuel with an ethanol content

exceeding 15 percent.

To prevent damage to your vehicle’s

engine and fuel system:

• Never use gasohol which con-

tains methanol.

• Never use gasohol containing

more than 15% ethanol.

• Never use leaded fuel or leaded

gasohol.

• Never use "E85" fuel.

Your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty does not cover damage

to the fuel system or any perform-

ance problems caused by the use

of "E85" fuel.

Using Fuel Additives (except

Detergent Fuel Additives)

Using fuel additives such as:

- Silicone fuel additive

- Ferrocene (iron-based) fuel additive

- Other metallic-based fuel additives

may result in cylinder misfire, poor

acceleration, engine stalling, dam-

age to the catalyst, or abnormal cor-

rosion, and may cause damage to

the engine resulting in a reduction in

the overall life of the powertrain.

- The Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) may illuminate.

Damage to the fuel system or per-

formance problem caused by the

use of these fuels or fuel additives

may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Gasoline containing MMT

Some gasoline contains harmful

manganese-based fuel additives

such as

MMT (

Methylcyclopentadienyl

Manganese Tricarbonyl

)

HYUNDAI does not recommend the

use of gasoline containing MMT.

This type of fuel can reduce vehicle

performance and affect your emis-

sion control system.

The malfunction indicator lamp on

the cluster may come on.

Detergent Fuel Additives

HYUNDAI recommends that you use

good quality gasolines treated with

detergent additives such as TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, which help pre-

vent deposit formation in the engine.

These gasolines will help the engine

run cleaner and enhance performance

of the Emission Control System. For

more information on TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline, please go to the

website (www.toptiergas.com).

NOTICE

Introduction

For customers who do not use TOP

Tier Detergent Gasoline regularly,

and have problems starting or the

engine does not run smoothly, deter-

gent-based fuel additives that you

can purchase separately may be

added to the gasoline. If TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline is not available,

one bottle of additive added to the

fuel tank at every 7,500 miles or 12

months is recommended.

Additives are available from your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer along

with information on how to use them.

Do not mix other additives.

Operation in foreign countries

If you are going to drive your vehicle

in another country, be sure to:

• Observe all regulations regarding

registration and insurance.

• Determine that acceptable fuel is

available.

• This vehicle should not be modi-

fied. Modification of your vehicle

could affect its performance, safety

or durability and may even violate

governmental safety and emis-

sions regulations.

In addition, damage or perform-

ance problems resulting from any

modification may not be covered

under warranty.

• If you use unauthorized electronic

devices, it may cause the vehicle to

operate abnormally, wire damage,

battery discharge and fire.For your

safety, do not use unauthorized

electronic devices.

By following a few simple precautions

for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you

may add to the performance, econo-

my and life of your vehicle.

• Do not race the engine.

• While driving, keep your engine

speed (rpm, or revolutions per

minute) between 2,000 rpm and

4,000 rpm.

• Do not maintain a single speed for

long periods of time, either fast or

slow.Varying engine speed is need-

ed to properly break-in the engine.

• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-

gencies, to allow the brakes to seat

properly.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE BBRREEAAKK--IINN PPRROOCCEESSSS

VVEEHHIICCLLEE MMOODDIIFFIICCAATTIIOONNSS

F10

Introduction

This vehicle is equipped with an

event data recorder (EDR). The

main purpose of an EDR is to

record, in certain crash or near

crash-like situations, such as an

air bag deployment or hitting a

road obstacle, data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle’s

systems performed. The EDR is

designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less. The

EDR in this vehicle is designed to

record such data as:

• How various systems in your

vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts were

buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was

depressing the accelerator

and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was travel-

ing.

These data can help provide a bet-

ter understanding of the circum-

stances in which crashes and

injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data

are recorded by your vehicle only

if a non-trivial crash situation

occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data

(e.g., name, gender, age, and

crash location) are recorded.

However, other parties, such as

law enforcement, could combine

the EDR data with the type of per-

sonally identifying data routinely

acquired during a crash investiga-

tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR,

special equipment is required, and

access to the vehicle or the EDR is

needed. In addition to the vehicle

manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the

special equipment, can read the

information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE DDAATTAA CCOOLLLLEECCTTIIOONN AANNDD EEVVEENNTT DDAATTAA RREECCOORRDDEERRSS

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Items contained in motor vehi-

cles or emitted from them are

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth

defects or reproductive harm.

These include:

• Gasoline and its vapors

• Engine exhaust

• Used engine oil

• Interior passenger compart-

ment components and materi-

als

• Component parts which are

subject to heat and wear

In addition, battery posts, termi-

nals and related accessories

contain lead, lead compounds

and other chemicals known to

the State of California to cause

cancer and reproductive harm.

WARNING

Your vehicle at a glance

Safety system of your vehicle

Convenient features of your vehicle

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

What to do in an emergency

Maintenance

Specifications, Consumer information and

Reporting safety defects

Index

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Your vehicle at a glance

HHyybbrriidd VVeehhiiccllee

Exterior Overview..................................................1-2

Interior Overview ...................................................1-4

Instrument Panel Overview ..................................1-5

Engine Compartment .............................................1-6

PPlluugg--iinn HHyybbrriidd VVeehhiiccllee

Exterior Overview..................................................1-7

Interior Overview ...................................................1-9

Instrument Panel Overview ................................1-10

Engine Compartment ...........................................1-11

1-2

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Hood......................................................3-45

2.Windows................................................3-37

3. Sunroof..................................................3-41

4.Wiper blade ..........................................7-28

5.Tires and wheels............................7-34, 8-5

6. Headlamp..............................................7-55

7. Outer side view mirror ..........................3-33

8. Daytime running light (DRL) ......3-116, 7-60

OAE016001N

■■

Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-3

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Door lock ................................................3-9

2. Fuel filler door ......................................3-48

3. Antenna ..................................................4-2

4. Rear combination lamp ........................7-61

5. High mounted stop lamp ......................7-64

6. Liftgate ..................................................3-46

7. Rear view monitor ..............................3-129

8. Parking Distance Warning system

(Reverse) ............................................3-130

9.Towing hook ..........................................6-41

OAE016002

■■

Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-4

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-10

2. Driver position memory system ............3-14

3. Side view mirror control switch..............3-35

4. Central door lock switch ........................3-11

5. Power window switches ........................3-37

6. Power window lock switch......................3-40

7. Instrument panel illumination control

switch ....................................................3-56

8. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)

System ..................................................5-34

9. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System ......5-56

10. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

OFF button ..........................................5-28

11. Fuel filler door open switch..................3-48

12. 12V battery reset switch ........................6-5

13. Fuse panel ..........................................7-50

14. Steering wheel ....................................3-16

15. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-16

16. Seat........................................................2-4

17. Hood release lever ..............................3-45

OAE017003N

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-5

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Steering wheel audio controls/ ............4-3

Bluetooth

wireless technology

hands-free controls ..............................4-4

2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-54

3. Horn....................................................3-17

4. Driver’s front air bag ..........................2-49

5. Cruise controls/ ..................................5-71

Smart cruise controls..........................5-76

6. Engine Start/Stop button ......................5-6

7. Light control/Turn signals..................3-116

8.Wiper/Washer ..................................3-127

9. Dual clutch transmission ....................5-12

. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2

. Climate control system ..................3-133

12. Seat warmer ....................................2-20

13.Wireless cellular phone charging

system ............................................3-155

14. Passenger’s front air bag..................2-49

15. Glove box........................................3-150

16. Power outlet....................................3-153

17. AUX, USB and iPod

port ..................4-2

OAE016004N

1-6

Your vehicle at a glance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT -- HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-16

2. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-16

3. Engine coolant cap...........................7-19

4. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-18

5. Inverter coolant reservoir..................7-18

6. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22

7. Air cleaner.........................................7-24

8.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-23

9. Fuse box...........................................7-51

OAE076001

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1-7

Your vehicle at a glance

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Hood......................................................3-45

2.Windows................................................3-37

3. Sunroof..................................................3-41

4.Wiper blade ..........................................7-28

5.Tires and wheels............................7-34, 8-5

6. Headlamp..............................................7-55

7. Outer side view mirror ..........................3-33

8. Daytime running light (DRL) ......3-116, 7-60

9. Charging door..........................................H4

OAEPH017001N

■■

Front view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-8

Your vehicle at a glance

1. Door lock ................................................3-9

2. Fuel filler door ......................................3-51

3. Antenna ..................................................4-2

4. Rear combination lamp ........................7-61

5. High mounted stop lamp ......................7-64

6. Liftgate ..................................................3-46

7. Rear view monitor ..............................3-129

8. Parking Distance Warning system

(Reverse) ............................................3-130

9.Towing hook ..........................................6-41

OAEPH016002

■■

Rear view

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-9

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNTTEERRIIOORR OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Door lock/unlock button ........................3-10

2. Driver position memory system ............3-14

3. Side view mirror control switch..............3-35

4. Central door lock switch ........................3-11

5. Power window switches ........................3-37

6. Power window lock switch......................3-40

7. Instrument panel illumination control

switch ....................................................3-56

8. Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW)

System ..................................................5-34

9. Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System ......5-56

10. ESC (Electronic Stability Control)

OFF button ..........................................5-28

11. Fuel filler door open switch..................3-51

12. AUTO/LOCK mode selection button ......H6

13. Scheduled charging deactivation

button......................................................H7

14. Fuse panel ..........................................7-50

15. Steering wheel ....................................3-16

16. Steering wheel tilt/telescope lever ......3-16

17. Seat........................................................2-4

18. Hood release lever ..............................3-45

OAEPH017003N

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1-10

Your vehicle at a glance

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT PPAANNEELL OOVVEERRVVIIEEWW -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

The actual shape may differ from the illustration.

1. Steering wheel audio controls/ ............4-3

Bluetooth

wireless technology

hands-free controls ..............................4-4

2. Instrument cluster ..............................3-55

3. Horn....................................................3-17

4. Driver’s front air bag ..........................2-49

5. Cruise controls/ ..................................5-71

Smart cruise controls..........................5-76

6. Engine Start/Stop button ......................5-6

7. Light control/Turn signals..................3-116

8.Wiper/Washer ..................................3-127

9. Dual clutch transmission ....................5-12

. Hazard warning flasher button ..............6-2

. Climate control system ..................3-133

12. Seat warmer ....................................2-20

13. EV/HEV button..................................H31

14.Wireless cellular phone charging

system ............................................3-155

15. Passenger’s front air bag..................2-49

16. Glove box........................................3-150

17. Power outlet....................................3-153

18. AUX, USB and iPod

port ..................4-2

OAE016004C

1-11

Your vehicle at a glance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT -- PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

1. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-16

2. Engine oil dipstick.............................7-16

3. Engine coolant cap...........................7-19

4. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-18

5. Inverter coolant reservoir..................7-18

6. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-22

7. Air cleaner.........................................7-24

8.Windshield washer fluid reservoir.....7-23

9. Fuse box...........................................7-51

❈ The 12 volt battery is located in the lug-

gage compartment.

OAEPH076001

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

Safety system of your vehicle

Important safety precautions...............................2-2

Always Wear Your Seat Belt ..........................................2-2

Restrain All Children.........................................................2-2

Air Bag Hazards.................................................................2-2

Driver Distraction ..............................................................2-2

Control Your Speed...........................................................2-3

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe Condition............................2-3

Seats ........................................................................2-4

Safety Precautions ...........................................................2-5

Front Seats .........................................................................2-6

Rear Seats.........................................................................2-12

Head Restraints ...............................................................2-16

Seat warmers ...................................................................2-20

Seat belts ..............................................................2-23

Seat Belt Safety Precautions.......................................2-23

Seat Belt Warning Light ................................................2-24

Seat Belt Restraint System...........................................2-25

Additional Seat Belt Safety Precautions...................2-32

Care of Seat Belts...........................................................2-35

Child restraint system (CRS) ..............................2-36

Children Always in the Rear.........................................2-36

Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) .................2-37

Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)..................2-39

Air bag

- Advanced supplemental restraint system.....2-47

Where Are the Air Bags?..............................................2-49

How Does the Air Bag System Operate?..................2-52

What to Expect After an Air Bag Inflates................2-57

Occupant Classification System (OCS).......................2-58

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off in a Collision? ........2-63

SRS Care............................................................................2-68

Additional Safety Precautions .....................................2-69

Air Bag Warning Labels.................................................2-70

This chapter provides you with important information about how to protect yourself and your passengers.

It explains how to properly use your seats and seat belts, and how your air bags work.

Additionally, this chapter explains how to properly restrain infants and children in your vehicle.

2-2

You will find many safety precautions

and recommendations throughout

this section, and throughout this man-

ual.The safety precautions in this sec-

tion are among the most important.

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

A seat belt is your best protection in

all types of accidents. Air bags are

designed to supplement seat belts,

not replace them. So even though

your vehicle is equipped with air bags,

ALWAYS make sure you and your

passengers wear your seat belts, and

wear them properly.

Restrain All Children

All children under age 13 should ride

in your vehicle properly restrained in

a rear seat, not the front seat.Infants

and small children should be

restrained in an appropriate child

restraint. Larger children should use

a booster seat with the lap/shoulder

belt until they can use the seat belt

properly without a booster seat.

Air Bag Hazards

While air bags can save lives, they

can also cause serious or fatal

injuries to occupants who sit too

close to them, or who are not prop-

erly restrained. Infants, young chil-

dren, and shorter adults are at the

greatest risk of being injured by an

inflating air bag. Follow all instruc-

tions and warnings in this manual.

Driver Distraction

Driver distraction presents a serious

and potentially deadly danger, espe-

cially for inexperienced drivers.Safety

should be the first concern when

behind the wheel and drivers need to

be aware of the wide array of potential

distractions, such as drowsiness,

reaching for objects, eating, personal

grooming, other passengers, and

using cellular phones.

Drivers can become distracted when

they take their eyes and attention off

the road or their hands off the wheel

to focus on activities other than driv-

ing.To reduce your risk of distraction

or getting into an accident:

IIMMPPOORRTTAANNTT SSAAFFEETTYY PPRREECCAAUUTTIIOONNSS

Safety system of your vehicle

2-3

Safety system of your vehicle

• ALWAYS set up your mobile devices

(i.e., MP3 players, phones, naviga-

tion units, etc.) when your vehicle is

parked or safely stopped.

• ONLY use your mobile device when

allowed by laws and when conditions

permit safe use. NEVER text or

email while driving. Most states have

laws prohibiting drivers from texting.

Some states and cities also prohibit

drivers from using handheld phones.

• NEVER let the use of a mobile

device distract you from driving.You

have a responsibility to your passen-

gers and others on the road to

always drive safely, with your hands

on the wheel as well as your eyes

and attention on the road.

Control Your Speed

Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,

the higher the speed, the greater the

risk, but serious injuries can also

occur at lower speeds. Never drive

faster than is safe for current condi-

tions, regardless of the maximum

speed posted.

Keep Your Vehicle in Safe

Condition

Having a tire blowout or a mechanical

failure can be extremely hazardous.

To reduce the possibility of such

problems, check your tire pressures

and condition frequently, and perform

all regularly scheduled maintenance.

2-4

SSEEAATTSS

Safety system of your vehicle

OAE036001N

Front seats

(1) Forward and backward

(2) Seatback angle

(3) Seat cushion height

(4) Lumbar support (Driver's seat)*

(5) Seat warmer*

(6) Headrest

Rear seats

(7) Seat warmer*

(8) Armrest*

(9) Headrest

(10) Seatback folding

* : if equipped

■ Manual seat

■ Power seat

Safety Precautions

Adjusting the seats so that you are sit-

ting in a safe, comfortable position

plays an important role in driver and

passenger safety together with the

seat belts and air bags in an accident.

Air bags

You can take steps to reduce the risk

of being injured by an inflating air

bag. Sitting too close to an air bag

greatly increases the risk of injury in

the event the air bag inflates.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (NHTSA) recommends

that drivers allow at least 10 inches

(25 cm) between the center of the

steering wheel and their chest.

Do not use a cushion that

reduces friction between the seat

and the passenger. The passen-

ger's hips may slide under the

lap portion of the seat belt during

an accident or a sudden stop.

Serious or fatal internal injuries

could result because the seat

belt cannot operate properly.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• Adjust the driver's seat as far to

the rear as possible while main-

taining the ability to maintain

full control of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger seat

as far to the rear as possible.

• Hold the steering wheel by the

rim with hands at the 9 o'clock

and 3 o'clock positions to mini-

mize the risk of injuries to your

hands and arms.

• NEVER place anything or any-

one between the steering wheel

and the air bag.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place feet or legs on the

dashboard to minimize the risk

of leg injuries.

WARNING

2-5

Safety system of your vehicle

2-6

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts

Always fasten your seat belt before

starting any trip.

At all times, passengers should sit

upright and be properly restrained.

Infants and small children must be

restrained in appropriate child restraint

systems. Adults and children who

have outgrown a booster seat must be

restrained using the seat belts.

Front Seats

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat belt:

• NEVER use one seat belt for

more than one occupant.

• Always position the seatback

upright with the lap portion of

the seat belt snug and low

across the hips.

• NEVER allow children or small

infants to ride on a passen-

ger's lap.

• Do not route the seat belt

across your neck,across sharp

edges, or reroute the shoulder

strap away from your body.

• Do not allow the seat belt to

become caught or jammed.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when adjusting your seat:

• NEVER attempt to adjust the

seat while the vehicle is mov-

ing. The seat could respond

with unexpected movement

and may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything under

the front seats. Loose objects

in the driver's foot area could

interfere with the operation of

the foot pedals, causing an

accident.

• Do not allow anything to inter-

fere with the normal position

and proper locking of the seat-

back.

• Do not place a cigarette lighter

on the floor or seat. When you

operate the seat, gas may exit

out of the lighter causing a fire.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-7

Safety system of your vehicle

Manual adjustment (if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the levers located on the out-

side of the seat cushion. Before driv-

ing, adjust the seat to the proper

position so that you can easily con-

trol the steering wheel, foot pedals

and controls on the instrument

panel.

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Pull up the seat slide adjustment

lever and hold it.

2. Slide the seat to the position you

desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seat is locked in place. Move

forward and rearward without

using the lever. If the seat moves,

it is not locked properly.

To prevent injury:

• Do not adjust your seat while

wearing your seat belt.

Moving the seat cushion for-

ward may cause strong pres-

sure on your abdomen.

• Do not allow your hands or

fingers to get caught in the

seat mechanisms while the

seat is moving.

CAUTION

(Continued)

• Use extreme caution when

picking up small objects

trapped under the seats or

between the seat and the cen-

ter console.Your hands might

be cut or injured by the sharp

edges of the seat mechanism.

OAE036002

2-8

Seatback angle

To recline the seatback:

1. Lean forward slightly and lift up

the seatback lever.

2. Carefully lean back on the seat

and adjust the seatback to the

position you desire.

3. Release the lever and make sure

the seatback is locked in place.

(The lever MUST return to its orig-

inal position for the seatback to

lock.)

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protection of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you.During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger's

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger's neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Safety system of your vehicle

NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

Drivers and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

OAE036003

2-9

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

• Push down on the lever several

times, to lower the seat cushion.

• Pull up on the lever several times,

to raise the seat cushion.

Power adjustment

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

The front seat can be adjusted by

using the control switches located on

the outside of the seat cushion.Before

driving, adjust the seat to the proper

position so that you can easily control

the steering wheel, foot pedals and

controls on the instrument panel.

To prevent damage to the seats:

• Always stop adjusting the seats

when the seat has moved as far

forward or rearward as possible.

• Do not adjust the seats for

longer than necessary when the

vehicle is turned off. This may

result in unnecessary battery

drain.

• Do not operate two or more

seats at the same time.This may

result in an electrical malfunc-

tion.

NOTICE

NEVER allow children in the

vehicle unattended. The power

seats are operable when the

vehicle is turned off.

WARNING

OAE036004

2-10

Forward and rearward adjustment

To move the seat forward or rearward:

1. Push the control switch forward or

rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Seatback angle

To adjust the seatback:

1. Rotate the top of control switch

forward or rearward.

2. Release the switch once the seat-

back reaches the desired position.

Reclining seatback

Sitting in a reclined position when

the vehicle is in motion can be dan-

gerous. Even when buckled up, the

protections of your restraint system

(seat belts and air bags) is greatly

reduced by reclining your seatback.

Safety system of your vehicle

NEVER ride with a reclined seat-

back when the vehicle is moving.

Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of serious

or fatal injuries in the event of a

collision or sudden stop.

Driver and passengers should

ALWAYS sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

OAE036007OAE036006

2-11

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belts must be snug against your

hips and chest to work properly.

When the seatback is reclined, the

shoulder belt cannot do its job

because it will not be snug against

your chest. Instead, it will be in front

of you.During an accident, you could

be thrown into the seat belt, causing

neck or other injuries.

The more the seatback is reclined,

the greater chance the passenger’s

hips will slide under the lap belt or

the passenger's neck will strike the

shoulder belt.

Seat cushion height

To change the height of the seat

cushion:

1. • Push the front portion of the con-

trol switch up to raise or down to

lower the front part of the seat

cushion.

• Push the rear portion of the con-

trol switch up to raise or down to

lower the height of the seat cush-

ion.

2. Release the switch once the seat

reaches the desired position.

Lumbar support

(for driver's seat, if equipped)

To adjust the lumbar support:

1. Press the front portion of the

switch (1) to increase support or

the rear portion of the switch (2) to

decrease support.

2. Release the switch once it reach-

es the desired position.

OAE036008

OAE036005

2-12

Safety system of your vehicle

Seatback pocket

The seatback pocket is provided on

the back of the front passenger's

seatback.

Rear Seats

Folding the rear seat

The rear seatbacks can be folded to

facilitate carrying long items or to

increase the luggage capacity of the

vehicle.

To prevent the Occupant

Classification System from mal-

functioning:

Do not hang onto the front pas-

senger's seatback.

WARNING

• Never allow passengers to sit

on top of the folded down

seatback while the vehicle is

moving. This is not a proper

seating position and no seat

belts are available for use.

This could result in serious

injury or death in case of an

accident or sudden stop.

• Objects carried on the folded

down seatback should not

extend higher than the top of

the front seatbacks. This

could allow cargo to slide for-

ward and cause injury or dam-

age during sudden stops.

WARNING

Do not put heavy or sharp

objects in the seatback pockets.

In an accident they could come

loose from the pocket and

injure occupants.

CAUTION

OAD035017

2-13

Safety system of your vehicle

To fold down the rear seatback:

1. Set the front seatback to the

upright position and if necessary,

slide the front seat forward.

2. Lower the rear head restraints to

the lowest position by pushing and

holding the release button (1) and

pushing down on the headrest (2).

3. Insert the rear seat belt buckle in

the pocket between the rear seat-

back and cushion.

4. Locate the seatbelt toward the

outboard position before folding

down the seatback. If not, the

seatbelt system may be interfered

by the seatback.

5. Pull on the seatback folding lever

(1).

OAE036018

OAE036065L

OAE036019

OAE036020

When returning the rear seat-

back from a folded to an upright

position, hold the seatback and

return it slowly. Ensure that the

seatback is completely locked

into its upright position by

pushing on the top of the seat-

back. In an accident or sudden

stop, the unlocked seatback

could allow cargo to move for-

ward with great force and enter

the passenger compartment,

which could result in serious

injury or death.

WARNING

2-14

6. Fold the seatback toward the front

of the vehicle.

7. To use the rear seat, lift and unfold

the seatback to the upright posi-

tion. Push the seatback firmly until

it clicks into place. Make sure the

seatback is locked in place.

When you return the seatback to

its upright position, always be sure

it has locked into position by push-

ing on the top of the seatback.

Safety system of your vehicle

OAE036021 OAE036066L

2-15

Safety system of your vehicle

Armrest (if equipped)

The armrest is located in the center

of the rear seat. Use the strap in the

center of the armrest to pull it down.

Do not place objects in the rear

seats, since they cannot be

properly secured and may hit

vehicle occupants in a collision

causing serious injury or death.

WARNING

Make sure the vehicle is off, the

shift lever is in P (Park), and the

parking brake is securely applied

whenever loading or unloading

cargo.Failure to take these steps

may allow the vehicle to move if

the shift lever is inadvertently

moved to another position.

WARNING

OAE036022

• Be careful when loading

cargo through the rear pas-

senger seats to prevent dam-

age to the vehicle interior.

• When cargo is loaded through

the rear passenger seats,

ensure the cargo is properly

secured to prevent it from

moving while driving.

• Unsecured cargo in the pas-

senger compartment can

cause damage to the vehicle

or injury to it's occupants.

CAUTION

2-16

Safety system of your vehicle

Head Restraints

The vehicle's front and rear seats

have adjustable head restraints. The

head restraints provide comfort for

passengers, but more importantly

they are designed to help protect

passengers from whiplash and other

neck and spinal injuries during an

accident, especially in a rear impact

collision.

To prevent damage, NEVER hit or

pull on the head restraints.

NOTICE

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death in an accident,

take the following precautions

when adjusting your head

restraints:

• Always properly adjust the

head restraints for all passen-

gers BEFORE starting the

vehicle.

• NEVER let anyone ride in a

seat with the head restraints

removed.

(Continued)

•

Adjust the head restraints so

the middle of the head

restraint is at the same height

as the height of the top of the

eyes.

• NEVER adjust the head

restraint position of the dri-

ver's seat when the vehicle is

in motion.

• Adjust the head restraint as

close to the passenger's head

as possible. Do not use a seat

cushion that holds the body

away from the seatback.

• Make sure the head restraint

locks into position after adjust-

ing it.

WARNING

OLF034072N

2-17

Safety system of your vehicle

Front seat head restraints

The vehicle's front and passenger's

seats are equipped with adjustable

head restraints for the passengers

safety and comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

If you recline the seatback towards

the front with the head restraint

and seat cushion raised, the head

restraint may come in contact with

the sunvisor or other parts of the

vehicle.

NOTICE

OPDE036068

OAE036010

OLF034015

2-18

Safety system of your vehicle

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Recline the seatback (2) rearward

using the seatback angle lever/

switch (1).

2. Raise the head restraint as far as

it can go.

3. Press the head restraint release

button (3) while pulling the head

restraint up (4).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles (2)

into the holes while pressing the

release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the

appropriate height.

3. Adjust the seatback (4) forward

using the seatback angle lever/

switch (3).

OAE036012

OAE036011

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE036014

OAE036013

■ Type A

■ Type B

2-19

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear seat head restraints

The rear seats are equipped with

head restraints in all the seating

positions for the passenger's safety

and comfort.

Adjusting the height up and down

To raise the head restraint:

1. Pull it up to the desired position (1).

To lower the head restraint:

1. Push and hold the release button

(2) on the head restraint support.

2. Lower the head restraint to the

desired position (3).

Removal/Reinstallation

To remove the head restraint:

1. Raise the head restraint as far as

it can go.

2. Press the head restraint release

button (1) while pulling the head

restraint up (2).

To reinstall the head restraint:

1. Put the head restraint poles into

the holes (3) while pressing the

release button (1).

2. Adjust the head restraint to the

appropriate height.

OPDE036069

OAE036017 OAE036072L

2-20

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Warmers

Front seat warmers (if equipped)

Seat warmers are provided to warm

the seats during cold weather.

To prevent damage to the seat

warmers and seats:

• Never use a solvent such as

paint thinner, benzene, alcohol

or gasoline to clean the seats.

• Do not place heavy or sharp

objects on seats equipped with

seat warmers.

• Do not change the seat cover. It

may damage the seat warmer.

NOTICE

The seat warmers can cause a

SERIOUS BURN, even at low

temperatures and especially if

used for long periods of time.

Passengers must be able to feel

if the seat is becoming too warm

so they can turn it off, if needed.

(Continued)

People who cannot detect tem-

perature change or pain to the

skin should use extreme cau-

tion, especially the following

types of passengers:

• Infants, children, elderly or

disabled persons, or hospital

outpatients.

• People with sensitive skin or

who burn easily.

• Fatigued individuals.

• Intoxicated individuals.

• People taking medication that

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness.

WARNING

NEVER place anything on the

seat that insulates against heat

when the seat warmer is in oper-

ation, such as a blanket or seat

cushion. This may cause the

seat warmer to overheat, caus-

ing a burn or damage to the seat.

WARNING

2-21

Safety system of your vehicle

While the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode, push either of the

switches to warm the driver's seat or

front passenger's seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

• Each time you push the switch, the

temperature setting of the seat is

changed as follows :

• When pressing the switch for more

than 1.5 seconds with the seat

warmer operating, the seat warmer

will turn OFF.

• The seat warmer defaults to the

OFF position whenever the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion.

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

Rear seat warmers (if equipped)

While the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode, push either of the

switches to warm the rear seat.

During mild weather or under condi-

tions where the operation of the seat

warmer is not needed, keep the

switches in the OFF position.

OAE036015N

OFF HIGH ( )

LOW ( ) MIDDLE ( )

→

OAE036023

2-22

Safety system of your vehicle

Each time you push the switch, the

temperature setting of the seat is

changed as follows :

The seat warmer defaults to the OFF

position whenever the Engine Start/

Stop button is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

Information

With the seat warmer switch in the

ON position, the heating system in the

seat turns off or on automatically

depending on the seat temperature.

Battery cooling duct

The high voltage battery cooling duct

is located on the left side of the rear

seats. The cooling duct cools down

the high voltage battery.

When the high voltage battery cool-

ing duct is blocked, the high voltage

battery may be overheated. Do not

obstruct the cooling duct with any

other objects.

OFF → HIGH ( ) → LOW ( )

→

OAE036024

■ Hybrid vehicle

OAEPH036024

■ Plug-in hybrid vehicle

2-23

Safety system of your vehicle

This section describes how to use the

seat belts properly. It also describes

some of the things not to do when

using seat belts.

Seat Belt Safety Precautions

Always fasten your seat belt and

make sure all passengers have fas-

tened their seat belts before starting

any trip. Air bags are designed to

supplement the seat belt as an addi-

tional safety device, but they are not a

substitute. Most states require all

occupants of a vehicle to wear seat

belts.

SSEEAATT BBEELLTTSS

Seat belts must be used by ALL

passengers whenever the vehi-

cle is moving.Take the following

precautions when adjusting and

wearing seat belts:

• ALWAYS properly restrain

children under age 13 in the

rear seats.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• NEVER allow children to ride

in the front passenger seat. If

a child age 13 or older must be

seated in the front seat, move

the seat as far back as possi-

ble and properly restrain them

in the seat.

• NEVER allow an infant or child

to be carried on an occupant’s

lap.

• NEVER ride with the seatback

reclined when the vehicle is

moving.

• Do not allow children to share

a seat or seat belt.

• Do not wear the shoulder belt

under your arm or behind your

back.

• Always wear both the shoul-

der portion and lap portion of

the lap/shoulder belt.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

twisted. A twisted seat belt

will not protect you properly

in an accident.

(Continued)

• Do not use a seat belt if the

webbing or hardware is dam-

aged.

• Do not latch the seat belt into

the buckles of other seats.

• NEVER unfasten the seat belt

while driving. This may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Make sure there is nothing in

the buckle interfering with the

seat belt latch mechanism.

This may prevent the seat belt

from fastening securely.

• No modifications or additions

should be made by the user

which will either prevent the

seat belt adjusting devices

from operating to remove

slack, or prevent the seat belt

assembly from being adjusted

to remove slack.

2-24

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt Warning Light

Seat belt warning light

(for driver's seat)

As a reminder to the driver, the seat

belt warning light will illuminate and

warning chime will sound for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you

place the Engine Start/Stop button to

the ON position if the seat belt is

unfastened.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 6 mph

(9 km/h), the warning light will stay

illuminated.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 12 mph

(20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime

will sound for approximately 100 sec-

onds and the corresponding warning

light will blink.

If you unfasten the seat belt while

driving under 12 mph (20 km/h), the

seat belt warning light will illuminate

until the seat belt is fastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while

driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the

seat belt warning chime will sound for

approximately 100 seconds and the

corresponding warning light will blink.

Damaged seat belts and seat

belt assemblies will not operate

properly. Always replace:

• Frayed, contaminated, or dam-

aged webbing

• Damaged hardware

• The entire seat belt assembly

after it has been worn in an

accident, even if damage to

webbing or assembly is not

apparent

WARNING

OLMB033022

2-25

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belt warning light

(for front passenger's seat)

As a reminder to the front passenger,

the front passenger's seat belt warn-

ing lights will illuminate for approxi-

mately 6 seconds each time you

place the Engine Start/Stop button to

the ON position regardless of belt

fastening.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 6 mph

(9 km/h), the warning light will stay

illuminated.

If you continue not to fasten the seat

belt and you drive over 12 mph

(20 km/h) the seat belt warning chime

will sound for approximately 100 sec-

onds and the corresponding warning

light will blink.

If you unfasten the seat belt while

driving under 12 mph (20 km/h) the

seat belt warning light will illuminate

until the seat belt is fastened.

If you unfasten the seat belt while

driving over 12 mph (20 km/h), the

seat belt warning chime will sound for

approximately 100 seconds and the

corresponding warning light will blink.

Seat Belt Restraint System

The front passenger's seat belt

warning light may not properly

operate if the front passenger

does not sit properly in the seat.

WARNING

OAEE036011N

Improperly positioned seat belts

may increase the risk of serious

injury in an accident.Take the fol-

lowing precautions when adjust-

ing the seat belt:

• Position the lap portion of the

seat belt as low as possible

across your hips, not on your

waist, so that it fits snugly.

(Continued)

WARNING

OLMB033025

2-26

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat Belt-Driver's 3-point sys-

tem with emergency locking

retractor

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab (1) into the

buckle (2). There will be an audible

"click" when the tab locks into the

buckle.

You should place the lap belt (1) por-

tion across your hips and the shoul-

der belt (2) portion across your

chest.

The seat belt automatically adjusts to

the proper length after the lap belt

portion is adjusted manually so that it

fits snugly around your hips. If you

lean forward in a slow, easy motion,

the belt will extend and move with

you.

If there is a sudden stop or impact,

the belt will lock into position. It will

also lock if you try to lean forward too

quickly.

OLMB033087

(Continued)

• Position one arm under the

shoulder belt and the other over

the belt, as shown in the illus-

tration.

• Always position the shoulder

belt anchor into the locked

position at the appropriate

height.

• Never position the shoulder

belt across your neck or face.

ODH033053

2-27

Safety system of your vehicle

If you are not able to smoothly pull

enough of the seat belt out from

the retractor, firmly pull the seat

belt out and release it. After

release, you will be able to pull the

belt out smoothly.

Height adjustment

You can adjust the height of the

shoulder belt anchor to one of the

three different positions for maximum

comfort and safety.The shoulder por-

tion should be adjusted so it lies

across your chest and midway over

your shoulder nearest the door, not

over your neck.

To adjust the height of the seat belt

anchor, lower or raise the height

adjuster into an appropriate position.

To raise the height adjuster, pull it up

(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while

pressing the height adjuster button (2).

Release the button to lock the anchor

into position. Try sliding the height

adjuster to make sure that it has

locked into position.

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the

locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should

automatically draw back into the

retractor. If this does not happen,

check the belt to be sure it is not twist-

ed, then try again.

NOTICE

OAD035027

ODH033057

2-28

Safety system of your vehicle

Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-

point system with convertible

locking retractor

This type of seat belt combines the

features of both an emergency locking

retractor seat belt and an automatic

locking retractor seat belt. Convertible

retractor type seat belts are installed in

the rear seat positions to help accom-

modate the installation of child

restraint systems. Although a convert-

ible retractor is also installed in the

front passenger seat position, NEVER

place any infant/child restraint system

in the front seat of the vehicle.

To fasten your seat belt:

Pull the seat belt out of the retractor

and insert the metal tab into the buck-

le. There will be an audible "click"

when the tab locks into the buckle.

When not securing a child restraint,

the seat belt operates in the same way

as the driver's seat belt (Emergency

Locking Retractor Type). It automati-

cally adjusts to the proper length only

after the lap belt portion of the seat

belt is adjusted manually so that it fits

snugly across your hips.

When the seat belt is fully extended

from the retractor to allow the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, the

seat belt operation changes to allow

the belt to retract, but not to extend

(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).

Refer to the "Using a Child Restraint

System" section in this chapter.

Although the seat belt retractor

provides the same level of protec-

tion for seated passengers in

either emergency or automatic

locking modes, the emergency

locking mode allows seated pas-

sengers to move freely in their

seat while keeping some tension

on the belt. During a collision or

sudden stop, the retractor auto-

matically locks the belt to help

restrain your body.

To deactivate the automatic lock-

ing mode, unbuckle the seat belt

and allow the belt to fully retract.

To release your seat belt:

Press the release button (1) in the

locking buckle.

When it is released, the belt should

automatically draw back into the

retractor. If this does not happen,

check the belt to be sure it is not twist-

ed, then try again.

NOTICE

ODH033057

2-29

Safety system of your vehicle

Pre-tensioner seat belt

(Driver and front passenger)

Your vehicle is equipped with driver's

and front passenger's Pre-tensioner

Seat Belts (Retractor Pretensioner

and Emergency Fastening Device

System).The purpose of the pre-ten-

sioner is to make sure the seat belts

fit tightly against the occupant's body

in certain frontal or side collision(s).

The Emergency Fastening Device

System may be activated in certain

crashes where the frontal or side colli-

sion(s) is severe enough, together

with the air bags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or

if the occupant tries to lean forward

too quickly, the seat belt retractor will

lock into position.In certain frontal or

side collision(s), the pre-tensioner

will activate and pull the seat belt into

tighter contact against the occu-

pant's body.

(1) Retractor Pretensioner

The purpose of the retractor pre-

tensioner is to make sure that the

shoulder belts fit in tightly against

the occupant's upper body in cer-

tain frontal or side collision(s).

(2) Emergency Fastening Device

System

The purpose of the Emergency

Fastening Device System is to

make sure that the pelvis belts fit

in tightly against the occupant's

lower body in certain frontal or

side collision(s).

If the system senses excessive ten-

sion on the driver or passenger's

seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-

tem activates, the load limiter inside

the retractor pre-tensioner will

release some of the pressure on the

affected seat belt.

OTL035053

• Always wear your seat belt and

sit properly in your seat.

• Do not use the seat belt if it is

loose or twisted. A loose or

twisted seat belt will not pro-

tect you properly in an acci-

dent.

• Do not place anything near the

buckle. This may adversely

affect the buckle and cause it

to function improperly.

• Always replace your pre-ten-

sioners after activation or an

accident.

• NEVER inspect, service, repair

or replace the pre-tensioners

yourself. This must be done by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Do not hit the seat belt assem-

blies.

WARNING

2-30

Safety system of your vehicle

The Pre-Tensioner Seat Belt System

consists mainly of the following com-

ponents.Their locations are shown in

the illustration above:

1. SRS air bag warning light

2. Retractor pre-tensioner

3. SRS control module

4. Emergency Fastening Device

System

The sensor that activates the SRS

air bag is connected with the

pre–tensioner seat belts.The SRS

air bag warning light on the instru-

ment panel will illuminate for

approximately 6 seconds after the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position, and then it should

turn off.

If the pre-tensioner is not working

properly, the warning light will illu-

minate even if the SRS air bag is

not malfunctioning. If the warning

light does not illuminate, stays

illuminated or illuminates when

the vehicle is being driven, have

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

inspect the pre-tensioner seat

belts and SRS air bags as soon as

possible.

NOTICE

Do not touch the pre-tensioner

seat belt assemblies for several

minutes after they have been

activated. When the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt mechanism

deploys during a collision, the

pre-tensioners become hot and

can burn you.

WARNING

OLMB033040/Q

2-31

Safety system of your vehicle

• Both the driver's and front pas-

senger's pre-tensioner seat

belts may be activated in certain

frontal or side collisions or

rollovers.

• When the pre-tensioner seat

belts are activated, a loud noise

may be heard and fine dust,

which may appear to be smoke,

may be visible in the passenger

compartment. These are normal

operating conditions and are not

hazardous.

• Although it is non-toxic, the fine

dust may cause skin irritation

and should not be inhaled for

prolonged periods. Wash all

exposed skin areas thoroughly

after an accident in which the

pre-tensioner seat belts were

activated.

Rear center seatbelt

(3-point rear center seat belt)

1. Insert the tongue plate (A) into the

buckle (A’) until an audible "click"

is heard, indicating the latch is

locked. Make sure the belt is not

twisted.

NOTICE

• Fasten your seat belt while

sitting properly in an upright

position to maximize the

effectiveness of the pre-ten-

sioner seat belt system.

• A pre-tensioner seat belt sys-

tem is designed to activate

only once. Replace the pre-

tensioner seat belt system, if it

was activated in an accident.

WARNING

OAE036068L

2-32

Safety system of your vehicle

2. Pull the tongue plate (B) and

insert it into the buckle (B’) until an

audible "click" is heard, indicating

the latch is locked. Make sure the

belt is not twisted.

When using the rear center seat belt,

the buckle with the "CENTER" mark

must be used.

Additional Seat Belt Safety

Precautions

Seat belt use during pregnancy

The seat belt should always be used

during pregnancy. The best way to

protect your unborn child is to protect

yourself by always wearing the seat

belt.

Pregnant women should always wear

a lap-shoulder seat belt. Place the

shoulder belt across your chest, rout-

ed between your breasts and away

from your neck. Place the lap belt line

so that it fits snugly and as low as pos-

sible across the hips, not across the

abdomen.

• A pregnant woman or a

patient is more vulnerable to

any imapcts on the abdomen

during an abrupt stop or acci-

dent. If you are in an accident

while pregnant, we recom-

mend you consult your doc-

tor.

• To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to an unborn

child during an accident,

pregnant women should

NEVER place the lap portion

of the seat belt above or over

the area of the abdomen

where the unborn child is

located.

WARNING

OAE036027

2-33

Safety system of your vehicle

Seat belt use and children

Infant and small children

All 50 states have child restraint laws

which require children to travel in

approved child restraint devices,

including booster seats. The age at

which seat belts can be used instead

of child restraints differs among

states, so you should be aware of the

specific requirements in your state,

and where you are travelling. Infant

and child restraints must be properly

placed and installed in a rear seat.

For more information refer to the

"Child Restraint Systems" section in

this chapter.

Small children are best protected

from injury in an accident when prop-

erly restrained in the rear seat by a

child restraint system that meets the

requirements of the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standards. Before

buying any child restraint system,

make sure that it has a label certify-

ing that it meets Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS

213. The restraint must be appropri-

ate for your child's height and weight.

Check the label on the child restraint

for this information. Refer to the

"Child Restraint Systems" section in

this chapter.

ALWAYS properly restrain infants

and small children in a child

restraint appropriate for the

child's height and weight.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death to a child and

other passengers, NEVER hold a

child in your lap or arms when

the vehicle is moving.The violent

forces created during an acci-

dent will tear the child from your

arms and throw the child against

the interior of the vehicle.

WARNING

2-34

Safety system of your vehicle

Larger children

Children under age 13 and who are

too large for a booster seat must

always occupy the rear seat and use

the available lap/shoulder belts. A

seat belt should lie across the upper

thighs and be snug across the shoul-

der and chest to restrain the child

safely. Check belt fit periodically.

Children are afforded the most safe-

ty in the event of an accident when

they are restrained by a proper

restraint system and/or seat belts in

the rear seat. Always have the

LATCH system inspected by your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer after an

accident. An accident can damage

the LATCH system and may not

properly secure the child restraint.

If a larger child over age 13 must be

seated in the front seat, the child

must be securely restrained by the

available lap/shoulder belt and the

seat should be placed in the rear-

most position.

If the shoulder belt portion slightly

touches the child's neck or face, try

placing the child closer to the center

of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still

touches their face or neck they need

to be returned to an appropriate

booster seat in the rear seat.

Transporting an injured person

A seat belt should be used when an

injured person is being transported.

Consult a physician for specific rec-

ommendations.

One person per belt

Two people (including children) should

never attempt to use a single seat belt.

This could increase the severity of

injuries in case of an accident.

Do not lie down

Sitting in a reclined position when the

vehicle is in motion can be dangerous.

Even when buckled up, the protec-

tions of your restraint system (seat

belts and air bags) is greatly reduced

by reclining your seatback.

To reduce the chance of injuries in the

event of an accident and to achieve

the maximum effectiveness of the

restraint system, all passengers

should be sitting up and the front and

rear seats should be in an upright

position when the car is moving.

• Always make sure children

are wearing their seat belts

and that they are properly

adjusted before driving.

• NEVER allow the shoulder

belt to contact the child’s

neck or face.

• Do not allow more than one

child to use a single seat belt.

WARNING

2-35

Safety system of your vehicle

A seat belt cannot provide proper

protection if the person is lying down

in the rear seat or if the front or rear

seats are in a reclined position.

Care of Seat Belts

Seat belt systems should never be

disassembled or modified. In addi-

tion, care should be taken to assure

that seat belts and belt hardware are

not damaged by seat hinges, doors

or other abuse.

Periodic inspection

All seat belts should be inspected

periodically for wear or damage of

any kind. Any damaged parts should

be replaced as soon as possible by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Keep belts clean and dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and

dry.If belts become dirty, they can be

cleaned by using a mild soap solu-

tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,

strong detergents or abrasives

should not be used because they

may damage and weaken the fabric.

When to replace seat belts

The entire seat belt assembly or

assemblies should be replaced if the

vehicle has been involved in an acci-

dent.This should be done even if no

damage is visible. Additional ques-

tions concerning seat belt operation

should be directed to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• NEVER ride with a reclined

seatback when the vehicle is

moving.

• Riding with a reclined seatback

increases your chance of seri-

ous or fatal injuries in the event

of a collision or sudden stop.

• Drivers and passengers should

always sit well back in their

seats, properly belted, and with

the seatbacks upright.

WARNING

2-36

Safety system of your vehicle

Children Always in the Rear

Children under age 13 must always

ride in the rear seats and must

always be properly restrained to min-

imize the risk of injury in an accident,

sudden stop or sudden maneuver.

According to accident statistics, chil-

dren are safer when properly

restrained in the rear seats than in

the front seat. Even with air bags,

children can be seriously injured

or killed. Children too large for a

child restraint must use the seat belts

provided.

All 50 states have child restraint laws

which require children to travel in

approved child restraint devices.The

laws governing the age or

height/weight restrictions at which

seat belts can be used instead of

child restraints differs among states,

so you should be aware of the spe-

cific requirements in your state, and

where you are travelling.

Child restraint systems must be prop-

erly placed and installed in the rear

seat. You must use a commercially

available child restraint system that

meets the requirements of the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards

(FMVSS 213).

Child restraint systems are generally

designed to be secured in a vehicle

seat by lap belt portion of a

lap/shoulder belt, or by a LATCH sys-

tem in the rear seats of the vehicle.

CCHHIILLDD RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM ((CCRRSS))

Always properly restrain chil-

dren in the rear seats of the

vehicle.

Children of all ages are safer

when restrained in the rear seat.

A child riding in the front pas-

senger seat can be forcefully

struck by an inflating air bag

resulting in SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH.

WARNING

2-37

Safety system of your vehicle

Child restraint system (CRS)

Infants and younger children must be

restrained in an appropriate rear-fac-

ing or forward-facing CRS that has

first been properly secured to the

rear seat of the vehicle. Read and

comply with the instructions for

installation and use provided by the

manufacturer of the child restraint.

Selecting a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

When selecting a CRS for your child,

always:

• Make sure the CRS has a label

certifying that it meets applicable

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards (FMVSS 213).

• Select a child restraint based on

your child’s height and weight.The

required label or the instructions

for use typically provide this infor-

mation.

• Select a child restraint that fits the

vehicle seating position where it

will be used.

• Read and comply with the warn-

ings and instructions for installation

and use provided with the child

restraint system.

(Continued)

• Always follow the child

restraint system manufactur-

er's instructions for installa-

tion and use.

• Always properly restrain your

child in the child restraint.

• If the vehicle head restraint

prevents proper installation of

a child seat (as described in

the child restraint system

manual), the head restraint of

the respective seating posi-

tion shall be readjusted or

entirely removed.

• Do not use an infant carrier or

a child safety seat that

"hooks" over a seatback, it

may not provide adequate

protection in an accident.

• After an accident, have a

HYUNDAI dealer check the

child restraint system, seat

belts, tether anchors and

lower anchors.

An improperly secured child

restraint can increase the risk

of SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH

in an accident. Always take the

following precautions when

using a child restraint system:

• NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen-

ger's seat.

• Always properly secure the

child restraint to a rear seat of

the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-38

Safety system of your vehicle

Child restraint system types

There are three main types of child

restraint systems: rear-facing seats,

forward-facing seats, and booster

seats. They are classified according

to the child's age, height and weight.

Rearward-facing child seats

A rear-facing child seat provides

restraint with the seating surface

against the back of the child.The har-

ness system holds the child in place,

and in an accident, acts to keep the

child positioned in the seat and

reduce the stress to the neck and

spinal cord.

All children under age one must

always ride in a rear-facing infant child

restraint.

Convertible and 3-in-1 child seats typ-

ically have higher height and weight

limits for the rear-facing position,

allowing you to keep your child rear-

facing for a longer period of time.

Continue to use a rear-facing child

seat for as long as your child will fit

within the height and weight limits

allowed by the child seat manufactur-

er. It's the best way to keep them

safe. Once your child has outgrown

the rear-facing child restraint, your

child is ready for a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness.

OAE036062

NEVER install a child or infant

restraint in the front passen-

ger's seat.

Placing a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat can

result in SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH if the child restraint is

struck by an inflating air bag.

WARNING

2-39

Safety system of your vehicle

Forward-facing child restraints

A forward-facing child seat provides

restraint for the child's body with a

harness. Keep children in a forward-

facing child seat with a harness until

they reach the top height or weight

limit allowed by your child restraint’s

manufacturer.

Once your child outgrows the forward-

facing child restraint, your child is

ready for a booster seat.

Booster seats

A booster seat is a restraint designed

to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat

belt system. A booster seat positions

the seat belt so that it fits properly

over the lap of your child.

Keep your child in a booster seat until

they are big enough to sit in the seat

without a booster and still have the

seat belt fit properly. For a seat belt to

fit properly, the lap belt must lie snug-

ly across the upper thighs, not the

stomach.The shoulder belt should lie

snug across the shoulder and chest

and not across the neck or face.

Children under age 13 must always

ride in the rear seats and must always

be properly restrained to minimize the

risk of injury.

Installing a Child Restraint

System (CRS)

Before installing your child

restraint system always:

• Read and follow the instruc-

tions provided by the manu-

facturer of the child restraint.

• Read and follow the instruc-

tions regarding child restraint

systems in this manual.

Failure to follow all warnings

and instructions could increase

the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY

or DEATH if an accident occurs.

WARNING

If the vehicle headrest prevents

proper installation of a child

seat (as described in the child

seat system manual, the head-

rest of the respective seating

position shall be readjusted or

entirely removed.

WARNING

OAE036028

2-40

Safety system of your vehicle

After selecting a proper child seat for

your child, check to make sure it fits

properly in your vehicle. Follow the

instructions provided by the manu-

facturer when installing the child

seat. Note these general steps when

installing the seat to your vehicle:

•

Properly secure the child restraint

to the vehicle.

All child restraints

must be secured to the vehicle with

the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or

with the LATCH system.

• Make sure the child restraint is

firmly secured. After installing a

child restraint to the vehicle, push

and pull the seat forward-and-back

and side-to-side to verify that it is

securely attached to the seat. A

child restraint secured with a seat

belt should be installed as firmly as

possible. However, some side-to-

side movement can be expected.

• Secure the child in the child

restraint. Make sure the child is

properly strapped in the child

restraint according to the manufac-

turer instructions.

Lower Anchors and Tether for

Children (LATCH System)

The LATCH system holds a child

restraint during driving and in an acci-

dent. This system is designed to

make installation of the child restraint

easier and reduce the possibility of

improperly installing your child

restraint. The LATCH system uses

anchors in the vehicle and attach-

ments on the child restraint. The

LATCH system eliminates the need

to use seat belts to secure the child

restraint to the rear seats.

Lower anchors are metal bars built

into the vehicle. There are two lower

anchors for each LATCH seating

position that will accommodate a

child restraint with lower attachments.

To use the LATCH system in your

vehicle, you must have a child

restraint with LATCH attachments.

The child seat manufacturer will pro-

vide you with instructions on how to

use the child seat with its attachments

for the LATCH lower anchors.

A child restraint in a closed

vehicle can become very hot.To

prevent burns, check the seat-

ing surface and buckles before

placing your child in the child

restraint.

CAUTION

2-41

Safety system of your vehicle

LATCH anchors have been provided

in the left and right outboard rear

seating positions. Their locations are

shown in the illustration.There are no

LATCH anchors provided for the cen-

ter rear seating position.

The lower anchor position indicator

symbols are located on the left and

right rear seat backs to identify the

position of the lower anchors in your

vehicle (see arrows in illustration).

The LATCH anchors are located

between the seatback and the seat

cushion of the rear seat left and right

outboard seating positions.

Do not attempt to install a child

restraint system using LATCH

anchors in the rear center seat-

ing position.There are no LATCH

anchors provided for this seat.

Using the outboard seat anchors

can damage the anchors which

may break or fail in a collision

resulting in serious injury or

death.

WARNING

OAE036063

OAE036031

Lower Anchor

Position Indicator

Lower Anchor

2-42

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint with

the LATCH anchors system

To install a LATCH-compatible child

restraint in either of the rear outboard

seating positions:

1. Move the seat belt buckle away

from the lower anchors.

2. Move any other objects away from

the anchors that could prevent a

secure connection between the

child restraint and the lower

anchors.

3. Place the child restraint on the

vehicle seat, then attach the seat

to the lower anchors according to

the instructions provided by the

child restraint manufacturer.

4. Follow the child restraint instruc-

tions for properly adjusting and

tightening the lower attachments

on the child restraint to the lower

anchors.

The recommended weight for the

LATCH system is under 65 lb (30

kg).

How to determine an appropriate

child restraint weight:

Child weight + Child restraint

weight < 65 lb (30kg)

NOTICE

Take the following precautions

when using the LATCH system:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your child restraint system.

• To prevent the child from

reaching and taking hold of

unretracted seat belts, buckle

all unused rear seat belts and

retract the seat belt webbing

behind the child. Children can

be strangled if a shoulder belt

becomes wrapped around

their neck and the seat belt

tightens.

• NEVER attach more than one

child restraint to a single

anchor. This could cause the

anchor or attachment to come

loose or break.

• Always have the LATCH sys-

tem inspected by your author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer after an

accident. An accident can

damage the LATCH system

and may not properly secure

the child restraint.

WARNING

2-43

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint seat

with "Tether Anchor" system

First secure the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchors or the seat

belt. If the child restraint manufactur-

er recommends that the top tether

strap be attached, attach and tighten

the top tether strap to the top tether

strap anchor.

Child restraint hook holders are

located on the rear of the seatbacks.

To install the tether anchor:

1. Route the child restraint tether strap

over the child restraint seatback.

Route the tether strap under the

head restraint and between the

head restraint posts, or route the

tether strap over the top of the vehi-

cle seatback.Make sure the strap is

not twisted.

2. Connect the tether strap hook to the

tether anchor, then tighten the teth-

er strap according to the child seat

manufacturer's instructions to firmly

secure the child restraint to the seat.

3. Check that the child restraint is

securely attached to the seat by

pushing and pulling the seat for-

ward-and-back and side-to-side.

Take the following precautions

when installing the tether strap:

• Read and follow all installation

instructions provided with

your child restraint system.

• NEVER attach more than one

child restraint to a single teth-

er anchor. This could cause

the anchor or attachment to

come loose or break.

• Do not attach the tether strap

to anything other than the cor-

rect tether anchor. It may not

work properly if attached to

something else.

• Do not use the tether anchors

for adult seat belts or harness-

es, or for attaching other items

or equipment to the vehicle.

WARNING

OAE036030

OAE036029N

2-44

Safety system of your vehicle

Securing a child restraint with

lap/shoulder belt

When not using the LATCH system,

all child restraints must be secured to

a vehicle rear seat with the lap part

of a lap/shoulder belt.

Automatic locking mode

Since all passenger seat belts move

freely under normal conditions and

only lock under extreme or emer-

gency conditions (emergency locking

mode), you must manually pull the

seat belt all the way out to shift the

retractor to the "Automatic Locking"

mode to secure a child restraint.

The "Automatic Locking" mode will

help prevent the normal movement

of the child in the vehicle from caus-

ing the seat belt to loosen and com-

promise the child restraint system.To

secure a child restraint system, use

the following procedure.

To install a child restraint system on

the rear seats, do the following:

1. Place the child restraint system on

a rear seat and route the lap/

shoulder belt around or through

the child restraint, following the

restraint manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

Be sure the seat belt webbing is

not twisted.

When using the rear center seat

belt, you should also refer to the

"Rear Seat Belt – Passenger's 3-

point system" section in this

chapter.

NOTICE

ALWAYS place a rear-facing

child restraint in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Placing a rear-facing child

restraint in the front seat can

result in serious injury or death

if the child restraint is struck by

an inflating air bag.

WARNING

OLMB033044

2-45

Safety system of your vehicle

2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch

into the buckle. Listen for the dis-

tinct "click" sound.

Information

Position the release button so that it is

easy to access in case of an emergency.

3. Pull the shoulder portion of the seat

belt all the way out.When the shoul-

der portion of the seat belt is fully

extended, it will shift the retractor to

the "Automatic Locking" (child

restraint) mode.

4. Slowly allow the shoulder portion of

the seat belt to retract and listen for

an audible "clicking" or "ratcheting"

sound. This indicates that the

retractor is in the "Automatic

Locking" mode. If no distinct sound

is heard, repeat steps 3 and 4.

OLMB033045

OLMB033097 OLMB033098

2-46

Safety system of your vehicle

5. Remove as much slack from the

belt as possible by pushing down

on the child restraint system while

feeding the shoulder belt back into

the retractor.

6. Push and pull on the child restraint

system to confirm that the seat

belt is holding it firmly in place.If it

is not, release the seat belt and

repeat steps 2 through 6.

7. Double check that the retractor is

in the "Automatic Locking" mode

by attempting to pull more of the

seat belt out of the retractor. If you

cannot, the retractor is in the

"Automatic Locking" mode.

If your CRS manufacturer instructs or

recommends you to use a tether

anchor with the lap/shoulder belt,

refer to the previous pages for more

information.

When the seat belt is allowed to

retract to its fully stowed position,

the retractor will automatically

switch from the "Automatic

Locking" mode to the emergency

lock mode for normal adult usage.

To remove the child restraint, press

the release button on the buckle and

then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of

the restraint and allow the seat belt

to retract fully.

NOTICE

If the retractor is not in the

"Automatic Locking" mode, the

child restraint can move when

your vehicle turns or stops sud-

denly. A child can be seriously

injured or killed if the child

restraint is not properly anchored

in the car, including manually

pulling the seat belt all the way

out to shift the rectractor to the

"Automatic Locking" mode.

WARNING

2-47

Safety system of your vehicle

AAIIRR BBAAGG -- AADDVVAANNCCEEDD SSUUPPPPLLEEMMEENNTTAALL RREESSTTRRAAIINNTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAEE036035

The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

1. Driver's front air bag

2. Passenger's front air bag

3. Side air bag

4. Curtain air bag

5. Driver's knee air bag

2-48

Safety system of your vehicle

This vehicle is equipped with an

Advanced Supplemental Air Bag

System for the driver's seat and front

passenger's seats.

The front air bags are designed to

supplement the three-point seat

belts. For these air bags to provide

protection, the seat belts must be

worn at all times when driving.

You can be severely injured or killed

in an accident if you are not wearing

a seat belt. Air bags are designed to

supplement seat belts, but do not

replace them. Also, air bags are not

designed to deploy in every collision.

In some accidents, the seat belts are

the only restraint protecting you.

AIR BAG SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

ALWAYS use seat belts and child restraints - every trip, every time,

everyone! Even with air bags, you can be seriously injured or killed in

a collision if you are improperly belted or not wearing your seat belt

when the air bag inflates.

NEVER place a child in any child restraint or booster seat in the front

passenger seat. An inflating air bag could forcefully strike the infant

or child causing serious or fatal injuries.

ABC - Always Buckle Children under age 13 in the back seat. It is the

safest place for children of any age to ride. If a child age 13 or older

must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted

and the seat should be moved as far back as possible.

All occupants should sit upright with the seatback in an upright posi-

tion, centered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs com-

fortably extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked

and is turned off. If an occupant is out of position during an accident,

the rapidly deploying air bag may forcefully contact the occupant

causing serious or fatal injuries.

You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily

close to the air bags or lean against the door or center console.

Move your seat as far back as possible from front air bags, while still

maintaining control of the vehicle. The U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends that drivers allow at

least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and

the chest.

WARNING

2-49

Safety system of your vehicle

Where Are the Air Bags?

Driver's and passenger's front

air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a

Advanced Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS) and lap/shoulder belts

at both the driver and passenger

seating positions.

The SRS consists of air bags which

are located in the center of the steer-

ing wheel, in the driver's side lower

crash pad below the steering wheel

column and the passenger's side

front panel pad above the glove box.

The air bags are labeled with the let-

ters "AIR BAG" embossed on the

pad covers.

The purpose of the SRS is to provide

the vehicle's driver and front passen-

gers with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt system

alone. The advanced SRS offers the

ability to control the air bag inflation

within two levels.A first stage level is

provided for moderate-severity

impacts. A second stage level is pro-

vided for more severe impacts.

According to the impact severity, the

SRS Control Module (SRSCM) con-

trols the air bag inflation. Failure to

properly wear seat belts can

increase the risk or severity of injury

in an accident.

OAE036032

OAE036033

OAE036036

■ Driver's knee air bag

■ Driver's front air bag

■ Passenger's front air bag

2-50

Safety system of your vehicle

Side air bags

Your vehicle is equipped with a side

air bag in each front seat. The pur-

pose of the air bag is to provide the

vehicle's driver and the front passen-

ger with additional protection than

that offered by the seat belt alone.

The side air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side impact

collisions, depending on the crash

severity.

The side and curtain air bags on

both sides of the vehicle may deploy

if a rollover or possible rollover is

detected.

The side air bags are not designed to

deploy in all side impact or rollover

situations.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

front air bags, take the following

precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

• Move your seat as far back as

possible from front air bags,

while still maintaining control

of the vehicle.

• Never lean against the door or

center console.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs

on the dashboard.

• No objects (such as crash pad

cover, cellular phone holder,

cup holder, perfume or stickers)

should be placed over or near

the air bag modules on the

steering wheel, instrument

panel, windshield glass, and the

front passenger's panel above

the glove box. Such objects

could cause harm if the vehicle

is in a crash severe enough to

cause the air bags to deploy.

WARNING

OAE036037

OAE036038

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

side air bag, take the following

precautions:

• Seat belts must be worn at all

times to help keep occupants

positioned properly.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-51

Safety system of your vehicle

Curtain air bags

Curtain air bags are located along

both sides of the roof rails above the

front and rear doors.

(Continued)

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies

onto doors, put their arms on

the doors, stretch their arms

out of the window, or place

objects between the doors

and seats.

• Hold the steering wheel at the

9 o'clock and 3 o'clock posi-

tions, to minimize the risk of

injuries to your hands and

arms.

• Do not use any accessory

seat covers.This could reduce

or prevent the effectiveness

of the system.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag or between the air

bag and yourself. Also, do not

attach any objects around the

area the air bag inflates such

as the door, side door glass,

front and rear pillar.

(Continued)

• Do not place any objects

between the door and the

seat. They may become dan-

gerous projectiles if the side

air bag inflates.

• Do not install any accessories

on the side or near the side air

bags.

• Do not put any objects

between the side airbag label

and seat cushion. It could

cause harm if the vehicle is in

a crash severe enough to

cause the air bags to deploy.

• Do not cause impact to the

doors when the Engine Start/

Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion as this may cause the

side air bags to inflate.

• If the seat or seat cover is

damaged, have the vehicle

checked and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE036041

OAE036042

2-52

Safety system of your vehicle

They are designed to help protect the

heads of the front seat occupants

and the rear outboard seat occupants

in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain air bags are designed to

deploy only during certain side

impact collisions, depending on the

crash severity.

The side and curtain air bags on

both sides of the vehicle may deploy

if a rollover or possible rollover is

detected.

The curtain air bags are not designed

to deploy in all side impact or rollover

situations.

How Does the Air Bag System

Operate?

The SRS consists of the following

components:

1.Driver's front air bag module/

Driver's knee airbag module

2. Passenger's front air bag module

3.Side air bag modules/

Side impact sensors

4. Curtain air bag modules

5.Retractor pre-tensioner assem-

blies

6. Air bag warning light

7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/

Rollover sensor

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

curtain air bag, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• All seat occupants must wear

seat belts at all times to help

keep occupants positioned

properly.

(Continued)

• Properly secure child

restraints as far away from the

door as possible.

• Do not place any objects over

the air bag. Also, do not attach

any objects around the area

the air bag inflates such as the

door, side door glass, front

and rear pillar, roof side rail.

• Do not hang other objects

except clothes, especially

hard or breakable objects. In

an accident, it may cause

vehicle damage or personal

injury.

• Do not allow passengers to

lean their heads or bodies onto

doors, put their arms on the

doors,stretch their arms out of

the window, or place objects

between the doors and seats.

• Do not open or repair the side

curtain air bags.

WARNING

OAEE036075N

2-53

Safety system of your vehicle

8. Front impact sensors

9. Side pressure sensors

10. Emergency Fastening Device

System

11. Occupant classification system

The SRSCM (Supplemental

Restraint System Control Module)

continually monitors all SRS compo-

nents while the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position to deter-

mine if a crash impact is severe

enough to require air bag deploy-

ment or pre-tensioner seat belt

deployment.

SRS warning light

The SRS (Supplement Restraint

System) air bag warning light on the

instrument panel displays the air bag

symbol depicted in the illustration.

The system checks the air bag elec-

trical system for malfunctions. The

light indicates that there is a potential

malfunction with your air bag system,

which could include your side and

curtain air bags used for rollover pro-

tection.

If your SRS malfunctions, the air

bag may not inflate properly dur-

ing an accident increasing the

risk of serious injury or death.

If any of the following condi-

tions occur, your SRS is mal-

functioning:

• The light does not turn on for

approximately six seconds

when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

• The light stays on after illumi-

nating for approximately six

seconds.

• The light comes on while the

vehicle is in motion.

• The light blinks when the

vehicle is in the ready ( )

mode.

Have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer inspect the SRS as soon

as possible if any of these con-

ditions occur.

WARNING

2-54

Safety system of your vehicle

During a frontal collision, sensors will

detect the vehicle's deceleration. If

the rate of deceleration is high

enough, the control unit will inflate

the front air bags.

The front air bags help protect the

driver and front passenger by

responding to frontal impacts in

which seat belts alone cannot pro-

vide adequate restraint. When need-

ed, the side air bags help provide

protection in the event of a side

impact or rollover.

• Air bags are activated (able to

inflate if necessary) only when the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position.

• Air bags inflate in the event of cer-

tain frontal or side collisions to help

protect the occupants from serious

physical injury.

• Generally, air bags are designed to

inflate based upon the severity of a

collision, its direction, etc. These

two factors determine whether the

sensors produce an electronic

deployment/inflation signal.

• Air bag deployment depends on a

number of factors including vehicle

speed, angles of impact and the

density and stiffness of the vehicles

or objects which your vehicle

impacts during a collision. The

determining factors are not limited

to those mentioned above.

• The front air bags will completely

inflate and deflate in an instant. It is

virtually impossible for you to see

the air bags inflate during an acci-

dent. It is much more likely that you

will simply see the deflated air bags

hanging out of their storage com-

partments after the collision.

• In addition to inflating in certain

side collisions, vehicles equipped

with a rollover sensor, side and

curtain air bags will inflate if the

sensing system detects a rollover.

When a rollover is detected, side

and curtain air bags will remain

inflated longer to help provide pro-

tection from ejection, especially

when used in conjunction with the

seat belts.

• To help provide protection, the air

bags must inflate rapidly.The speed

of air bag inflation is a consequence

of extremely short time in which to

inflate the air bag between the

occupant and the vehicle structures

before the occupant impacts those

structures. This speed of inflation

reduces the risk of serious or life-

threatening injuries and is thus a

necessary part of air bag design.

However, the rapid air bag inflation

can also cause injuries which can

include facial abrasions, bruises

and broken bones because the

inflation speed also causes the air

bags to expand with a great deal of

force.

• There are even circumstances

under which contact with the air

bag can cause fatal injuries, espe-

cially if the occupant is positioned

excessively close to the air bag.

2-55

Safety system of your vehicle

You can take steps to help reduce

the risk of being injured by an inflat-

ing air bag.The greatest risk is sitting

too close to the air bag. An air bag

needs about 10 inches (25 cm) of

space to inflate. NHTSA recom-

mends that drivers allow at least 10

inches (25 cm) between the center of

the steering wheel and the chest.

When the SRSCM detects a suffi-

ciently severe impact to the front of

the vehicle, it will automatically

deploy the front air bags.

OHM039102N

■ Driver’s front air bag (1)

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death from an inflating

air bag, take the following pre-

cautions:

• NEVER place a child restraint

in the front passenger seat.

Always properly restrain chil-

dren under age 13 in the rear

seats of the vehicle.

• Adjust the front passenger's

and driver's seats as far to the

rear as possible while allow-

ing you to maintain full con-

trol of the vehicle.

• Hold the steering wheel with

hands at the 9 o'clock and 3

o'clock positions.

• Never place anything or any-

one between the air bag and

the seat occupant.

• Do not allow the front passen-

ger to place their feet or legs

on the dashboard.

WARNING

2-56

Safety system of your vehicle

Upon deployment, tear seams mold-

ed directly into the pad covers will

separate under pressure from the

expansion of the air bags. Further

opening of the covers allows full

inflation of the air bags.

A fully inflated air bag, in combina-

tion with a properly worn seat belt,

slows the driver or the front passen-

ger forward motion, reducing the risk

of head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the air bag

immediately starts deflating, enabling

the driver to maintain forward visibili-

ty and the ability to steer or operate

other controls.

OHM039103N

■ Driver’s front air bag (2)

OHM039104N

■ Driver’s front air bag (3)

OLMB033057

■ Passenger’s front air bag

To prevent objects from becom-

ing dangerous projectiles when

the passenger's air bag inflates:

• Do not install or place any

objects (drink holder, CD

holder, stickers, etc.) on the

front passenger's panel above

the glove box where the pas-

senger's air bag is located.

• Do not install a container of

liquid air freshener near the

instrument cluster or on the

instrument panel surface.

WARNING

2-57

Safety system of your vehicle

What to Expect After an Air

Bag Inflates

After a frontal or side air bag inflates,

it will deflate very quickly. Air bag

inflation will not prevent the driver

from seeing out of the windshield or

being able to steer. Curtain air bags

may remain partially inflated for

some time after they deploy.

Noise and smoke from inflating

air bag

When the air bags inflate, they make

a loud noise and may produce

smoke and powder in the air inside of

the vehicle. This is normal and is a

result of the ignition of the air bag

inflator. After the air bag inflates, you

may feel substantial discomfort in

breathing because of the contact of

your chest with both the seat belt and

the air bag, as well as from breathing

the smoke and powder. The powder

may aggravate asthma for some

people. If you experience breathing

problems after an air bag deploy-

ment, seek medical attention imme-

diately.

Though the smoke and powder are

nontoxic, they may cause irritation to

the skin, eyes, nose, throat, etc. If

this is the case, wash and rinse with

cold water immediately and seek

medical attention if the symptoms

persist.

(Continued)

• Always wash exposed skin

areas thoroughly with cold

and mild soap.

• Always have an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer replace the

air bag immediately after

deployment. Air bags are

designed to be used only

once.

After an air bag inflates, take

the following precautions:

• Open your windows and doors

as soon as possible after

impact to reduce prolonged

exposure to the smoke and

powder released by the inflat-

ing air bag.

• Do not touch the air bag stor-

age area's internal compo-

nents immediately after an air

bag has inflated. The parts

that come into contact with an

inflating air bag may be very

hot.

(Continued)

WARNING

2-58

Safety system of your vehicle

Occupant Classification

System (OCS)

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Occupant Classification System

(OCS) in the front passenger's seat.

Main components of the

Occupant Classification System

• A detection device located within

the front passenger seat cushion.

• Electronic system to determine

whether the passenger air bag

systems should be activated or

deactivated.

• An indicator light located on the

instrument panel which illuminates

the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG

OFF" indicating the front passen-

ger air bag system is deactivated.

• The instrument panel air bag indi-

cator light is interconnected with

the OCS.

The OCS is designed to help detect

the presence of a properly-seated

front passenger and determine if the

passenger's front air bag should be

enabled (may inflate) or not.

The purpose is to help reduce the

risk of injury or death from an inflat-

ing air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by

requiring the air bag to be automati-

cally turned OFF.

For example, if a child restraint of the

type specified in the regulations is on

the seat, the occupant classification

sensor can detect it and cause the

air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occu-

pants who are properly seated and

wearing the seat belt properly,

should not cause the passenger air

bag to be automatically turned OFF.

For small adults it may be turned

OFF, however, if the occupant does

not sit in the seat properly (for exam-

ple, by not sitting upright, by sitting

on the edge of the seat, or by other-

wise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag

OFF.

You will find the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator on the center

fascia panel.This system detects the

conditions 1-4 in the following table

and activates or deactivates the front

passenger air bag based on these

conditions.

OAEE036040N

2-59

Safety system of your vehicle

Always be sure that you and all vehi-

cle occupants are seated properly

and wearing the seat belt properly for

the most effective protection by the

air bag and the seat belt.

The OCS may not function properly if

the passenger takes actions which

can affect the classification system.

These include:

• Failing to sit in an upright position.

• Leaning against the door or center

console.

• Sitting towards the sides of the

front of the seat.

• Putting their legs on the dashboard

or resting them on other locations

which reduce the passenger

weight on the front seat.

• Wearing the seat belt improperly.

• Reclining the seatback.

• Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear

or hip protection wear.

• Putting an additional thick cushion

on the seat.

• Putting electrical devices (e.g.

notebook, satellite radio) on the

seat with inverter charging.

Condition and operation in the front passenger Occupant Classification System

Condition detected by the

occupant classification system

Indicator/Warning light Devices

"PASSENGER

AIR BAG OFF"

indicator light

SRS

warning light

Front passenger

air bag

1. Adult *

Off Off Activated

2. Infant *

or child restraint

system with 12 months old *

On Off Deactivated

3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated

4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated

The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front

passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique

and posture.

Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a larger child who has out-

grown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize

him/her as an adult depending upon his/her physique or sitting position.

Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months

to 12 years old (with or without child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat.This is

a normal condition.

2-60

Safety system of your vehicle

Riding in an improper position or placing weight on the front passenger's seat when it is unoccupied by a

passenger adversely affects the OCS.To reduce the risk of serious injury or death:

WARNING

OVQ036013NB

OLMB033100

OLMB033101

OLMB033103

OLMB033102

OLMB033104

• NEVER put a heavy load in

the front seat or seatback

pocket, or hang any items

on the front passenger

seat.

• NEVER place your feet on

the front passenger seat-

back.

• NEVER sit with your hips

shifted towards the front

of the seat.

• NEVER ride with the seat-

back reclined when the

vehicle is moving.

• NEVER place your feet or

legs on the dashboard.

• NEVER lean on the door or

center console or sit on

one side of the front pas-

senger seat.

(continued)

2-61

Safety system of your vehicle

ODH035900K

ODH035901K

ODH035902K

ODH035903K

• Do not sit on the passen-

ger seat wearing heavily

padded clothes such as

ski wear and hip protector.

• Do not use car seat

accessories such as thick

blankets and cushions

which cover up the car

seat surface.

• Do not place electronic

devices such as laptops,

DVD player, or conductive

materials such as water

bottles on the passenger

seat.

• Do not use electronic

devices such as laptops

and satellite radios which

use inverter chargers.

• If large quantity of liquid

has been spilled on the

passenger seat, the air

bag warning light may

illuminate or malfunction.

Therefore, make sure the

seat has been completely

dried before driving the

vehicle.

• Do not place sharp objects on the front passenger seat.These may damage the occupant detection sys-

tem, if they puncture the seat cushion.

• Do not place any items under the front passenger seat.

• When changing or replacing the seat or seat cover, use original items only. The OCS has been devel-

oped based on using original HYUNDAI car seats only. Altering or changing the authentic parts may

result in system malfunction and increase risk of injury when in collision. Any of the above could inter-

fere with the proper operation of the OCS sensor thereby increasing the risk of an injury in an accident.

(continued)

2-62

Safety system of your vehicle

Proper seated position for OCS

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator is on when an adult is seat-

ed in the front passenger seat, place

the Engine Start/Stop button in the

OFF position and ask the passenger

to sit properly (sitting upright with the

seat back in an upright position, cen-

tered on the seat cushion with their

seat belt on, legs comfortably

extended and their feet on the floor).

Restart the engine and have the per-

son remain in that position. This will

allow the system to detect the person

and to enable the passenger air bag.

If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator is still on, ask the passen-

ger to move to the rear seat.

The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"

indicator illuminates for approxi-

mately 4 seconds after the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON

position or after the engine is

started. If the front passenger seat

is occupied, the OCS will then

classify the front passenger after

several more seconds.

Do Not Install a Child Restraint

in the Front Passenger's Seat

Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the OCS, never install a child

restraint in the front passenger's seat.

An inflating air bag can forcefully

strike a child or child restraint result-

ing in serious or fatal injury.

NOTICE

B990A01O

Never allow an adult passenger

to ride in the front passenger

seat when the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator is illuminat-

ed. During a collision, the air bag

will not inflate if the indicator is

illuminated. Have your passen-

ger reposition himself in the

seat. If the "PASSENGER AIR

BAG OFF" indicator remains illu-

minated after the passenger

repositions himself properly and

the vehicle is restarted, have the

passenger move to the rear seat

because the air bag will not

inflate.

WARNING

1JBH3051

2-63

Safety system of your vehicle

Why Didn't My Air Bag Go Off

in a Collision?

Air bags are not designed to inflate in

every collision. There are certain

types of accidents in which the air bag

would not be expected to provide

additional protection. These include

rear impacts, second or third colli-

sions in multiple impact accidents, as

well as low speed impacts. Damage

to the vehicle indicates a collision

energy absorption, and is not an indi-

cator of whether or not an air bag

should have inflated.

Air bag collision sensors

• NEVER place a rear-facing or

front-facing child restraint in

the front passenger's seat of

the vehicle.

• An inflating frontal air bag

could forcefully strike a child

resulting in serious injury or

death.

• Always properly restrain chil-

dren in an appropriate child

restraint in the rear seat of the

vehicle.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of an air bag

deploying unexpectedly and

causing serious injury or death:

• Do not hit or allow any objects

to impact the locations where air

bags or sensors are installed.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not perform maintenance

on or around the air bag sen-

sors.If the location or angle of

the sensors is altered, the air

bags may deploy when they

should not or may not deploy

when they should.

• Do not install bumper guards

or replace the bumper with a

non-genuine HYUNDAI parts.

This may adversely affect the

collision and air bag deploy-

ment performance.

• Place the Engine Start/Stop

button in the OFF or ACC

position when the vehicle is

being towed to prevent inad-

vertent air bag deployment.

• Have all air bag repairs conduct-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

2-64

Safety system of your vehicle

1. SRS control module/Rollover sensor

2. Front impact sensor

3. Side pressure sensor

4. Side impact sensor

OAE036043N/OAE036044/OAE036045N/OAE036046/OAE036047

2-65

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag inflation conditions

Front air bags

Front air bags and the driver's knee

air bag are designed to inflate in a

frontal collision depending on the

severity of impact of the front colli-

sion.

Side and curtain air bags

Side and curtain air bags are

designed to inflate when an impact is

detected by side collision sensors

depending on the severity of impact

resulting from a side impact collision.

Although the driver's and front pas-

senger's air bags are designed to

inflate only in frontal collisions, they

also may inflate in other types of col-

lisions if the front impact sensors

detect a sufficient impact. Side and

curtain air bags are designed to

inflate only in side impact collisions

or rollover situations, but they may

inflate in other collisions if the side

impact sensors detect a sufficient

impact.

If the vehicle chassis is impacted by

bumps or objects on unimproved

roads, the air bags may deploy.Drive

carefully on unimproved roads or on

surfaces not designed for vehicle

traffic to prevent unintended air bag

deployment.

OAE036049

OAE036050

OAE036048

2-66

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bag non-inflation conditions

In certain low-speed collisions the air

bags may not deploy. The air bags

are designed not to deploy in such

cases because they may not provide

benefits beyond the protection of the

seat belts.

Front air bags are not designed to

inflate in rear collisions, because

occupants are moved backward by

the force of the impact. In this case,

inflated air bags would not provide

any additional benefit.

Front air bags may not inflate in side

impact collisions, because occupants

move in the direction of the collision,

and thus in side impacts, front air bag

deployment would not provide addi-

tional occupant protection.

However, side and curtain air bags

may inflate depending on the severi-

ty of impact.

OAE036052

OAE036051

OAE036053

2-67

Safety system of your vehicle

In an angled collision, the force of

impact may direct the occupants in a

direction where the air bags would

not be able to provide any additional

benefit, and thus the sensors may

not deploy any air bags.

Just before impact, drivers often

brake heavily. Such heavy braking

lowers the front portion of the vehicle

causing it to "ride" under a vehicle

with a higher ground clearance. Air

bags may not inflate in this "under-

ride" situation because deceleration

forces that are detected by sensors

may be significantly reduced by such

"underride" collisions.

Front air bags may not inflate in

rollover accidents because air bag

deployment could not provide protec-

tion to the occupants.

However, side and curtain air bags

may inflate when the vehicle is rolled

over by a side impact collision.

OAE036061 OAE036054 OAE036055

2-68

Safety system of your vehicle

Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle

collides with objects such as utility

poles or trees, where the point of

impact is concentrated and the colli-

sion energy is absorbed by the vehi-

cle structure.

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-

free and there are no parts you can

safely service by yourself. If the SRS

air bag warning light does not illumi-

nate when the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton is in the ON position, or continu-

ously remains on, have your vehicle

immediately inspected by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such

as removing, installing, repairing, or

any work on the steering wheel, the

front passenger's panel, front seats

and roof rails must be performed by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Improper handling of the SRS system

may result in serious personal injury.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, take the follow-

ing precautions:

• Do not attempt to modify or

disconnect the SRS compo-

nents or wiring, including the

addition of any kind of badges

to the pad covers or modifica-

tions to the body structure.

• Do not place objects over or

near the air bag modules on

the steering wheel, instrument

panel, or the front passen-

ger's panel above the glove

box.

• Clean the air bag pad covers

with a soft cloth moistened

with plain water. Solvents or

cleaners could adversely

affect the air bag covers and

proper deployment of the sys-

tem.

• Always have inflated air bags

replaced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE036056

2-69

Safety system of your vehicle

Additional Safety Precautions

Passengers should not move out of

or change seats while the vehicle is

moving. A passenger who is not

wearing a seat belt during a crash or

emergency stop can be thrown

against the inside of the vehicle,

against other occupants, or be ejected

from the vehicle.

Do not use any accessories on seat

belts. Devices claiming to improve

occupant comfort or reposition the

seat belt can reduce the protection

provided by the seat belt and increase

the chance of serious injury in a crash.

Do not modify the front seats.

Modification of the front seats could

interfere with the operation of the sup-

plemental restraint system sensing

components or side air bags.

Do not place items under the front

seats. Placing items under the front

seats could interfere with the opera-

tion of the supplemental restraint sys-

tem sensing components and wiring

harnesses.

Do not cause impact to the doors.

Impact to the doors when the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON position

may cause the air bags to inflate.

Modifications to accommodate

disabilities. If you require modifica-

tion to your vehicle to accommodate

a disability, contact the HYUNDAI

Customer Connect Center at 800-

633-5151.

Adding equipment to or modify-

ing your air bag equipped vehicle

If you modify your vehicle by chang-

ing your vehicle's frame, bumper sys-

tem, front end or side sheet metal or

ride height, this may affect the oper-

ation of your vehicle's air bag sys-

tem.

(Continued)

• If components of the air bag

system must be discarded, or if

the vehicle must be scrapped,

certain safety precautions

must be observed. Consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for

the necessary information.

Failure to follow these precau-

tions could increase the risk of

personal injury.

Air Bag Warning Labels

Air bag warning labels, required by

the U.S. National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA), are

attached to alert the driver and pas-

sengers of potential risks of the air

bag system.Be sure to read all of the

information about the air bags that

are installed on your vehicle in this

Owners Manual.

Safety system of your vehicle

2-70

OAD035053N

Convenient features of your vehicle

Accessing Your Vehicle.........................................3-3

Smart Key............................................................................3-3

Immobilizer System ...........................................................3-8

Door Locks..............................................................3-9

Operating Door Locks from Outside the Vehicle......3-9

Operating Door Locks from Inside the Vehicle.......3-10

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features...............................3-12

Child-Protector Rear Door Locks...............................3-12

Theft-alarm System ............................................3-13

Driver Position Memory System........................3-14

Storing Positions into Memory....................................3-14

Recalling Positions from Memory...............................3-15

Easy Access Function ....................................................3-15

Steering Wheel.....................................................3-16

Electric Power Steering (EPS) .....................................3-16

Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering.................................3-16

Horn....................................................................................3-17

Heated Steering Wheel (for Canada).........................3-17

Mirrors...................................................................3-18

Inside Rearview Mirror ..................................................3-18

Side View Mirrors ...........................................................3-33

Reverse Parking Aid Function......................................3-36

Windows ................................................................3-37

Power Windows...............................................................3-38

Sunroof..................................................................3-41

Sunroof Opening and Closing......................................3-42

Sliding the Sunroof.........................................................3-42

Tilting the Sunroof .........................................................3-43

Sunshade...........................................................................3-43

Resetting the Sunroof ...................................................3-44

Exterior Features.................................................3-45

Hood ...................................................................................3-45

Liftgate ..............................................................................3-46

Fuel Filler Door (Hybrid vehicle) .................................3-48

Fuel Filler Door (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ..................3-51

Instrument Cluster ...............................................3-54

Instrument Cluster Control............................................3-56

Gauges and Meters ........................................................3-56

Warning and Indicator Lights.......................................3-62

LCD Display Messages...................................................3-73

LCD Display ..........................................................3-89

LCD Display Control........................................................3-89

LCD Display Modes (for cluster type A) ...................3-90

LCD Display Modes (for cluster type B) ...................3-98

Trip Computer (Hybrid Vehicle) .......................3-105

Trip Computer (Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle).........3-110

Lighting................................................................3-116

Exterior Lights ...............................................................3-116

Interior Lights ................................................................3-124

Welcome System ...........................................................3-126

Wipers and Washers..........................................3-127

Windshield Wipers ........................................................3-127

Windshield Washers .....................................................3-128

Driver Assist System .........................................3-129

Rear View Monitor .......................................................3-129

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) System ........3-130

Automatic Climate Control System..................3-133

Automatic Heating and Air Conditioning.................3-134

Manual Heating and Air Conditioning......................3-135

System Operation .........................................................3-142

System Maintenance....................................................3-143

Windshield Defrosting and Defogging............3-145

To Defog Inside Windshield........................................3-145

To Defrost Outside Windshield..................................3-146

Defogging Logic ............................................................3-146

Rear Window Defroster ..............................................3-146

Auto Defogging System ..............................................3-147

Climate Control Additional Features ...............3-149

Automatic Ventilation...................................................3-149

Storage Compartment .......................................3-150

Center Console Storage ..............................................3-150

Glove Box........................................................................3-150

Sunglass Holder.............................................................3-151

Multi Box.........................................................................3-151

Interior Features................................................3-152

Cup Holder ......................................................................3-152

Sunvisor...........................................................................3-153

Power Outlet ..................................................................3-153

USB Charger...................................................................3-154

Wireless Cellular Phone Charging System..............3-155

Clock.................................................................................3-157

Clothes Hanger ..............................................................3-157

Floor Mat Anchor(s).....................................................3-158

Cargo Security Screen.................................................3-159

3-3

Convenient features of your vehicle

Smart Key

Your HYUNDAI uses a Smart Key,

which you can use to lock or unlock

a door (and liftgate) and even start

the vehicle.

1. Door Lock

2. Door Unlock

3. Liftgate Unlock

4. Panic

Locking

To lock :

1. Close all doors, hood and liftgate.

2. Either press the door handle but-

ton or press the Door Lock button

(1) on the smart key.

3. The hazard warning lights will

blink and the chime will sound

once.

4. Make sure the doors are locked by

checking the position of the door

lock button inside the vehicle.

Information

The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is within

28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the out-

side door handle.

Even though you press the outside

door handle button, the doors will not

lock and the chime will sound for

three seconds if any of the following

occur:

• The Smart Key is in the vehicle.

• The Engine Start/Stop button is in

ACC or ON position.

• Any door except the liftgate is

open.

AACCCCEESSSSIINNGG YYOOUURR VVEEHHIICCLLEE

OAE046029 OAE046001

Do not leave the Smart Key in

your vehicle with unsupervised

children. Unattended children

could press the Engine Start/

Stop button and may operate

power windows or other con-

trols, or even make the vehicle

move, which could result in

serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-4

Convenient features of your vehicle

Unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the Smart Key.

2. Either press the driver's outside

door handle button or press the

Door Unlock button (2) on the

smart key.

3. The driver's door will unlock. The

hazard warning lights will blink two

times.

If you press the driver's outside

door handle button or Door Unlock

button on the smart key again

within four seconds, then all the

doors will unlock.

Two press unlock setting:

Two press unlock setting can be

changed according to owner's

preference.

Select or deselect the 'Two Press

Unlock' menu in the User Settings

mode on the LCD display (User

Settings ➞ Door and select or

deselect Two Press Unlock).

Information

• The door handle button will only

operate when the smart key is with-

in 28~40 inches (0.7~1 m) from the

outside door handle and other peo-

ple can also open the doors.

• If you press the front passenger's

outside door handle, while carrying

the Smart Key, all doors will unlock.

• After unlocking the doors, the doors

will lock automatically after 30 sec-

onds unless a door is opened.

• Either the driver or front passenger

door can be opened with the door

handle button when the smart key is

within this range.

OAE046001

3-5

Convenient features of your vehicle

Liftgate unlocking

To unlock:

1. Carry the smart key.

2. Either press the liftgate handle

button or press and hold the

Liftgate Unlock button (3) on the

smart key for more than one sec-

ond.

3. The hazard warning lights will

blink two times.

Information

• The liftgate handle button will only

operate when the smart key is within

28 inches (0.7 m) from the liftgate

handle.

• The Liftgate Unlock button (3) will

only unlock the liftgate. It will not

release the latch and open the lift-

gate automatically. If the Liftgate

Unlock button is used, someone

must still press the liftgate handle

button to open the liftgate.

Panic button

Press and hold the Panic button (4)

for more than one second. The horn

sounds and hazard warning lights

blink for about 30 seconds.To cancel

the panic mode, press any button on

the Smart Key.

Start-up

You can start the vehicle without

inserting the key.

For more information, refer to the

"Engine Start/Stop Button" sec-

tion in chapter 5.

To prevent damaging the smart key:

• Keep the smart key away from

any liquid or fire. Internal circuits

may malfunction if the inside of

the smart key gets damp (from

liquids or moisture) or if it is heat-

ed. This can exclude the smart

key from warranty coverage.

• Avoid dropping or throwing the

smart key.

• Protect the smart key from

extreme temperatures.

NOTICE

3-6

Mechanical key

If the Smart Key does not operate nor-

mally, you can lock or unlock the dri-

ver’s door by using the mechanical key.

Press and hold the release button (1)

and remove the mechanical key (2).

Insert the mechanical key into the

key hole on the door.

To reinstall the mechanical key, put

the key into the hole and push it until

a click sound is heard.

Loss of a smart key

A maximum of two Smart Keys can

be registered to a single vehicle. If

you happen to lose your smart key,

you should immediately take the

vehicle and remaining keys to your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or tow

the vehicle, if necessary.

Smart key precautions

The smart key may not work if any of

the following occur:

• The smart key is close to a radio

transmitter such as a radio station

or an airport which can interfere

with normal operation of the trans-

mitter.

• The smart key is near a mobile two

way radio system or a cellular

phone.

• Another vehicle’s smart key is being

operated close to your vehicle.

If the smart key does not work cor-

rectly, open and close the door with

the mechanical key. If you have a

problem with the smart key, contact

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

If the smart key is in close proximity

to your mobile phone, the signal

could be blocked by your mobile

phone’s normal operational signals.

This is specifically relevant when the

phone is active such as making and

receiving calls, text messaging,

and/or sending/receiving emails.

Avoid placing the smart key and your

mobile phone in the same location

and always try to maintain an ade-

quate distance between the two

devices.

Keep the smart key away from

electromagnetic materials that

blocks electromagnetic waves to

the key surface.

Always have the smart key with

you when leaving the vehicle. If

the smart key is left near the vehi-

cle, the vehicle battery may be dis-

charged.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAEE046001

3-7

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Battery replacement

If the Smart Key is not working prop-

erly, try replacing the battery with a

new one.

Battery Type: CR2032

To replace the battery:

1. Pry open the rear cover of the

smart key.

2. Remove the old battery and insert

the new battery.

3. Reinstall the rear cover of the

smart key.

If you suspect your smart key might

have sustained some damage, or

you feel your smart key is not work-

ing correctly, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose of the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulation(s).

OLF044008

3-8

Convenient features of your vehicle

Immobilizer System

The immobilizer system helps protects

your vehicle from theft. If an improper-

ly coded key (or other device) is used,

the engine's fuel system is disabled.

When the Engine Start/Stop button is

placed in the ON position, the immo-

bilizer system indicator should come

on briefly, then go off. If the indicator

starts to blink, the system does not

recognize the coding of the key.

Place the Engine Start/Stop button to

the OFF position, then place the

Engine Start/Stop button to the ON

position again.

The system may not recognize your

key's coding if another immobilizer

key or other metal object (i.e., key

chain) is near the key. The vehicle

may not start because the metal may

interrupt the transponder signal from

transmitting normally.

If the system repeatedly does not

recognize the coding of the key, it is

recommended that you contact your

HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it. Electrical

problems could result that may make

your vehicle inoperable.

The transponder in your key is an

important part of the immobilizer

system. It is designed to give

years of trouble-free service, how-

ever you should avoid exposure to

moisture, static electricity and

rough handling. Immobilizer sys-

tem malfunction could occur.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

NOTICE

In order to prevent theft of your

vehicle, do not leave spare keys

anywhere in your vehicle. Your

immobilizer password is a cus-

tomer unique password and

should be kept confidential.

WARNING

3-9

Convenient features of your vehicle

Operating Door Locks from

Outside the Vehicle

Mechanical key

To remove the cover:

1. Pull out the door handle (1).

2. Press the lock (2) located inside

the bottom part of the cover with a

key or flat-head screwdriver.

3. Push out the cover while pressing

the lock.

To install the cover:

1. Pull out the door handle.

2. Install the cover.

If you lock the driver's door with a

mechanical key, all vehicle doors will

lock. If you unlock the driver's door

with a mechanical key, the driver's

door will unlock and the passenger

doors will unlock according to the

current two press unlock setting.

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Smart key

Press the button on the driver's out-

side door handle while carrying the

Smart Key with you or press the Door

Unlock button on the Smart Key, the

driver's door will unlock. If you press

the button on the front passenger's

outside door, all doors will unlock.

DDOOOORR LLOOCCKKSS

OAEE046188N

OAE046001

OLF044003

Door

Unlock

Door

Lock

3-10

Convenient features of your vehicle

Once the doors are unlocked, they

may be opened by pulling the door

handle.

When closing the door, push the

door by hand. Make sure that doors

are closed securely.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, door lock

and door mechanisms may not work

properly due to freezing conditions.

• If the door is locked/unlocked multi-

ple times in rapid succession with

either the vehicle key or door lock

switch, the system may stop operat-

ing temporarily in order to protect

the circuit and prevent damage to

system components.

• Two press unlock setting can be

changed with the smart key or in the

User Settings mode on the cluster.

Operating Door Locks from

Inside the Vehicle

With the door lock button

• To unlock a door, pull the door lock

button (1) to the "Unlock" position.

The red mark (2) on the door lock

button will be visible.

• To lock a door, push the door lock

button (1) to the "Lock" position. If

the door is locked properly, the red

mark (2) on the door lock button

will not be visible.

• To open a door, pull the door han-

dle (3) outward.

• If the inner door handle of the dri-

ver’s (or front passenger’s) door is

pulled when the door lock button is

in the lock position, the button is

unlocked and door opens.

• Doors cannot be locked if the

smart key is in the vehicle and any

door is open.

Information

If a power door lock ever fails to func-

tion while you are in the vehicle try

one or more of the following tech-

niques to exit:

• Operate the door unlock feature

repeatedly (both electronic and

manual) while simultaneously

pulling on the door handle.

• Operate the other door locks and

handles, front and rear.

• Lower a front window and use the

mechanical key to unlock the door

from outside.

OAE046004N

3-11

Convenient features of your vehicle

With the central door lock

switch

When pressing the ( ) switch (1), all

vehicle doors will lock.

When pressing the ( ) switch (2), all

vehicle doors will unlock.

If the smart key is in the vehicle and

any door is opened, the doors will

not lock even though the lock button

(1) of the central door lock switch is

pressed.

■ Driver’s door

OAE046005N/OAEE046509N

■ Passenger’s door

• The doors should always be

fully closed and locked while

the vehicle is in motion. If the

doors are unlocked,the risk of

being thrown from the vehicle

in a crash is increased.

• Do not pull the inner door

handle of driver's or passen-

ger's door while the vehicle is

moving.

WARNING

Do not leave children or animals

unattended in your vehicle. An

enclosed vehicle can become

extremely hot, causing death or

serious injury to unattended

children or animals who cannot

escape the vehicle. Children

might operate features of the

vehicle that could injure them,

or they could encounter other

harm, possibly from someone

gaining entry to the vehicle.

WARNING

Always secure your vehicle.

Leaving your vehicle unlocked

increases the potential risk to

you or others from someone

hiding in your vehicle.

To secure your vehicle, while

depressing the brake, move the

shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, engage the parking brake,

and place the Engine Start/Stop

button in the OFF position,close

all windows, lock all doors, and

always take the key with you.

WARNING

3-12

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto Door Lock/Unlock Features

Impact sensing door unlock

All doors will be automatically

unlocked when an impact causes the

air bags to deploy.

Speed sensing door lock

All doors will be automatically locked

(when set on cluster) when vehicle

speed exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h).

All of the doors will be automatically

unlocked after the vehicle is turned off.

Shift lever auto door lock

All doors will be automatically locked

when shifted out of P (Park) with the

vehicle in the ready ( ) mode.

You can activate or deactivate the

Auto Door Lock/Unlock features from

the User Settings mode on the LCD

display.

For more information, refer to the

"LCD Display" section in this

chapter.

Child-Protector Rear Door Locks

The child safety lock is provided to

help prevent children seated in the

rear from accidentally opening the

rear doors.The rear door safety locks

should be used whenever children

are in the vehicle.

The child safety lock is located on

the edge of each rear door.When the

child safety lock is in the lock posi-

tion, the rear door will not open if the

inner door handle is pulled.

OAEE046002N

Opening a door when something

is approaching may cause dam-

age or injury. Be careful when

opening doors and watch for

vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles

or pedestrians approaching the

vehicle in the path of the door.

CAUTION

If you stay in the vehicle for a

long time while the weather is

very hot or cold, there are risks

of injuries or danger to life. Do

not lock the vehicle from the

outside when someone is in the

vehicle.

WARNING

3-13

Convenient features of your vehicle

To lock the child safety lock, insert a

key (or screw driver) (1) into the hole

and turn it to the lock position.

To allow a rear door to be opened

from inside the vehicle, unlock the

child safety lock.

This system helps to protect your

vehicle and valuables. The horn will

sound and the hazard warning lights

will blink continuously if any of the

following occur:

- A door is opened without using the

smart key.

- The liftgate is opened without

using the smart key.

- The engine hood is opened.

The alarm continues for 30 seconds,

then the system resets. To turn off

the alarm, unlock the doors with the

smart key.

The Theft Alarm System automati-

cally sets 30 seconds after you lock

the doors and the liftgate. For the

system to activate, you must lock the

doors and the liftgate from outside

the vehicle with the smart key or by

pressing the button on the outside of

the door handles with the smart key

in your possession.

The hazard warning lights will blink

and the chime will sound once to

indicate the system is armed.

Once the security system is set,

opening any door, the liftgate, or the

hood without using the smart key will

cause the alarm to activate.

The Theft Alarm System will not set if

the hood, the liftgate, or any door is

not fully closed. If the system will not

set, check the hood, the liftgate, or

the doors are fully closed.

Do not attempt to alter this system or

add other devices to it.

Information

• Do not lock the doors until all pas-

sengers have left the vehicle. If the

remaining passenger leaves the

vehicle when the system is armed,

the alarm will be activated.

• If the vehicle is not disarmed with

the smart key, open the doors by

using the mechanical key and start

the vehicle by directly pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key.

• When the system is disarmed but a

door or liftgate is not opened within

30 seconds, the system will be

rearmed.

TTHHEEFFTT--AALLAARRMM SSYYSSTTEEMM

If children accidently open the

rear doors while the vehicle is

in motion, they could fall out of

the vehicle.The rear door safety

locks should always be used

whenever children are in the

vehicle.

WARNING

3-14

Convenient features of your vehicle

The Driver Position Memory System

is provided to store and recall the fol-

lowing memory settings with a sim-

ple button operation.

- Driver's seat position

- Side view mirror position

- Instrument panel illumination intensity

If the battery is disconnected, the

position memory will be lost and the

driving positions must be stored in

the system again.

If the Driver Position Memory System

does not operate normally, have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Storing Positions into Memory

1. Check that the shift lever is in P

(Park) while the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

2. Adjust the driver's seat position,

side view mirror position and

instrument panel illumination

intensity to positions comfortable

for the driver.

3. Press the SET button.The system

will beep once and notify you

"Press button to save settings"on

the LCD display.

4. Press one of the memory buttons

(1 or 2) within 4 seconds.The sys-

tem will beep twice when the mem-

ory has been successfully stored.

5. "Driver 1 (or 2) settings saved" will

appear on the LCD display.

DDRRIIVVEERR PPOOSSIITTIIOONN MMEEMMOORRYY SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE046036N

Never attempt to operate the driv-

er position memory system while

the vehicle is moving.

This could result in loss of con-

trol, and an accident causing

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

WARNING

3-15

Convenient features of your vehicle

Recalling Positions from

Memory

1. Check that the shift lever is in P

(Park) while the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

2. Press the desired memory button

(1 or 2).The system will beep once,

and then the driver's seat position,

side view mirror position and instru-

ment panel illumination intensity

will automatically adjust to the

stored positions.

3. "Driver 1(or 2) settings is applied"

will appear on the LCD display.

• While recalling the "1" memory

position, pressing the SET or 1

button temporarily stops the

adjustment of the recalled memo-

ry position. Pressing the 2 button

recalls the "2" memory position.

• While recalling the "2" memory

position, pressing the SET or 2

button temporarily stops the

adjustment of the recalled memo-

ry position. Pressing the 1 button

recalls the "1" memory position.

• While recalling the stored posi-

tions, pressing one of the con-

trol buttons for the driver’s seat,

side view mirror or instrument

panel illumination will cause the

movement of that component to

stop and move in the direction

that the control button is

pressed.

Easy Access Function

The system will move the driver's

seat automatically as follows:

The shift lever is in P (Park)

• It will move the driver's seat rear-

ward when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the OFF position and

the driver's door is opened.

• It will move the driver's seat forward

when the vehicle is turned ON or

the driver’s door is closed with the

smart key with you.

You can activate or deactivate the

Easy Access Function from the User

Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the

"LCD Display" section in this

chapter.

NOTICE

3-16

Convenient features of your vehicle

SSTTEEEERRIINNGG WWHHEEEELL

Electric Power Steering (EPS)

The system assists you with steering

the vehicle. If the vehicle is turned off

or if the power steering system

becomes inoperative, you may still

steer the vehicle, but it will require

increased steering effort.

Should you notice any change in the

effort required to steer during normal

vehicle operation, have the system

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Information

The following symptoms may occur

during normal vehicle operation:

• The steering effort may be high

immediately after placing the Engine

Start/Stop button in the ON position.

This happens as the system performs

the EPS system diagnostics. When

the diagnostics are completed, the

steering wheel will return to its nor-

mal condition.

• A click noise may be heard from the

EPS relay after the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON or OFF position.

• Motor noise may be heard when the

vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving

speed.

• When you operate the steering wheel

in low temperature, abnormal noise

may occur. If temperature rises, the

noise will disappear. This is a normal

condition.

• When an error is detected from the

EPS, the steering effort assist func-

tion will not be activated in order to

prevent fatal accidents. Instrument

cluster warning lights may be on or

the steering effort may be high.

When the following symptoms occur,

immediately drive the vehicle to a

safe area and check it.

Tilt Steering / Telescope Steering

Adjust the steering wheel so it points

toward your chest, not toward your

face. Make sure you can see the

instrument cluster warning lights and

gauges. After adjusting, push the

steering wheel both up and down to

be certain it is locked in position.

Always adjust the position of the

steering wheel before driving.

If the Electric Power Steering

System does not operate nor-

mally, the warning light ( ) will

illuminate on the instrument

cluster.You may steer the vehi-

cle, but it will require increased

steering efforts.Take your vehi-

cle to an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and have the system

checked as soon as possible.

CAUTION

NEVER adjust the steering wheel

while driving. This may cause

loss of vehicle control resulting

in an accident.

WARNING

3-17

Convenient features of your vehicle

To change the steering wheel angle

and height:

1. Pull down the lock-release lever (1).

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the

desired angle (2) and distance for-

ward/back (3).

3. Pull up the lock-release lever to

lock the steering wheel in place.

Information

After adjustment, sometimes the lock

release lever may not lock the steering

wheel. It is not a malfunction. This

occurs when two gears are not

engaged correctly. In this case, adjust

the steering wheel again and then lock

the steering wheel.

Horn

To sound the horn, press the area

indicated by the horn symbol on your

steering wheel (see illustration). The

horn will operate only when this area

is pressed.

Do not strike the horn severely to

operate it, or hit it with your fist.

Do not press on the horn with a

sharp-pointed object.

Heated Steering Wheel

(for Canada, if equipped)

When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ON position or when the

vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode,

press the heated steering wheel but-

ton to warm the steering wheel. The

indicator on the button will illuminate.

To turn the heated steering wheel off,

press the button again.The indicator

on the button will turn off.

The heated steering wheel will auto-

matically turn off after approximately

30 minutes.

NOTICE

OAEE046014

OAE046009

OAE046008N

3-18

Do not install any cover or acces-

sory on the steering wheel. The

cover or accessory could cause

damage to the heated steering

wheel system.

Inside Rearview Mirror

Before you start driving, adjust the

rearview mirror to the center on the

view through the rear window.

When cleaning the mirror, use a

paper towel or similar material

dampened with glass cleaner. Do

not spray glass cleaner directly on

the mirror as that may cause the

liquid cleaner to enter the mirror

housing.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

Make sure your line of sight is

not obstructed. Do not place

objects in the rear seat, cargo

area, or behind the rear head-

rests which could interfere with

your vision through the rear

window.

WARNING

NEVER adjust the mirror while

driving. This may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

WARNING

To prevent serious injury during

an accident or deployment of

the air bag, do not modify the

rearview mirror and do not

install a wide mirror.

WARNING

MMIIRRRROORRSS

3-19

Convenient features of your vehicle

Day/night rearview mirror

(if equipped)

Make this adjustment before you

start driving and while the day/night

lever is in the day position.

Pull the day/night lever towards you

to reduce glare from the headlights

of the vehicles behind you during

night driving.

Remember that you lose some

rearview clarity in the night position.

Blue Link

center (if equipped)

For details, refer to the Blue Link

Owner's Guide, Navigation Manual

or Audio Manual.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

with HomeLink

system,

compass and Blue Link

(for U.S.A)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror

with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System. During

nighttime driving, this feature will

automatically detect and reduce

rearview mirror glare while the com-

pass indicates the direction the vehi-

cle is pointed. The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver allows you to

activate your garage door(s), electric

gate, home lighting, etc.

OAD045011N

OAE046010

Day

Night

3-20

Convenient features of your vehicle

(1) Blue Link Center button

(2) Blue Link POI button

(3) Blue Link SOS button

(4) Compass control button &

Dimming ON/OFF button

(5) Status indicator LED

(6) Channel 1 button

(7) Channel 2 button

(8) Channel 3 button

(9) Compass display

(10) Rear light sensor

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

) Mirror

(if equipped)

The NVS

Mirror automatically

reduces glare by monitoring light lev-

els in the front and the rear of the

vehicle. Any object that obstructs

either light sensor will degrade the

automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding

NVS

mirrors and other applica-

tions, please refer to the Gentex

website:

www.gentex.com

Your mirror will automatically dim

upon detecting glare from the vehi-

cles traveling behind you. The auto-

dimming function can be controlled

by pressing the Dimming ON/OFF

button (4):

1. Pressing and holding the button

for 3 seconds turns the auto-dim-

ming function OFF which is indi-

cated by the green Status

Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing and holding the button

for 3 seconds again turns the auto-

dimming function ON which is indi-

cated by the green Status Indicator

LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi-

tion each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is

also equipped with a Z-Nav™

Compass that shows the vehicle

Compass heading in the Display

Window using the 8 basic cardinal

headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

OAD045045N

3-21

Convenient features of your vehicle

Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and

OFF and will remember the last state

when the ignition is cycled. To turn

the display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the button

within 1 second to turn the display

feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button

again within 1 second to turn the

display back ON.

Additional options can be set with

press and hold sequences of the

button and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag-

netic north and true north. To com-

pensate for this difference you will

need to adjust the Zone setting based

on where you live.

B520C05NF

3-22

Convenient features of your vehicle

To adjust the Zone setting:

1.Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current

location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for 6

seconds, the current Zone

Number will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button

again will cause the numbers to

increment (Note: they will repeat

…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing

the button when the desired Zone

Number appears on the display

will set the new Zone.

4.Within about 5 seconds the com-

pass will start displaying a com-

pass heading again.

There are some conditions that can

cause changes to the vehicle mag-

nets, such as installing a ski rack or

a CB antenna. Body repair work on

the vehicle can also cause changes

to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In

these situations, the compass will

need to be re-calibrated to quickly

correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the com-

pass:

1. Press and hold the button for

more than 9 seconds. When the

compass memory is cleared a "C"

will appear in the display.

2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-

cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System

The HomeLink

Wireless Control

System can replace up to three

hand-held radio-frequency (RF)

transmitters with a single built-in

device. This innovative feature will

learn the radio frequency codes of

most current transmitters to operate

devices such as gate operators,

garage door openers, entry door

locks, security systems, even home

lighting. Both standard and rolling

code-equipped transmitters can be

programmed by following the out-

lined procedures.

Additional HomeLink

information

can be found at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the

RF device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as for

future HomeLink

programming. It is

also suggested that upon the sale of

the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

buttons be erased for

security purposes.

3-23

Convenient features of your vehicle

Programming HomeLink

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the

vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new bat-

tery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink

for quicker

training and accurate transmission

of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the

Engine Start/Stop button to be

placed in the ACC (or "Accessories")

position for programming and/or

operation of HomeLink

• In the event that there are still pro-

gramming difficulties or questions

after following the programming

steps listed below, contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Programming

To train most devices, follow these

instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons

(

), HomeLink

Channel 1

and Channel 3, until the indicator

light begins to flash (after 10 sec-

onds). Release both buttons. Do

not hold the buttons for longer

than 20 seconds.

ODH044413N

Flashing

Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure people and

objects are out of the way of the

device to prevent potential harm

or damage. Do not use the

HomeLink

with any garage door

opener that lacks the safety stop

and reverse features required by

U.S.federal safety standards (this

includes any garage door opener

model manufactured before April

1, 1982). A garage door that can-

not detect an object - signaling

the door to stop and reverse -

does not meet current U.S. feder-

al safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without

these features increases the risk

of serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-24

Convenient features of your vehicle

2. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)

away from the HomeLink

button

you wish to program while keeping

the indicator light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold

both the HomeLink

and hand-

held transmitter buttons until the

HomeLink

indicator light changes

from a slow to a rapid blinking

light. Now you may release both

the HomeLink

and hand-held

transmitter buttons.

Information

Some devices may require you to

replace this Programming step 3 with

procedures noted in the "Gate

Operator/Canadian Programming"

chapter. If the HomeLink

indicator

light does not change to a rapidly

blinking light after performing these

steps, contact HomeLink

www.homelink.com.

4.Press and hold for 5 seconds and

release the programmed HomeLink

button up to two separate times to

activate the door.If the door does not

activate, press and hold the just-

trained HomeLink

button and

observe the indicator light.

• If the indicator light stays on con-

stantly, programming is complete

and your device should activate

when the HomeLink

button is

pressed and released.

• If the indicator light blinks rapidly

for 2 seconds and then turns to a

constant light, continue with

"Programming" steps 5-7 to com-

plete the programming of a rolling

code equipped device (most com-

monly a garage door opener).

5. At the garage door opener receiver

(motor-head unit) in the garage,

locate the "learn" or "smart" button.

This can usually be found where

the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

ODH044414N

Flashing

3-25

Convenient features of your vehicle

6.Firmly press and release the

"learn" or "smart" button. (The

name and color of the button vary

by manufacturer). There are 30

seconds to initiate step 7.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly

press, hold for 2 seconds and

release the programmed

HomeLink

button. Repeat the

"press/hold/release" sequence a

second time, and, depending on

the brand of the garage door

opener (or other rolling code

equipped device), repeat this

sequence a third time to complete

the programming process.

HomeLink

should now activate your

rolling code equipped device.

Gate operator & Canadian program-

ming

During programming, your handheld

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System button (note steps 2

through 3 in the Programming portion

of this document) while you press

and re-press ("cycle") your handheld

transmitter every two seconds until

the frequency signal has been

learned. The indicator light will flash

slowly and then rapidly after several

seconds upon successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release

the programmed HomeLink

button.

Activation will now occur for the

trained device (i.e. garage door

opener, gate operator, security sys-

tem, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held transmitter of the device

may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single HomeLink

button

To program a device to HomeLink

using a HomeLink

button previously

trained, follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

button. DO NOT

release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds.Without releasing

the HomeLink

button, proceed

with "Programming" step 2.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink

at www.homelink.com

1-800-355-3515.

3-26

Convenient features of your vehicle

Erasing HomeLink

buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.

However, to erase all three pro-

grammed buttons:

1.Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons until the indi-

cator light begins to flash after 10

seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold

for longer than 20 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System is now in the training

(learn) mode and can be pro-

grammed at any time following the

appropriate steps in the

Programming chapters above.

NVS

is a registered trademark and

Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex

Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.

HomeLink

is a registered trademark

owned by Johnson Controls,

Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

FCC ID: NZLTLMHL4

IC: 4112A-TLMHL4

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. The transceiver has been tested and

complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifica-

tions not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

Electric chromic mirror (ECM)

with compass and HomeLink

system (for Canada)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a

Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror

with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and an Integrated HomeLink

Wireless Control System.

During nighttime driving, this feature

will automatically detect and reduce

rearview mirror glare while the com-

pass indicates the direction the vehi-

cle is pointed. The HomeLink

Universal Transceiver allows you to

activate your garage door(s), electric

gate, home lighting, etc.

3-27

Convenient features of your vehicle

(1) Channel 1 button

(2) Channel 2 button

(3) Status indicator LED

(4) Channel 3 button

(5) Rear light sensor

(6) Dimming ON/OFF button

(7) Compass control button

(8) Compass display

Automatic-Dimming Night Vision

Safety™ (NVS

) Mirror

(if equipped)

The NVS

Mirror automatically

reduces glare by monitoring light lev-

els in the front and the rear of the

vehicle. Any object that obstructs

either light sensor will degrade the

automatic dimming control feature.

For more information regarding

NVS

mirrors and other applica-

tions, please refer to the Gentex

website:

www.gentex.com

The auto-dimming function can be

controlled by pressing the ON/OFF

button:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-

dimming function OFF which is

indicated by the green Status

Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns

the auto-dimming function ON

which is indicated by the green

Status Indicator LED turning on.

The mirror defaults to the ON posi-

tion each time the vehicle is started.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is

also equipped with a Z-Nav™

Compass that shows the vehicle

Compass heading in the Display

Window using the 8 basic cardinal

headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).

OAD045046N

3-28

Convenient features of your vehicle

B520C05NF

Compass function

The Compass can be turned ON and

OFF and will remember the last state

when the ignition is cycled. To turn

the display feature ON/OFF:

1. Press and release the button to

turn the display feature OFF.

2. Press and release the button

again to turn the display back ON.

Additional options can be set with

press and hold sequences of the but-

ton and are detailed below.

There is a difference between mag-

netic north and true north. To com-

pensate for this difference you will

need to adjust the Zone setting

based on where you live.

3-29

Convenient features of your vehicle

To adjust the Zone setting:

1.Determine the desired Zone

Number based upon your current

location on the Zone Map.

2. Press and hold the button for

more than 3 but less than 6 sec-

onds, the current Zone Number

will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button

again will cause the numbers to

increment (Note: they will repeat

…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing

the button when the desired Zone

Number appears on the display

will set the new Zone.

4.Within about 5 seconds the com-

pass will start displaying a com-

pass heading again.

There are some conditions that can

cause changes to the vehicle mag-

nets, such as installing a ski rack or

a CB antenna. Body repair work on

the vehicle can also cause changes

to the vehicle’s magnetic field. In

these situations, the compass will

need to be re-calibrated to quickly

correct these changes.

If you need to recalibrate the com-

pass:

1. Press and hold the button for

more than 6 seconds. When the

compass memory is cleared a "C"

will appear in the display.

2. Drive the vehicle in 2 complete cir-

cles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System

The HomeLink

Wireless Control

System can replace up to three hand-

held radio-frequency (RF) transmit-

ters with a single built-in device. This

innovative feature will learn the radio

frequency codes of most current

transmitters to operate devices such

as gate operators, garage door open-

ers, entry door locks, security sys-

tems, even home lighting. Both stan-

dard and rolling code-equipped trans-

mitters can be programmed by fol-

lowing the outlined procedures.

Additional HomeLink

information

can be found at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the

RF device you are programming for

use in other vehicles as well as for

future HomeLink

programming. It is

also suggested that upon the sale of

the vehicle, the programmed

HomeLink

buttons be erased for

security purposes.

3-30

Convenient features of your vehicle

Programming HomeLink

Please note the following:

• When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the

vehicle outside of the garage.

• It is recommended that a new bat-

tery be placed in the hand-held

transmitter of the device being pro-

grammed to HomeLink

for quicker

training and accurate transmission

of the radio-frequency signal.

• Some vehicles may require the

Engine Start/Stop button to be

placed in the ACC (or "Accessories")

position for programming and/or

operation of HomeLink

• In the event that there are still pro-

gramming difficulties or questions

after following the programming

steps listed below, contact

HomeLink

at: www.homelink.com

or by calling 1-800-355-3515.

Rolling code programming

Rolling code devices which are

"code-protected" and manufactured

after 1996 may be determined by the

following:

• Reference the device owner’s

manual for verification.

• The handheld transmitter appears to

program the HomeLink

Universal

Transceiver but does not activate the

device.

• Press and hold the trained

HomeLink button. The device has

the rolling code feature if the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly and then

turns solid after 2 seconds.

Before programming HomeLink

to a garage door opener or gate

operator, make sure people and

objects are out of the way of the

device to prevent potential harm

or damage. Do not use the

HomeLink

with any garage door

opener that lacks the safety stop

and reverse features required by

U.S.federal safety standards (this

includes any garage door opener

model manufactured before April

1, 1982). A garage door that can-

not detect an object - signaling

the door to stop and reverse -

does not meet current U.S. feder-

al safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without

these features increases the risk

of serious injury or death.

WARNING

3-31

Convenient features of your vehicle

To train rolling code devices, follow

these instructions:

1. At the garage door opener receiv-

er (motor-head unit) in the garage,

locate the "learn" or "smart" but-

ton. This can usually be found

where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the motor-head unit.

Exact location and color of the but-

ton may vary by garage door

opener brand. If there is difficulty

locating the training button, refer-

ence the device owner’s manual or

please visit our Web site at

www.homelink.com.

2.Firmly press and release the

"learn" or "smart" button (which

activates the "training light"). You

will have 30 seconds to initiate

step 3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly

press, hold for two seconds and

then release the desired

HomeLink

button. Repeat the

"press/hold/release" sequence a

second time to complete the pro-

gramming. (Some devices may

require you to repeat this

sequence a third time to complete

the programming.)

4. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe

the red Status Indicator LED.If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and

your device should activate.

5.To program the remaining two

HomeLink

buttons, follow either

steps 1 through 4 above for other

Rolling Code devices or steps 2

through 5 in Standard Programming

for standard devices.

Standard programming

To train most devices, follow these

instructions:

1. For first-time programming, press

and hold the two outside buttons,

HomeLink

Channel 1 and

Channel 3 Buttons, until the indi-

cator light begins to flash (after 20

seconds). Release both buttons.

Do not hold the buttons for longer

than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm)

away from the HomeLink

buttons

while keeping the indicator light in

view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold

both the HomeLink

and hand-

held transmitter button. DO NOT

release the buttons until step 4

has been completed.

4.While continuing to hold the but-

tons the red Indicator Status LED

will flash slowly and then rapidly

after HomeLink

successfully

trains to the frequency signal from

the hand-held transmitter.Release

both buttons.

3-32

Convenient features of your vehicle

5. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe

the red Status Indicator LED.If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and

your device should activate when

the HomeLink

button is pressed

and released.

6.To program the remaining two

HomeLink

buttons, follow steps 2

through 5.

Gate operator & Canadian program-

ming

During programming, your handheld

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press the

Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System button (note

steps 2 through 4 in the Standard

Programming portion of this docu-

ment) while you press and re-press

("cycle") your handheld transmitter

every two seconds until the frequen-

cy signal has been learned.The indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training.

Operating HomeLink

To operate, simply press and release

the programmed HomeLink

button.

Activation will now occur for the

trained device (i.e. garage door

opener, gate operator, security sys-

tem, entry door lock, home/office

lighting, etc.). For convenience, the

hand-held transmitter of the device

may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a single

HomeLink

button

To program a new device to a previ-

ously trained HomeLink

button, fol-

low these steps:

1.Press and hold the desired

HomeLink

button. Do NOT

release until step 4 has been com-

pleted.

2.When the indicator light begins to

flash slowly (after 20 seconds),

position the handheld transmitter 1

to 3 inches away from the

HomeLink

surface.

3.Press and hold the handheld

transmitter button.The HomeLink

indicator light will flash, first slowly

and then rapidly.

4.When the indicator light begins to

flash rapidly, release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained

HomeLink

button and observe

the red Status Indicator LED.If the

indicator light stays on constantly,

programming is complete and

your new device should activate.

3-33

Convenient features of your vehicle

Erasing HomeLink

buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased.

However, to erase all three pro-

grammed buttons:

1.Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink

buttons until the indi-

cator light begins to flash-after 20

seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold

for longer than 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink

Wireless

Control System is now in the training

(learn) mode and can be pro-

grammed at any time following the

appropriate steps in the Programming

chapters above.

NVS

is a registered trademark and

Z-Nav™ is a trademark of the Gentex

Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.

HomeLink

is a registered trademark

owned by Johnson Controls,

Incorporated, Milwaukee, Wisconsin.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3

IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

3. The transceiver has been tested and

complies with FCC and Industry

Canada rules. Changes or modifica-

tions not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to

operate the device.

Side View Mirrors

Be sure to adjust mirror angles

before driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with both

left-hand and right-hand side view

mirrors.The mirrors can be adjusted

remotely with the remote switch.The

mirror heads can be folded to help

prevent damage during an automatic

car wash or when passing through a

narrow street.

The right side view mirror is convex.

Objects seen in the mirror are closer

than they appear.

OAE046013

3-34

Convenient features of your vehicle

Use your interior side view mirror or

direct observation to determine the

actual distance of following vehicles

when changing lanes.

• Do not scrape ice off the mirror

face; this may damage the sur-

face of the glass.

• If the mirror is jammed with ice,

do not adjust the mirror by

force. Use an approved spray

de-icer (not radiator antifreeze)

spray, or a sponge or soft cloth

with very warm water, or move

the vehicle to a warm place and

allow the ice to melt.

Blind spot mirror (for U.S.A)

The Blind Spot Mirror (BSM) is a

supplemental mirror that reduces the

driver’s blind spot by showing the

rear side area of the vehicle. The

blind spot mirror is equipped on the

left-hand side view mirror.

Do not clean the mirror with harsh

abrasives, fuel or other petroleum

based cleaning products.

NOTICE

OLF044477N

OLF044478N

• Always check the road condi-

tion while driving for unex-

pected situations even though

the vehicle is equipped with a

blind spot mirror.

• The blind spot mirror is a

device made for convenience.

Do not solely rely on the mir-

ror but always pay attention to

traffic around you.

WARNING

Do not adjust or fold the side

view mirrors while driving. This

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

3-35

Convenient features of your vehicle

Side view mirror control

Adjusting the side mirrors:

1. Press either the L (driver's side) or

R (passenger's side) button (1) to

select the side view mirror you

would like to adjust.

2. Use the mirror adjustment control

switch to position the selected mir-

ror up, down, left or right.

3. After adjustment, put the button

into neutral (center) position to

prevent inadvertent adjustment.

• The mirrors stop moving when

they reach the maximum adjust-

ing angles, but the motor contin-

ues to operate while the switch

is pressed. Do not press the

switch longer than necessary,

because this can damage the

motor.

• Do not attempt to adjust the side

view mirrors by hand, because

this can damage the motor.

Folding the side view mirrors

To fold the side view mirrors, grasp

the housing of the mirror and then

fold it toward the rear of the vehicle.

NOTICE

OAE046014N OAE046015

3-36

Convenient features of your vehicle

Reverse Parking Aid Function

(if equipped)

When you move the shift lever to the

R (Reverse) position, the side view

mirror(s) will rotate downwards to aid

with driving in reverse. The position

of the side view mirror switch (1)

determines whether or not the mir-

rors will move:

Left/Right :When either the L (Left) or

R (Right) switch is select-

ed, both side view mirrors

will move.

Neutral : When neither switch is select-

ed, the side view mirrors will

not move.

The side view mirrors will automati-

cally revert to their original positions if

any of the following occur:

• The Engine Start/Stop button is

placed to either the OFF position

or the ACC position.

• The shift lever is moved to any

position except R (Reverse).

• The remote control side view mir-

ror switch is not selected.

OAE046502N

3-37

Convenient features of your vehicle

(1) Driver’s door power window

switch

(2) Front passenger’s door power

window switch

(3) Rear door (left) power window

switch

(4) Rear door (right) power window

switch

(5) Window opening and closing

(6) Automatic power window

(7) Power window lock switch

WWIINNDDOOWWSS

OAEE046019N

3-38

Convenient features of your vehicle

Power Windows

The Engine Start/Stop button must

be in the ON position to be able to

raise or lower the windows. Each

door has a Power Window switch to

control that door's window. The driv-

er has a Power Window Lock switch

which can block the operation of pas-

senger windows.The power windows

will operate for approximately 30

seconds after the Engine Start/Stop

button is placed in the ACC or OFF

position. However, if the front doors

are opened, the Power Windows will

not operate even within the 30 sec-

onds period.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, power win-

dows may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• While driving with the rear win-

dows down or with the sunroof (if

equipped) opened (or partially

opened), your vehicle may demon-

strate a wind buffeting or pulsation

noise. This noise is normal and can

be reduced or eliminated by taking

the following actions. If the noise

occurs with one or both of the rear

windows down, partially lower both

front windows approximately one

inch (2.5 cm). If you experience the

noise with the sunroof open, slightly

close the sunroof.

Window opening and closing

To open:

Press the window switch down to the

first detent position (5). Release the

switch when you want the window to

stop.

To close:

Pull the window switch up to the first

detent position (5). Release the win-

dow switch when you want the win-

dow to stop.

To avoid serious injury or death,

do not extend your head, arms

or body outside the windows

while driving.

WARNING

OAE046020

3-39

Convenient features of your vehicle

Auto up/down window

(if equipped)

Pressing or pulling up the power win-

dow switch momentarily to the sec-

ond detent position (6) completely

lowers or lifts the window even when

the switch is released. To stop the

window at the desired position while

the window is in operation, pull up or

press down and release the switch.

To reset the power windows

If the power windows do not operate

normally, the automatic power win-

dow system must be reset as follows:

1. Place the Engine Start/Stop button

to the ON position.

2. Close the window and continue

pulling up on the power window

switch for at least one second.

If the power windows do not operate

properly after resetting, have the

system checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If a window senses any obstacle while

it is closing automatically, it will stop

and lower approximately 12 inches (30

cm) to allow the object to be cleared.

If the window detects the resistance

while the power window switch is

pulled up continuously, the window

will stop upward movement then

lower approximately 1 inch (2.5 cm).

If the power window switch is pulled

up continuously again within 5 sec-

onds after the window is lowered by

the automatic window reverse fea-

ture, the automatic window reverse

will not operate.

OLF044032

The automatic reverse feature

doesn't activate while resetting

the power window system.

Make sure body parts or other

objects are safely out of the way

before closing the windows to

avoid injuries or vehicle dam-

age.

WARNING

3-40

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

The automatic reverse feature is only

active when the "Auto Up" feature is

used by fully pulling up the switch to

the second detent.

Do not install any accessories on

the windows. The automatic

reverse feature may not operate.

Power window lock switch

The driver can disable the power

window switches on the rear passen-

ger's doors by pressing the power

window lock switch.

When the power window lock switch

is pressed:

• The driver's master control can

operate all the power windows.

• The front passenger's control can

operate the front passenger's power

window.

• The rear passenger's control can-

not operate the rear passenger's

power window.

• To prevent possible damage to

the power window system, do

not open or close two windows

or more at the same time. This

will also ensure the longevity of

the fuse.

• Never try to operate the main

switch on the driver's door and

the individual door window

switch in opposite directions at

the same time. If this is done,the

window will stop and cannot be

opened or closed.

NOTICE

OAE046021N

Do not allow children to play

with the power windows. Keep

the driver's door power window

lock switch in the LOCK posi-

tion. Serious injury or death can

result from unintentional win-

dow operation by a child.

WARNING

Make sure body parts or other

objects are safely out of the way

before closing the windows to

avoid injuries or vehicle damage.

Objects less than 0.16 inch (4 mm)

in diameter caught between the

window glass and the upper win-

dow channel may not be detected

by the automatic reverse window

and the window will not stop and

reverse direction.

WARNING

3-41

Convenient features of your vehicle

If your vehicle is equipped with a

sunroof, you can slide or tilt your

sunroof with the sunroof control

switch located on the overhead con-

sole.

The sunroof can only be opened,

closed, or tilted when the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion.

The sunroof can be operated for

approximately 30 seconds after the

Engine Start/Stop button is placed in

the ACC or OFF position.

However, if the front door is opened,

the sunroof cannot be operated even

within 30 seconds.

Information

• In cold and wet climates, the sun-

roof may not work properly due to

freezing conditions.

• After the vehicle is washed or in a

rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any

water that is on the sunroof before

operating it.

• To prevent damage to the sun-

roof and the motor, do not con-

tinue to press the sunroof con-

trol lever after the sunroof is in

the fully open,closed or tilt posi-

tion(s).

• Make sure the sunroof is closed

fully when leaving your vehicle.

If the sunroof is left open,rain or

snow may wet the interior of the

vehicle. Also, leaving the sun-

roof open when the vehicle is

unattended may invite theft.

NOTICE

SSUUNNRROOOOFF ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAD045022

• Never adjust the sunroof or

sunshade while driving. This

could result in loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

• Make sure heads, other body

parts or objects are out of the

way before using the sunroof.

• Do not leave the engine run-

ning and the key in your vehi-

cle with unsupervised children.

Unattended children could

operate the sunroof, which

could result in serious injury.

• Do not sit on the top of the

vehicle. It may cause injuries

or vehicle damage.

WARNING

3-42

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunroof Opening and Closing

To open:

Press the sunroof control lever back-

ward to the first detent position.

Release the switch when you want

the sunroof to stop.

To close:

Press the sunroof control lever forward

to the first detent position.Release the

switch when you want the sunroof to

stop.

Sliding the Sunroof

Pressing the sunroof control lever

backward or forward momentarily to

the second detent position completely

opens or closes the sunroof even

when the switch is released. To stop

the sunroof at the desired position

while the sunroof is in operation, press

the sunroof control lever backward or

forward and release the switch.

Information

To minimize wind noise while driving,

it is recommended that you drive with

the sunroof slightly closed (stop the

sunroof about 3 inch (7 cm) before the

maximum slide open position).

Automatic reverse (if equipped)

If the sunroof senses any obstacle

while it is closing automatically, it will

reverse direction then stop to allow

the object to be cleared.

The auto reverse function does not

work if a small obstacle is between

the sliding glass and the sunroof

sash.

You should always check that all pas-

sengers and objects are away from

the sunroof before closing it.

OLFC044035CNOAD045023

3-43

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tilting the Sunroof

Tilt the sunroof open:

Push the sunroof control lever

upward until the sunroof moves to

the desired position.

To close the sunroof:

Push the sunroof control lever forward

until the sunroof moves to the desired

position.

Sunshade

The sunshade will open automatical-

ly with the sunroof when the glass

panel moves. If you want it closed,

move the sunshade manually.

The sunroof is made to slide

together with the sunshade. Do

not leave the sunshade closed

while the sunroof is open.

NOTICE

OAD045024 OAD045037

Small objects that can get

caught between the sunroof

glass and the front glass chan-

nel may not be detected by the

automatic reverse system. In

this case, the sunroof glass will

not detect the object and will

not reverse direction.

WARNING

3-44

Convenient features of your vehicle

Resetting the Sunroof

The sunroof may need to be reset if

the following conditions occur:

- The battery is discharged or dis-

connected or the sunroof fuse has

been replaced or disconnected

- The sunroof control lever is not

operating correctly

To reset the sunroof, perform the fol-

lowing steps:

1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton to the ON position or start the

vehicle ( indicator ON). It is

recommended to reset the sunroof

while the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode.

2. Push the control lever forward.The

sunroof will close completely or tilt

depending on the condition of the

sunroof.

3. Release the control lever when the

sunroof stops moving.

4. Push the control lever forward

about 10 seconds.

- When the sunroof is in the

closed position :

The glass will tilt and slightly

move up and down.

- When the sunroof is in the tilt

position:

The glass will slightly move up

and down.

Do not release the lever until the

operation is completed.

If you release the lever during opera-

tion, start the procedure again from

step 2.

5. Within 3 seconds, push and hold

the control lever forward until the

sunroof operates as follows:

Tilt down → Slide Open → Slide

Close.

Do not release the lever until the

operation is completed.

If you release the lever during opera-

tion, start the procedure again from

step 2.

6. Release the sunroof control lever

after all steps have completed.

The sunroof system has been

reset.

Information

• If the sunroof is not reset when the

vehicle battery is disconnected or

discharged, or the sunroof fuse is

blown, the sunroof may not operate

normally.

• For more detailed information, con-

tact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-45

Convenient features of your vehicle

Hood

Opening the hood

1. Park the vehicle and set the park-

ing brake.

2. Pull the release lever to unlatch

the hood. The hood should pop

open slightly.

3. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise

the hood slightly, push up the sec-

ondary latch (1) inside of the hood

center and lift the hood (2).

4. Pull out the support rod and hold

the hood open with the support

rod (3).

EEXXTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

• Grasp the support rod in the

area wrapped in rubber. The

rubber will help prevent you

from being burned by hot metal

when the engine is hot.

• The support rod must be insert-

ed completely into the hole pro-

vided whenever you inspect the

engine compartment. This will

prevent the hood from falling

and possibly injuring you.

WARNING

OAE046026N

OAE046027N OAD045039L

3-46

Convenient features of your vehicle

Closing the hood

1. Before closing the hood, check the

following:

• All filler caps in engine compart-

ment must be correctly installed.

• Gloves, rags or any other com-

bustible material must be

removed from the engine com-

partment.

2. Lower the hood halfway (lifted

approximately 12 inches (30 cm)

from the closed position) and push

down to securely lock in place.

Then double check to be sure the

hood is secure. If the hood can be

raised slightly, it is not securely

locked. Open it again and close it

with more force.

Liftgate

Opening the liftgate

Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

Then do one of the following:

1. Unlock all doors with the Door

Unlock button on your smart key.

Press the liftgate handle button

and open the liftgate.

2. Press and hold the Liftgate Unlock

button on the smart key. Press the

liftgate handle button and open

the liftgate.

3. With the Smart Key in your pos-

session, press the liftgate handle

button and open the liftgate.

• Before closing the hood,

ensure all obstructions are

removed from around the

hood opening.

• Always double check to be

sure that the hood is firmly

latched before driving away.

Check there is no hood open

warning light or message dis-

played on the instrument clus-

ter. Driving with the hood

opened may cause a total loss

of visibility, which might

result in an accident.

• Do not move the vehicle with

the hood in the raised posi-

tion, as vision is obstructed,

which might result in an acci-

dent, and the hood could fall

or be damaged.

WARNING

OAE046022

3-47

Convenient features of your vehicle

Closing the liftgate

Lower the liftgate lid and press down

until it locks.

To be sure the liftgate lid is securely

fastened, always check by trying to

pull it up again without pressing the

liftgate handle button.

In cold and wet climates,door lock

and door mechanisms may not

work properly due to freezing con-

ditions.

NOTICE

OAE046031N

The liftgate swings upward.

Make sure no objects or people

are near the rear of the vehicle

when opening the liftgate.

WARNING

Make certain that you close the

liftgate before driving your vehi-

cle. Possible damage may occur

to the liftgate lift cylinders and

attached hardware if the liftgate

is not closed prior to driving.

CAUTION

Do not hold the part (gas lifter)

that supports the liftgate. Be

aware that the deformation of

the part may cause vehicle

damage and a risk of safety

accident.

WARNING

OHYK047009

3-48

Convenient features of your vehicle

Emergency liftgate safety

release

Your vehicle is equipped with an

Emergency Liftgate Safety Release

lever located inside the liftgate.When

someone is inadvertently locked in

the luggage compartment, the lift-

gate can be opened manually from

inside the luggage compartment by

performing the following steps :

1. Input the mechanical key into the

hole.

2. Push the mechanical key to the

right.

3. Push up the liftgate.

Fuel Filler Door (Hybrid vehicle)

Opening the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door must be opened

from inside the vehicle by pushing

the fuel filler door open switch.

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Push the fuel filler door open

switch.

• For emergencies, be fully

aware of the location of the

emergency liftgate safety

release lever in this vehicle

and how to open the liftgate if

you are accidentally locked in

the luggage compartment.

• No one should be allowed to

occupy the luggage compart-

ment of the vehicle at any time.

The luggage compartment is a

very dangerous location in the

event of a crash.

• Use the release lever for emer-

gencies only. Use extreme cau-

tion, especially while the vehi-

cle is in motion.

WARNING

OAE046024N

OAE046023N

3-49

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to

fully open.

4. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it counterclockwise. You may

hear a hissing noise as the pres-

sure inside the tank equalizes.

5. Place the cap on the fuel filler door.

Information

If the fuel filler door does not open

because ice has formed around it, tap

lightly or push on the door to break

the ice and release the door. Do not

pry on the door. If necessary, spray

around the door with an approved de-

icer fluid (do not use radiator anti-

freeze) or move the vehicle to a warm

place and allow the ice to melt.

Closing the fuel filler door

1. To install the fuel tank cap, turn it

clockwise until it "clicks" one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is

latched securely.

Gasoline is highly flammable

and explosive. Failure to follow

these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the

location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,

at the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle, you should eliminate the

potential build-up of static

electricity by touching a metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not use cellular phones

while refueling. Electric cur-

rent and/or electronic interfer-

ence from cellular phones can

potentially ignite fuel vapors

and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuel-

ing.You can generate a build-

up of static electricity by

touching, rubbing or sliding

against any item or fabric

capable of producing static

electricity. Static electricity

discharge can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire. If you

must re-enter the vehicle, you

should once again eliminate

potentially dangerous static

electricity discharge by touch-

ing a metal part of the vehicle,

away from the fuel filler neck,

nozzle or other gasoline

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

OAE046025

3-50

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel Requirements"

suggested in the Introduction chapter.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted sur-

faces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction

of the fuel system or emission

control system.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Do not use matches or a

lighter and do not smoke or

leave a lit cigarette in your

vehicle while at a gas station,

especially during refueling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

gasoline spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

eling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately con-

tact the manager of the gas

station and then contact the

local fire department. Follow

any safety instructions they

provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes or

skin and thus subject you to

the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap

carefully and slowly. If the cap

is venting fuel or if you hear a

hissing sound, wait until the

condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

(Continued)

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

(Continued)

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be

sure to place the container on

the ground prior to refueling.

Static electricity discharge

from the container can ignite

fuel vapors causing a fire.

Once refueling has begun,

contact between your bare

hand and the vehicle should

be maintained until the filling

is complete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store gasoline.

• When refueling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, and place the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF

position. Sparks produced by

electrical components related

to the engine can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire.

(Continued)

3-51

Convenient features of your vehicle

Fuel Filler Door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

Opening the fuel filler door

The fuel filler door must be opened

from inside the vehicle by pushing

the fuel filler door open switch.

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Push the fuel filler door open

switch.

3. Wait until the fuel tank is depres-

surized.

The message "Fuel door open" is

displayed when the fuel filler door

opens after the fuel tank is

depressurized.

Information

• It may take up to 20 seconds to open

the fuel filler door.

• When the fuel filler door is frozen

and does not open after 20 seconds

at freezing temperature, slightly tap

the fuel filler door and then attempt

to open it.

4. Pull the fuel filler door (1) out to

fully open.

5. To remove the fuel tank cap (2),

turn it counterclockwise. You may

hear a hissing noise as the pres-

sure inside the tank equalizes.

6. Place the cap on the fuel filler

door.

OAEPH047025L

OAEPH046024

OLFP045236N/OAEPH047525L

3-52

Closing the fuel filler door

1.To install the fuel tank cap, turn it

clockwise until it "clicks" one time.

2. Close the fuel filler door until it is

latched securely.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Gasoline is highly flammable

and explosive. Failure to follow

these guidelines may result in

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:

• Read and follow all warnings

posted at the gas station.

• Before refueling, note the

location of the Emergency

Gasoline Shut-Off, if available,

at the gas station.

• Before touching the fuel noz-

zle, you should eliminate the

potential build-up of static

electricity by touching a metal

part of the vehicle, a safe dis-

tance away from the fuel filler

neck, nozzle, or other gas

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Do not use cellular phones

while refueling. Electric cur-

rent and/or electronic interfer-

ence from cellular phones can

potentially ignite fuel vapors

and cause a fire.

• Do not get back into a vehicle

once you have begun refuel-

ing.You can generate a build-

up of static electricity by

touching, rubbing or sliding

against any item or fabric

capable of producing static

electricity. Static electricity

discharge can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire. If you

must re-enter the vehicle, you

should once again eliminate

potentially dangerous static

electricity discharge by touch-

ing a metal part of the vehicle,

away from the fuel filler neck,

nozzle or other gasoline

source, with your bare hand.

(Continued)

• Add fuel into the fuel tank

within 20 minutes after open-

ing the fuel filler door. After 20

minutes, the fuel tank may

shut off, causing fuel to over-

flow. In this case, re-press the

fuel filler door opening but-

ton.

• Do not leave the fuel filler

door opened for an extended

period of time. It may dis-

charge the battery.

• Close the fuel filler door after

fueling the vehicle. If you start

the vehicle with the fuel filler

door opened, the message,

"Check fuel door", illuminates

on the LCD display.

• Avoid refueling the vehicle

while charging the (high-volt-

age) hybrid battery. It may

cause a fire or an explosion

due to static electricity.

WARNING

3-53

Convenient features of your vehicle

Information

Make sure to refuel your vehicle

according to the "Fuel Requirements"

suggested in the Introduction chapter.

• Do not spill fuel on the exterior

surfaces of the vehicle. Any type

of fuel spilled on painted sur-

faces may damage the paint.

• If the fuel filler cap requires

replacement, use only a genuine

HYUNDAI cap or the equivalent

specified for your vehicle. An

incorrect fuel filler cap can

result in a serious malfunction

of the fuel system or emission

control system.

NOTICE

(Continued)

• When using an approved

portable fuel container, be

sure to place the container on

the ground prior to refueling.

Static electricity discharge

from the container can ignite

fuel vapors causing a fire.

Once refueling has begun,

contact between your bare

hand and the vehicle should

be maintained until the filling

is complete.

• Use only approved portable

plastic fuel containers designed

to carry and store gasoline.

• When refueling, always move

the shift lever to the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, and place the Engine

Start/Stop button to the OFF

position. Sparks produced by

electrical components related

to the engine can ignite fuel

vapors causing a fire.

(Continued)

• Do not use matches or a

lighter and do not smoke or

leave a lit cigarette in your

vehicle while at a gas station,

especially during refueling.

• Do not over-fill or top-off your

vehicle tank, which can cause

gasoline spillage.

• If a fire breaks out during refu-

eling, leave the vicinity of the

vehicle, and immediately con-

tact the manager of the gas

station and then contact the

local fire department. Follow

any safety instructions they

provide.

• If pressurized fuel sprays out,

it can cover your clothes or

skin and thus subject you to

the risk of fire and burns.

Always remove the fuel cap

carefully and slowly. If the cap

is venting fuel or if you hear a

hissing sound, wait until the

condition stops before com-

pletely removing the cap.

(Continued)

• Always check that the fuel cap

is installed securely to pre-

vent fuel spillage in the event

of an accident.

3-54

IINNSSTTRRUUMMEENNTT CCLLUUSSTTEERR

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Power gauge

2. Speedometer

3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5.Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

OAEPH047100N/OAE046501N

• Type B

■■

Hybrid vehicle

• Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

For more details,refer to the "Gauges

and Meters" in this chapter.

3-55

Convenient features of your vehicle

1. Power gauge

2. Speedometer

3. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge

4. Fuel gauge

5.Warning and indicator lights

6. LCD display (including Trip computer)

OAEPH047542N/OAEPH047501N

• Type B

■■

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

• Type A

The actual cluster in the vehicle may

differ from the illustration.

For more details,refer to the "Gauges

and Meters" in this chapter.

3-56

Instrument Cluster Control

Instrument panel illumination

When the vehicle's position lights or

headlights are on, press the illumina-

tion control button to adjust the

brightness of the instrument panel

illumination.

When pressing the illumination con-

trol button, the interior switch illumi-

nation intensity is also adjusted.

• The brightness of the instrument

panel illumination is displayed.

• If the brightness reaches to the

maximum or minimum level, a

chime will sound.

Gauges and Meters

Speedometer

Convenient features of your vehicle

Never adjust the instrument

cluster while driving. This could

result in loss of control and lead

to an accident that may cause

death, serious injury, or property

damage.

WARNING

OAE046401N

OAE046102N

OAE046103N

■ Type A

■ Type B

• ECO mode selected

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046167L/OAE046113L

3-57

Convenient features of your vehicle

The speedometer indicates the

speed of the vehicle and is calibrated

in miles per hour (MPH) and/or kilo-

meters per hour (km/h).

The speedometer for cluster type B

is displayed differently according to

the mode selected, ECO or SPORT.

If the shift lever is in S (Sport),

SPORT mode is selected and if the

shift lever is in D (Drive), ECO mode

is selected.

For more information, refer to

"Dual Clutch Transmission" in

chapter 5.

Tachometer

The tachometer indicates the approx-

imate number of engine revolutions

per minute (rpm).

Use the tachometer to select the cor-

rect shift points and to prevent lug-

ging and/or over-revving the engine.

Do not operate the engine within

the tachometer's RED ZONE. This

may cause severe engine damage.

Power gauge

The power gauge indicates whether

the current driving condition is fuel

efficient or not.

• CHARGE :

Shows that the energy made by the

vehicle is being converted to elec-

trical energy. (Regenerated energy)

• ECO :

Shows that the vehicle is being

driven in an Eco-friendly manner.

• POWER :

Shows that the vehicle is exceed-

ing the Eco-friendly range.

NOTICE

OAE046104N

■ Type B

• SPORT mode selected

OAE046106N

■ Type B

• SPORT mode selected

OAEQ046008

3-58

Information

Accordance to the power gauge area

the "EV" indicator comes on or off.

- "EV" indicator ON : Vehicle is driv-

en using the electric motor or the

gasoline engine is stopped.

- "EV" indicator OFF : Vehicle is

driven using the gasoline engine.

Fuel gauge

This gauge indicates the approxi-

mate amount of fuel remaining in the

fuel tank.

Information

• The fuel tank capacity is given in

chapter 8.

• The fuel gauge is supplemented by a

low fuel warning light, which will

illuminate when the fuel tank is

nearly empty.

• On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge

pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel

warning light may come on earlier

than usual due to the movement of

fuel in the tank.

Avoid driving with an extremely

low fuel level. Running out of fuel

could cause the engine to misfire

damaging the catalytic converter.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAE046107/OAE046108

■ Type A ■ Type B

Running out of fuel can expose

vehicle occupants to danger.

You must stop and obtain addi-

tional fuel as soon as possible

after the warning light comes

on or when the gauge indicator

comes close to the "E (Empty)"

level.

WARNING

3-59

Convenient features of your vehicle

Hybrid battery SOC

(State of Charge) gauge

This gauge indicates the remaining

hybrid battery power. If the SOC is

near the "L (Low)" level, the vehicle

automatically operates the engine to

charge the battery. However, if the

Service Indicator ( ) and

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

( ) turn on when the SOC gauge

is near the "L (Low)" level, have the

vehicle be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Never try to start the vehicle if the

fuel tank is empty. In this condi-

tion, the engine cannot charge the

high voltage battery of the hybrid

system. If you try to start the vehi-

cle when the fuel is empty, the

high voltage battery will become

discharged and be damaged.

Plug-in hybrid mode indicator

• CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)

mode : The high-voltage (hybrid)

battery is used to drive the vehicle.

• CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)

mode : The high-voltage (hybrid)

battery and gasoline engine is

used to drive the vehicle.

Information

Even when the battery charging rate

is high and driving in electric mode is

possible, engine may turn on in some

areas to protect the system.

NOTICE

■ Hybrid vehicle ■ Plug-in hybrid vehicle

OAEQ046009/OAEPH046522

OAEPH047519N

■ CD (Charge Depleting, Electric)

OAEPH047520N

■ CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid)

3-60

Convenient features of your vehicle

Outside temperature gauge

This gauge indicates the current out-

side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).

- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F

(-40°C ~ 60°C)

The outside temperature on the dis-

play may not change immediately

like a general thermometer (to avoid

distracting the driver).

To change the temperature unit from

°F to °C or °C to °F:

- Go to User Settings Mode ➝ Other

(Features) ➝ Temperature Unit.

For vehicles equipped with Automatic

Climate Control, you can also:

- Press and hold the AUTO and OFF

buttons on the climate control unit

for 3 seconds

Both the temperature unit on the

cluster LCD display and climate con-

trol screen will change.

Odometer

The odometer indicates the total dis-

tance that the vehicle has been driv-

en and should be used to determine

when periodic maintenance should

be performed.

OAE046135N/OAEE046502N

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046138N/OAE046112N

■ Type B

■ Type A

3-61

Convenient features of your vehicle

Range

• The range is the estimated dis-

tance the vehicle can be driven

with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "----" as range.

• The Range for cluster type B is dis-

played differently according to the

mode selected, ECO or SPORT. If

the shift lever is in S (Sport),

SPORT mode is selected and if the

shift lever is in D (Drive), ECO

mode is selected.

For more information, refer to

"Dual Clutch Transmission" in

chapter 5.

• The Range for cluster type A is

mentioned in "Trip Computer" in

this chapter.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the range function may not

operate correctly.

• The range may differ from the actu-

al driving distance as it is an esti-

mate of the available driving dis-

tance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallon

(6 liters) of fuel are added to the

vehicle.

• The range may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

Dual clutch transmission shift

indicator

This indicator displays which shift

lever position is selected.

OAE046475N/OAE046126N

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046136L/OAE046110L

■ Type B

■ Type A

3-62

Convenient features of your vehicle

Shift indicator pop-up (if equipped)

The pop-up indicates the current

gear position displayed in the cluster

for about 2 seconds when shifting

into other positions (P/R/N/D).

Warning and Indicator Lights

Information

Make sure that all warning lights are

OFF after starting the engine. If any

light is still ON, this indicates a situa-

tion that needs attention.

Ready Indicator

This indicator illuminates :

When the vehicle is ready to be driven.

- ON : Normal driving is possible.

- OFF : Normal driving is not possible,

or a problem has occurred.

- Blinking : Emergency driving.

When the ready indicator goes OFF

or blinks, there is a problem with the

system. In this case, have your vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

EV Mode Indicator

This indicator illuminates when the

vehicle is driven by the electric motor.

Service Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a problem with the

hybrid vehicle control system or

hardware.

When the warning light illuminates

while driving, or does not go OFF

after starting the vehicle, have your

vehicle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046137/OAE046111

3-63

Convenient features of your vehicle

Charging Cable

Connection Indicator

(Plug-in hybrid)

This indicator illuminates in red when

the charging cable is connected.

Air Bag Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 6

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the SRS.

In this case, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Seat Belt Warning Light

This warning light informs the driver

that the seat belt is not fastened.

For more details, refer to the "Seat

Belts" in chapter 2.

Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds.

- It remains on if the parking brake

is applied.

• When the parking brake is applied.

• When the brake fluid level in the

reservoir is low.

- If the warning light illuminates

with the parking brake released, it

indicates the brake fluid level in

the reservoir is low.

• When the regenerative brake does

not operate.

If the brake fluid level in the reser-

voir is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. With the engine stopped, check the

brake fluid level immediately and

add fluid as required (For more

details, refer to "Brake Fluid" in

chapter 7). After adding brake

fluid, check all brake components

for fluid leaks.If a brake fluid leak is

found, or if the warning light

remains on, or if the brakes do not

operate properly, do not drive the

vehicle. Have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Dual-diagonal braking system

Your vehicle is equipped with dual-

diagonal braking systems. This

means you still have braking on two

wheels even if one of the dual sys-

tems should fail.

With only one of the dual systems

working, more than normal pedal

travel and greater pedal pressure is

required to stop the vehicle.

3-64

Also, the vehicle will not stop in as

short a distance with only a portion

of the brake system working.

If the brakes fail while you are driv-

ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-

al engine braking and stop the vehi-

cle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Regenerative Brake

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates :

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds.

• When the regenerative brake does

not operate and the brake does not

perform well.This causes the Brake

Warning light and Regenerative

Brake Warning Light to illuminate

simultaneously.

In this case, drive safely and have

your vehicle inspected by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

The operation of the brake pedal may

be more difficult than normal and the

braking distance can increase.

Anti-lock Brake System

(ABS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ABS (The normal braking sys-

tem will still be operational without

the assistance of the anti-lock

brake system).

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Convenient features of your vehicle

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light

Driving the vehicle with a warn-

ing light ON is dangerous. If the

Parking Brake & Brake Fluid

Warning Light illuminates with

the parking brake released, it

indicates that the brake fluid

level is low.

In this case, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

3-65

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD)

System Warning Light

These two warning lights illuminate

at the same time while driving:

• When the ABS and regular brake

system may not work normally.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Information

- Electronic

Brake Force Distribution

(EBD) System Warning Light

When the ABS Warning Light is on or

both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake

Fluid Warning Lights are on, the

speedometer, odometer, or tripmeter

may not work. Also, the EPS Warning

Light may illuminate and the steering

effort may increase or decrease.

In this case, have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

Electric Power Steering

(EPS) Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the EPS.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD) System

Warning Light

When both ABS and Parking

Brake & Brake Fluid Warning

Lights are on, the brake system

will not work normally and you

may experience an unexpected

and dangerous situation during

sudden braking.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

In this case, avoid high speed

driving and abrupt braking.

Have the vehicle inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

3-66

Malfunction Indicator

Lamp (MIL)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the emission control system.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may

cause damage to the emission

control system which could affect

drivability and/or fuel economy.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(MIL) illuminates, potential catalyt-

ic converter damage is possible

which could result in loss of

engine power.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

Charging System

Warning Light

When this warning light illuminates

while running the engine, the battery

is not being charged. Immediately

turn OFF all electrical accessories.

Try not to use electrically operated

controls, such as the power win-

dows. Keep running the engine.

Have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible.

Engine Oil Pressure

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the engine oil pressure is low.

If the engine oil pressure is low:

1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe

location and stop your vehicle.

2. Turn the engine off and check the

engine oil level (For more details,

refer to "Engine Oil" in chapter 7).

If the level is low, add oil as required.

If the warning light remains on

after adding oil or if oil is not avail-

able, have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

as soon as possible.

NOTICE

Convenient features of your vehicle

3-67

Convenient features of your vehicle

• If the engine does not stop

immediately after the Engine Oil

Pressure Warning Light is illumi-

nated, severe damage could

result.

• If the warning light stays on

while the engine is running, it

indicates that there may be seri-

ous engine damage or malfunc-

tion. In this case:

1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

2.Turn off the engine and check

the oil level. If the oil level is

low, fill the engine oil to the

proper level.

3. Start the engine again. If the

warning light stays on after the

engine is started, turn the

engine off immediately. In this

case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Low Fuel Level

Warning Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Driving with the Low Fuel Level

warning light on or with the fuel

level below "E" can cause the

engine to misfire and damage the

catalytic converter (if equipped).

Engine Coolant

Temperature Warning

Light

This warning light illuminates:

• When the engine coolant temper-

ature is above 248°F (120°C). This

means that the engine is overheat-

ed and may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

NOTICE

3-68

Convenient features of your vehicle

Master Warning Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When there is a malfunction in oper-

ation in any of the following systems:

- Low washer fluid (if equipped)

- Exterior lamp malfunction

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) malfunction (if

equipped)

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) System malfunction (if

equipped)

- Smart cruise control malfunction

(if equipped)

- High Beam Assist malfunction (if

equipped)

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

- Service reminder

To identify the details of the warning,

look at the LCD display.

Low Tire Pressure

Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place Engine Start/Stop

button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When one or more of your tires are

significantly underinflated.

For more details, refer to

"Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

This warning light remains ON

after blinking for approximately 60

seconds, or repeatedly blinks ON

and OFF in 3 second intervals:

• When there is a malfunction with

the TPMS.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er as soon as possible.

For more details, refer to

"Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Safe Stopping

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire damage

caused by external factors.

• If you notice any vehicle insta-

bility, immediately take your

foot off the accelerator pedal,

apply the brakes gradually with

light force, and slowly move to

a safe position off the road.

WARNING

3-69

Convenient features of your vehicle

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds and then goes off.

• When there is a malfunction with

the ESC system.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• While the ESC is operating.

For more details, refer to

"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"

in chapter 5.

Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) OFF

Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately

3 seconds and then goes off.

• When you deactivate the ESC sys-

tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-

ton.

For more details, refer to

"Electronic Stability Control (ESC)"

in chapter 5.

Immobilizer Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates for

up to 30 seconds:

• When the vehicle detects the smart

key in the vehicle with the Engine

Start/Stop button in the ACC or ON

position.

- At this time, you can start the

engine.

- The indicator light goes off after

starting the engine.

This indicator light blinks for a few

seconds:

• When the smart key is not in the vehi-

cle.

- At this time, you cannot start the

engine.

3-70

Convenient features of your vehicle

This indicator light illuminates for 2

seconds and goes off:

• If the smart key is in the vehicle and

the Engine Start/Stop button is ON,

but the vehicle cannot detect the

smart key.

In this case, have the vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

This indicator light blinks:

• When the battery voltage of the

smart key is low.

- At this time, you can not start the

engine. However, you can start

the engine if you press the

Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key. (For more details,

refer to "Starting the Vehicle"

in chapter 5).

• When there is a malfunction with

the immobilizer system.

In this case, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn Signal Indicator

Light

This indicator light blinks:

• When you operate the turn signal

indicator light.

If any of the following occurs, there

may be a malfunction with the turn

signal system.

- The turn signal indicator light illumi-

nates but does not blink

- The turn signal indicator light blinks

rapidly

- The turn signal indicator light does

not illuminate at all

If either of these conditions occur,

have your vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

High Beam Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the headlamps are on and in

the high beam position.

• When the turn signal lever is pulled

into the Flash-to-Pass position.

Light ON Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the tail lights or headlamps

are on.

3-71

Convenient features of your vehicle

High Beam Assist

(HBA) indicator light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates :

• When the high-beam is on with the

light switch in the AUTO light posi-

tion.

• If your vehicle detects oncoming or

preceding vehicles, the High Beam

Assist (HBA) system will switch the

high beam to low beam automati-

cally.

For more details, refer to "High

Beam Assist (HBA) system" in this

chapter.

Exterior Light Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When one of the exterior bulbs

(headlamp, tail lamp, fog lamp, etc.)

is not operating properly. One of the

bulbs may need to be replaced.

Information

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same

wattage rating.

LED Headlight Warning

Light (if equipped)

This warning light illuminates:

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

• When there is a malfunction with

the LED headlight.

In this case, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

This warning light blinks:

• When there is a malfunction with a

LED headlight related part.

In this case, have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Continuous driving with the LED

Headlight Warning Light on or

blinking can reduce LED headlight

life.

NOTICE

3-72

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cruise Indicator Light

(if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control system is

enabled.

For more details, refer to "Cruise

Control System" in chapter 5.

Cruise SET Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the cruise control speed is

set.

For more details, refer to "Cruise

Control System" in chapter 5.

SPORT Mode Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates

• When the driver moves the shift

lever to S (Sport).

For more details, refer to "Dual

Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.

ECO Mode Indicator

Light

This indicator light illuminates:

• When the driver moves the shift

lever to D (Drive).

For more details, refer to "Dual

Clutch Transmission" in chapter 5.

Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist

Waning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light illuminates :

• When you place the Engine Start/

Stop button to the ON position.

- It illuminates for approximately 3

seconds. (for cluster type B)

• When the FCA system is turned

off.

• When the radar sensor or cover is

blocked with dirt or snow. Check

the sensor and cover and clean

them by using a soft cloth.

• When there is a malfunction with

FCA. In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized dealer of

HYUNDAI.

3-73

Convenient features of your vehicle

Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) System Indicator

Light (if equipped)

This indicator light illuminates:

• [Green] When the system operat-

ing conditions are satisfied.

• [White] When system operating

conditions are not satisfied or

when the sensor does not detect

the lane line.

• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-

tion with the lane keeping assist

system.

In this case, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

For more information,refer to "Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) System" in

chapter 5.

LCD Display Messages

Shift to P

This message is displayed if you try

to turn off the vehicle with the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position.

At this time, the Engine Start/Stop

button turns to the ACC position (If

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton once more, it will turn to the ON

position).

Low Key Battery

This message is displayed if the bat-

tery of the smart key is discharged

while changing the Engine Start/

Stop button to the OFF position.

Press START button while turn-

ing wheel

This message is displayed if the

steering wheel does not unlock nor-

mally when the Engine Start/Stop

button is pressed.

You should press the Engine Start/

Stop button while turning the steer-

ing wheel right and left.

Check Steering Wheel Lock

System

This message is displayed if the

steering wheel does not lock normal-

ly while the Engine Start/Stop button

changes to the OFF position.

Press brake pedal to start vehicle

This message is displayed if the

Engine Start/Stop button changes to

the ACC position twice by pressing

the button repeatedly without

depressing the brake pedal.

You can start the vehicle by depress-

ing the brake pedal.

Key not in vehicle

This message is displayed if the

smart key is not in the vehicle when

you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton.

When attempting to start the vehicle,

always have the smart key with you.

3-74

Key not detected

This message is displayed if the

smart key is not detected when you

press the Engine Start/Stop button.

Press START button again

This message is displayed if you

were unable to start the vehicle when

the Engine Start/Stop button was

pressed.

If this occurs, attempt to start the

engine by pressing the Engine Start/

Stop button again.

If the warning message appears

each time you press the Engine

Start/Stop button, have your vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Press START button with key

This message is displayed if you

press the Engine Start/Stop button

while the warning message "Key not

detected" is displayed.

At this time, the immobilizer indicator

light blinks.

Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse

This message is displayed if the

brake switch fuse is disconnected.

You need to replace the fuse with a

new one before starting the engine.

If that is not possible, you can start

the engine by pressing the Engine

Start/Stop button for 10 seconds in

the ACC position.

Shift to P to start vehicle

This message is displayed if you try

to start the engine with the shift lever

not in the P (Park) position.

Door, Hood, Liftgate Open

This warning is displayed indicating

which door, or hood, or liftgate is

open.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAE046165

Before driving the vehicle, you

should confirm that the door/

hood/liftgate is fully closed.

Also, check there is no door

/hood/liftgate open warning light

or message displayed on the

instrument cluster.

CAUTION

3-75

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the door/liftgate open warning is

blocked with another warning mes-

sage, an icon will appear on the top

of the LCD display.

Sunroof Open (if equipped)

This warning is displayed if you turn

off the engine when the sunroof is

open.

Icy Road Warning Light

(if equipped)

This warning light is to warn the driver

the road may be icy.

When the temperature on the out-

side temperature gauge is approxi-

mately below 40°F (4°C), the Icy

Road Warning Light and Outside

Temperature Gauge blinks and then

illuminates. Also, the warning chime

sounds 1 time.

OAD045136

■ Type A

OAEE046114

■ Type B■ Type A

OAE046461L/OAE046099L

3-76

Information

If the icy road warning light appears

while driving, you should drive more

attentively and safely refraining from

over-speeding, rapid acceleration, sud-

den braking or sharp turning, etc.

Low Pressure

This message is displayed if the tire

pressure is low. The corresponding

tire on the vehicle will be illuminated.

For more details, refer to "Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

Turn on FUSE SWITCH/

Turn FUSE SWITCH On

Either message is displayed if the

fuse switch located on the fuse box

under the steering wheel is OFF.

You should turn the fuse switch on.

For more details, refer to "Fuses"

in chapter 7.

Convenient features of your vehicle

■ Type B

■ Type A

OAE046114L/OAE046115L

OLFH044149L/OAEPH047564N

3-77

Convenient features of your vehicle

Low Washer Fluid (if equipped)

This message is displayed if the

washer fluid level in the reservoir is

nearly empty.

Have the washer fluid reservoir

refilled.

Low Fuel

This message is displayed if the fuel

tank is almost out of fuel.

When this message is displayed, the

low fuel level warning light in the

cluster will come on.

It is recommended to look for the

nearest fueling station and refuel as

soon as possible.

Add fuel as soon as possible.

Engine has overheated / Engine

overheated

Either message is displayed when

the engine coolant temperature is

above 248°F (120°C). This means

that the engine is overheated and

may be damaged.

If your vehicle is overheated, refer

to "Overheating" in chapter 6.

Check High Beam Assist (HBA)

system (if equipped)

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the High Beam

Assist (HBA) system. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more details, refer to "High

Beam Assist (HBA) system" in

chapter 3.

Lights Mode

This indicator displays which exterior

light is selected using the lighting

control.

OAE046117L

OAE058237L

3-78

Wiper

This indicator displays which wiper

speed is selected using the wiper

control.

Check headlight (if equipped)

This message is displayed if the

headlamps are not operating proper-

ly. A headlamp bulb may need to be

replaced.

Information

Make sure to replace the burned out

bulb with a new one of the same wattage

rating.

Check Lane Keeping Assist

(LKA) system (if equipped)

Either message is displayed if there

is a problem with the Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) System. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

For more information, refer to

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System" in chapter 5.

Convenient features of your vehicle

OAE046118L

3-79

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system

This warning message is displayed if

there is a problem with the Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system.

Have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

For more information, refer to

"Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system" in chapter 5.

Parking Distance Warning sys-

tem (Reverse) malfunction

(if equipped)

This warning is displayed if there is a

problem with the Parking Assist

System. Have the vehicle inspected

by an authorized dealer of

HYUNDAI.

For more information, refer to

"Driver Assist System" in chapter

Check Active Air Flap System

This message is displayed in the fol-

lowing situations:

- There is a malfunction with the

actuator flap

- There is a malfunction with the

actuator air flap controller

- The air flap does not open

When all of the above conditions are

fixed, the warning will disappear.

OAE046462L

OOS057087L

OLFH044262L

3-80

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check Hybrid system

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the hybrid

control system.

Refrain from driving when the warn-

ing message is displayed.

In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check Hybrid system.

Turn engine Off

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the hybrid

system.The " " indicator will blink

and a warning chime will sound until

the problem is solved.

In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Check Hybrid system.

Do not start engine

This message is displayed when the

hybrid battery power (SOC) level is

low. A warning chime will sound until

the problem is solved.

In this case have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEPH047560N

OLFH044248L

OLFH044240L

3-81

Convenient features of your vehicle

Stop vehicle and check power

supply

This message is displayed when a

failure occurs in the power supply

system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and tow your vehicle to

the nearest authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and have the vehicle inspect-

ed.

Stop vehicle to charge battery/

Park with engine On to charge

battery

Either message is displayed when

the hybrid battery power (SOC) level

is low.

In this case, park the vehicle in a

safe location and wait until the hybrid

battery is charged.

Refuel to prevent Hybrid battery

damage

This message is displayed when the

fuel tank is nearly empty.

You should refill the fuel tank to pre-

vent hybrid battery damage.

OLFH044232L/OAEPH047561N

OLFH044230L OLFH044242L

3-82

Convenient features of your vehicle

Refill inverter coolant

This message is displayed when the

inverter coolant is nearly empty.

You should refill the inverter coolant.

Stop vehicle and check brakes/

Stop vehicle and check regen.

brakes

Either message is displayed when a

failure occurs in the brake system.

In this case, park the vehicle in a safe

location and tow your vehicle to the

nearest authorized HYUNDAI dealer

and have the vehicle inspected.

Check brakes/Check regenera-

tive brakes

Either message is displayed when

the brake performance is low or the

regenerative brake does not work

properly due to a failure in the brake

system.

In this case, it may take longer for the

brake pedal to operate and the brak-

ing distance may become longer.

OLFH044244L

OLFH044234L/OAEPH047562N

OLFH044250L/OAEPH047563N

3-83

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check Virtual Engine Sound

System

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the Virtual

Engine Sound System (VESS).

In this case, have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Unplug vehicle to start

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when you

start the engine without unplugging

the charging cable. Unplug the

charging cable, and then start the

vehicle.

Remaining time

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed to notify

the remaining time to fully charge the

battery.

OLFP045258NOLFH044543L OAEPH047193N

3-84

Convenient features of your vehicle

Wait until fuel door opens

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when you

attempt to open the fuel filler door

with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait

until the fuel tank is depressurized.

Information

It may take up to 20 seconds to open

fuel filler door.

Check fuel door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the fuel filler

door. Such as, when the fuel filler

door does not open after 20 seconds

at freezing temperature.

Information

When the fuel filler door is frozen and

does not open after 20 seconds at

freezing temperature, slightly tap the

fuel filler door and then attempt to

open it. In other cases, have your vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Fuel door open

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

fuel filler door opens after the fuel

tank is depressurized. If this mes-

sage is displayed, you can refuel the

fuel tank.

OAEPH047201L

OAEPH047526L

OAEPH047525L

3-85

Convenient features of your vehicle

Check fuel door

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle is driven with the fuel filler

door opened. Close the fuel filler

door and then start driving.

Shift to P to charge

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

charging connector is plugged with

the shift lever in R (Reverse), N

(Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift

lever to P (Park) and re-start the

charging process.

AC Charger Error!

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

there is a problem with the charger.

OAEPH047202L

OAEPH047526L

OAEE047134N

3-86

Convenient features of your vehicle

Aux. Battery Saver+ was used

while parked

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

Aux. Battery Saver+ function has

been completed when the vehicle is

turned ON.

For more information, refer to

"Hybrid System Overview" provided

in the front of the owner's manual.

Switching to Hybrid mode to

allow heating or air condition-

ing (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle automatically switches to

HEV mode to allow heating or air

conditioning. It is when the coolant

temperature is low (below 7 °F (-14

°C)) and the driver turns on the heat-

ing or cooling system.

If the coolant temperature gets high-

er than 7 °F (-14 °C) or the driver

turns off the heating or cooling sys-

tem the vehicle returns to its default

(EV) mode.

Maintaining Hybrid mode to

continue heating or air condi-

tioning (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle maintains the HEV mode to

allow heating or air conditioning.The

mode does not change when the

driver presses the [EV/HEV] button

to switch from the HEV mode to EV

mode while the heating and cooling

system is on and the coolant temper-

ature is below 7 °F (-14 °C).

OAEE047143N

OAEPH047207L

OAEPH047527L

3-87

Convenient features of your vehicle

Low/High System Temp.

Maintaining Hybrid mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

temperature of the high-voltage

(hybrid) battery is too low or too high.

This warning message is to protect

the battery and the hybrid system.

Low/High System Temp.

Switching to Hybrid mode

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

temperature of the high-voltage

(hybrid) battery is too low or high.

This warning message is to protect

the battery and the hybrid system.

Switching to Hybrid mode to

lubricate engine

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

vehicle is automatically switched to

the HEV mode to lubricate engine

while the Engine Start/Stop button is

in the ON position.

OAEPH047205L/OAEPH047206LOAEPH047203L/OAEPH047204L OAEPH047530L

3-88

Convenient features of your vehicle

Maintaining Hybrid mode to

protect engine

(Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when the

[EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is

impossible to switch from the HEV

mode to EV mode due to engine

lubrication.

Exit SPORT mode to switch to

EV (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)

This message is displayed when

[EV/HEV] button is pressed but it is

impossible to switch from the HEV

mode to EV mode because the

SPORT mode is engaged.

OAEPH047528L

OAEPH047531N

3-89

Convenient features of your vehicle

LLCCDD DDIISSPPLLAAYY

LCD Display Control

The LCD display modes can be

changed by using the control buttons.

(1) : MODE button for changing

modes

(2) , : MOVE switch for

changing items

(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for

setting or resetting the select-

ed item

OAE046402

■■

3-90

Convenient features of your vehicle

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

This mode displays the state of :

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System

- Smart Cruise Control

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

For more information, refer to "Smart Cruise Control (SCC)",

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system" and "Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system" in chapter 5.

A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.

Information

This mode displays the service interval (mileage or days) and warning mes-

sages related to the Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system, etc.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

or or

LCD Display Modes (for cluster type A)

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

3-91

Convenient features of your vehicle

Edit settings after shifting to P/

Shift to P to edit settings

Either message appears if you try to

adjust the User Settings while driv-

ing.

For your safety, change the User

Settings after parking the vehicle,

applying the parking brake and mov-

ing the shift lever to P (Park).

Quick guide (Help)

This mode provides quick guides for

the systems in the User Settings

mode.

Select an item, press and hold the

OK button.

For more information, about each

system, refer to this Owner's

Manual.

Trip computer mode

The trip computer mode displays

information related to vehicle driving

parameters including fuel economy,

tripmeter information and vehicle

speed.

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

OAE046503N OTL045174

3-92

Convenient features of your vehicle

Assist mode

SCC/LKA/DAW (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system and

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) sys-

tem.

For more information, refer to

each system in chapter 5.

A/V mode

This mode displays the state of the

A/V system.

Information mode

This mode displays the service inter-

val (mileage and days).

Service interval

Service in

It calculates and displays the mainte-

nance schedule (mileage or days),

as set in the system.

When the set mileages or days

passed, "Service in" message is dis-

played for several seconds each time

Engine Start/Stop button is turned

ON.

OAE057195N OTL045178

OTLA045182

3-93

Convenient features of your vehicle

Service required

If you exceed the specified service

interval, a message indicating,

"Service required" will be displayed

each time you turn ON the vehicle.

To reset the service interval in

mileages or days that you initially

set, press the OK button for more

than 1 second.

Service in OFF

If the service interval is not set,

"Service in OFF" message is dis-

played on the LCD display.

Information

If any of the following conditions

occur, the mileage and number of days

to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

Warning message

If one of followings occurs, warning

messages will be displayed in the

information mode for several seconds.

- Low washer fluid (if equipped)

- Exterior lamp malfunction

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system malfunction

(if equipped)

- High Beam Assist malfunction

(if equipped)

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) malfunction

(if equipped)

- Smart cruise control malfunction

(if equipped)

- Service reminder

OTLA045297 OTL045299L

3-94

Convenient features of your vehicle

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the

settings of the instrument cluster,

doors, lamps, etc.

1. Driver Assistance

2. Door

3. Lights

4. Convenience

5. Service Interval

6. Other (Features)

7. Reset

The information provided may dif-

fer depending on which functions

are applicable to your vehicle.

1. Driver Assistance

• Lane Safety

- Lane Departure Warning/

Standard LKA/Active LKA

To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) System.

For more information, refer to the

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System" in chapter 5.

• Driver Attention Warning

- High Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity/

Off

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Driver Attention Warning.

For more information, refer to the

"Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System" in chapter 5.

• Smart Cruise Control

- Response (Fast/Normal/Slow)

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Smart Cruise Control system.

For more information, refer to the

"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter 5.

• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

To activate or deactivate the FCA

system.

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system" in chapter 5.

• Forward Collision Warning

- Early/Normal/Late

To adjust the initial warning alert

time for Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA) system.

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system" in chapter 5.

• Rear Collision Warning

- Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning

To activate or deactivate the Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision Warning

function.

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

Sound

To activate or deactivate the Blind-

Spot Collision Warning Sound.

For more information, refer to

"Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system" in chapter 5.

3-95

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Coasting Guide

- Coasting Guide: To activate or

deactivate the Coasting Guide sys-

tem.

- Sound: To activate or deactivate

the Coasting Guide system sound.

- Start Coasting (Early/Normal/Late)

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Coasting Guide.

For more information, refer to

"Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.

2. Door

• Auto Lock

- Disable: The auto door lock opera-

tion will be canceled.

- Enable on Speed: All doors will be

automatically locked when the vehi-

cle speed exceeds 9.3 mph (15

km/h).

- Enable on Shift: All doors will be

automatically locked if the shift

lever is shifted from the P (Park)

position to the R (Reverse), N

(Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

• Auto Unlock

- Disable:The auto door unlock oper-

ation will be canceled.

- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the

Engine Start/Stop button is set to

the OFF position.

- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked if the shift lever

is shifted to the P (Park) position.

• Two Press Unlock

- Off: The two press unlock function

will be deactivated. Therefore, all

doors will unlock if the door unlock

button is pressed.

- On: Only the driver's door will

unlock if the door unlock button is

pressed.When the door unlock but-

ton is pressed again within 4 sec-

onds, the remaining doors will

unlock.

3-96

Convenient features of your vehicle

3. Lights

• One Touch Turn Signal

- Off :The one touch turn signal func-

tion will be deactivated.

- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-

cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when

the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more information, refer to

"Lighting" in this chapter.

• Headlight Delay

To activate or deactivate the head-

lamp delay function.

For more information, refer to

"Lighting" in this chapter

4. Convenience

• Seat Easy Access

- Off: The seat easy access function

is deactivated.

- Normal/Extended: When you turn

off the engine, the driver's seat will

automatically move rearward short

(Normal) or long (Extended) for you

to enter or exit the vehicle more

comfortably.

For more information, refer to

"Driver Position Memory System"

in this chapter.

• Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless

charging system in the front seat.

For more information, refer to

"Wireless Charging System" in

this chapter.

• Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/

Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display

shows the selected Wiper/Light

mode whenever you change the

mode.

• Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear

position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position

will be displayed on the LCD display.

5. Service Interval

• Service Interval

To activate or deactivate the service

interval function.

If the service interval menu is acti-

vated, you may adjust the time and

distance.

Information

To use the service interval menu, con-

sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-97

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the service interval is activated and

the time and distance is adjusted,

messages are displayed in the fol-

lowing situations each time the vehi-

cle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the

remaining mileage and days to

service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and

days to service has been reached

or passed.

Information

If any of the following conditions

occur, the mileage and number of days

to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

6. Other (Features)

• Aux. Battery Saver+

To activate or deactivate the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function.

When activated, the high voltage bat-

tery is used to keep the 12V battery

charged.

For more information, refer to

"Hybrid System Overview" provid-

ed in the front of the owner’s man-

ual.

• Fuel Economy (Auto) Reset

- Off: The average fuel economy will

not reset automatically whenever

refueling.

- After Ignition:When the vehicle has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refueling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

• Fuel Economy Unit

To select the fuel economy unit.

(US gallon, UK gallon)

• Temperature Unit

To select the temperature unit.

(°C,°F)

• Tire Pressure Unit

To select the tire pressure unit.

(psi, kPa, bar)

• Language

To select language.

7. Reset

You can reset the menus in the User

Settings Mode.All menus in the User

Settings Mode are reset to factory

settings, except language and serv-

ice interval.

3-98

Convenient features of your vehicle

Modes Symbol Explanation

Trip Computer

This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, etc.

For more information, refer to "Trip Computer" in this chapter.

Turn By Turn (TBT) This mode displays the state of the navigation.

Assist

This mode displays the state of :

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system

- Smart Cruise Control

- Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system

- Tire pressure

For more information, refer to "Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) system", "Smart

Cruise Control System", "Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system" in chapter 5

and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in chapter 6.

User Settings In this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps, etc.

Warning

This mode displays warning messages related to the Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system, etc.

The information provided may differ depending on which functions are applicable to your vehicle.

LCD Display Modes (for cluster type B)

3-99

Convenient features of your vehicle

Edit settings after shifting to P/

Shift to P to edit settings

Either message appears if you try to

adjust the User Settings while driv-

ing.

For your safety, change the User

Settings after parking the vehicle,

applying the parking brake and mov-

ing the shift lever to P (Park).

Quick guide help

This mode provides quick guides for

the systems in the User Settings

mode.

Select an item, press and hold the

OK button.

For more information about each

system, refer to this Owner's

Manual.

Trip computer mode

The trip computer mode displays

information related to vehicle driving

parameters including fuel economy,

tripmeter information and vehicle

speed.

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

OAEE046191N

3-100

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn By Turn (TBT) mode

This mode displays the state of the

navigation.

Assist mode

SCC/LKA/DAW (if equipped)

This mode displays the state of the

Smart Cruise Control (SCC), Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) system and

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) sys-

tem.

For more information, refer to

each system in chapter 5.

Tire Pressure

This mode displays information relat-

ed to Tire Pressure.

For more information, refer to

"Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)" in chapter 6.

OAEE046505N OAEE046137R

OAE066030L

3-101

Convenient features of your vehicle

Warning mode

If one of followings occurs, warning

messages will be displayed on the

LCD display for several seconds.

- Lower washer fluid (if equipped)

- Exterior lamp malfunction

- Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system malfunction (if

equipped)

- Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) malfunction (if

equipped)

- High Beam Assist malfunction (if

equipped)

- Smart cruise control malfunction

- Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) malfunction

User settings mode

In this mode, you can change the

settings of the instrument cluster,

doors, lamps, etc.

1. Driver Assistance

2. Door

3. Lights

4. Convenience

5. Service Interval

6. Other (Features)

7. Reset

The information provided may dif-

fer depending on which functions

are applicable to your vehicle.

1. Driver Assistance

• Lane Safety

- Lane Departure Warning/

Standard LKA/Active LKA

To adjust the sensitivity of the Lane

Keeping Assist (LKA) System.

For more information, refer to the

"Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System" in chapter 5.

• Driver Attention Warning

- High Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity/

Off

To adjust the sensitivity of the Driver

Attention Warning.

For more information, refer to the

"Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System" in chapter 5.

• SCC Reaction

- Fast/Normal/Slow

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Smart Cruise Control system.

For more information, refer to the

"Smart Cruise Control" in chapter

3-102

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

To activate or deactivate the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

System.

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) System" in chapter

• Forward Collision Warning

- Early/Normal/Late

To adjust the initial warning alert

time for Forward Collision-

Avoidance Assist (FCA) System.

For more information, refer to

"Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) System" in chapter 5.

• Blind-Spot Collision Warning Sound

To activate or deactivate the Blind-

Spot Collision Warning Sound.

For more information, refer to

"Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system" in chapter 5.

• Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning

To activate or deactivate the Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision Warning sys-

tem.

For more information, refer to

"Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system" in chapter 5.

• Coasting Guide

- Coasting Guide: To activate or

deactivate the Coasting Guide sys-

tem.

- Sound: To activate or deactivate

the Coasting Guide system sound.

For more information, refer to

"Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.

• Start Coasting (Early/Normal/Late)

To adjust the sensitivity of the

Coasting Guide.

For more information, refer to

"Coasting Guide" in chapter 5.

2. Door

• Auto Lock

- Disable: The auto door lock opera-

tion will be canceled.

- Enable on Speed: All doors will be

automatically locked when the vehicle

speed exceeds 9.3 mph (15 km/h).

- Enable on Shift: All doors will be

automatically locked if the shift

lever is shifted from the P (Park)

position to the R (Reverse), N

(Neutral), or D (Drive) position.

• Auto Unlock

- Disable:The auto door unlock oper-

ation will be canceled.

- Vehicle Off: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked when the

Engine Star/Stop button is set to

the OFF position.

- On Shift to P: All doors will be auto-

matically unlocked if the shift lever

is shifted to the P (Park) position.

3-103

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Two Press Unlock

- Off: The two press unlock function

will be deactivated. Therefore, all

doors will unlock if the door unlock

button is pressed.

- On: Only the driver's door will

unlock if the door unlock button is

pressed. When the door unlock

button is pressed again within 4

seconds, the remaining doors will

unlock.

3. Lights

• One Touch Turn Signal

- Off:The one touch turn signal func-

tion will be deactivated.

- 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The turn signal indi-

cator will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when

the turn signal lever is moved slightly.

For more information, refer to

"Lighting" in this chapter.

• Headlight Delay

To activate or deactivate the head-

lamp delay function.

For more information, refer to

"Lighting" in this chapter

4. Convenience

• Seat Easy Access

- Off: The seat easy access function

is deactivated.

- Normal/Extended: When you turn

off the engine, the driver's seat will

automatically move rearward short

(Normal) or long (Extended) for you

to enter or exit the vehicle more

comfortably.

For more information, refer to

"Driver Position Memory System"

in this chapter.

• Wireless Charging System

To activate or deactivate the wireless

charging system in the front seat.

For more information, refer to

"Wireless Charging System" in

this chapter.

• Wiper/Lights Display

To activate or deactivate the Wiper/

Light mode.

When activated, the LCD display

shows the selected Wiper/Light

mode whenever you changed the

mode.

• Gear Position Pop-up

To activate or deactivate the gear

position pop-up.

When activated, the gear position

will be displayed on the LCD display.

5. Service Interval

• Service Interval

To activate or deactivate the service

interval function.

• Adjust Interval

If the service interval menu is acti-

vated, you may adjust the time and

distance.

Information

To use the service interval menu, con-

sult an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

3-104

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the service interval is activated and

the time and distance is adjusted,

messages are displayed in the fol-

lowing situations each time the vehi-

cle is turned on.

- Service in

: Displayed to inform the driver the

remaining mileage and days to

service.

- Service required

: Displayed when the mileage and

days to service has been reached

or passed.

Information

If any of the following conditions

occur, the mileage and number of days

to service may be incorrect.

- The battery cable is disconnected.

- The fuse switch is turned off.

- The battery is discharged.

6. Other (Features)

• Aux. Battery Saver+

To activate or deactivate the Aux.

Battery Saver+ function.

When activated, the high voltage bat-

tery is used to keep the 12V battery

charged.

For more information, refer to

"Hybrid System Overview" provid-

ed in the front of the owner's man-

ual.

• Fuel Economy (Auto) Reset

- Off: The average fuel economy will

not reset automatically whenever

refueling.

- After Ignition: When the engine has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refueling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

For more information, refer to

"Trip Computer" in this chapter.

• Fuel Economy Unit

To select the fuel economy unit.

(US gallon, UK gallon)

• Temperature Unit

To select the temperature unit.

(°C,°F)

• Tire Pressure Unit

To select the tire pressure unit.

(psi, kPa, bar)

• Language

To select language.

7. Reset

You can reset the menus in the User

Settings Mode.All menus in the User

Settings Mode are reset to factory

settings, except language and serv-

ice interval.

3-105

Convenient features of your vehicle

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

Information

Some driving information stored in the

trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Trip modes

To change the trip mode, toggle the

" , " switch on the steering wheel.

TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR ((HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Timer

• Range

(Only for cluster type A)

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Digital Speedometer

Driving Style

Energy Flow

Engine Coolant Temperature

(Only for cluster type B)

OAE046402

■■

3-106

Convenient features of your vehicle

Range/Average fuel economy/

Instant fuel economy

Range (1)

• The range is the estimated dis-

tance the vehicle can be driven

with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "----" as range.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the range function may not

operate correctly.

(Continued)

• The range may differ from the actu-

al driving distance as it is an esti-

mate of the available driving dis-

tance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons

(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The fuel economy and range may

vary significantly based on driving

conditions, driving habits, and condi-

tion of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is calcu-

lated by the total driving distance

and fuel consumption since the last

average fuel economy reset.

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the OK button on the

steering wheel for more than 1 sec-

ond when the average fuel economy

is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average

fuel economy, select between "After

Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the

User Settings mode on the LCD dis-

play.

- After Ignition:When the vehicle has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refueling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a min-

imum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since

the last ignition key cycle before the

average fuel economy will be recalcu-

lated.

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instanta-

neous fuel economy while driving.

OAEPH047208N/OAEPH047506N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-107

Convenient features of your vehicle

Tripmeter/Average vehicle speed/

Timer

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving

distance since the last tripmeter

reset.

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

OK button on the steering wheel

for more than 1 second when the

tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-

tance and driving time since the

last average vehicle speed reset.

• To reset the average vehicle speed,

press the OK button on the steering

wheel for more than 1 second when

the average vehicle speed is dis-

played.

Information

• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is less

than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the

driving time is less than 10 seconds,

after resetting the vehicle speed.

• The average vehicle speed will con-

tinue to be calculated and will start

to decrease if the vehicle is stopped

while the engine is still running (for

example, when the vehicle is in traf-

fic or stopped at a stop light.)

Timer (3)

• The timer is the total driving time

since the last timer reset.

• To reset the timer, press the OK

button on the steering wheel for

more than 1 second when the timer

is displayed.

Information

The timer will continue to be counted

while the engine is still running (for

example, when the vehicle is in traffic

or stopped at a stop light.)

OAE046503N/OAEE046191N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-108

Convenient features of your vehicle

Digital speedometer

This message shows the speed of

the vehicle.

Drive Info display

At the end of each driving cycle, the

Driving Info message is displayed.

This display shows the trip distance

(1), the average fuel economy (2),

and the remaining vehicle range (3).

This information is displayed for a

few seconds when you turn off the

ignition, and then goes off automati-

cally. The information is calculated

for each ignition cycle.

If the estimated remaining vehicle

range is below 1 mi. (1 km), the dis-

tance to empty will display as "----"

and a "Low Fuel" warning message

(4) will be displayed.

Information

If sunroof open warning is displayed

in the cluster, the Driving Info mes-

sage will not be displayed.

OTLA045193/OAEE046153R

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAEPH047194N

■ Type A

3-109

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driving style

The driving style is displayed when

you are driving in ECO mode.

When you drive in SPORT mode,

each driving category will be dis-

played with "--".

Energy flow

The hybrid system informs the driv-

ers its energy flow in various operat-

ing modes.While driving, the current

energy flow is specified in 11 modes.

For more information,refer to HEV

Energy Flow in the "Hybrid

System Overview" provided in

front of the owner's manual.

Engine coolant temperature

This gauge indicates the tempera-

ture of the engine coolant when the

engine is running.

When the gauge indicator gets out

of the normal range, toward the "H

(Hot)" position, it indicates over-

heating of the engine. It may dam-

age the engine.

Do not continue driving with the

overheated engine. For further

information, refer to "If the Engine

Overheats" in the chapter 6.

NOTICE

OAE046148L/OAE046124L

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L OAE046125L

■ Type B

3-110

Convenient features of your vehicle

The trip computer is a microcomput-

er-controlled driver information sys-

tem that displays information related

to driving.

Information

Some driving information stored in the

trip computer (for example Average

Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is

disconnected.

Trip modes

For cluster type A

For cluster type B

TTRRIIPP CCOOMMPPUUTTEERR ((PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Elapsed Time

• Distance to Empty

(Only for cluster type A)

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Digital Speedometer

Range

(Electric/Gasoline)

Driving Style

Energy Flow

• Tripmeter

• Average Vehicle Speed

• Elapsed Time

• Average Fuel Economy

• Instant Fuel Economy

Range

(Electric/Gasoline)

Digital Speedometer

Driving Style

Energy Flow

Engine Coolant Temperature

3-111

Convenient features of your vehicle

To change the trip mode, toggle the

" , " switch on the steering wheel.

Range

The range is the estimated distance

the vehicle can be driven with the

remaining fuel in the fuel tank

(Gasoline) and high-voltage (hybrid)

battery (Electric).

If the estimated distance is below 1

mph (1 km/h), the trip computer will

display "---" as the range.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the range function may not

operate correctly.

• The range may differ from the actu-

al driving distance as it is an esti-

mate of the available driving dis-

tance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons

(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The range may vary significantly

based on driving conditions, driving

habits, and condition of the vehicle.

OAE046402

OAEPH047534N/OAEPH047153N

■ Type A

■ Type B

■■

3-112

Convenient features of your vehicle

Range/Average fuel economy/

Instant fuel economy

Range (1)

• The range is the estimated dis-

tance the vehicle can be driven

with the remaining fuel.

• If the estimated distance is below

1 mi. (1 km), the trip computer will

display "----" as range.

Information

• If the vehicle is not on level ground

or the battery power has been inter-

rupted, the range function may not

operate correctly.

• The range may differ from the actu-

al driving distance as it is an esti-

mate of the available driving dis-

tance.

• The trip computer may not register

additional fuel if less than 1.6 gallons

(6 liters) of fuel are added to the vehi-

cle.

• The fuel economy and range may

vary significantly based on driving

conditions, driving habits, and condi-

tion of the vehicle.

Average Fuel Economy (2)

• The average fuel economy is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-

tance and fuel consumption since

the last average fuel economy

reset.

• The average fuel economy can be

reset both manually and automati-

cally.

Manual reset

To clear the average fuel economy

manually, press the OK button on the

steering wheel for more than 1 sec-

ond when the average fuel economy

is displayed.

Automatic reset

To automatically reset the average

fuel economy, select between "After

Ignition" or "After Refueling" in the

User Settings mode on the LCD dis-

play.

- After Ignition:When the vehicle has

been OFF for 4 hours or longer the

average fuel economy will reset

automatically.

- After Refueling: The average fuel

economy will reset automatically

after adding 1.6 gallons (6 liters) of

fuel or more and after driving speed

exceeds 1 mph (1 km/h).

Information

The vehicle must be driven for a mini-

mum of 0.19 miles (300 meters) since the

last ignition key cycle before the average

fuel economy will be recalculated.

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAEPH047208N/OAEPH047506N

3-113

Convenient features of your vehicle

Instant Fuel Economy (3)

• This mode displays the instanta-

neous fuel economy while driving.

Tripmeter/Average vehicle

speed/Timer

Tripmeter (1)

• The tripmeter is the total driving

distance since the last tripmeter

reset.

• To reset the tripmeter, press the

OK button on the steering wheel

for more than 1 second when the

tripmeter is displayed.

Average Vehicle Speed (2)

• The average vehicle speed is cal-

culated by the total driving dis-

tance and driving time since the

last average vehicle speed reset.

• To reset the average vehicle speed,

press the OK button on the steering

wheel for more than 1 second when

the average vehicle speed is dis-

played.

Information

• The average vehicle speed is not dis-

played if the driving distance is less

than 0.19 miles (300 meters) or the

driving time is less than 10 seconds,

after resetting the vehicle speed.

• The average vehicle speed will con-

tinue to be calculated and will start

to decrease if the vehicle is stopped

while the engine is still running (for

example, when the vehicle is in traf-

fic or stopped at a stop light.)

OAE046503N/OAEE046191N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-114

Convenient features of your vehicle

Timer (3)

• The timer is the total driving time

since the last timer reset.

• To reset the timer, press the OK

button on the steering wheel for

more than 1 second when the timer

is displayed.

Information

The timer will continue to be counted

while the engine is still running (for

example, when the vehicle is in traffic

or stopped at a stop light.)

Digital speedometer

This message shows the speed of

the vehicle.

Drive Info display

At the end of each driving cycle, the

Driving Info message is displayed.

This display shows the trip distance

(1), average fuel economy (2), remain-

ing vehicle range (3), and charging

status (4).

This information is displayed for a few

seconds when you turn off the vehicle,

and then goes off automatically. The

information is calculated for each time

the vehicle is turned on.

Information

If sunroof open warning is displayed

in the cluster, the Driving Info mes-

sage will not be displayed.

OTLA045193/OAEE046153R

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAEPH047195N/OAEPH047538N

■ Type A

■ Type B

3-115

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driving style

The driving style is displayed when

you are driving in ECO mode.

When you drive in SPORT mode,

each driving category will be dis-

played with "--".

Energy flow

The hybrid system informs the driv-

ers its energy flow in various operat-

ing modes.While driving, the current

energy flow is specified in 11 modes.

For more information, refer to HEV

Energy Flow in the "Hybrid System

Overview" provided in front of the

owner's manual.

Engine coolant temperature

This gauge indicates the tempera-

ture of the engine coolant when the

engine is running.

When the gauge indicator gets out

of the normal range, toward the "H

(Hot)" position, it indicates over-

heating of the engine. It may dam-

age the engine.

Do not continue driving with the

overheated engine. For further

information, refer to "If the Engine

Overheats" in the chapter 6.

NOTICE

OAE046148L/OAE046124L

■ Type A

■ Type B

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046149L/OAEQ046001L OAE046125L

■ Type B

3-116

Convenient features of your vehicle

LLIIGGHHTTIINNGG

Exterior Lights

Lighting control

To operate the lights, turn the knob at

the end of the control lever to one of

the following positions:

1. DRL (Daytime Running Lights)

OFF position

2. AUTO light position

3. Parking lamp position

4. Headlamp position

Daytime running light (DRL)

(if equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

can make it easier for others to see

the front of your vehicle during the

day, especially after dawn and before

sunset.

The DRL system will turn the dedi-

cated lamp OFF when :

• The light switch is in the DRL OFF

position.

• The headlamps are ON.

• The parking lamps are ON.

• The vehicle is turned off.

AUTO light position (if equipped)

The parking lamp and headlamp will

be turned ON or OFF automatically

depending on the amount of light

outside the vehicle.

Even with the AUTO light feature in

operation, it is recommended to

manually turn ON the lamps when

driving at night or in a fog, driving in

the rain, or when you enter dark

areas, such as tunnels and parking

facilities.

OLF044084N

OAEE046510N

3-117

Convenient features of your vehicle

• Do not cover or spill anything on

the sensor (1) located in front of

the instrument panel.

• Do not clean the sensor using a

window cleaner, the cleanser may

leave a light film which could

interfere with sensor operation.

• If your vehicle has window tint

or other types of metallic coat-

ing on the front windshield, the

AUTO light system may not work

properly.

Parking lamp position ( )

The parking lamp, license plate lamp

and instrument panel lamp are turned

ON.

Headlamp position ( )

The headlamp, parking lamp, license

plate lamp and instrument panel

lamp are turned ON.

Information

The Engine Start/Stop button must be

in the ON position to turn on the

headlamp.

NOTICE

OLF044086N OLF044087N

3-118

Convenient features of your vehicle

High beam operation

To turn on the high beam headlamp,

push the lever away from you. The

lever will return to its original position.

The high beam indicator will light

when the headlamp high beams are

switched on.

To turn off the high beam headlamp,

pull the lever towards you. The low

beams will turn on.

To flash the high beam headlamp,

pull the lever towards you, then

release the lever. The high beams

will remain ON as long as you hold

the lever towards you.

High Beam Assist (HBA)

(if equipped)

The High Beam Assist (HBA) is a

system that automatically adjusts the

headlamp range (switches between

high beam and low beam) according

to the brightness of other vehicles

and road conditions.

Operating condition

1. Place the headlamp switch in the

AUTO position.

2.Turn on the high beam by pushing

the lever away from you.

The High Beam Assist (HBA) ( )

indicator will illuminate.

Do not use high beam when there

are other vehicles approaching

you. Using high beam could

obstruct the other driver's vision.

WARNING

OLF044089N

OLF044088N

OAE048581L

3-119

Convenient features of your vehicle

3.The High Beam Assist (HBA) will

turn on when vehicle speed is

above 25 mph (40 km/h).

• If the headlamp switch is pushed

away when the High Beam Assist

(HBA) is operating, the High Beam

Assist (HBA) will turn off and the

high beam will be on continuously.

• If the headlamp switch is pulled

towards you when the high beam

is off, the high beam will turn on

without the High Beam Assist

(HBA) canceled. When you let go

of the light switch, the lever will

move to the middle and the high

beam will turn off.

• If the headlamp switch is pulled

towards you when the high beam

is on by the High Beam Assist

(HBA), the low beam will be on

and the High Beam Assist (HBA)

will turn off.

• If the headlamp switch is placed

to the headlamp ON position, the

High Beam Assist (HBA) will turn

off and the low beam will be on

continuously.

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is

operating, the high beam switches to

low beamif any of the following condi-

tions occur :

- When the headlamp of an on-com-

ing vehicle is detected.

- When the tail lamp of a vehicle in

front is detected.

- When the headlamp or tail lamp of

a motorcycle or a bicycle is detect-

ed.

- When the surrounding ambient light

is bright enough that high beams

are not required.

- When streetlights or other lights

are detected.

- When the headlamp switch is not in

the AUTO position.

- When the High Beam Assist (HBA)

is off.

- When vehicle speed is below 15 mph

(24 km/h).

Warning light and message

When the High Beam Assist (HBA) is

not working properly, the Check High

Beam Assist warning message will

come on for a few second. After the

message disappears, the master

warning light ( ) will illuminate.Take

your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the system

checked.

OAE058237L

3-120

Convenient features of your vehicle

The driver must be cautious in

the below situations may not

work properly when recognition

of light from on-coming or front

vehicle is poor or limited:



When the light from on-com-

ing or front vehicle is poor

• When the light from the on-

coming or front vehicle is not

detected because of lamp

damage, hidden from sight,

etc.

• When the lamp of the on-com-

ing or front vehicle is covered

with dust, snow or water.

• When the front vehicle's head-

lamps are off but the fog

lamps on and etc.

(Continued)



When external condition is

intervened

• When there is a similar shape

lamp with the front vehicle's

lamps.

• When the headlamp is not

repaired or replaced at an

authorized dealer.

• When headlamp aiming is not

properly adjusted.

• When driving on a narrow

curved road, rough road,

downhill or uphill.

• When only part of the vehicle

in front is visible on a cross-

road or curved road.

• When there is a traffic light,

reflecting sign, flashing sign

or mirror ahead.

• When there is a temporary

reflector or flash ahead (con-

struction area).

• When the road conditions are

bad such as being wet, iced or

covered with snow.

(Continued)

• When a vehicle suddenly

appears from a curve.

• When the vehicle is tilted from

a flat tire or being towed.

• When the LKA (Lane Keeping

Assist) system failure indica-

tor (yellow) illuminates (if

equipped) and etc.



When front visibility is poor

• When the lamp of the on-com-

ing or front vehicle is covered

with dust, snow or water.

• When the light from the on-

coming or front vehicle is not

detected because of exhaust

fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc.

• When the front window is cov-

ered with foreign matters.

• When it is hard to see

because of fog, heavy rain or

snow and etc.

(Continued)

WARNING

3-121

Convenient features of your vehicle

Turn signals and lane change

signals

To signal a turn, push down on the

lever for a left turn or up for a right

turn in position (A).

If an indicator stays on and does not

flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of

the turn signal bulbs may be burned

out and will require replacement.

(Continued)

• Do not disassemble a front

view camera temporarily for

tinted window or attaching

any types of coatings and

accessories. If you disassem-

ble the camera and assemble

it again, take your vehicle to

an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er and have the system

checked to need a calibration.

• When you replace or reinstall

the windshield glass, front

view camera, take your vehi-

cle to an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and have the system

checked.

• Be careful that water doesn’t

get into the High Beam Assist

unit and do not remove or

damage related parts of the

High Beam Assist system.

• Do not place objects on the

crash pad that reflect light

such as mirrors, white paper,

etc.The system may malfunc-

tion if sunlight is reflected.

(Continued)

• At times, the High Beam

Assist may not work properly.

The system is for your con-

venience only. It is the respon-

sibility of the driver for safe

driving practices and always

check the road conditions for

your safety.

• When the system does not

operate normally, change the

lamp position manually

between the high beam and

low beam.

OLF044091N

3-122

Convenient features of your vehicle

One-touch turn signal function

To activate the One Touch Turn

Signal function, push the turn signal

lever up or down to position (B) and

then release it.

The lane change signals will blink 3,

5 or 7 times.

You can activate or deactivate the

One Touch Turn Signal function or

choose the number of blinks (3, 5, or

7) from the User Settings mode

(Light) on the LCD display.

For more information, refer to the

"LCD Display" section in this

chapter.

Battery saver function

The purpose of this feature is to pre-

vent the battery from being dis-

charged. The system automatically

turns off the parking lamp when the

driver turns the vehicle off and opens

the driver-side door.

With this feature, the parking lamps

will turn off automatically if the driver

parks on the side of road at night.

If necessary, to keep the lamps on

when the vehicle is turned off, per-

form the following:

1) Open the driver-side door.

2) Turn the parking lamps OFF and

ON again using the light switch on

the steering column.

Headlamp delay function

(if equipped)

If the Engine Start/Stop button is

placed in the ACC position or the

OFF position with the headlamps

ON, the headlamps (and/or parking

lamps) remain on for about 5 min-

utes. However, if the driver's door is

opened and closed, the headlights

are turned off after 15 seconds. Also,

with the vehicle off if the driver's door

is opened and closed, the head-

lamps (and/or parking lamps) are

turned off after 15 seconds.

The headlamps (and/or parking

lamps) can be turned off by pressing

the lock button on the smart key

twice or turning the light switch to the

OFF or AUTO position.

You can activate or deactivate the

Headlamp Delay function from the

User Settings mode (Light) on the

LCD display.

For more information, refer to the

"LCD Display" section in this

chapter.

3-123

Convenient features of your vehicle

If the driver gets out of the vehicle

through other doors (except dri-

ver's door), the battery saver func-

tion does not operate and the

headlamp delay function does not

turn off automatically.Therefore, It

causes the battery to be dis-

charged. In this case, make sure

to turn off the lamp before getting

out of the vehicle.

AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting

System) a.k.a. DBL (Dynamic

Bending Light) (if equipped)

Adaptive front lighting system uses

the steering angle and vehicle

speed, to keep your field of vision

wide by swiveling and leveling the

headlamp.

Change the switch to the AUTO posi-

tion when the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode.The adaptive front light-

ing system will operate when the

headlamp is ON. To turn off the

AFLS, change the switch to other

positions. After turning the AFLS off,

headlamp swiveling no longer

occurs, but leveling operates contin-

uously.

If the AFLS malfunction indicator

comes on, the AFLS is not working

properly. Drive to the nearest safe

location and restart the vehicle (

indicator ON). If the indicator contin-

uously remains on, have the system

be checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

OAEE046510N

3-124

Convenient features of your vehicle

Interior Lights

Do not use the interior lights for

extended periods when the vehi-

cle is turned off or the battery will

discharge.

Interior lamp AUTO cut

The interior lamps will automatically

go off approximately 20 minutes after

the vehicle is turned off and the

doors are closed.If a door is opened,

the lamp will go off 40 minutes after

the vehicle is turned off. If the doors

are locked by the smart key and the

vehicle enters the armed stage of the

theft alarm system, the lamps will go

off five seconds later.

Front lamps

(1) Front Map Lamp

(2) Front Door Lamp

(3) Front Room Lamp ON

(4) Front Room Lamp OFF

Front Map Lamp :

Press either lenses to turn the map

lamp on or off. This light produces a

spot beam for convenient use as a

map lamp at night or as a personal

lamp for the driver and the front pas-

senger.

Front Door Lamp ( ):

The front or rear room lamps come on

when the front or rear doors are

opened. When doors are unlocked by

the smart key, the front and rear lamps

come on for approximately 30 seconds

as long as any door is not opened.The

front and rear room lamps go out grad-

ually after approximately 30 seconds

when the door is closed. However, if

the Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position or all doors are locked, the

front and rear lamps will turn off. If a

door is opened with the Engine

Start/Stop button in the ACC position

or the OFF position, the front and rear

lamps stay on for about 20 minutes.

Front room lamp

•:

Press the button to turn ON the

room lamp for the front/rear seats.

•:

Press the button to turn OFF the

room lamp for the front/rear seats

regardless of front or rear door open

position.

NOTICE

Do not use the interior lights

when driving in the dark.The inte-

rior lights may obscure your view

and cause an accident.

WARNING

OAD045405

3-125

Convenient features of your vehicle

Rear lamp

Rear Room Lamp ( ):

Press this switch to turn the room

lamp on and off.

Luggage compartment lamp

The luggage compartment lamp

comes on when the liftgate is

opened.

The luggage compartment lamp

comes on as long as the liftgate is

open. To prevent unnecessary

charging system drain, close the

liftgate securely after using the

luggage compartment.

Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped)

Push the switch to turn the light on or

off.

• :The lamp will turn on if this

button is pressed.

• :The lamp will turn off if this

button is pressed.

Always have the switch in the off

position when the vanity mirror

lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor

is closed without the lamp off, it

may discharge the battery or dam-

age the sunvisor.

NOTICE

■ Type A

■ Type B

OAE046445

OAEE046421

OAE046418N OAD045410

3-126

Convenient features of your vehicle

Welcome System (if equipped)

Welcome light (if equipped)

Door handle lamp (if equipped)

When all the doors (and liftgate) are

closed and locked, the door handle

lamp will come on for about 15 sec-

onds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key.

• When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed with the

smart key in possession.

• When the vehicle is approached

with the smart key in possession.

Headlamp and parking lamp

When the headlamp (with the lamp

switch in the headlamp or AUTO

position) is on and all doors (and

trunk) are locked and closed, the

parking lamp and headlamp will

come on for 15 seconds when the

door unlock button is pressed on the

smart key.

At this time, if you press the door lock

or unlock button on the smart key the

parking lamp and headlamp will turn

off immediately.

You can activate or deactivate the

Welcome Light from the User

Settings mode on the LCD display.

For more details, refer to "LCD

Display" in this chapter.

Interior lamp

When the interior lamp switch is in

the DOOR position and all doors (and

tailgate) are closed and locked, the

room lamp will come on for 30 sec-

onds if any of the below is performed.

• When the door unlock button is

pressed on the smart key.

• When the button of the outside

door handle is pressed.

At this time, if you press the door lock

or unlock button, the room lamp will

turn off immediately.

OAE046409N

3-127

Convenient features of your vehicle

A :Wiper speed control

· MIST – Single wipe

· OFF – Off

· INT – Intermittent wipe

· LO – Low wiper speed

· HI – High wiper speed

B : Intermittent control wipe time

adjustment

C :Wash with brief wipes

Windshield Wipers

Operates as follows when the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion.

MIST : For a single wiping cycle,

push the lever upward and

release.The wipers will oper-

ate continuously if the lever is

held in this position.

OFF : Wiper is not in operation.

INT : Wiper operates intermittently at

the same wiping intervals. To

vary the speed setting, move

the speed control lever.The top

most setting will run the wipers

most frequently (for more rain).

The bottom setting will run the

wipers the least frequently (for

less rain).

LO :The wiper runs at a lower speed.

HI : The wiper runs at a higher speed.

Information

If there is heavy accumulation of snow

or ice on the windshield, defrost the

windshield for about 10 minutes, or

until the snow and/or ice is removed

before using the windshield wipers to

ensure proper operation.

If you do not remove the snow and/or

ice before using the wiper and washer,

it may damage the wiper and washer

system.

WWIIPPEERRSS AANNDD WWAASSHHEERRSS

OLF044278

3-128

Convenient features of your vehicle

Windshield Washers

In the OFF position, pull the lever

gently toward you to spray washer

fluid on the windshield and to run the

wipers 1-3 cycles. The spray and

wiper operation will continue until you

release the lever. If the washer does

not work, you may need to add wash-

er fluid to the washer fluid reservoir.

• To prevent possible damage to

the washer pump, do not oper-

ate the washer when the fluid

reservoir is empty.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers or windshield, do not

operate the wipers when the

windshield is dry.

• To prevent damage to the wiper

arms and other components, do

not attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• To prevent possible damage to

the wipers and washer system,

use anti-freezing washer fluids

in the winter season or cold

weather.

NOTICE

When the outside temperature

is below freezing, ALWAYS

warm the windshield using the

defroster to help prevent the

washer fluid from freezing on

the windshield and obscuring

your vision which could result

in an accident and serious

injury or death.

WARNING

OLF044095N

3-129

Convenient features of your vehicle

DDRRIIVVEERR AASSSSIISSTT SSYYSSTTEEMM

Rear View Monitor

The Rear View Monitor will activate

when the vehicle is in the ready ( )

mode and when you shift to the R

(Reverse) position.

This is a supplemental system that

helps provide a view of the area

behind the vehicle through the A/V

display while the vehicle is in the R

(Reverse) position.

Always keep the monitor lens

clean. The monitor may not work

normally if the lens is covered

with dirt, water or snow.

NOTICE

The Rear View Monitor is not a

safety device. It only serves to

assist the driver in identifying

objects directly behind the mid-

dle of the vehicle. The monitor

does NOT cover the complete

area behind the vehicle.

WARNING

• Never rely solely on the Rear

View Monitor when backing-

up.

• ALWAYS look around your

vehicle to make sure there are

no objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any

direction to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention

when the vehicle is driven

close to objects, particularly

pedestrians, and especially

children.

WARNING

OAE046407N

OAE046406

3-130

Convenient features of your vehicle

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System (if equipped)

The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System assists the driver

during reverse movement of the vehi-

cle by chiming if any object is sensed

within approximately 50 in (120 cm)

behind the vehicle.

This system is a supplemental sys-

tem that senses objects within the

range and location of the sensors, it

cannot detect objects in other areas

where sensors are not installed.

Operation of the Parking

Distance Warning (Reverse)

System

Operating condition

• This system will activate when

backing up. However, if the vehicle

speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h), the

system may not detect objects.

• If the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph

(10 km/h), the system will not warn

you even though objects are

detected.

• When more than two objects are

sensed at the same time, the clos-

est one will be recognized first.

OAE046403

Sensor

• ALWAYS look around your vehi-

cle to make sure there are not

any objects or obstacles before

moving the vehicle in any direc-

tion to prevent a collision.

• Always pay close attention

when the vehicle is driven close

to objects,particularly pedestri-

ans, and especially children.

• Be aware that some objects

may not be visible on the

screen or be detected by the

sensors, due to the objects

distance, size or material, all of

which can limit the effective-

ness of the sensor.

WARNING

3-131

Convenient features of your vehicle

Types of warning sound and indicator

Non-operational conditions of

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System

The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System may not operate

normally when:

• Moisture is frozen to the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with dirt or

debris such as snow or ice, or the

sensor cover is blocked.

There is a possibility of the Rear

Parking Distance Warning (Reverse)

System malfunction when:

• Driving on uneven road surfaces

such as unpaved roads, gravel,

bumps, or gradient.

• Objects generating excessive noise

such as vehicle horns, loud motor-

cycle engines, or truck air brakes

can interfere with the sensor.

• Heavy rain or water spray is present.

• Wireless transmitters or mobile

phones are present near the sensor.

• The sensor is covered with snow.

• Any non-factory equipment or

accessories have been installed, or

if the vehicle bumper height or sen-

sor installation has been modified.

Types of warning sound Indicator

When an object is approximately 24 to 47 in (60 to 120

cm) from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps inter-

mittently.

When an object is approximately 12 to 24 in (30 to 60 cm)

from the rear bumper, the warning sound beeps more fre-

quently.

When an object is within 12 in (30 cm) from the rear

bumper, the warning sound beeps continuously.

• The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors sta-

tus. If the indicator blinks, have your vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

• If the audible warning does not sound or if the buzzer sounds intermit-

tently when shifting into R (Reverse) position, this may indicate a mal-

function with the Parking Distance Warning (Reverse) System. If this

occurs, have your vehicle checked by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer as

soon as possible.

NOTICE

3-132

Convenient features of your vehicle

Detecting range may decrease when:

• Outside air temperature is extreme-

ly hot or cold.

• Undetectable objects smaller than

40 inches (1 m) and narrower than

6 inches (14 cm) in diameter.

The following objects may not be

recognized by the sensor:

• Sharp or slim objects such as

ropes, chains or small poles.

• Objects, which tend to absorb sen-

sor frequency such as clothes,

spongy material or snow.

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System precautions

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System may not operate

consistently in some circum-

stances depending on the speed of

the vehicle and the shapes of the

objects detected.

• The Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System may malfunction

if the vehicle bumper height or sen-

sor installation has been modified

or damaged. Any non-factory

installed equipment or accessories

may also interfere with the sensor

performance.

• The sensor may not recognize

objects less than 15 in. (40 cm)

from the sensor, or it may sense an

incorrect distance. Use caution.

• When the sensor is blocked with

snow, dirt, debris, or ice, the

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System may be inopera-

tive until the snow or ice melts, or

the debris is removed. Use a soft

cloth to wipe debris away from the

sensor.

• Do not push, scratch or strike the

sensor with any hard objects that

could damage the surface of the

sensor. Sensor damage could occur.

• Do not spray the sensors or its sur-

rounding area directly with a high

pressure washer. Doing so may

cause the sensors to fail to operate

normally.

Your new vehicle warranty does

not cover any accidents or dam-

age to the vehicle or injuries to

its occupants related to a

Parking Distance Warning

(Reverse) System. Always drive

safely and cautiously.

WARNING

3-133

Convenient features of your vehicle

AAUUTTOOMMAATTIICC CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAE046500

1. Driver's temperature control knob

2. Passenger’s temperature control knob

3. AUTO (automatic control) button

4. OFF button

5. Front windshield defrost button

6. Rear window defrost button

7. Air conditioning button

8. Air intake control button

9. Fan speed control button

10. Mode selection button

11. Driver only button

12. SYNC button

13. Climate control information screen

3-134

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Heating and Air

Conditioning

The Automatic Climate Control

System is controlled by setting the

desired temperature.

1. Press the AUTO button.

The modes, fan speeds, air intake

and air-conditioning will be controlled

automatically by the temperature set-

ting you select.

2.Turn the temperature control knob

to the desired temperature. If the

temperature is set to the lowest

setting (Lo), the air conditioning

system will operate continuously.

After the interior has cooled suffi-

ciently, adjust the knob to a higher

temperature set point whenever

possible.

To turn the automatic operation off,

select any button of the following:

- Mode selection button

- Front windshield defroster button

(Press the button one more time

to deselect the front windshield

defroster function. The 'AUTO'

sign will illuminate on the infor-

mation screen once again.)

- Fan speed control button

The selected function will be con-

trolled manually while other functions

operate automatically.

For your convenience and to improve

the effectiveness of the climate con-

trol, use the AUTO button and set the

temperature to 73°F (23°C).

OAE046303

OAE046302

3-135

Convenient features of your vehicle

Never place anything near the

sensor to ensure better control of

the heating and cooling system.

Manual Heating and Air

Conditioning

The heating and cooling system can

be controlled manually by pushing

buttons other than the AUTO button.

In this case, the system works

sequentially according to the order of

buttons selected.

When pressing any button except the

AUTO button while using automatic

operation, the functions not selected

will be controlled automatically.

1. Start the vehicle ( indicator

ON).

2. Set the mode to the desired posi-

tion.

To improve the effectiveness of

heating and cooling, select:

- Heating:

- Cooling:

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

5. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

6. If air conditioning is desired, turn

the air conditioning system on.

7. Press the AUTO button to convert

to full automatic control of the sys-

tem.

NOTICE

OAE046304N

3-136

Convenient features of your vehicle

Mode selection

The air flow outlet direction is cycled

as follows:

Face-Level (B, D, F)

Air flow is directed toward the upper

body and face. Additionally, each

outlet can be controlled to direct the

air discharged from the outlet.

Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F)

Air flow is directed towards the face

and the floor.

The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the

ventilation system.

OAE046306N/OAE046305

■ MODE DOWN ( )

■ MODE UP ( )

3-137

Convenient features of your vehicle

Floor & Defrost

(A, C, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor and the windshield with a small

amount directed to the side window

defrosters.

Floor-Level (A, C, E, F)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

floor, with a small amount of the air

being directed to the windshield and

side window defrosters.

Defrost-Level (A)

Most of the air flow is directed to the

windshield with a small amount of air

directed to the side window defrosters.

Interior panel vents

The outlet vents can be opened or

closed ( ) using the vent control

lever.

Also, you can adjust the direction of

air delivered from these vents using

the vent control lever as shown.

OAE046307

OAE046308

OAE046309

■ Front

■ Rear

3-138

Convenient features of your vehicle

Temperature control

Turn the knob to the right to increase

the temperature.Turn the knob to the

left to decrease temperature.

The temperature will increase or

decrease by 1°F/0.5°C.

Temperature conversion

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, the temperature mode

display will reset to Fahrenheit.

To change the temperature unit from

°F to °C or °C to °F:

- On the instrument cluster, go to

User Settings Mode ➝ Other

(Features) ➝ Temperature Unit.

- Press and hold the AUTO and OFF

buttons on the climate control unit

for 3 seconds.

The temperature unit on both on the

cluster LCD display and climate con-

trol information screen will change.

Sync button

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature equally

• Press the "SYNC" button to oper-

ate the driver and passenger side

temperature equally.

The passenger side temperature

will be set to the same temperature

as the driver side temperature.

• Turn the left temperature control

knob. The driver and passenger

side temperature will be adjusted

equally.

■ Driver’s side ■ Front passenger’s side

OAE046310 OAE046311

3-139

Convenient features of your vehicle

Adjusting the driver and passenger

side temperature individually

Press the "SYNC" button again to

operate the driver and passenger

side temperature individually. The

button indicator will turn off.

Air intake control

This button is used to select the out-

side (fresh) air position or recirculat-

ed air position.

Recirculated air position

With the recirculated air

position selected, air

from the passenger

compartment will be

drawn through the heat-

ing system and heated

or cooled according to

the function selected.

Outside (fresh) air position

With the outside (fresh)

air position selected, air

enters the vehicle from

outside and is heated or

cooled according to the

function selected.

Information

Using the system in the fresh air posi-

tion is recommended.

Prolonged operation of the heater in

the recirculated air position (without

air conditioning selected) can cause

fogging of the windshield and side

windows and the air within the pas-

senger compartment will become

stale.

In addition, prolonged use of the air

conditioning with the recirculated air

position selected will result in exces-

sively dry air in the passenger com-

partment.

OAE046312

3-140

Convenient features of your vehicle

Fan speed control

The fan speed can be set as desired

by pushing the fan speed control but-

ton.

More air is delivered with higher fan

speeds.

Pressing the OFF button turns off the

fan.

Information

For better voice recognition, fan speed

may automatically slow down for a

couple of minutes when you activate

voice recognition or hands free.

Operating the fan when the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ON position could cause the bat-

tery to discharge. Operate the fan

when the vehicle is in the ready

( ) mode.

NOTICE

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in

the recirculated air position

can cause drowsiness or

sleepiness, that may cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident. Set the air

intake control to the outside

(fresh) air position as much as

possible while driving.

• Continued use of the climate

control system operation in

the recirculated air position

(without the air conditioning

selected) may allow humidity

to increase inside the vehicle

which may fog the glass and

obscure visibility.

• Do not sleep in a vehicle with

the air conditioning or heating

system on. It may cause seri-

ous injury or death due to a

drop in the oxygen level

and/or body temperature.

WARNING

OAE046313

3-141

Convenient features of your vehicle

Driver only

If you press the DRIVER ONLY but-

ton( ) and the indicator light

illuminates, air mostly blows in the

direction of the driver’s seat.

However, some of the air may come

out of other seating position ducts to

keep indoor air pleasant.

If you use the button with no passen-

ger in the front passenger seat, ener-

gy consumption will be reduced.

DRIVER ONLY button will be turned

off under the following conditions:

1) Defrost on (the DRIVER ONLY

button indicator is not turned off)

2) DRIVER ONLY button re-push

Air conditioning

Push the A/C button to manually turn

the system on (indicator light will illu-

minate) and off.

OFF mode

Push the OFF button to turn the cli-

mate control system off.

You can still operate the mode and

air intake buttons as long as the

Engine Start/ Stop button is in the

ON position.

DRIVER

ONLY

OAE046315OAE046314 OAE046316

3-142

Convenient features of your vehicle

System Operation

Ventilation

1. Select the Face Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

Heating

1. Select the Floor Level mode.

2. Set the air intake control to the

outside (fresh) air position.

3. Set the temperature control to the

desired position.

4. Set the fan speed control to the

desired speed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired,

turn the air conditioning system on.

If the windshield fogs up, select the

Floor & Defrost mode or press

the Front Defrost mode.

Operation Tips

• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes

from entering the car through the

ventilation system, temporarily set

the air intake control to the recircu-

lated air position. Return the con-

trol to the fresh air position when

the irritation has passed. This will

help keep the driver alert and com-

fortable.

• To prevent the inside of the wind-

shield from fogging, set the air

intake control to the fresh air posi-

tion and fan speed to the desired

position, turn on the air conditioning

system, and adjust the temperature

control to the desired temperature.

Air conditioning

All HYUNDAI Air Conditioning

Systems are filled with environmen-

tally friendly R-134a refrigerant.

1. Start the vehicle.

2. Push the air conditioning button.

3. Set the mode to the Face Level

mode.

4. Set the air intake control to the

recirculated air position. However,

prolonged operation of the recircu-

lated air position will excessively

dry the air.In this case, change the

air position.

5. Adjust the fan speed control and

temperature control to maintain

maximum comfort.

When maximum cooling is desired,

set the temperature control to the

extreme left position then set the fan

speed control to the highest speed.

3-143

Convenient features of your vehicle

Air conditioning system operation

tips

• If the vehicle has been parked in

direct sunlight during hot weather,

open the windows for a short time

to let the hot air inside the vehicle

escape.

• After sufficient cooling has been

achieved, switch back from the

recirculated air to the fresh outside

air position.

• To help reduce moisture inside of

the windows on rainy or humid

days, decrease the humidity inside

the vehicle by operating the air

conditioning system with the win-

dows and sunroof closed.

• Use the air conditioning system

every month only for a few minutes

to ensure maximum system per-

formance.

• If you operate air conditioner

excessively, the difference between

the temperature of the outside air

and that of the windshield could

cause the outer surface of the

windshield to fog up, causing loss

of visibility. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button to

the position and fan speed

control to the lower speed.

System Maintenance

Climate control air filter

This filter is installed behind the glove

box. It filters the dust or other pollu-

tants that enter the vehicle through the

heating and air conditioning system.

Have the climate control air filter be

replaced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer according to the maintenance

schedule. If the vehicle is being driv-

en in severe conditions such as dusty

or rough roads, more frequent air

conditioner filter inspections and

changes are required.

If the air flow rate suddenly decreas-

es, the system should be checked at

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

1LDA5047

Outside air

Recirculated

air

Climate control

air filter

Blower

Evaporator

core

Heater core

3-144

Convenient features of your vehicle

Checking the amount of air

conditioner refrigerant and

compressor lubricant

When the amount of refrigerant is

low, the performance of the air con-

ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also

reduces the performance of the air

conditioning system.

Therefore, if abnormal operation is

found, have the system inspected by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

It is important that the correct

type and amount of oil and refrig-

erant is used. Otherwise, damage

to the compressor and abnormal

system operation may occur.

The air conditioning system should

be serviced by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Air conditioning refrigerant label

The actual Air Conditioning refriger-

ant label in the vehicle may differ

from the illustration.

Each symbols and specification on

air conditioning refrigerant label

means as below :

1. Classification of refrigerant

2. Amount of refrigerant

3. Classification of Compressor lubri-

cant

Refer to chapter 8 for more detail

location of the air conditioning refrig-

erant label.

NOTICE

Because the refriger-

ant is at very high

pressure, the air con-

ditioning system

should only be serv-

iced by trained and certified

technicians. It is important that

the correct type and amount of

oil and refrigerant is used, oth-

erwise damage to the vehicle

and personal injury may occur.

WARNING

POE

OLFP046583N

■ Example

3-145

Convenient features of your vehicle

WWIINNDDSSHHIIEELLDD DDEEFFRROOSSTTIINNGG AANNDD DDEEFFOOGGGGIINNGG

Windshield heating

Do not use the or posi-

tion during cooling operation in

extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temper-

ature of the outside air and that

of the windshield could cause

the outer surface of the wind-

shield to fog up, causing loss of

visibility could cause an acci-

dent resulting in serious injury

or death. In this case, set the

mode selection knob or button

to the position and fan

speed control knob or button to

a lower speed.

WARNING

• For maximum defrosting, set the

temperature control to the extreme

right/hot position and the fan speed

control to the highest speed.

• If warm air to the floor is desired

while defrosting or defogging, set the

mode to the floor-defrost position.

• Before driving, clear all snow and

ice from the windshield, rear win-

dow, side view mirrors, and all side

windows.

• Clear all snow and ice from the

hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to

improve heater and defroster effi-

ciency and to reduce the probability

of fogging up the inside of the wind-

shield.

Information

If the engine temperature is still cold

after starting, then a brief engine

warm up period may be required for

the vented air flow to become warm or

hot.

To Defog Inside Windshield

1. Select the desired fan speed.

2. Select the desired temperature.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4.The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.

If the outside (fresh) air position is

not selected automatically, adjust the

corresponding button manually.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan

speed.

OAE046317

3-146

Convenient features of your vehicle

To Defrost Outside Windshield

1. Set the fan speed to the highest

(extreme right) position.

2. Set the temperature to the extreme

hot (HI) position.

3. Press the defroster button ( ).

4.The outside (fresh) air position will

be selected automatically.

If the position is selected, lower

fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan

speed.

Defogging Logic

To reduce the probability of fogging

up the inside of the windshield, the

air intake or air conditioning are con-

trolled automatically according to

certain conditions such as or

positions. To cancel or return the

defogging logic, do the following.

1. Place the Engine Start/Stop button

to the ON position.

2. Press the defroster button ( ).

3.While pressing the air conditioning

button (A/C), press the air intake

control button at least 5 times with-

in 3 seconds.

The air intake control button indicator

will blink 3 times. It indicates that the

defogging logic is canceled or

returned to the programmed status.

If the battery has been discharged or

disconnected, it resets to the defog

logic status.

Rear Window Defroster

To prevent damage to the conduc-

tors bonded to the inside surface

of the rear window, never use

sharp instruments or window

cleaners containing abrasives to

clean the window.

If you want to defrost and defog

the front windshield, refer to

the "Windshield Defrosting and

Defogging" section in this chapter.

NOTICE

OAE046318

3-147

Convenient features of your vehicle

The defroster heats the window to

remove frost, fog and thin ice from

the interior and exterior of the rear

window while the vehicle is in the

ready ( ) mode.

• To activate the rear window

defroster, press the rear window

defroster button located in the center

facia switch panel. The indicator on

the rear window defroster button illu-

minates when the defroster is ON.

• To turn off the defroster, press the

rear window defroster button again.

Information

• If there is heavy accumulation of

snow on the rear window, brush it off

before operating the rear defroster.

• The rear window defroster automat-

ically turns off after approximately

20 minutes or when the Engine

Start/Stop button is in the OFF posi-

tion.

Side view mirror defroster

If your vehicle is equipped with the

side view mirror defrosters, they will

operate at the same time you turn on

the rear window defroster.

Auto Defogging System

Auto defogging system reduces the

possibility of fogging up the inside of

the windshield by automatically

sensing the moisture on inside the

windshield.

The auto defogging system operates

when the heater or air conditioning is

on.

OAE046301

OAE046320N

3-148

Convenient features of your vehicle

When the Auto Defogging

System operates, the indi-

cator will illuminate.

If high levels of moisture are sensed in

the vehicle, the Auto Defogging System

will operate in the following order:

Step 1 : Outside air position

Step 2 : Operating the air conditioning

Step 3 : Blowing air toward the wind-

shield

Step 4 : Increasing air flow toward

the windshield

If the air conditioning is off or recircu-

lated air position is manually select-

ed while Auto Defogging System is

ON, the Auto Defogging System

Indicator will blink 3 times to signal

that the manual operation has been

canceled.

To cancel or reset the

Auto Defogging System

Press the front windshield defroster

button for 3 seconds when the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON

position. When the Auto Defogging

System is canceled, the ADS OFF

symbol will blink 3 times and ADS

OFF will be displayed on the climate

control information screen.

When the Auto Defogging System is

reset, the ADS OFF symbol will blink

6 times without a signal.

Information

• When the air conditioning is turned

on by Auto defogging system, if you

try to turn off the air conditioning, the

indicator will blink 3 times and the air

conditioning will not be turned off.

• For efficiency, do not select recircu-

lated air position while the Auto

defogging system is operating.

• When Auto defogging mode is

selected, fan speed, temperature and

intake mode which is adjusted man-

ually are canceled for better defog-

ging result.

Do not remove the sensor cover

located on the upper end of the

windshield glass.

Damage to system parts could

occur and may not be covered by

your vehicle warranty.

NOTICE

3-149

Convenient features of your vehicle

Automatic Ventilation

(if equipped)

When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ON position or when the

vehicle is in the ready ( ) mode

and temperature is below 59°F

(15°C) with the recirculated air posi-

tion selected more than five minutes,

the air intake position will automati-

cally change to the outside (fresh) air

position.

To cancel or reset the Automatic

Ventilation

When the air conditioning system is

on, select Face Level mode and

while pressing the A/C button, press

the recirculated air position button

five times within three seconds.

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AADDDDIITTIIOONNAALL FFEEAATTUURREESS

3-150

Convenient features of your vehicle

SSTTOORRAAGGEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

To avoid possible theft, do not

leave valuables in the storage

compartments.

Center Console Storage

To open :

Grab and hold the latch (1) on the

arm rest then lift the lid.

Glove Box

To open:

Pull the lever (1).

NOTICE

Never store cigarette lighters,

propane cylinders, or other

flammable/explosive materials

in the vehicle. These items may

catch fire and/or explode if the

vehicle is exposed to hot tem-

peratures for extended periods.

WARNING

ALWAYS keep the storage com-

partment covers closed secure-

ly while driving. Items inside

your vehicle are moving as fast

as the vehicle. If you have to

stop or turn quickly, or if there

is a crash, the items may fly out

of the compartment and may

cause an injury if they strike the

driver or a passenger.

WARNING

OAE046420

ALWAYS close the glove box

door after use.

An open glove box door can

cause serious injury to the pas-

senger in an accident, even if the

passenger is wearing a seat belt.

WARNING

OAE046421

3-151

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunglass Holder

To open:

Push and release the cover and the

holder will slowly open. Place your

sunglasses in the compartment door

with the lenses facing out.

To close:

Push back into position.

Make sure the sunglass holder is

closed while driving.

Multi Box

Use the multi box to keep small

objects.

OAD045413 OAE046422

• Do not keep objects except

sunglasses inside the sun-

glass holder. Such objects can

be thrown from the holder in

the event of a sudden stop or

an accident, possibly injuring

the passengers in the vehicle.

• Do not open the sunglass

holder while the vehicle is

moving. The rear view mirror

of the vehicle can be blocked

by an open sunglass holder.

• Do not put the glasses forcibly

into a sunglass holder. It may

cause personal injury if you

try to open it forcibly when the

glasses are jammed in holder.

WARNING

Do not keep objects that can be

thrown from the multi box and

severely injure passengers in

the vehicle in the event of a sud-

den stop or an accident.

WARNING

3-152

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cup Holder

Cups or small beverages cups may

be placed in the cup holders.

Rear (if equipped)

Pull the armrest down to use the cup

holders.

• Keep your drinks sealed while

driving to prevent spilling your

drink. If liquid spills, it may get

into the vehicle's electrical/elec-

tronic system and damage elec-

trical/electronic parts.

• When cleaning spilled liquids, do

not dry the cup holder at high

temperature. This may damage

the cup holder.

NOTICE

IINNTTEERRIIOORR FFEEAATTUURREESS

OAE046424

■ Front

■ Rear

OAE046423

• Avoid abrupt starting and

braking when the cup holder

is in use to prevent spilling

your drink. If hot liquid spills,

you could be burned. Such a

burn to the driver could cause

loss of vehicle control result-

ing in an accident.

• Do not place uncovered or

unsecured cups, bottles,

cans, etc., in the cup holder

containing hot liquid while the

vehicle is in motion. Injuries

may result in the event of a

sudden stop or collision.

• Only use soft cups in the cup

holders. Hard objects can

injure you in an accident.

WARNING

Keep cans or bottles out of

direct sun light and do not put

them in a hot vehicle. It may

explode.

WARNING

3-153

Convenient features of your vehicle

Sunvisor

To use a sunvisor, pull it downward.

To use a sunvisor for a side window,

pull it downward, unsnap it from the

bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2).

To use the vanity mirror, pull down the

sunvisor and slide the mirror cover (3).

Adjust the sunvisor forward or back-

ward (4) as needed (if equipped).Use

the ticket holder (5) to hold tickets (if

equipped).

Close the vanity mirror cover

securely and return the sunvisor

to its original position after use.

Do not put several tickets in the

ticket holder at one time. This

could cause damage to the ticket

holder.

Power Outlet (if equipped)

The power outlet is designed to pro-

vide power for mobile telephones or

other devices designed to operate

with vehicle electrical systems. The

devices should draw less than 180 W

(Watts) with the vehicle in the ready

( ) mode.

NOTICE

OAEE046511N

For your safety, do not block

your view when using the sunvi-

sor.

WARNING

OAE046426N

Avoid electrical shocks. Do not

place your fingers or foreign

objects (pin, etc.) into a power

outlet or touch the power outlet

with a wet hand.

WARNING

3-154

Convenient features of your vehicle

To prevent damage to the Power

Outlets :

• Use the power outlet only when

the vehicle is in the ready ( )

mode and remove the accessory

plug after use. Using the acces-

sory plug for prolonged periods

of time with the vehicle off could

cause the battery to discharge.

• Only use 12V electric acces-

sories which are less than 180 W

(Watts) in electric capacity.

• Adjust the air-conditioner or

heater to the lowest operating

level when using the power outlet.

• Close the cover when not in use.

(Continued)

• Some electronic devices can

cause electronic interference

when plugged into a vehicle’s

power outlet.These devices may

cause excessive audio static

and malfunctions in other elec-

tronic systems or devices used

in your vehicle.

• Push the plug in as far as it will

go. If good contact is not made,

the plug may overheat and the

fuse may open.

• Plug in battery equipped electri-

cal/electronic devices with

reverse current protection. The

current from the battery may

flow into the vehicle’s electri-

cal/electronic system and cause

system malfunction.

USB Charger (if equipped)

The USB charger is located inside

the console box between the driver's

seat and the front passenger's seat.

Insert the USB charger into the USB

port, and re-charge a smart phone or

a tablet PC.

A charging status/charging comple-

tion message will be displayed on

the screen of your device.

Your device may get warm during the

re-charging process. This does not

indicate any malfunction with the

charging system.

NOTICE

OAE046427

3-155

Convenient features of your vehicle

A device that requires a specific re-

charging method may not properly

re-charge with this USB charger. If

this is the case, use the specified

charger for your device.

This USB charging terminal will not

allow you to play your media on the

AVN unit. To connect your media to

the AVN unit, use the USB port in the

multi box and follow steps in the Car

Multimedia User's Manual that is

supplied with the vehicle.

Wireless Cellular Phone

Charging System (if equipped)

There is a wireless cellular phone

charger inside the front console.

The system is available when all

doors are closed, and when the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the

ACC/ON/START position.

To charge a cellular phone

The wireless cellular phone charging

system charges only the Qi-enabled

cellular phones ( ). Read the label

on the cellular phone accessory

cover or visit your cellular phone

manufacturer’s website to check

whether your cellular phone supports

the Qi technology.

The wireless charging process starts

when you put a Qi-enabled cellular

phone on the wireless charging unit.

1. Remove other items, including the

smart key, from the wireless charg-

ing unit. If not, the wireless charg-

ing process may be interrupted.

Place the cellular phone on the

center of charging pad.

2.The indicator light is orange when

the cellular phone is charging.The

indicator light turns green when

phone charging is completed.

3.You can turn ON or OFF the wire-

less charging function in the user

settings mode on the instrument

cluster. For further information,

refer to the "LCD Display Modes"

in this chapter.

OAE046444N

3-156

Convenient features of your vehicle

If your phone is not charging:

- Slightly change the position of the

cellular phone on the charging pad.

- Make sure the indicator light is

orange.

The indicator light will blink orange

for 10 seconds if there is a malfunc-

tion in the wireless charging system.

In this case, temporarily stop the

charging process, and re-attempt to

wirelessly charge your cellular phone

again.

The system warns you with a mes-

sage on the LCD display if the cellu-

lar phone is still on the wireless

charging unit after the ignition switch

is in the OFF position and the front

door is opened.

Information

For some manufacturers' cellular

phones, the system may not warn you

even though the cellular phone is left

on the wireless charging unit. This is

due to the particular characteristic of

the cellular phone and not a malfunc-

tion of the wireless charging.

• The wireless cellular phone

charging system may not sup-

port certain cellular phones,

which are not verified for the Qi

specification ( ).

• When placing your cellular

phone on the charging mat,

position the phone in the middle

of the mat for optimal charging

performance. If your cell phone

is off to the side, the charging

rate may be less and in some

cases the cell phone may experi-

ence higher heat conduction.

• In some cases, the wireless

charging may stop temporarily

when the Smart Key is used,

either when starting the vehicle

or locking/unlocking the doors,

etc.

• When charging certain cellular

phones, the charging indicator

may not change to green when

the cell phone is fully charged.

(Continued)

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop,when tem-

perature abnormally increases

inside the wireless cellular

phone charging system. The

wireless charging process

restarts, when temperature falls

to a certain level.

• The wireless charging process

may temporarily stop when

there is any metallic item, such

as a coin, between the wireless

cellular phone charging system

and a cellular phone.

• For certain cellular phone with

their own protection, the wire-

less charging speed may

decrease and the wireless

charging may stop.

• If the cellular phone has a thick

cover,the wireless charging may

not be possible.

• If the cell phone is not complete-

ly contacting the charging pad,

wireless charging may not oper-

ate properly.

(Continued)

NOTICE

3-157

Convenient features of your vehicle

(Continued)

• Some magnetic items like credit

cards,phone cards or rail tickets

may be damaged if left with the

cellular phone during the charg-

ing process.

• If the cellular phone without the

wireless charging function or

the metallic items are placed on

the charging pad, it may cause

slight noise.This noise does not

affect the cellular phone and the

vehicle, because this noise is an

operating sound during deter-

mining the item on the charging

pad.

• If the ignition switch is in the

OFF position, the charging also

stops.

Clock

Vehicles with Audio system

Select the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].

• Set time: Set the time displayed on

the audio screen.

• Time format: Choose between 12-

hour and 24-hour time formats.

Vehicles with Navigation system

Select the Settings menu on the

Navigation system ➟ Select

[Date/Time].

• GPS time: Displays time according

to the received GNSS time.

• 24-hour: Switches to 12 hour or 24

hour.

Clothes Hanger (if equipped)

These hangers are not designed to

hold large or heavy items.

Do not adjust the clock while

driving, you may lose your

steering control and cause an

accident that results in severe

personal injury or death.

WARNING

OAEE046434

3-158

Convenient features of your vehicle

Floor Mat Anchor(s)

ALWAYS use the Floor Mat Anchors

to attach the front floor mats to the

vehicle. The anchors on the front

floor carpet keep the floor mats from

sliding forward.

Do not hang other objects such

as hangers or hard objects

except clothes. Also, do not put

heavy, sharp or breakable

objects in the clothes pockets.

In an accident or when the cur-

tain air bag is inflated, it may

cause vehicle damage or per-

sonal injury.

WARNING

OGSB047265L

OAE046430

Do not overlay additional mats

or liners over the floor mats. If

using All Weather mats, remove

the carpeted floor mats before

installing them. Only use floor

mats designed to connect to the

anchors.

WARNING

The following must be observed

when installing ANY floor mat

to the vehicle.

• Ensure that the floor mats are

securely attached to the vehi-

cle's floor mat anchor(s)

before driving the vehicle.

• Do not use ANY floor mat that

cannot be firmly attached to

the vehicle's floor mat anchors.

• Do not stack floor mats on top

of one another (e.g. all-weath-

er rubber mat on top of a car-

peted floor mat). Only a single

floor mat should be installed

in each position.

IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was

manufactured with driver’s side

floor mat anchors that are

designed to securely hold the

floor mat in place. To avoid any

interference with pedal opera-

tion, HYUNDAI recommends

that the HYUNDAI floor mat

designed for use in your vehicle

be installed.

WARNING

3-159

Convenient features of your vehicle

Cargo Security Screen

(if equipped)

Use the cargo security screen to

hide items stored in the cargo area.

To use the cargo security screen

1.Pull the cargo security screen

towards the rear of the vehicle by

the handle (1).

2. Insert the guide pin into the guide

(2).

Pull out the cargo security screen

with the handle in the center to

prevent the guide pin from falling

out of the guide.

When the cargo security screen

is not in use:

1.Pull the cargo security screen

backward and up to release it from

the guides.

2.The cargo security screen will

automatically slide back in.

The cargo security screen may

not automatically slide back in if

the cargo security screen is not

fully pulled out. Fully pull it out

and then let go.

NOTICE

OAE046432N

OAE046433

3-160

Convenient features of your vehicle

To remove the cargo security

screen

1. Push out the lower part of guide

pins in both sides.

2.While pushing in one side of the

guide pin, pull out the cargo secu-

rity screen.

3. Open the luggage tray and keep

the cargo security screen in the

tray.

OAEE046409N

OAE046435N

Multimedia System

Multimedia System.................................................4-2

AUX, USB and iPod

port ...............................................4-2

Antenna ...............................................................................4-2

Steering Wheel Audio Controls......................................4-3

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Hands-Free...........4-4

Audio (Display Audio) / Video /

Navigation System (AVN).................................................4-5

How Vehicle Audio Works...............................................4-5

Features of Your Vehicle.................................................4-7

Audio (with Touch Screen).................................4-10

Feature of Your Audio...................................................4-11

Radio...................................................................................4-16

SiriusXM ............................................................................4-18

Media..................................................................................4-19

Phone .................................................................................4-32

Siri .......................................................................................4-40

Setup ..................................................................................4-41

Declaration of Conformity..................................4-44

FCC......................................................................................4-44

4-2

Multimedia System

• If you install an aftermarket HID

head lamp, your vehicle's audio

and electronic devices may not

function properly.

• Prevent chemicals such as per-

fume, cosmetic oil, sun cream,

hand cleaner, and air freshener

from contacting the interior

parts because they may cause

damage or discoloration.

AUX, USB and iPod

Port

You can use an AUX port or USB

cable to connect audio devices to the

vehicle AUX or USB port.

Information

When using a portable audio device

connected to the power outlet, noise

may occur during playback. If this

happens, use the power source.

❈ iPod

is a trademark of Apple Inc.

Antenna

Shark fin antenna

The shark fin antenna will receive the

transmit data (example: AM/FM,

SXM signal, GPS, LTE).

NOTICE

MMUULLTTIIMMEEDDIIAA SSYYSSTTEEMM

OAE046439N

OAE046321L

4-3

Multimedia System

Roof antenna

The roof antenna receives both AM

and FM broadcast signals, SXM sig-

nals (only type B). Rotate the roof

antenna in a counterclockwise direc-

tion to remove it. Rotate it in a clock-

wise direction to reinstall it.

• Before entering a place with a low

height clearance or a car wash,

remove the antenna by rotating it

counterclockwise. If not, the

antenna may be damaged.

• When reinstalling your antenna,

it is important that it is fully

tightened and adjusted to the

upright position to ensure prop-

er reception.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

Do not operate multiple audio

remote control buttons simultane-

ously.

NOTICE

OAE046438

OAE046481L

OAE048481N

■ Type A

■ Type B

4-4

Multimedia System

VOLUME (VOL + / - ) (1)

• Press the VOLUME switch up to

increase volume.

• Press the VOLUME switch down to

decrease volume.

SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is

pressed up or down and held for 0.8

second or more, it will function in the

following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the AUTO SEEK

select button. It will SEEK until you

release the button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the FF/RW button.

If the SEEK/PRESET switch is

pressed up or down, it will function

in the following modes:

RADIO mode

It will function as the PRESET STA-

TION UP/DOWN button.

MEDIA mode

It will function as the TRACK UP/

DOWN button.

MODE (3)

Press the MODE button to toggle

through Radio, SXM, or AUX modes.

MUTE ( ) (4)

• Press the MUTE button to mute the

sound.

• Press the MUTE button again to

activate the sound.

Information

Detailed information for audio control

buttons are described in the Car

Multimedia User's Manual that is

supplied with the vehicle.

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Hands-Free

With the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology in the vehicle, you can

use the phone wireless.

(1) Call / Answer button

(2) Call end button

OAE046440

OAE046447

(3) Microphone

Detailed information for the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology hands-free is

described in the Car Multimedia

User's Manual.

Audio (Display Audio) / Video /

Navigation System (AVN)

(if equipped)

Detailed information for the AVN sys-

tem is described in the Car

Multimedia User's Manual.

How Vehicle Audio Works

AM and FM radio signals are broad-

cast from transmitter towers located

around your city. They are intercept-

ed by the radio antenna on your vehi-

cle.This signal is then processed by

the radio and sent to your vehicle

speakers.

When a strong radio signal has

reached your vehicle, the precise

engineering of your audio system

ensures the best possible quality

reproduction. However, in some

cases the signal coming to your vehi-

cle may not be strong and clear.

This can be due to factors, such as

the distance from the radio station,

closeness of other strong radio sta-

tions or the presence of buildings,

bridges or other large obstructions in

the area.

4-5

Multimedia System

JBM001

FM reception

AM broadcasts can be received at

greater distances than FM broad-

casts. This is because AM radio

waves are transmitted at low fre-

quencies. These long distance, low

frequency radio waves can follow the

curvature of the earth rather than

travelling straight. In addition, they

curve around obstructions resulting

in better signal coverage.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at

high frequencies and do not bend to

follow the earth's surface. Because

of this, FM broadcasts generally

begin to fade within short distances

from the station.Also, FM signals are

easily affected by buildings, moun-

tains, and obstructions.This can lead

to undesirable or unpleasant listen-

ing conditions which might lead you

to believe a problem exists with your

radio. The following conditions are

normal and do not indicate radio

trouble:

• Fading - As your vehicle moves

away from the radio station, the sig-

nal will weaken and sound will

begin to fade.When this occurs, we

suggest that you select another

stronger station.

• Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or

large obstructions between the

transmitter and your radio can dis-

turb the signal causing static or flut-

tering noises to occur.Reducing the

treble level may lessen this effect

until the disturbance clears.

4-6

Multimedia System

JBM003

FM radio station

JBM004JBM002

AM reception

• Station Swapping - As an FM signal

weakens, another more powerful

signal near the same frequency

may begin to play. This is because

your radio is designed to lock onto

the clearest signal. If this occurs,

select another station with a

stronger signal.

• Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio sig-

nals being received from several

directions can cause distortion or

fluttering. This can be caused by a

direct and reflected signal from the

same station, or by signals from two

stations with close frequencies. If

this occurs, select another station

until the condition has passed.

Features of Your Vehicle

Satellite radio reception

You may experience difficulties in

receiving SiriusXM

satellite radio

signals in the following situations.

• If you are driving in a tunnel or a

covered parking area.

• If you are driving beneath the top

level of a multi-level freeway.

• If you are driving under a bridge.

• If you are driving next to a tall vehi-

cle (such as a truck or a bus) that

blocks the signal.

• If you are driving in a valley where

the surrounding hills or peaks block

the signal from the satellite.

• If you are driving on a mountain

road where is the signal blocked by

mountains.

• If you are driving in an area with tall

trees that block the signal (30 ft.

/10m or more), for example on an

road that goes through a dense for-

est.

• The signal can become weak in

some areas that are not covered by

the SiriusXM

repeater network.

4-7

Multimedia System

JBM005

SATELLITE2

SATELLITE1

Information

There may also be additional unfore-

seen circumstances leading to recep-

tion problems with the SiriusXM

satellite radio signal.

Advisory Messages, such as 'CH

Unavailable' may occur when starting

SiriusXM

Radio.

Using a cellular phone or a two-

way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside

the vehicle, noise may be produced

from the audio system. This does not

mean that something is wrong with

the audio equipment. In such a case,

try to operate mobile devices as far

from the audio equipment as possible.

NOTE:

Order of playing files (folders) :

1. Song playing order : to

sequentially.

2. Folder playing order :

❋ If no song file is contained in the

folder,that folder is not displayed.

4-8

Multimedia System

When using a communication

system such as a cellular phone

or a radio set inside the vehicle, a

separate external antenna must

be fitted. When a cellular phone

or a radio set is used with an

internal antenna alone, it may

interfere with the vehicle's electri-

cal system and adversely affect

safe operation of the vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not use a cellular phone

while driving. Stop at a safe

location to use a cellular phone

or set up the hands-free calling

feature.

WARNING

iPod

is a registered trademark of Apple Inc.

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

The Bluetooth

word mark and logos are registered

trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of

such marks by HYUNDAI is under license. Other trade-

marks and trade names are those of their respective

owners.

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology enabled cell phone is

required to use

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone compatibility can

be checked by visiting https://www.hyundaiusa.com/blue-

tooth.

Pandora

Pandora, the Pandora logo, and the Pandora trade dress

are trademarks or registered trademarks of Pandora

Media, Inc. Used with permission.

Pandora is only available in certain countries.Please visit

http://www.pandora.com/legal for more information.

4-9

Multimedia System

4-10

Multimedia System

AAUUDDIIOO ((WWiitthh TToouucchh SSccrreeeenn))

G2H4G0000EU/G2H4G0001EU

■

Type A

(With

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology)

■ Type B

4-11

Multimedia System

Feature of Your Audio

Head unit

❈ The actual image in the vehicle

may differ from the illustration.

(1) LCD screen

• Tap the screen to select a button.

(2) POWER/VOL knob

• Turn to adjust the volume.

• Press to turn the device on or off.

(3) RADIO

• Start FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

(4) MEDIA

• Select USB(iPod

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology(BT) Audio,

AUX and My Music or Pandora.

• Display the media menu when two

or more media are connected or

when the [MEDIA] button is

pressed in media mode.

(5) SEEK/TRACK

• Search for next station in FM or AM

radio mode.

• Search for next station in SiriusXM*

radio mode.

• Change the current song in media

mode.

* if equipped

(6) RESET

• Shutdown and restart the system.

■ Type B

■ Type A

4-12

Multimedia System

(7) PHONE

• Start

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Phone mode.

(8) SETUP

• Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver

and Display Off settings.

(9) TUNE knob

• Turn to navigate through the sta-

tions/songs list.

• Press to select an item.

■ Type B

■ Type A

4-13

Multimedia System

Steering wheel remote control

❈ The actual image in the may differ

from the illustration.

(1) VOICE

• Pressing the button

- If Siri is not active: Starts Siri.

- If Siri is active: Re-starts Siri.

• Pressing and holding the button:

Siri is deactivated.

(2)MODE

• Press the button to change the

mode in the following order: Radio

➟ Media.

• Press and hold the button to turn off.

(3) MUTE

• Press to mute audio output.

• When a call is active, mic volume is

muted.

(4) VOLUME

• Press to adjust the volume.

(5) UP/DOWN

• Press the button in radio mode to

search Presets.

• Press and hold the button in radio

mode to search frequencies.

• Press the button in media mode to

change the current song.

• Press and hold the button in media

mode to quick search through songs.

(6)CALL

• Pressing the button

- If not in

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode or

receiving a phone call.

First press: Display Dial Number

screen.

Second press: Automatically dis-

play the most recently Dialed

Call number.

Third press: Dial the phone num-

ber entered.

- Press in the Incoming Call notifica-

tion screen to accept the phone call.

- Press in

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to

switch to the waiting call.

• Pressing and holding the button

(over 1.0 seconds)

- If not in

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode or

receiving a phone call, the most

recently Dialed Call number is

dialed.

- Press in

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to

transfer the call to your cell

phone.

- Press in cell phone mode to

switch to

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode.

(7) END

• Press in

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Handsfree mode to

end the phone call.

• Press in the incoming call screen

to reject the call.

4-14

Multimedia System

Audio System Safety Warning

• Do not use a cellular phone

while driving. Stop at a safe

location to use a cellular

phone.

• Do not stare at the screen

while driving. Staring at the

screen for prolonged periods

of time could lead to traffic

accidents.

• Do not disassemble, assemble,

or modify the audio system.

Such acts could result in acci-

dents, fire, or electric shock.

• Using the phone while driving

may lead to a lack of attention

of traffic conditions and

increase the likelihood of

accidents. Use the phone fea-

ture after parking the vehicle.

(Continued)

• Exercise caution not to spill

water or introduce foreign

objects into the device. Such

acts could lead to smoke, fire,

or product malfunction.

• Please refrain from use if the

screen is blank or no sound

can be heard as these signs

may indicate product malfunc-

tion. Continued use in such

conditions could lead to acci-

dents (fires, electric shock) or

product malfunctions.

• Do not touch the antenna dur-

ing thunder or lightening as

such acts may lead to light-

ning induced electric shock.

• Do not stop or park in park-

ing-restricted areas to operate

the product. Such acts could

lead to traffic accidents.

WARNING

Distracted Driving

Driving while distracted can

result in a loss of vehicle con-

trol that may lead to an acci-

dent, severe personal injury,

and death. The driver’s primary

responsibility is in the safe and

legal operation of a vehicle, and

use of any handheld devices,

other equipment, or vehicle sys-

tems which take the driver’s

eyes, attention and focus away

from the safe operation of a

vehicle or which are not permis-

sible by law should never be

used during operation of the

vehicle.

WARNING

4-15

Multimedia System

Information

Turn on the car ignition before using

this device. Do not operate the audio

system for long periods of time with

the ignition turned off as such opera-

tions may lead to battery discharge.

• Do not subject the device to

severe shock or impact. Direct

pressure onto the front side of

the monitor may cause damage

to the LCD or touch screen.

• When cleaning the device, make

sure to turn off the device and

use a dry and smooth cloth.

Never use rough materials,

chemical cloths, or solvents

(alcohol, benzene, thinners,

etc.). As such materials may

damage the device panel or

cause color/quality deteriora-

tion.

• Do not place beverages close to

the audio system. Spilling bever-

ages may lead to system mal-

function.

• Placing the audio system within

an electromagnetic environment

may result in noise interference.

Information

In this case of product malfunction,

please contact your dealer or vehicle

service center.

Information on status icons

Icons showing audio status are shown

in the upper-right corner of the screen.

NOTICE

Icon Description

Mute Mute engaged

Battery

Remaining battery life of

a connected Bluetooth

device

Handsfree +

Audio stream-

ing connection

Bluetooth

Handsfree

call and audio stream-

ing available

Handsfree

connection

Bluetooth

Handsfree

call available

Bluetooth

audio streaming

Bluetooth

audio

streaming available

Downloading

contacts

Downloading contacts

through Bluetooth

wire-

less communications

Downloading

call history

Downloading call history

through Bluetooth

wire-

less communications

Line busy Phone call in progress

Mute mic

Mic muted during a call

(caller cannot hear your

voice)

Phone signal

strength

Display the phone signal

strength for a cell phone

connected by Bluetooth

4-16

Multimedia System

Radio

You can listen to FM, AM and

SiriusXM* radio.

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and

SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the

main screen.

(3) List

Display all available stations.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Presets 1~40

Save or listen to favorite stations.

Switching between FM, AM and

SiriusXM*

• Press the [RADIO] button on the

audio system to switch between

FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

• Select [Band] on the screen to switch

between FM, AM and SiriusXM*.

* if equipped

Searching stations

Searching stations by pressing the

[SEEK/TRACK] button on the prod-

uct.

< Presets >

By selecting [< Presets >], the but-

tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on

the screen can be changed.

Presets 1~40

Press the button to listen to a preset.

Press and hold the button number to

save the current station. If the slot is

empty, simply pressing saves the

station to the slot.

List

A list of all available stations is dis-

played. Press the desired station.

Favorite stations can be saved to

[Presets] by selecting the [+].

Select [Menu], and select the desired

function.

• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently

used stations.

To listen to a preset, press the

desired station.

Press and hold the desired slot

from 1 through 40. This saves the

current station in the selected slot.

If the slot is empty, simply pressing

saves the station to the slot.

• Scan: All stations available in the

current location of the vehicle are

played for five seconds each.

• Information: View detailed station

information.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

• Station Info: Set whether to receive

station information such as Station

Name, Program Type or Information.

4-17

Multimedia System

Information

SiriusXM

Satellite Radio information

(if equipped)

• Satellite Radio channels:

Enjoy SiriusXM Satellite Radio with a

3-month trial subscription to the

Sirius Select package. You’ll get over

variable channels, including commer-

cial free music, plus all your favorite

sports, exclusive talk, entertainment,

and a selection of premium program-

ming. For more information and a

complete list of SiriusXM channels,

visit siriusxm.com in the United States,

siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call

SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.

• Satellite Radio reception factors:

To receive the satellite signal, your

vehicle has been equipped with a

satellite radio antenna located on

the roof of your vehicle. The vehicle

roof provides the best location for

an unobstructed, open view of the

sky, a requirement of a satellite

radio system. Like AM/FM, there

are several factors that can affect

satellite radio reception perform-

ance:

(Continued)

- Antenna obstructions: For opti-

mal reception performance, keep

the antenna clear of snow and ice

build-up and keep luggage and

other material as far away from

the antenna as possible.

• SiriusXM Satellite Radio service:

SiriusXM is a subscription-based satel-

lite radio service that broadcasts music,

sports, news and entertainment pro-

gramming to radio receivers, which are

available for installation in motor vehi-

cles or factory installed, as well as for

the home, portable and wireless devices,

and through an Internet connection on

a personal computer.

Vehicles that are equipped with a

factory installed SiriusXM Satellite

Radio system include:

- Hardware and an introductory

trial subscription term, which

begins on the date of sale or lease

of the vehicle.

- For a small upgrade fee, access to

SiriusXM music channels, and

other select channels over the

Internet using any computer con-

nected to the Internet (U.S. cus-

tomers only).

(Continued)

• SiriusXM services require a sub-

scription sold separately, or as a

package, by Sirius XM Radio Inc. If

you decide to continue service after

your trial, the subscription plan you

choose will automatically renew

thereafter and you will be charged

according to your chosen payment

method at then-current rates. Fees

and taxes apply. To cancel you must

call SiriusXM at 1-866-635-2349.

See SiriusXM Customer Agreement

for complete terms at www.sir-

iusxm.com. SiriusXM U.S. satellite

and data services are available only

in the 48 contiguous states, DC and

Puerto Rico (with coverage limita-

tions). SiriusXM satellite service is

also available in Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca. All fees and pro-

gramming subject to change. Sirius,

XM and all related marks and logos

are trademarks of Sirius XM Radio

Inc.

4-18

Multimedia System

SiriusXM

(1) Band

Switch between FM, AM and

SiriusXM.

(2) Presets

Change the preset number on the

main screen.

(3) List

Display all channels.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Presets 1~40

Save or listen to favorite channels.

(6) Play Live

Switches to the live broadcast mode.

(7) Skip Backward

Repeats the previously broadcasted

program.

- Holding for less than 0.8 seconds:

Moves to the previous segment.

- Holding for over 1.0 seconds:Moves

to the previous 5 seconds.

(8) Play/Pause

Pauses/plays the current broadcast-

ing program.

(9) Skip Forward

Moves to the next segment.

Switching between FM, AM and

SiriusXM

• Press the [RADIO] button on the

audio system to switch between

FM, AM and SiriusXM.

• Select [Band] on the screen to switch

between FM, AM and SiriusXM.

Searching channels

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to

search channels.

< Presets >

By selecting [< Presets >], the but-

tons for Presets 1~40 displayed on

the screen can be changed.

Presets 1~40

Press the button to listen to a preset.

Press and hold the button number to

save the current channel.

List

A list of all channels is displayed.

Press the desired channel.

Favorite channels can be saved to

[Presets] by selecting the [+].

4-19

Multimedia System

Select [Menu], and select the desired

function.

• Presets: Save up to 40 frequently

used channels.

To listen to a preset, press the

desired channel.

Press and hold the desired slot

from 1 through 40. This saves the

current channel in the selected

slot.

If the slot is empty, simply pressing

saves the channel to the slot.

• Categories: Channels can be

searched by category.

• Direct Tune: The desired channel

can be selected by entering num-

bers.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

• Tag Song: Tag the current song

information.

When an Apple device (iPhone

iPod

) is connected, tagged song

information is sent automatically to

the connected device.

Information

Up to 50 songs can be tagged.

• Scan: All channels available in the

vehicle’s current location are

played for ten seconds each.

• Program Schedule: View the

Program schedule.

• Featured Favorites: The Featured

Favorites feature allows SiriusXM™

to broadcast additional presets.

- Example 1: During holidays,

“Holiday Music” might include all

SiriusXM™ channels that are

playing holiday music for easy

access by users.

Multiple sets of Featured Favorites

data can be broadcast by SiriusXM™

and can change from time to time.

• Information: View detailed channel

information.

• Category Lock: Search or scan

channels in the current category

only.

Media

Information

Using MP3

Supported audio formats

File formats other than the formats

above may not be recognized or

playable. Information such as file

name may not be displayed.

NOTICE

Compressed

audio formats

MPEG1 Audio Layer3

MPEG2 Audio Layer3

MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3

Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X

& 8.X

4-20

Multimedia System

Range of supported compressed file

types

1. Bitrate range (Kbps)

2. Sampling frequency (Hz)

• The sound quality of MP3/WMA

compressed files may vary depend-

ing on the bitrate. (A higher bitrate

can have better sound quality.)

• The product only recognizes files

with the MP3 or WMA extension.

Files without one of these exten-

sions are not recognized.

3. Number of recognizable folders

and files

• Folders: 2,000 for USB

• Files: 6,000 for USB

• No recognition limit for folder hier-

archies

4. Character display range (Unicode)

• Filenames: Up to 64 English char-

acters (64 Korean characters)

• Foldernames: Up to 32 English

characters (32 Korean characters)

Languages supported (Unicode support)

• Korean: 2,604 characters

• English: 94 characters

• Common Chinese characters:4,888

characters

• Special symbols: 986 characters

Japanese/Simplified Chinese char-

acters are not supported.

NOTICE

BIT RATE(kbps)

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA

Layer3

High Range

32 8 8 48

40 16 16 64

48 24 24 80

56 32 32 96

64 40 40 128

80 48 48 160

96 56 56 192

112 64 64

128 80 80

160 96 96

192 112 112

224 128 128

256 144 144

320 160 160

MPEG1 MPEG2 MPEG2.5 WMA

44100 22050 11025 32000

48000 24000 12000 44100

32000 16000 8000 48000

4-21

Multimedia System

Information

Using the USB Devices

• Starting the vehicle while a USB

device is connected can damage the

device. Please disconnect USB

devices before starting the vehicle.

• Starting the vehicle or stopping the

engine while an external USB device

is connected can result in failure of

the external USB device to operate.

• Be cautious of static electricity when

connecting/disconnecting external

USB devices.

• An encrypted MP3 player is not rec-

ognized when connected as an exter-

nal device.

• External USB devices may not be

recognized, depending on the state

of the external USB device.

• Only products with byte/sectors for-

matted at 4 KB or lower are recog-

nized.

• Only USB devices in FAT12/16/32

format are recognized; NTFS and

ExFAT file systems are not recog-

nized.

(Continued)

• Some USB devices are not recog-

nized due to compatibility issues.

• Do not touch the USB connections.

• Connecting and disconnecting USB

devices rapidly over a short period

of time can cause equipment failure.

• Abnormal sounds may be audible

when the USB device is disconnected.

• Turn the audio off before connecting

or disconnecting external USB

devices.

• Recognition may take longer

depending on the type, capacity or

file format of the external USB

device. This is not a product mal-

function.

• Use of USB devices for purposes

other than playing music files is pro-

hibited.

• Image display and video playback

are not supported.

(Continued)

• Use of USB accessories, including

charge and heat though the USB I/F,

can lead to reduced product per-

formance or malfunctions. Do not

use USB devices or accessories for

these purposes.

• Use of aftermarket USB hubs and

extension cables can result in the

vehicle’s audio system failing to rec-

ognize your USB device. Connect

the USB device directly to the multi-

media port of your vehicle.

• When using high-capacity USB

devices with logical drive divisions,

only files saved on the highest level

logical drive can be played.

If applications are loaded on a USB

drive, file playback may fail.

• Some MP3 players, cell phones, dig-

ital cameras, etc. (USB devices that

are not recognized as mobile stor-

age) may not operate normally

when connected.

• USB charging may not be supported

by some mobile devices.

(Continued)

4-22

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• Operation is guaranteed only for

standard (Metal Cover Type) USB

Memory drives.

• Operation of HDD, CF, SD and mem-

ory stick devices is not guaranteed.

• DRM (Digital Rights Management)

files cannot be played.

• SD-type USB memory, CF-type

USB memory, and other USB mem-

ory devices that require adapters

for connection are not supported.

• Proper operation of USB HDDs or

USB drives with connectors that

loosen due to vehicle vibrations is

not guaranteed. (iStick, etc.)

• USB products that are

used as key chains or

cell phone accessories

may damage the USB

jack and affect proper

file playback. Please refrain from

use. Use only products with plug

connectors, as shown in the follow-

ing illustration.

• When MP3 devices or cell phones

are connected simultaneously

through AUX, BT Audio and USB

modes, a popping noise or malfunc-

tion may occur.

USB

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [USB].

• Connect a USB drive to the USB

port to automatically play files on

the USB drive.

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the

currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning TUNE

knob, and press the knob to play.

4-23

Multimedia System

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs

available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’,

‘Repeat folder’or ‘Repeat category’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

• Repeat folder: All songs in the

current folder are repeated.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Information

The repeat folder function is available

only when songs are playing from the

[File] category under [List].

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle folder’ or ‘Shuffle

category’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order.

• Shuffle folder: Songs within

the current folder are played in ran-

dom order.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Select [Menu], and select the desired

function.

• Save to My Music: Songs on your

USB device can be saved to My

Music.

(1)File: Select a file to save

(2)Mark All: Select all files.

(3)Unmark All: Deselect all files.

4-24

Multimedia System

(4)Save: Save the selected file(s)

- Select the files you want to save,

and select [Save].This saves the

selected files to My Music.

- Saving is canceled if phone calls

are received or made while saving.

- If Siri is activated, phone calls

are received or made while sav-

ing, saving will be canceled.

- Up to 6,000 files can be saved.

- The currently playing file on the

USB device cannot be changed

while saving.

- My Music cannot be used while

saving.

- Up to 700 MB can be saved.

• Information: Detailed information

on the currently playing song is dis-

played.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Information

Using the iPod

Devices

• To use the audio system’s iPod

con-

trol function, use the dedicated

cable provided with your iPod

• Connecting the iPod

to the vehicle

during play may result in a loud

noise that lasts about one to two sec-

onds. Connect the iPod

to the vehi-

cle after stopping or pausing play.

• Connect the iPod

with the vehicle in

the ACC ON state to begin charging.

• When connecting the iPod

cable,

be sure to fully push the cable into

the port.

• When EQ effects are enabled simul-

taneously on external devices, such

as iPod

s and the audio system, the

EQ effects may overlap, causing

sound quality deterioration or dis-

tortion. Deactivate the EQ function

for all external devices, if possible.

• Noise may occur when your iPod

or the AUX port is connected.

Disconnect and store separately

when not in use.

(Continued)

• There may be noise if the audio sys-

tem is used with an iPod

or AUX

external device connected to the

power jack. In these cases, discon-

nect the iPod

or external device

from the power jack.

• Play may be interrupted, or device

malfunctions may occur depending

on the characteristics of your

iPod

/iPhone

• Play may fail if your iPhone

is con-

nected through both Bluetooth

Wireless Technology and USB. In

this case, select Dock connector or

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology on

your iPhone

to change the sound

output settings.

• If your software version does not

support the communication proto-

col or your iPod

is not recognized

due to device failure, anomalies or

defects, iPod

mode cannot be used.

• iPod

nano (5th generation) devices

may not be recognized if the battery

is low. Charge sufficiently before use.

(Continued)

4-25

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• The search and song play order in

the iPod

device may be different

from the search order in the audio

system.

• If the iPod

has failed due to an

internal defect, please reset the

iPod

(consult your iPod

manual).

• Depending on the software version,

the iPod

may fail to sync with the

system. If the media is removed or

disconnected before recognition, the

previous mode may not be restored

(iPad

cannot be charged).

• Cables other than the 1-meter cable

provided with iPod

/iPhone

prod-

ucts may not be recognized.

• When other music apps are used on

your iPod

, the system sync func-

tion may fail due to malfunction of

the iPod

application.

iPod

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

• Connect your iPod

to the audio

USB port, press the [MEDIA] but-

ton, and select [iPod].

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the

currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning the TUNE

knob, and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs

available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

4-26

Multimedia System

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat category’, ‘Repeat current

song’.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle category’ play.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Select [Menu], and select the desired

function.

• Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

When other music programs are

running

When songs saved on your iPod

are playing through a separate music

app, the following screen is dis-

played.

(1)Play/Pause: Pause or play music

(2)Play iPod Files: Play music saved

on your iPod

(3)Album Image:View playback info

Information

Operation cannot be carried out cor-

rectly due to iPod

application mal-

function.

Play iPod Files

• Select [Play iPod Files] to play

songs saved on your iPod

If there are no songs saved on your

iPod

, the [Play iPod Files] is dis-

abled.

4-27

Multimedia System

Information

Using

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology Audio

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Audio mode can only be used if a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology-

enabled phone is connected. Only

devices that support Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio can be

used.

• If the Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology-enabled phone is dis-

connected during play, the music

stops.

• When the TRACK UP/DOWN but-

tons are used during Bluetooth

Wireless Technology audio stream-

ing, a popping noise or sound inter-

ruptions may occur, depending on

the cell phone device.

• Depending on the cell phone model,

the audio streaming function may

not be supported.

(Continued)

• If a phone call is made or received

when music is playing in Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio mode,

the call may mix with the music.

• When returning to Bluetooth

Wireless Technology Audio mode

after ending a call, play might not

resume automatically for some cell

phone models.

•

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree is a feature that

enables drivers to practice safe

driving. Connecting the car

audio system with a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology phone

allows the user to conveniently

make calls, receive calls, and

manage the phone book. Before

using the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology, carefully read the

contents of this user’s manual.

• Excessive use or operations

while driving may lead to negli-

gent driving practices and be

the cause of accidents.

• Do not operate the device exces-

sively while driving.

• Viewing the screen for pro-

longed periods of time is dan-

gerous and may lead to acci-

dents.

• When driving, view the screen

only for short periods of time.

NOTICE

4-28

Multimedia System

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

(BT) Audio

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(4) Play/Pause

Pause or play music.

Information

• Some cell phone models may not

support particular functions.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

audio volume is synced with cell

phone media volume.

Playback

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [BT Audio].

Changing songs

• Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button

to play the previous or next song.

Information

Some cell phones may not support this

function.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or

‘Repeat category’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Information

The repeat play function is engaged,

depending on the operation of the con-

nected Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

4-29

Multimedia System

Information

The shuffle function is engaged, depend-

ing on the operation of the connected

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device.

Select [Menu], and select the desired

function.

• Connections:The currently connected

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device can be changed.

• Information: Detailed information on

the currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

AUX

Running AUX

• Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [AUX].

• Connect the external device con-

nection jack to the AUX terminal to

run AUX.

(1) Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

My Music

(1) Repeat

Enable/disable repeat.

(2) Shuffle

Enable/disable shuffle play.

(3) List

View a list of all songs.

(4) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(5) Album Image

View song info.

4-30

Multimedia System

(6) Pause

Pause or play music.

(7) Playback progress

Press to skip to the desired location.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [My Music].

• My Music cannot be selected if it

does not contain music.

• Check the content of your USB

drive before saving music to My

Music.

Changing songs

Press the [SEEK/TRACK] button to

play the previous or next song.

• Press and hold the [SEEK/TRACK]

button to rewind or fast forward the

currently playing song.

• Search songs by turning the TUNE

knob and press the knob to play.

Selecting songs from a list

Select [List] to see a list of songs

available for play.

Select and play the desired song.

Repeat play

Select [Repeat] to enable or disable

‘Repeat all’, ‘Repeat current song’ or

‘Repeat category’.

• Repeat all: All songs in the

playlist are repeated.

• Repeat current song: The cur-

rently playing song is repeated.

• Repeat category: Repeat all

songs in the current category.

Shuffle play

Select [Shuffle] to enable/disable

‘Shuffle’, ‘Shuffle category’ play.

• Shuffle: Songs are played in

random order.

• Shuffle category: Songs within

the current category are played in

random order.

Select [Menu], and select the desired

function.

• Delete Files: You can delete files

from My Music.

(1)File: Select saved file

(2)Mark All: Select all files.

(3)Unmark All: Deselect all files.

4-31

Multimedia System

(4)Delete: Delete the selected file(s).

- Select the file to delete, then

select [Delete] to delete it.

- If Siri is activated, phone calls

are received or made during

delete, delete will be canceled.

• Add to Playlist: Frequently played

songs can be paired in a [Playlist].

- Songs can be played from the

[Playlist].

• Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Delete from Playlist

When a song in the playlist is play-

ing, select [Menu] and select [Delete

from Playlist].

Select the song to delete, then select

[Delete].

Pandora

(1) Thumbs Down

If you don’t like the song that is cur-

rently playing, press this button to

skip to the next song and to minimize

the number of songs from similar

genres.

Information

Pandora

limits the number of times

that you can skip to the next song.

(2) Thumbs Up

If you like the song that is currently

playing, press this button. Pandora

will play more songs from the same

genre.

Information

The settings of this function cannot be

reset.

(3) Skip

Skip to the next song.

Information

Pandora

limits the number of times

that you can skip to the next song.

(4) Stations

Display the station list.

(5) Menu

Navigate to the menu screen.

(6) Album Image

View song info.

4-32

Multimedia System

(7) Pause

Pause or play music.

(8) Shared Station

Indicate that the station is already

shared.

Information

Thumbs Up/Down is not available for

shared stations.

Playback

Press the [MEDIA] button, and

select [Pandora].

Information

• Pandora

: Connect a smartphone to

listen to Pandora

Radio

• Apple devices must be connected via

USB cable and Android devices

must be connected via Bluetooth

Wireless Technology in order to run

Pandora

Select [Menu] and select the desired

function.

• Bookmark: Add the song that is

currently playing to your book-

marks list.

Information

• You can view your bookmarked

songs on your online Pandora

pro-

file. Go to pandora.com, then go to

[Your profile] above the player. That

will bring up a page with your sta-

tions and bookmarked songs.

• The settings of this function cannot

be reset.

• Quit: Exit Pandora

mode and

return to previous audio mode.

• Information: Detailed info on the

currently playing song is displayed.

• Sound Settings: Audio sound set-

tings can be changed.

Phone

Information

Using the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Cellular Phone

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology is a

near-field wireless networking tech-

nology that uses the 2.4 GHz fre-

quency to connect various devices

within a certain distance wirelessly.

• The technology is used in PCs,

peripherals, Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology phones, tablet PCs,

household appliances and automo-

biles. Devices supporting Bluetooth

Wireless Technology can exchange

data at high speeds without physical

cable connections.

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree devices enable convenient

access to phone functions through cell

phones equipped with Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

• Some Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices may not be supported by the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree function.

(Continued)

4-33

Multimedia System

(Continued)

• When Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology is connected and calls

are attempted through a connected

cell phone from outside the vehicle,

the call is connected through the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree function of the vehicle.

• Please be sure to disconnect the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree function through your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device or the audio screen.

• See https://www.hyundaiusa.com/

BlueTooth/ for a list of supported

Bluetooth devices.

Safety precautions

• The

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree function helps drivers to

drive safely. By connecting a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology-

enabled phone to the vehicle’s

audio system, phone calls can be

made and received through the

audio system and contacts can be

managed.Consult the user manual

before use.

• Excessive manipulation of controls

while driving, making it difficult to

pay attention to the road ahead,

can lead to accidents.Do not oper-

ate the device excessively while

driving.

• Looking at the screen for a pro-

longed time increases the risk of

accidents. Keep time spent looking

at the screen to a minimum.

Precautions when connecting Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices

• The vehicle supports the following

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

functions. Some

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices may not sup-

port some functions.

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Handsfree phone calls

2) Operations during a call (Private,

Switch, Mic Vol. controls)

3) Download call history saved to the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device

4) Download contacts saved to the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device

5) Automatic contacts/call history

download when

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology is connected

6) Automatic

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device connection

when the vehicle is started

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

audio streaming playback

• Before connecting the audio system

to your device, make sure your

device supports

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology.

4-34

Multimedia System

• Even if your device supports

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology, a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology con-

nection cannot be established if

the device’s

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology function is switched off.

Search and connect with the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

function enabled.

• Pair or connect

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices to the audio

system with the vehicle at a stand-

still.

• If a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

connection is lost due to abnormal

conditions while a

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device is con-

nected (communication range

exceeded, device power OFF,

communication errors, etc.), the

disconnected

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device is searched for

and automatically reconnected.

• If you want to disable the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device auto-con-

nect function, turn the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology function OFF on

your device. Consult the user manu-

als for individual devices to see

whether

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology is supported.

• Handsfree call quality and volume

may vary depending on the type of

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

• Some

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices are subject to

intermittent

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology connection failures. In

this case, use the following

method.

1) Turn the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology function off on your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device ➟ Turn it on and try again.

2) Delete the paired device from

both the audio system and

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device, then pair again.

3)Power down your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device ➟

Turn it on and try again.

4) Completely remove the battery

from your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device; reinsert it,

reboot, and attempt connection.

5) Restart the vehicle and reat-

tempt connection.

Pairing a Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device

Information on pairing Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices

• Pairing refers to the process of pair-

ing

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

cell phones or devices with the sys-

tem prior to connection.This is a nec-

essary procedure for

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology connection and

usage.

• Up to five devices can be paired.

• Pairing Bluetooth

device is not

allowed while vehicle is moving.

Pairing the first Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio system or the [CALL] button

on the steering wheel remote control

➟ Search for the vehicle from the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device, and pair ➟ Enter the passkey

on the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device or approve passkey ➟

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology pair-

ing completed.

4-35

Multimedia System

1. When the [PHONE] button on the

audio or the [CALL] button on the

steering wheel remote control is

pressed, the following screen is dis-

played.Devices can now be paired.

(1) Vehicle Name: Searched name in

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

Information

The vehicle name in the image above

is an example. Refer to your device for

the actual name of your device.

2. Search for available

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices in the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

menu of your

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device (cell phone,

etc.).

3. Confirm that the vehicle name in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device matches the vehicle name

shown on the audio screen, then

select it.

4-1. For devices that require passkey

entry, a passkey entry screen is

shown on your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device.

- Enter the passkey ‘0000’, in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

4-2. For devices that require passkey

confirmation, the following

screen is shown on the audio

system. A 6-digit passkey input

screen is shown in the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device.

- After confirming that the 6-digit

passkey on the audio screen

and the

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device are identical,

select [OK] in your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device.

Information

The 6-digit passkey in the image

above is an example. Refer to your

vehicle for the actual passkey.

4-36

Multimedia System

Pairing a second Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth] ➟

Select [Connections] ➟ Select [Add

New].

- The pairing procedure from this

point is identical to [Pairing the first

Bluetooth device].

Information

• Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

standby mode lasts for three min-

utes. If a device is not paired within

three minutes, pairing is canceled.

Start over from the beginning.

• For most Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices, a connection is

established automatically after pair-

ing. Some devices, however, require

separate confirmation when con-

necting after pairing. Be sure to

check your Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device after pairing to

confirm that it has connected.

Connecting Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices

If there are no connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio system or the [CALL] button in

the steering wheel remote control ➟

List of paired

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices ➟ Select the desired

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device

from the list ➟ Connect

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

4-37

Multimedia System

If there are connected devices

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Settings] ➟

Select [Connections] ➟ Select

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device to connect ➟

Select [Connect] ➟ Connect

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology.

Information

• Only one Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device can be connected

at a time.

• When a Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device is connected,

other devices cannot be paired.

Accepting/rejecting phone calls

Receiving phone calls with

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology connected.

(1)Caller name: If the caller number

is in your contacts, the correspon-

ding name is displayed.

(2) Incoming phone number: Incoming

phone number is displayed.

(3)Accept: Accept call.

(4)Reject: Reject call.

Information

• When the incoming call screen is

displayed, audio mode and the set-

tings screen cannot be shown. Only

call volume control is supported.

• Some Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices may not support the call reject

function.

• Some Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices may not support the phone

number display function.

4-38

Multimedia System

Operation during calls

Incoming call with

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology connected ➟ Select

[Accept].

(1) Call duration: Call duration display.

(2) Caller name: If the caller number is

in your contacts, the corresponding

name is displayed.

(3) Incoming phone number: Incoming

phone number is displayed.

(4) Keypad: Number keypad for

Automatic Response Service input

is displayed.

(5) Private: Call is transferred to a cell

phone.

(6)Outgoing Volume:Adjust outgoing

voice volume.

(7)End: End call.

Information

• Some Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices may not support the Private

function.

• The outgoing voice volume may vary

depending on the type of Bluetooth

device. If the outgoing voice volume is

too high or low, adjust the Outgoing

Volume.

Favorites

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Favorites] ➟

Favorites list displayed.

(1)Favorites list: A list of paired

favorites is displayed.

Connect a call when selected.

(2) Add to Favorites: Add a down-

loaded phone number to favorites.

(3) Delete: Delete a saved favorite.

Information

• Up to 20 favorites can be paired for

each paired Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device.

• Favorites can be accessed when the

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device they were paired from is con-

nected.

• The audio system does not down-

load favorites from Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices.

Favorites must be newly saved

before use.

• To add to favorites, contacts must be

downloaded first.

• Saved favorites are not updated

even if the contacts of the connected

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device are changed. In this case,

favorites need to be deleted and

added again.

4-39

Multimedia System

Call history

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Call history]

➟ Call history is displayed.

(1)Call history: Display the down-

loaded call history list.

Connect a call when selected.

(2) Sort by:Sort by all calls, dialed calls,

received calls or missed calls.

(3)Download: Download call history

from connected

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices.

Information

• Up to 50 dialed, received and missed

calls are saved.

• When the latest call history is

received, the existing call history is

deleted.

Contacts

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Contacts] ➟

Select letter (ABC) ➟ Contacts dis-

played.

(1)Contacts: Display downloaded

contacts.

Connect a call when selected.

(2) Download:Download contacts from

connected

Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology devices.

Information

• Only supported contacts format can

be downloaded and displayed from

the Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device, contacts from some applica-

tions will not be included.

• Up to 2,000 contacts can be saved.

• In some cases, additional confirmation

from your Bluetooth

Wireless

Technology device is necessary when

downloading contacts. If downloading

of contacts unsuccessful, consult your

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device's settings or the audio screen to

approve the download.

• Contacts without phone numbers

are not displayed.

4-40

Multimedia System

Dial

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio ➟ Select [Dial].

(1)Phone number entry window:The

phone number entered using the

keypad is displayed.

(2)Clear

- Press to delete individual digits.

- Press and hold to delete the

entire phone number.

(3)Keypad: Enter phone number.

(4)

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

Phone name

- The name of the connected

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is displayed.

- Contacts matching the keypad

number/letter input are displayed.

(5)Call

- Enter and select a phone num-

ber to call.

- Select without entering a phone

number to see the most recent

dialed call.

Connections

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio ➟ Select [Connections].

- For connections setting, refer to

Setup ➟ Select [Bluetooth] ➟

Select [Connections] page.

Settings

Press the [PHONE] button on the

audio ➟ Select [Settings].

- For phone Setup, refer to Setup

page ➟ Select [Bluetooth].

Siri

Information

Using Siri

• Android device is not supported to

use Siri.

• If you want to use Siri, you have to

connect your iOS device to multime-

dia system through Bluetooth

Wireless Technology. (Please check

whether your iOS device supports

Siri and turning Siri On)

• If the iOS version is changed, the

functions and response may be dif-

ferent according to the iOS device

and the latest version.

• Siri automatically stops in the fol-

lowing events.

1)Outgoing and incoming phone

calls.

2)Media (USB, etc.) is connected.

(Siri mode is maintained when

iPod

s are connected)

3)Rear view monitor is activated

(option).

4)Vehicle is started or engine is

turned off.

5)Screen transition buttons, such as

RADIO or MEDIA, are selected.

(Continued)

4-41

Multimedia System

(Continued)

6)When a pop-up message is dis-

played on the screen due to acci-

dental execution of Siri.

• The microphone is located above the

driver’s seat. To ensure proper Siri,

state your voice while maintaining

proper driving posture.

Starting Siri

Press the [VOICE] button on the

steering wheel remote control to

start Siri and see the screen.

(1)Speak: Re-start Siri.

(2)Exit: End Siri.

Information

• Functions and feedbacks from voice

commands via Siri are executed in

the iOS device.

• The Audio system only supports

"Phone" related functions, other

functions will be performed in your

iOS device.

Setup

Access Display, Sound, Date/Time,

Bluetooth, System, Screen Saver

and Display Off settings.

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system.

Display

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Display].

• Mode: Audio screen brightness can

be adjusted to the time of day.

• Illumination: The brightness of the

audio screen can be changed.

4-42

Multimedia System

Sound

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Sound].

• Position: Sound balance and pan-

ning can be adjusted.

• Tone: Sound tone color can be

adjusted.

• Speed dependent volume:

Automatically adjust volume based

on vehicle speed.

• Beep: Select whether to play a beep

sound when the screen is touched.

Date/Time

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Date/Time].

• Set Time: Set the time displayed on

the audio screen.

• Time Format: Choose between 12-

hour and 24-hour time formats.

• Set Date:Set the date displayed on

the audio screen.

Bluetooth

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Bluetooth].

• Connections: Control pairing, dele-

tion, connection and disconnection

Blluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices.

• Auto Connection Priority: Set the

connection priority of

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology devices when

the vehicle is started.

• Download Contacts: Contacts can

be downloaded from connected

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

devices.

• Bluetooth Voice Prompts*: Play or

mute voice prompts for

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology device pair-

ing, connection and errors.

* if equipped

Information

• When paired devices are deleted,

the call history and contacts of the

device saved to the audio system are

deleted.

•ForBluetooth

Wireless Technology

connections with low connection

priority, some time may be required

for the connection to be established.

• Contacts can be downloaded only

from the currently connected

Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device.

• If no Bluetooth

Wireless Technology

device is connected, the Download

Contacts button is disabled.

Date/Time Setting Distraction

Adjusting the date/time setting

while driving can result in a loss

of vehicle control that may lead

to an accident, severe personal-

injury, and death.

WARNING

4-43

Multimedia System

System

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [System].

• Memory Information: View My

Music memory usage.

• Language: Change the user lan-

guage.

• Default: Reset the audio system.

• System Information: At the System

Information screen, Software version

information, updates are available.

- System Update: At the System

Information screen, insert the

USB memory with the latest file

downloaded, and then select the

[Update] to begin updating. The

system with then reboot auto-

matically.

Information

• The system resets to the default val-

ues, and all saved data and settings

are lost.

• This product needs supplemented

software updates and additional

functions, which collectively may

take some time to complete, depend-

ing on the amount of data.

• If the Power is disconnected or the

USB is removed during an update,

the data might be damaged. Please

wait until the update is complete

while engine is on.

Screen Saver

Set the information displayed when

the audio system is switched off or

the screen is turned off.

Press the [SETUP] button on the audio

system ➟ Select [Screen Saver].

• Analog: An analog clock is dis-

played.

• Digital: A digital clock is displayed.

• None: No information is displayed.

Display Off

To prevent glare, the screen can be

turned off with the audio system in

operation.

Press the [SETUP] button on the

audio system ➟ Select [Display Off].

Information

Use 'Screen Saver' to set the informa-

tion to be displayed when the screen is

turned off.

FCC

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15

of the FCC Rules.These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a resi-

dential installation.

This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance

with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that

interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or tel-

evision reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to cor-

rect the interference by one or more of the following measures:

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void

your authority to operate this equipment.

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the radiator and your body.This trans-

mitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to

do so by the FCC.

DDEECCLLAARRAATTIIOONN OOFF CCOONNFFOORRMMIITTYY

4-44

Multimedia System

Driving your vehicle

Before Driving ........................................................5-4

Before Entering the Vehicle...........................................5-4

Before Starting ..................................................................5-4

Engine Start/Stop Button.....................................5-6

Engine Start/Stop Button Positions .............................5-7

Starting the Vehicle ..........................................................5-9

Turning Off the Vehicle.................................................5-11

Dual Clutch Transmission....................................5-12

Dual Clutch Transmission Operation ..........................5-12

Shift Lever Position........................................................5-16

Paddle Shifter ..................................................................5-19

Parking...............................................................................5-20

Good Driving Practices ..................................................5-20

Coasting Guide (Plug-in hybrid vehicle) ..........5-22

Braking System ....................................................5-23

Power Brakes...................................................................5-23

Disc Brake Wear Indicator ............................................5-24

Parking Brake...................................................................5-24

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ....................................5-26

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)................................5-28

Vehicle Stability Management (VSM).........................5-31

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC) ....................................5-33

Good Braking Practices.................................................5-33

Blind-spot Collision Warning (BCW) system ...5-34

BCW (Blind-spot Collision Warning)...........................5-35

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic Collision Warning).........5-37

Detecting sensor .............................................................5-40

Limitations of the system .............................................5-41

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist (FCA)

system....................................................................5-43

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-43

FCA Warning Message and System Control ............5-45

FCA Sensor .......................................................................5-47

System Malfunction .......................................................5-49

Limitations of the System.............................................5-51

Lane Keeping Assist (LKA) System...................5-56

LKA System Operation...................................................5-57

Warning Light and Message.........................................5-61

Driver's attention ............................................................5-62

LKA System Function Change......................................5-64

Driver Attention Warning (DAW) system .........5-66

System Setting and Activation.....................................5-66

Resetting the System.....................................................5-68

System Standby...............................................................5-68

System Malfunction .......................................................5-69

Cruise Control.......................................................5-71

Cruise Control Operation...............................................5-71

Smart Cruise Control System .............................5-76

Smart Cruise Control Speed .........................................5-77

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance.............................................................................5-82

Sensor to Detect Distance to the Vehicle Ahead ...5-84

To Adjust the Sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control ......................................................5-86

To Convert to Cruise Control Mode............................5-87

Limitations of the System.............................................5-87

Special Driving Conditions..................................5-93

Hazardous Driving Conditions......................................5-93

Rocking the Vehicle........................................................5-93

Smooth Cornering ...........................................................5-94

Driving at Night................................................................5-94

Driving in the Rain ..........................................................5-94

Driving in Flooded Areas...............................................5-95

Highway Driving...............................................................5-95

Winter Driving ......................................................5-96

Snow or Icy Conditions..................................................5-96

Winter Precautions.........................................................5-98

Vehicle Load Limit..............................................5-100

Tire Loading Information Label.................................5-101

Trailer Towing.....................................................5-105

5-3

Driving your vehicle

Carbon monoxide (CO) gas is toxic. Breathing CO can cause unconsciousness and death.

Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide which cannot be seen or smelled.

Do not inhale engine exhaust.

If at any time you smell engine exhaust inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. Exposure to CO can cause

unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.

The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If

you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the

vehicle, have the exhaust system checked as soon as possible by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.

Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Run the engine only

long enough to start the engine and to move the vehicle out of the garage.

Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle.

If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an

open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan control set to high so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

Keep the air intakes clear.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, keep the ventilation air intakes located in front of the windshield

clear of snow, ice, leaves, or other obstructions.

If you must drive with the liftgate open:

Close all windows.

Open instrument panel air vents.

Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face", and the fan control set to high.

WARNING

5-4

Driving your vehicle

Before Entering the Vehicle

• Be sure all windows, outside mir-

ror(s), and outside lights are clean

and unobstructed.

• Remove frost, snow, or ice.

• Visually check the tires for uneven

wear and damage.

• Check under the vehicle for any

sign of leaks.

• Be sure there are no obstacles

behind you if you intend to back up.

Before Starting

• Make sure the hood, the liftgate,

and the doors are securely closed

and locked.

• Adjust the position of the seat and

steering wheel.

• Adjust the inside and outside

rearview mirrors.

• Verify all the lights work.

• Fasten your seatbelt.Check that all

passengers have fastened their

seatbelts.

• Check the gauges and indicators in

the instrument panel and the mes-

sages on the instrument display

when the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ON position.

• Check that any items you are car-

rying are stored properly or fas-

tened down securely.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-

ety of automobile components

including components found in

the interior furnishings in a

vehicle, contain or emit harmful

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

birth defects and reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids

contained in vehicles and cer-

tain products of components

contain or emit chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer and birth

defects or other reproductive

harm.

WARNING

BBEEFFOORREE DDRRIIVVIINNGG

5-5

Driving your vehicle

NEVER drink or take drugs and

drive.

Drinking or taking drugs and driv-

ing is dangerous and may result

in an accident and SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH.

Drunk driving is the number

one contributor to the highway

death toll each year. Even a

small amount of alcohol will

affect your reflexes, percep-

tions and judgment. Just one

drink can reduce your ability to

respond to changing conditions

and emergencies and your reac-

tion time gets worse with each

additional drink.

Driving while under the influ-

ence of drugs is as dangerous

or more dangerous than driving

under the influence of alcohol.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

You are much more likely to have

a serious accident if you drink or

take drugs and drive. If you are

drinking or taking drugs, don't

drive. Do not ride with a driver

who has been drinking or taking

drugs.Choose a designated driv-

er or call a taxi.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, take the fol-

lowing precautions:

• ALWAYS wear your seat belt.

All passengers must be prop-

erly belted whenever the vehi-

cle is moving. For more infor-

mation, refer to "Seat Belts" in

chapter 2.

• Always drive defensively.

Assume other drivers or pedes-

trians may be careless and

make mistakes.

• Stay focused on the task of

driving. Driver distraction can

cause accidents.

• Leave plenty of space between

you and the vehicle in front of

you.

WARNING

5-6

Whenever the front door is opened,

the Engine Start/Stop button will illu-

minate and will go off 30 seconds

after the door is closed.

EENNGGIINNEE SSTTAARRTT//SSTTOOPP BBUUTTTTOONN

Driving your vehicle

To reduce risk of serious injury

or death, NEVER allow children

or any person who is unfamiliar

with the vehicle to touch the

Engine Start/Stop button or

related parts. Unexpected and

sudden vehicle movement can

occur.

WARNING

OAE056001

• NEVER press the Engine

Start/Stop button while the

vehicle is in motion except in

an emergency. This will result

in the engine turning off and

loss of power assist for the

steering and brake systems.

(Continued)

WARNING

To turn the vehicle off in an

emergency:

Press and hold the Engine

Start/Stop button for more than

two seconds OR rapidly press

and release the Engine Start/

Stop button three times (within

three seconds).

If the vehicle is still moving, you

can restart the engine without

depressing the brake pedal by

pressing the Engine Start/Stop

button with the shift lever in the

N (Neutral) position.

WARNING

(Continued)

This may lead to loss of direc-

tional control and braking

function, which could cause

an accident.

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, set the parking

brake, press the Engine Start/

Stop button to the OFF posi-

tion, and take the Smart Key

with you. Unexpected vehicle

movement may occur if these

precautions are not followed.

• NEVER reach through the

steering wheel for the Engine

Start/Stop button or any other

control while the vehicle is in

motion. The presence of your

hand or arm in this area may

cause a loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

5-7

Driving your vehicle

Engine Start/Stop Button Positions

Button Position Action Notice

OFF

To turn off the vehicle, press the Engine

Start/Stop button with shift lever in P (Park).

When you press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton without the shift lever in P (Park), the

Engine Start/Stop button does not turn to the

OFF position, but turns to the ACC position.

ACC

Press the Engine Start/Stop button when the

button is in the OFF position without depress-

ing the brake pedal.

Some electrical accessories are usable.

If you leave the Engine Start/Stop button in the

ACC position for more than one hour, the bat-

tery power will turn off automatically to prevent

the battery from discharging.

5-8

Driving your vehicle

Button Position Action Notice

Press the Engine Start/Stop button while it is

in the ACC position without depressing the

brake pedal.

The warning lights can be checked before

the vehicle is started.

Do not leave the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ON position when the vehicle is not in the

ready ( ) mode to prevent the battery from

discharging.

START

To start the vehicle, depress the brake pedal

and press the Engine Start/Stop button with

the shift lever in the P (Park) position.

If you press the Engine Start/Stop button with-

out depressing the brake pedal, the vehicle

does not start and the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton changes as follows:

OFF

→→

ACC

→→

OFF

However, the vehicle may start if you depress

the brake pedal within 0.5 second after press-

ing the Engine Start/Stop button from the OFF

position.

5-9

Driving your vehicle

Starting the Vehicle

Information

• The vehicle will start by pressing the

Engine Start/Stop button, only when

the smart key is in the vehicle.

• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-

cle, if it is far away from the driver,

the vehicle may not start.

• When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ACC or ON position, if any

door is open, the system checks for

the smart key. If the smart key is not

in the vehicle, the " " indicator

will blink and the warning "Key not

in vehicle" will come on and if all

doors are closed, the chime will also

sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the

smart key in the vehicle when in the

ACC position or if the vehicle is in

the ready ( ) mode.

1. Always carry the smart key with

you.

2. Make sure the parking brake is

applied.

3. Make sure the shift lever is in P

(Park).

4. Depress the brake pedal.

5. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton. If the vehicle starts, the " "

indicator will come on.

Information

• Do not wait for the engine to warm

up while the vehicle remains station-

ary. Start driving at moderate

engine speeds. (Aggressive accelerat-

ing and decelerating should be

avoided.)

• Always start the vehicle with your

foot on the brake pedal. Do not

depress the accelerator while start-

ing the vehicle. Do not rev the

engine while warming it up.

• Always wear appropriate shoes

when operating your vehicle.

Unsuitable shoes, such as

high heels, ski boots, sandals,

flip-flops, etc., may interfere

with your ability to use the

brake and accelerator pedals.

• Do not start the vehicle with the

accelerator pedal depressed.

The vehicle can move and lead

to an accident.

• Wait until the engine rpm is

normal. The vehicle may sud-

denly move if the brake pedal

is released when the rpm is

high.

WARNING

5-10

Driving your vehicle

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

• If the " " indicator turns off

while you are in motion, do not

attempt to shift to the P (Park)

position.

If traffic and road conditions

permit, you may put the shift

lever in the N (Neutral) position

while the vehicle is still moving

and press the Engine Start/Stop

button in an attempt to restart

the engine.

• Do not push or tow your vehicle

to start the vehicle.

To prevent damage to the vehicle:

When the stop lamp switch fuse is

blown, you can't start the engine

normally. Replace the fuse with a

new one. If you are not able to

replace the fuse, you can start the

vehicle by pressing and holding

the Engine Start/Stop button for

10 seconds with the Engine Start/

Stop button in the ACC position.

Do not press the Engine Start/Stop

button for more than 10 seconds

except when the stop lamp switch

fuse is blown.

For your safety always depress

the brake pedal before starting the

vehicle.

Information

If the smart key battery is weak or the

smart key does not work correctly,

you can start the engine by pressing

the Engine Start/Stop button with the

smart key in the direction of the pic-

ture above.

NOTICENOTICE

OAE056002

5-11

Driving your vehicle

Turning Off the Vehicle

1. Depress the brake pedal fully.

2. Shift to P (Park).

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Press the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton to turn the vehicle off.

5. Make sure the " " indicator

light on the instrument cluster is

turned off.

If the " " indicator light on

the instrument cluster is still

on, the vehicle is not turned off

and can move when the gear is

in any position except P (Park).

CAUTION

5-12

Driving your vehicle

Dual Clutch Transmission

Operation

The dual clutch transmission has six

forward speeds and one reverse

speed.

The individual speeds are selected

automatically when the shift lever is

in the D (Drive) position.

• The dual clutch transmission can

be thought of as an automatically

shifting manual transmission. It

gives the driving feel of a manual

transmission, yet provides the

ease of a fully automatic transmis-

sion.

• When D (Drive) is selected, the

transmission will automatically shift

through the gears similar to a con-

ventional automatic transmission.

Unlike a traditional automatic

transmission, the gear shifting can

sometimes be felt and heard as the

actuators engage the clutches and

the gears are selected.

• The dual clutch transmission incor-

porates a dry-type dual clutch

mechanism, which allows for better

acceleration performance and

increased fuel efficiency while driv-

ing.

DDUUAALL CCLLUUTTCCHH TTRRAANNSSMMIISSSSIIOONN

Move shift lever.

Press the shift button, then move shift lever.

Depress the brake pedal, press the shift button, and then move shift lever.

OAE056004N

❈ To move the shift lever from/to P (Parking) or between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive), you must depress the brake pedal for the vehicle to stand still.

Manual shift mode

5-13

Driving your vehicle

But it differs from a conventional

automatic transmission because it

does not incorporate a torque con-

verter. Instead, the transition from

one gear to the next is managed by

clutch slip, especially at lower

speeds.

As a result, shifts are sometimes

more noticeable, and a light vibra-

tion can be felt as the transmission

shaft speed is matched with the

engine shaft speed. This is a nor-

mal condition of the dual clutch

transmission.

• The dry-type clutch transfers

torque more directly and provides

a direct-drive feeling which may

feel different from a conventional

automatic transmission. This may

be more noticeable when launch-

ing the vehicle from a stop or when

traveling at low, stop-and-go vehi-

cle speeds.

• When rapidly accelerating from a

lower vehicle speed, the engine

rpm may increase dramatically as

a result of clutch slip as the dual

clutch transmission selects the cor-

rect gear. This is a normal condi-

tion.

• When accelerating from a stop on

an incline, press the accelerator

smoothly and gradually to avoid

any shudder feeling or jerkiness.

• When traveling at a lower vehicle

speed, if you release the accelera-

tor pedal quickly, you may feel

engine braking before the trans-

mission changes gears. This

engine braking feeling is similar to

operating a manual transmission at

low speed.

• When driving downhill, you may

wish to move the gear shift lever to

Manual Shift mode and downshift

to a lower gear in order to control

your speed without using the brake

pedal excessively.

• When you turn the vehicle on and

off, you may hear clicking sounds

as the system goes through a self-

test.This is a normal sound for the

dual clutch transmission.

• During the first 1000 miles (1,500

km), you may feel that the vehicle

may not be smooth when acceler-

ating at low speed. During this

break-in period, the shift quality

and performance of your new vehi-

cle is continuously optimized.

To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death:

• ALWAYS check the surround-

ing areas near your vehicle for

people, especially children,

before shifting a vehicle into

D (Drive) or R (Reverse).

• Before leaving the driver's

seat, always make sure the

shift lever is in the P (Park)

position, then set the parking

brake, and place the Engine

Start/Stop button in the OFF

position. Unexpected and

sudden vehicle movement

can occur if these precautions

are not followed.

• Do not use aggressive engine

braking (shifting from a high-

er gear to a lower gear) on

slippery roads. This could

cause the tires to slip and may

result in an accident.

WARNING

5-14

Driving your vehicle

• Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into D (Drive) or

R (Reverse).

• Do not put the shift lever in N

(Neutral) while driving.

• To avoid damage to your trans-

mission, do not try to accelerate

in R (Reverse) or any forward

gear position with the brakes

applied.

• When stopped on a slope, do

not hold the vehicle with accel-

erator pedal. Use the brake

pedal or the parking brake.

DCT Warning Messages

Steep Grade

This warning message is displayed

when vehicle is driven slowly on a

grade and the vehicle detects that

the brake pedal is not applied.

Driving up hills or on steep grades:

• To hold the vehicle on an incline

use the foot brake or the parking

brake.

• When in stop-and-go traffic on an

incline, allow a gap to form ahead

of you before moving the vehicle

forward. Then hold the vehicle on

the incline with the foot brake.

• If the vehicle is held or creeping

forward on an incline by applying

the accelerator pedal, the clutch

and transmission may overheat

which can result in damage.At this

time, a warning message will

appear on the LCD display.

• If the LCD display warning is

active, the foot brake must be

applied.

• Ignoring the warnings can lead to

damage to the transmission.

To hold the vehicle on a hill use

the foot brake or the parking

brake. If the vehicle is held by

applying the accelerator pedal on

a hill, the clutch and transmission

will be overheated resulting in

damage.

NOTICE

OTLE055018

Due to transmission failure, you

may not continue to drive and

the position indicator (D, P) on

the instrument cluster will bilnk.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer and have the system

checked.

WARNING

5-15

Driving your vehicle

Transmission High Temperature

• Under certain conditions, such as

repeated stop-and-go launches on

steep grades, sudden take off or

acceleration, or other harsh driving

conditions, the transmission clutch

temperatures will increase exces-

sively.

• When the clutch temperatures are

too high, the "Transmission temp is

high! Stop safely" warning mes-

sage will appear on the LCD dis-

play, a chime will sound, and the

transmission shifting may not be

smooth.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

• If you ignore this warning, the driv-

ing condition may become worse.

You may experience abrupt shifts,

frequent shifts, or jerkiness.

• When the message "Trans cooled.

Resume driving." appears you can

continue to drive your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

Transmission Overheated

• If the vehicle continues to be driv-

en and the clutch temperatures

reach the maximum temperature

limit, the "Transmission Hot! Park

with engine on" warning will be dis-

played.When this occurs the clutch

is disabled until the clutch cools to

normal temperatures.

• The warning will display a time to

wait for the transmission to cool.

• If this occurs, pull over to a safe

location, stop the vehicle with the

engine running, apply the brakes

and shift the vehicle to P (Park),

and allow the transmission to cool.

OTLE055023

OAE056196N/OTLE055027

5-16

Driving your vehicle

• When the message "Trans cooled.

Resume driving." appears you can

continue to drive your vehicle.

• When possible, drive the vehicle

smoothly.

If any of the warning messages in

the LCD display continue to blink, for

your safety, contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

Shift Lever Position

P (Park)

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into P (Park).

To shift from P (Park), you must depr

ess firmly on the brake pedal and

make sure your foot is off the accel-

erator pedal.

If you have done all of the above

and still cannot shift the lever out

of P (Park), see "Shift-Lock

Release" in this section.

The shift lever must be in P (Park)

before turning the vehicle off.

• Shifting into P (Park) while the

vehicle is in motion may

cause you to lose control of

the vehicle.

• After the vehicle has stopped,

always make sure the shift

lever is in P (Park), apply the

parking brake, and turn the

vehicle off.

• When parking on an incline,

place the shift lever in Park

and apply the parking brake to

prevent the vehicle from

rolling downhill.

• Do not use the P (Park) posi-

tion in place of the parking

brake.

WARNING

5-17

Driving your vehicle

R (Reverse)

Use this position to drive the vehicle

backward.

Always come to a complete stop

before shifting into or out of R

(Reverse); you may damage the

transmission if you shift into R

(Reverse) while the vehicle is in

motion.

N (Neutral)

The wheels and transmission are not

engaged.

Always depress the brake pedal

when you are shifting from N

(Neutral) to another gear.

D (Drive)

This is the normal driving position.

The transmission will automatically

shift through a six-gear sequence,

providing the best fuel economy and

power.

For extra power when passing anoth-

er vehicle or driving uphill depress

the accelerator pedal further until

you feel the transmission downshift

to a lower gear.

If you drive the vehicle with the shift

lever in D (Drive), the vehicle will

automatically change to ECO mode.

The indicator will illuminate on

the instrument cluster.

When driving in ECO mode, the vehi-

cle improves fuel efficiency for eco-

friendly driving.

S (Sport)

If you drive the vehicle with the shift

lever in S (Sport), the vehicle will

automatically change to SPORT

mode. The indicator will illumi-

nate on the instrument cluster.

When driving in SPORT mode, the

vehicle provides sporty but firm rid-

ing.

Information

In SPORT mode, the fuel efficiency

may decrease.

NOTICE

Do not drive with the shift lever

in N (Neutral).The engine brake

will not work and lead to an

accident.

WARNING

Do not shift into gear unless

your foot is firmly on the brake

pedal. Shifting into gear when

the engine is running at high

speed can cause the vehicle to

move very rapidly. You could

lose control of the vehicle and

hit people or objects.

WARNING

Depress the brake pedal fully to

prevent unintended movement

when stopping the vehicle.

CAUTION

5-18

Driving your vehicle

Manual shift mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or

in motion, manual shift mode is

selected by pushing the shift lever

from the D (Drive) position into the

manual gate. To return to D (Drive)

range operation, push the shift lever

back into the main gate.

In Manual Shift Mode, moving the

shift lever backwards and forwards

will allow you to select the desired

range of gears for the current driving

conditions.

+ (Up) : Push the lever forward once

to shift up one gear.

- (Down) : Pull the lever backwards

once to shift down one

gear.

Information

• Only the six forward gears can be

selected. To reverse or park the

vehicle, move the shift lever to the R

(Reverse) or P (Park) position as

required.

• Downshifts are made automatically

when the vehicle slows down. When

the vehicle stops, 1

gear is automat-

ically selected.

• When the engine rpm approaches

the red zone the transmission will

upshift automatically.

• If the driver presses the lever to

+ (Up) or - (Down) position, the

transmission may not make the

requested gear change if the next

gear is outside of the allowable

engine rpm range. The driver must

execute upshifts in accordance with

road conditions, taking care to keep

the engine rpms below the red zone.

Shift-lock system

For your safety, the dual clutch trans-

mission has a shift-lock system

which prevents shifting the transmis-

sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)

unless the brake pedal is depressed.

To shift the transmission from P

(Park) into R (Reverse):

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the vehicle or place the

Engine Start/Stop button in the

ON position.

3. Move the shift lever.

OAE056012N

((

))

((

))

5-19

Driving your vehicle

Shift-lock release

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position into R (Reverse)

position with the brake pedal

depressed, continue depressing the

brake, and then do the following:

1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton in the OFF position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-

ering the shift-lock release access

hole.

4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw-

driver) into the access hole and

press down on the tool.

5. Move the shift lever.

6. Remove the tool from the shift-

lock override access hole then

install the cap.

If you need to use the shift-lock

release, have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

immediately.

Paddle Shifter (if equipped)

The paddle shifter is functional when

the shift lever is in the D (Drive) or S

(Sport) position, or the manual shift

mode.

The paddle shifter will operate when

the vehicle speed is more than 3

mph (5 km/h).

Pull the [+] or [-] paddle shifter once

to shift up or down one gear and the

system changes from automatic

mode to manual mode.

OAE056011N

OPD056015

5-20

Driving your vehicle

• The system changes from manual

mode to automatic mode when

- the vehicle speed is lower than 3

mph (5 km/h),

- you depress the accelerator

pedal for more than 5 seconds,

- you pull the [+] paddle shifter for

more than 1 second, or

- you move the shift lever from D

(Drive) to S (Sport) or manual

shift mode (+, -) and then back to

D (Drive).

Information

If the [+] and [-] paddle shifters are

pulled at the same time, gear shift may

not occur.

Parking

Always come to a complete stop and

continue to depress the brake pedal.

Move the shift lever into the P (Park)

position, apply the parking brake,

and place the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton in the OFF position.Take the key

with you when exiting the vehicle.

Good Driving Practices

• Never move the shift lever from P

(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other

position with the accelerator pedal

depressed.

• Never move the shift lever into P

(Park) when the vehicle is in

motion.

Be sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before you attempt to shift

into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).

• Do not move the shift lever to N

(Neutral) when driving. Doing so

may result in an accident because

of a loss of engine braking and the

transmission could be damaged.

• Do not drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

consistent pedal pressure can

result in the brakes overheating,

brake wear and possibly even

brake failure.

• Depressing both accelerator and

brake pedals at the same time can

trigger logic for engine power

reduction to assure vehicle decel-

eration. Vehicle acceleration will

resume after the brake pedal is

released.

When you stay in the vehicle

with the engine running, be

careful not to depress the accel-

erator pedal for a long period of

time. The engine or exhaust

system may overheat and start

a fire.

The exhaust gas and the

exhaust system are very hot.

Keep away from the exhaust

system components.

Do not stop or park over flam-

mable materials, such as dry

grass, paper or leaves. They

may ignite and cause a fire.

WARNING

5-21

Driving your vehicle

• When driving in Manual Shift

Mode, slow down before shifting to

a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower

gear may not be engaged if the

engine rpms are outside of the

allowable range.

• Always apply the parking brake

when leaving the vehicle. Do not

depend on placing the transmis-

sion in P (Park) to keep the vehicle

from moving.

• Exercise extreme caution when

driving on a slippery surface. Be

especially careful when braking,

accelerating or shifting gears.On a

slippery surface, an abrupt change

in vehicle speed can cause the

drive wheels to lose traction and

may cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

• Optimum vehicle performance and

economy is obtained by smoothly

depressing and releasing the

accelerator.

(Continued)

• In the event your vehicle

leaves the roadway, do not

steer sharply. Instead, slow

down before pulling back into

the travel lanes.

• HYUNDAI recommends you

follow all posted speed limits.

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH:

• ALWAYS wear your seatbelt.

In a collision, an unbelted

occupant is significantly more

likely to be seriously injured

or killed than a properly belt-

ed occupant.

• Avoid high speeds when cor-

nering or turning.

• Do not make quick steering

wheel movements, such as

sharp lane changes or fast,

sharp turns.

• The risk of rollover is greatly

increased if you lose control

of your vehicle at highway

speeds.

• Loss of control often occurs if

two or more wheels drop off

the roadway and the driver

over steers to reenter the

roadway.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-22

The coasting guide function informs

the driver when to take the foot off

from the accelerator by anticipating a

decelerating event* based on the

analysis of driving routes and road

conditions of the navigation. It

encourages the driver to remove foot

from the pedal and allow coasting

down the road with EV motor only.

This helps prevent unnecessary fuel

consumption and increases fuel effi-

ciency.

Information

Example of a deceleration event is

making a right/left turn, driving

through a rotary, entering or exiting a

highway (freeway), etc.

The driver can activate the coasting

guide by placing the ignition switch in

the ON position and by selecting:

• User settings

User Settings → Driver Assistance

→ Coasting Guide

For the explanation of the system,

press and hold the [OK] button.

Operation conditions

To activate the system, take the fol-

lowing procedures. Enter your desti-

nation information on the navigation

and select the driving route. Have the

vehicle in ECO mode by driving the

vehicle in D (Drive). Then, satisfy the

following.

- The operational speed is above 25

mph (40 km/h).

Information

The operating speed may vary due to

difference between instrument cluster

and navigation effected by tire infla-

tion level.

Information

Coasting guide is only a supplemental

system to assist with fuel-efficient

driving. Thus, the operating condi-

tions may be different in accordance

with traffic/road conditions (i.e. driv-

ing in a traffic jam, driving on a slope,

driving on a curve). Thus, take the

actual driving conditions into consid-

eration, such as distances from the

vehicles ahead/ behind, while refer-

ring to the coasting guide system as

guidance.

CCOOAASSTTIINNGG GGUUIIDDEE ((PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE,, IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Driving your vehicle

OAEPH047504L/OAE046505N

■ Type A ■ Type B

5-23

Driving your vehicle

Power Brakes

Your vehicle has power-assisted

brakes that adjust automatically

through normal usage.

If the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode or the vehicle is turned

off while driving, the power assist for

the brakes will not work.You can still

stop your vehicle by applying greater

force to the brake pedal than typical.

The stopping distance, however, will

be longer than with power brakes.

When the vehicle is not in the ready

( ) mode, the reserve brake

power is partially depleted each time

the brake pedal is applied. Do not

pump the brake pedal when the

power assist has been interrupted.

Pump the brake pedal only when

necessary to maintain steering con-

trol on slippery surfaces.

BBRRAAKKIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

Take the following precautions:

• Do not drive with your foot

resting on the brake pedal.

This will create abnormal high

brake temperatures, exces-

sive brake lining and pad

wear, and increased stopping

distances.

• When descending down a

long or steep hill, move the

gear shift lever to Manual

Shift Mode and manually

downshift to a lower gear in

order to control your speed

without using the brake pedal

excessively. Applying the

brakes continuously will

cause the brakes to overheat

and could result in a tempo-

rary loss of braking perform-

ance.

(Continued)

• Wet brakes may impair the

vehicle's ability to safely slow

down; the vehicle may also

pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Applying

the brakes lightly will indicate

whether they have been

affected in this way. Always

test your brakes in this fash-

ion after driving through deep

water.To dry the brakes, light-

ly tap the brake pedal to heat

up the brakes while maintain-

ing a safe forward speed until

brake performance returns to

normal. Avoid driving at high

speeds until the brakes func-

tion correctly.

WARNING

5-24

Driving your vehicle

Do not depress the brake pedal

continuously without the " "

indicator ON. The battery may be

discharged.

• Some noise and vibration may

occur during braking. This is

normal.

• In below cases, some electric

brake pump noise and motor

vibration may occur temporarily.

This is normal operation.

- When the pedal is depressed

very quickly

- When the pedal is depressed

multiple times in short inter-

vals

- When the ABS function is acti-

vated during braking

Disc Brake Wear Indicator

When your brake pads are worn and

new pads are required, you will hear

a high pitched warning sound from

your front or rear brakes. You may

hear this sound come and go or it

may occur whenever you depress

the brake pedal.

Note that some driving conditions or

climates may cause a brake squeal

when you first apply (or lightly apply)

the brakes. This is normal and does

not indicate a problem with your

brakes.

To avoid costly brake repairs, do

not continue to drive with worn

brake pads.

Information

Always replace brake pads as com-

plete front or rear axle sets.

Parking Brake

Always set the parking brake before

leaving the vehicle. To apply the

parking brake:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal

down as far as possible.

NOTICE

OAE056014

5-25

Driving your vehicle

To release:

Firmly depress the brake pedal.

Depress the parking brake pedal

down and it will release automatical-

ly.

If the parking brake does not release

or does not release all the way, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE056013

• Whenever leaving the vehicle

or parking, always come to a

complete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into P (Park)

position, then apply the park-

ing brake, and place the

Engine Start/Stop button in

the OFF position.

Vehicles with the parking

brake not fully engaged are at

risk for moving inadvertently

and causing injury to yourself

or others.

• NEVER allow anyone who is

unfamiliar with the vehicle to

touch the parking brake. If the

parking brake is released

unintentionally, serious injury

may occur.

• Only release the parking

brake when you are seated

inside the vehicle with your

foot firmly on the brake pedal.

WARNING

To reduce the risk of SERIOUS

INJURY or DEATH, do not oper-

ate the parking brake while the

vehicle is moving except in an

emergency situation. It could

damage the brake system and

lead to an accident.

WARNING

5-26

Driving your vehicle

• Do not apply the accelerator

pedal while the parking brake is

engaged. If you depress the

accelerator pedal with the park-

ing brake engaged, warning will

sound. Damage to the parking

brake may occur.

• Driving with the parking brake

on can overheat the braking sys-

tem and cause premature wear

or damage to brake parts. Make

sure the parking brake is

released and the Brake Warning

Light is off before driving.

Check the Parking

Brake Warning Light

by placing the Engine

Start/Stop button to

the ON position (vehi-

cle not in the ready

( ) mode).

This light will be illuminated when the

parking brake is applied with the

Engine Start/Stop button in the

START or ON position.

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is released and the Brake

Warning Light is OFF.

If the Parking Brake Warning Light

remains on after the parking brake is

released while the vehicle is in the

ready ( ) mode, there may be a

malfunction in the brake system.

Immediate attention is necessary.

If at all possible, cease driving the

vehicle immediately.If that is not pos-

sible, use extreme caution while

operating the vehicle and only con-

tinue to drive the vehicle until you

can reach a safe location.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

NOTICE

An Anti-Lock Braking System

(ABS) or an Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system will not

prevent accidents due to

improper or dangerous driving

maneuvers. Even though vehi-

cle control is improved during

emergency braking, always

maintain a safe distance

between you and objects ahead

of you. Vehicle speeds should

always be reduced during

extreme road conditions. The

braking distance for cars

equipped with ABS or ESC may

be longer than for those without

these systems in the following

road conditions.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-27

Driving your vehicle

ABS is an electronic braking system

that helps prevent a braking skid.

ABS allows the driver to steer and

brake at the same time.

Using ABS

To obtain the maximum benefit from

your ABS in an emergency situation,

do not attempt to modulate your

brake pressure and do not try to

pump your brakes. Depress your

brake pedal as hard as possible.

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This is

normal and it means your ABS is

active.

ABS does not reduce the time or dis-

tance it takes to stop the vehicle.

Always maintain a safe distance from

the vehicle in front of you.

ABS will not prevent a skid that

results from sudden changes in

direction, such as trying to take a

corner too fast or making a sudden

lane change. Always drive at a safe

speed for the road and weather con-

ditions.

ABS cannot prevent a loss of stabili-

ty. Always steer moderately when

braking hard. Severe or sharp steer-

ing wheel movement can still cause

your vehicle to veer into oncoming

traffic or off the road.

On loose or uneven road surfaces,

operation of the anti-lock brake sys-

tem may result in a longer stopping

distance than for vehicles equipped

with a conventional brake system.

The ABS warning light ( ) will stay

on for several seconds after the

Engine Start/Stop button is in the ON

position. During that time, the ABS

will go through self-diagnosis and the

light will go off if everything is nor-

mal. If the light stays on, you may

have a problem with your ABS.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

(Continued)

Drive your vehicle at reduced

speeds during the following

conditions:

• Rough, gravel or snow-cov-

ered roads.

• On roads where the road sur-

face is pitted or has different

surface height.

• Tire chains are installed on

your vehicle.

The safety features of an ABS

or ESC equipped vehicle should

not be tested by high speed

driving or cornering.This could

endanger the safety of yourself

or others.

5-28

Driving your vehicle

Information

When you jump start your vehicle

because of a drained battery, the ABS

warning light ( ) may turn on at the

same time. This happens because of

the low battery voltage. It does not

mean your ABS is malfunctioning.

Have the battery recharged before

driving the vehicle.

Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)

The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) system helps to stabilize the

vehicle during cornering maneuvers.

ESC checks where you are steering

and where the vehicle is actually

going. ESC applies braking pressure

to any one of the vehicle's brakes

and intervenes in the engine man-

agement system to assist the driver

with keeping the vehicle on the

intended path. It is not a substitute

for safe driving practices. Always

adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

When you drive on a road hav-

ing poor traction, such as an icy

road, and apply your brakes

continuously, the ABS will be

active continuously and the

ABS warning light ( ) may

illuminate. Pull your car over to

a safe place and turn the vehicle

off.

Restart the vehicle. If the ABS

warning light is off, then your

ABS system is normal.

Otherwise, you may have a

problem with your ABS system.

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

CAUTION

If the ABS warning light ( ) is

on and stays on, you may have

a problem with the ABS. Your

power brakes will work normal-

ly. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death, contact your

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as

possible.

WARNING

OAEPH057016

5-29

Driving your vehicle

ESC operation

ESC ON condition

When the Engine Start/Stop button

is in the ON position, the ESC and

the ESC OFF indicator lights illumi-

nate for approximately three sec-

onds. After both lights go off, the

ESC is enabled.

When operating

When the ESC is in opera-

tion, the ESC indicator light

blinks:

• When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may lock the

wheels, you may hear sounds from

the brakes, or feel a corresponding

sensation in the brake pedal. This

is normal and it means your ESC is

active.

• When the ESC activates, the vehi-

cle may not respond to the accel-

erator as it does under routine con-

ditions.

• If the Cruise Control was in use

when the ESC activates, the

Cruise Control automatically disen-

gages. The Cruise Control can be

reengaged when the road condi-

tions allow. See "Cruise Control

System" later in this chapter. (if

equipped)

• When moving out of the mud or

driving on a slippery road, the

engine RPM (revolutions per

minute) may not increase even if

you press the accelerator pedal

deeply. This is to maintain the sta-

bility and traction of the vehicle and

does not indicate a problem.

ESC OFF condition

To cancel ESC operation :

• State 1

Press the ESC OFF button briefly.

The ESC OFF indicator light and

message will illuminate. In this state,

the traction control function of ESC

(engine management) is disabled,

but the brake control function of ESC

(braking management) still operates.

Never drive too fast for the road

conditions or too quickly when

cornering. The ESC system will

not prevent accidents.

Excessive speed in turns, abrupt

maneuvers, and hydroplaning

on wet surfaces can result in

severe accidents.

WARNING

■ Type A ■ Type B

OLF054101N/OAE056018L

5-30

Driving your vehicle

• State 2

Press and hold the ESC OFF button

continuously for more than 3 sec-

onds. The ESC OFF indicator light

and message illuminates and a

warning chime sounds. In this state,

both the traction control function of

ESC (engine management) and the

brake control function of ESC (brak-

ing management) are disabled.

If the Engine Start/Stop button is

placed to the OFF position when

ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon

restarting the vehicle, the ESC will

automatically turn on again.

Indicator lights

When the Engine Start/Stop button

is placed to the ON position, the ESC

indicator light illuminates, then goes

off if the ESC system is operating

normally.

The ESC indicator light blinks when-

ever the ESC is operating.

If ESC indicator light stays on, your

vehicle may have a malfunction with

the ESC system. When this warning

light illuminates have your vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

The ESC OFF indicator light comes

on when the ESC is turned off.

Driving with wheels and tires with

different sizes may cause the ESC

system to malfunction. Before

replacing tires, make sure all four

tires and wheels are the same

size. Never drive the vehicle with

different sized wheels and tires

installed.

NOTICE

■ ESC indicator light (blinks)

■ ESC OFF indicator light (comes on)

When the ESC is blinking, this

indicates the ESC is active:

Drive slowly and NEVER attempt

to accelerate. NEVER turn the

ESC off while the ESC indicator

light is blinking or you may lose

control of the vehicle resulting in

an accident.

WARNING

■ Type A ■ Type B

OLF054100N/OAE056020L

5-31

Driving your vehicle

ESC OFF usage

When Driving

The ESC OFF mode should only be

used briefly to help free the vehicle if

stuck in snow or mud by temporarily

stopping operation of the ESC to

maintain wheel torque.

To turn ESC off while driving, press

the ESC OFF button while driving on

a flat road surface.

To prevent damage to the trans-

mission:

• Do not allow wheel(s) of one

axle to spin excessively while

the ESC, ABS, and parking brake

warning lights are displayed.

The repairs would not be cov-

ered by the vehicle warranty.

Reduce engine power and do

not spin the wheel(s) excessive-

ly while these lights are dis-

played.

• When operating the vehicle on a

dynamometer, make sure the

ESC is turned off (ESC OFF light

illuminated).

Information

Turning the ESC off does not affect

ABS or standard brake system opera-

tion.

Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM)

The Vehicle Stability Management

(VSM) is a function of the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system. It

helps ensure the vehicle stays stable

when accelerating or braking sud-

denly on wet, slippery and rough

roads where traction over the four

tires can suddenly become uneven.

NOTICE

Take the following precautions

when using the Vehicle Stability

Management (VSM):

• ALWAYS check the speed and

the distance to the vehicle

ahead. The VSM is not a sub-

stitute for safe driving prac-

tices.

• Never drive too fast for the

road conditions.The VSM sys-

tem will not prevent acci-

dents. Excessive speed in bad

weather, slippery and uneven

roads can result in severe

accidents.

WARNING

5-32

Driving your vehicle

VSM operation

VSM ON condition

The VSM operates when:

• The Electronic Stability Control

(ESC) is on.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 9 mph (15 km/h) on curve

roads.

• Vehicle speed is approximately

above 12 mph (20 km/h) when the

vehicle is braking on rough roads.

When operating

When you apply your brakes under

conditions which may activate the

ESC, you may hear sounds from the

brakes, or feel a corresponding sen-

sation in the brake pedal.This is nor-

mal and it means your VSM is active.

The VSM does not operate when:

• Driving on a banked road such

as gradient or incline.

• Driving rearward.

• ESC OFF indicator light is on.

• EPS (Electric Power Steering)

warning light ( ) is on or

blinks.

Driving with wheels and tires with dif-

ferent sizes may cause the ESC sys-

tem to malfunction. Before replacing

tires, make sure all four tires and

wheels are the same size. Never

drive the vehicle with different sized

tires and wheels installed.

NOTICE

If ESC indicator light ( ) or

EPS warning light ( ) stays on

or blinks, your vehicle may have

a malfunction with the VSM sys-

tem. When the warning light illu-

minates, have your vehicle

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

WARNING

5-33

Driving your vehicle

Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

The Hill-Start Assist Control (HAC)

helps prevent the vehicle from rolling

backwards when starting a vehicle

from a stop on a hill. The system

operates the brakes automatically for

approximately 2 seconds and releas-

es the brake after 2 seconds or when

the accelerator pedal is depressed.

• The HAC does not operate when

the shift lever is in P (Park) or N

(Neutral).

• The HAC activates even though

the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is off but does not acti-

vate when the ESC has malfunc-

tioned.

Good Braking Practices

Wet brakes can be dangerous! The

brakes may get wet if the vehicle is

driven through standing water or if it

is washed.Your vehicle will not stop

as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet

brakes may cause the vehicle to pull

to one side.

To dry the brakes, apply the brakes

lightly until the braking action returns

to normal, taking care to keep the

vehicle under control at all times. If

the braking action does not return to

normal, stop as soon as it is safe to

do so and call an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

DO NOT drive with your foot resting

on the brake pedal. Even light, but

constant pedal pressure can result in

the brakes overheating, brake wear,

and possibly even brake failure.

If a tire goes flat while you are driv-

ing, apply the brakes gently and

keep the vehicle pointed straight

ahead while you slow down. When

you are moving slowly enough for it

to be safe to do so, pull off the road

and stop in a safe location.

Keep your foot firmly on the brake

pedal when the vehicle is stopped to

prevent the vehicle from rolling for-

ward.

NOTICE

Always be ready to depress the

accelerator pedal when starting

off on a incline.The HAC activates

only for approximately 2 seconds.

WARNING

Whenever leaving the vehicle or

parking, always come to a com-

plete stop and continue to

depress the brake pedal. Move

the shift lever into P (Park) posi-

tion, then apply the parking

brake, and place the Engine

Start/Stop button in the OFF

position.

Vehicles parked with the park-

ing brake not applied or not

fully engaged may roll inadver-

tently and may cause injury to

the driver and others. ALWAYS

apply the parking brake before

exiting the vehicle.

WARNING

5-34

Driving your vehicle

The Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system uses radar sensors in

the rear bumper to monitor and warn

the driver of an approaching vehicle

in the driver's blind spot area.

The system monitors the rear area of

the vehicle and provides information

to the driver with an audible alert and

an indicator on the outer side view

mirrors.

(1)Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW)

The Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) range varies relative to

vehicle speed. Note that if your

vehicle is traveling much faster

than the vehicles around you, the

warning will not occur.

(2)BCW : Closing at high speed

The BCW-Closing at high speed

feature will help alert you when a

vehicle is approaching in an adja-

cent lane at a high rate of speed.

If the driver activates the turn sig-

nal when the system detects an

oncoming vehicle, the system

sounds an audible alert. The time

of alert varies according to the

speed difference between you

and the approaching vehicle.

(3)RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

The RCCW feature monitors

approaching cross traffic from the

left and right side of the vehicle

when your vehicle is in reverse.

The feature will operate when the

vehicle is moving in reverse

below about 6 mph (10 km/h). If

oncoming cross traffic is detected

a warning chime will sound.

The time of alert varies according

to the speed difference between

you and the approaching vehicle.

BBLLIINNDD--SSPPOOTT CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((BBCCWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE056106

Blind spot area

Closing at high speed

• Always be aware of road con-

ditions while driving and be

alert for unexpected situa-

tions even though the Blind-

spot Collision Warning (BCW)

system is operating.

• The Blind-spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system is not

a substitute for proper and

safe driving. Always drive

safely and use caution when

changing lanes or backing up

the vehicle. The Blind-spot

Collision Warning (BCW) sys-

tem may not detect every

object alongside the vehicle.

WARNING

5-35

Driving your vehicle

BCW (Blind-spot Collision

Warning)

Operating conditions

To operate:

Press the BCW switch with the

Engine Start/Stop button in the ON

position.

The indicator on the BCW switch will

illuminate.

To cancel:

Press the BCW switch again. The

indicator on the switch will go off.

When the system is not used, turn

the system off by turning off the

switch.

Information

• If the Engine Start/Stop button is

turned OFF and then ON again, the

BCW system returns to the previous

state.

• When the system is turned on, the

warning light will illuminate for 3

seconds on the outer side view mir-

ror.

The function will activate when:

1. The system is on.

2. The vehicle speed is above

approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).

3. An oncoming vehicle is detected

in the blind spot area.

First stage alert

If a vehicle is detected within the

boundary of the system, a warning

light (yellow) will illuminate on the

outer side view mirror.

Once the detected vehicle is no

longer within the blind spot area, the

warning will turn off depending on

the driving conditions of the vehicle.

OAEPH057033

OAE056035

■ Left side

■ Right side

5-36

Driving your vehicle

• The second stage alarm may be

deactivated.

- To deactivate the warning chime:

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance → Rear Collision

Warning and deselect Blind-Spot

Collision Warning Sound' on the

LCD display.

Cluster type B

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance and deselect Blind-

Spot Collision Warning Sound' on

the LCD display.

OAE056036

■ Left side

OAE056037

■ Right side

Second stage alert

A warning chime to alert the driver will activate when:

1. A vehicle has been detected in the blind spot area by the radar system

(the warning light will illuminate on the outer side view mirror) (i.e., in

the first stage alert) AND

2. The turn signal is applied (same side as where the vehicle is being

detected).

When this alert is activated, the warning light on the side view mirror will

also blink.

If you turn off the turn signal indicator, the second stage alert (warning

chime and blinking warning light on the outer side view mirror) will be

deactivated.

5-37

Driving your vehicle

- To activate the warning chime:

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance → Rear Collision

Warning and select Blind-Spot

Collision Warning Sound' on the

LCD display.

Cluster type B

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance and select Blind-Spot

Collision Warning Sound' on the

LCD display.

Information

The warning chime function helps

alert the driver. Deactivate this func-

tion only when it is necessary. For

more information, refer to "LCD

Display Modes" in chapter 3.

RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning)

(if equipped)

The Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning function monitors approach-

ing cross traffic from the left and right

side of the vehicle when your vehicle

is in reverse.

Operating conditions

To operate:

Cluster type A

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance → Rear Collision

Warning and select Rear Cross-

Traffic Collision Warning' on the LCD

display.

Cluster type B

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance and select Rear Cross-

Traffic Collision Warning' on the LCD

display

The system will turn on and standby

to activate. The system will activate

when vehicle speed is below 6 mph

(10 km/h) and with the shift lever in R

(Reverse).

If the function is deselected from the

instrument cluster, the function will

deactivate.

For more information, refer to

"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

OAE056106

5-38

Driving your vehicle

Information

• The last selected setting (ON or

OFF) of the RCCW is remained in

the system.

• The system will activate when vehi-

cle speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h)

and with the shift lever in R

(Reverse).

• The RCCW (Rear Cross-Traffic

Collision Warning) detecting range

is approximately 1 ft ~ 65 ft (0.5 m ~

20 m) in the direction of both later-

al sides of the vehicle.

An approaching vehicle will be

detected if their vehicle speed is

within 2.5 ~ 22.5 mph (4 km/h ~ 36

km/h).

Note that the detecting range may

vary under certain conditions. As

always, use caution and pay close

attention to your surroundings

when backing up your vehicle.

Warning type

If the vehicle detected by the sensors

approaches your vehicle, the warn-

ing chime will sound, the warning

light on the outer side view mirror will

blink and a message will appear on

the LCD display.

Information

• The warning chime will turn off

when:

- The detected vehicle moves out of

the sensing area or

- when the vehicle is right behind

your vehicle or

- when the vehicle is not approach-

ing your vehicle or

- when the other vehicle slows down.

• The system may not operate proper-

ly due to other factors or circum-

stances. Always pay attention to

your surroundings.

• If the sensing area near the rear

bumper is blocked by either a wall

or barrier or by a parked vehicle,

the system sensing area may be

reduced.

■ Left

■ Right

• Type A • Type B

OAE058220/OAE058046

OAE058221/OAE058047

• Type A • Type B

5-39

Driving your vehicle

• The system may not work prop-

erly when the bumper has been

damaged, or if the rear bumper

has been replaced or repaired.

• The sensing range differs some-

what according to the width of

the road. When the road is nar-

row, the system may detect

other vehicles in the next lane

Or when the road is wide, the

system may not detect other

vehicles in the next lane.

• The system may turn off due to

strong electromagnetic waves.

NOTICE

• With the system activated, the

warning light on the outer

side view mirror will illumi-

nate whenever a vehicle is

detected at the rear side by

the system.

To avoid accidents, do not

focus only on the warning

light and neglect to see the

surrounding of the vehicle.

• Drive safely even though the

vehicle is equipped with a

Blind-spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system and Rear

Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW). Do not sole-

ly rely on the system but

check your surrounding

before changing lanes or

backing the vehicle up.

The system may not alert the

driver in some conditions so

always check your surround-

ings while driving.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• The Blind-spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system and

Rear Cross-Traffic Collision

Warning (RCCW) are not a

substitute for proper and safe

driving practices. Always

drive safely and use caution

when changing lanes or back-

ing up your vehicle.The Blind-

spot Collision Warning (BCW)

system may not detect every

object alongside the vehicle.

5-40

Driving your vehicle

Detecting sensor

The sensors are located inside the

rear bumper.

Always keep the rear bumper clean

for the proper operation of the sys-

tem.

Warning message

Blind-Spot Collision Warning

(BCW) system disabled.

Radar blocked

This warning message may appear

when :

- One or both of the sensors on the

rear bumper is blocked by dirt or

snow or a foreign object.

- Driving in rural areas where the

BCW sensor does not detect

another vehicle for an extended

period of time.

- When there is inclement weather

such as heavy snow or rain.

If any of these conditions occur, the

light on the BCW switch and the sys-

tem will turn off automatically.

When the BCW canceled warning

message is displayed in the cluster,

check to make sure that the rear

bumper is free from any dirt or snow

in the areas where the sensor is

located. Remove any dirt, snow, or

foreign material that could interfere

with the radar sensors.

After any dirt or debris is removed,

the BCW system should operate nor-

mally after about 10 minutes of driv-

ing the vehicle.

If the system still does not operate

normally have your vehicle inspected

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAEE058241L

OAE056065

5-41

Driving your vehicle

Check Blind-Spot Collision

Warning (BCW) system

If there is a problem with the BCW

system, a warning message will

appear and the light on the switch will

turn off.The system will turn off auto-

matically. Have your vehicle inspect-

ed by an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er.

Limitations of the system

The driver must be cautious in the

below situations, because the sys-

tem may not detect other vehicles or

objects in certain circumstances.

• When a trailer or carrier is

installed.

• The vehicle drives in inclement

weather such as heavy rain or

snow.

• The sensor is polluted with rain,

snow, mud, etc.

• The rear bumper where the sensor

is located is covered with a foreign

object such as a bumper sticker, a

bumper guard, a bike rack, etc.

• The rear bumper is damaged, or

the sensor is out of the original

default position.

• The vehicle height gets lower or

higher due to heavy loading in the

luggage compartment, abnormal

tire pressure, etc.

• When the temperature near the

rear bumper area is high or low.

• When the sensors are blocked by

other vehicles, walls or parking-lot

pillars.

• The vehicle drives on a curved

road or through a tollgate.

• The vehicle is driven near areas

containing metal substances such

as a construction zone, railroad,

etc.

• There is a fixed object near the

vehicle, such as a guardrail, per-

son, animal, etc.

• While going down or up a steep

road where the height of the lane is

different.

• When driving through a narrow

road with many trees or bushes.

• When driving on wet surfaces.

• When driving through a large area

with few vehicles or structures

around, such as a desert, rural

area, etc.

• A big vehicle is near such as a bus

or truck.

• When other vehicles are close to

your vehicle.

• When the other vehicle approach-

es very close.

OAE058222L

5-42

• When the detected vehicle also

moves back, as your vehicle drives

back.

• While changing lanes.

• The vehicle is turning left or right at

a crossroad.

• If the vehicle has started at the

same time as the vehicle next to

you and has accelerated.

• When the other vehicle passes at a

very fast speed.

• When the vehicle in the next lane

moves two lanes away from you

OR when the vehicle two lanes

away moves to the next lane to

you.

• A motorcycle or bicycle is near.

• A flat trailer is near.

• If there are small objects in the

detecting area such as a shopping

cart or a baby stroller.

• If there is a low height vehicle such

as a sports car.

Non-operating condition

The BCW indicator on the outer side

view mirror may not illuminate prop-

erly when:

• The outer side view mirror housing

is damaged.

• The mirror is covered with dirt,

snow, or debris.

• The window is covered with dirt,

snow, or debris.

• The window is tinted.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

Driving your vehicle

5-43

Driving your vehicle

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) System is designed to

help detect and monitor the vehicle

ahead or detect a pedestrian (if

equipped) in the roadway through

radar signals and camera recogni-

tion to warn the driver that a collision

is imminent, and if necessary, apply

emergency braking.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

The driver can activate the FCA by

placing the Engine Start/Stop button

to the ON position and by selecting:

'User Settings → Driver Assistance

→ Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist'

The FCA deactivates, when the driv-

er deselects the system setting.

FFOORRWWAARRDD CCOOLLLLIISSIIOONN--AAVVOOIIDDAANNCCEE AASSSSIISSTT ((FFCCAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

Take the following precautions

when using the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) System:

• This system is only a supple-

mental system and it is not

intended to, nor does it

replace the need for extreme

care and attention of the driv-

er. The sensing range and

objects detectable by the sen-

sors are limited. Pay attention

to the road conditions at all

times.

• NEVER drive too fast in accor-

dance with the road condi-

tions or while cornering.

• Always drive cautiously to

prevent unexpected and sud-

den situations from occur-

ring. FCA does not stop the

vehicle completely and is not

a collision avoidance system.

WARNING

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058261L/OAEE058243L

5-44

Driving your vehicle

The warning light illumi-

nates on the LCD display,

when you cancel the FCA

system. The driver can

monitor the FCA ON/OFF status on

the LCD display. Also, the warning

light illuminates when the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control) is

turned off (Traction & Stability control

disabled).

If the warning light remains ON when

the FCA is activated, have the sys-

tem checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time on the LCD display.

Go to the 'User Settings → Driver

Assistance → Forward Collision

Warning → Early/Noramal/Late'.

The options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning includes the fol-

lowing:

• Early:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated earlier than normal. This

setting maximizes the amount of

distance between the vehicle or

pedestrian ahead before the initial

warning occurs.

Even though, 'Early' is selected if

the front vehicle suddenly stops the

initial warning activation time may

not seem fast.

• Normal:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated normally. This setting

allows for a nominal amount of dis-

tance between the vehicle or

pedestrian ahead before the initial

warning occurs.

• Late:

When this condition is selected, the

initial Forward Collision Warning is

activated later than normal. This

setting reduces the amount of dis-

tance between the vehicle or

pedestrian ahead before the initial

warning occurs.

Select 'Late' when traffic is light and

when driving speed is slow.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058262L/OAEE058023L

5-45

Driving your vehicle

Prerequisite for activation

The FCA system is on and ready

when FCA is selected on the LCD

display and when the following pre-

requisites are satisfied:

- The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is on.

- Driving speed exceeds approxi-

mately 6 mph (10 km/h). (The FCA

is only activated within a certain

speed range.)

- The system detects a pedestrian

or a vehicle in front, which may col-

lide with your vehicle. (The FCA

may not be activated or may sound

a warning alarm in accordance

with the driving situation or vehicle

condition.)

FCA Warning Message and

System Control

The FCA produces warning mes-

sages and warning alarms in accor-

dance with the collision risk levels,

such as abrupt stopping of the vehi-

cle in front, insufficient braking dis-

tance, or pedestrian detection. Also,

it controls the brakes in accordance

with the collision risk levels.

• Completely stop the vehicle

on a safe location before

operating the switch on the

steering wheel to activate/

deactivate the FCA system.

• The FCA automatically acti-

vates when the Engine Start/

Stop button is in the ON posi-

tion.The driver can deactivate

the FCA by canceling the sys-

tem setting on the LCD dis-

play.

• If you cancel the ESC

(Electronic Stability Control)

when the FCA system is

turned on, the FCA automati-

cally deactivates and the FCA

warning light illuminates.

When the ESC is cancelled

the FCA cannot be activated

on the LCD display. The FCA

warning light will illuminate

which is normal.

WARNING

5-46

Driving your vehicle

The driver can select the initial warn-

ing activation time in the User

Settings in the LCD display. The

options for the initial Forward

Collision Warning include Early,

Normal or Late initial warning time.

Collision Warning

warning) - Yellow

This initial warning message

appears on the LCD display with a

warning chime.

Collision Warning

warning) - Red

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime. Additionally, some vehicle

system intervention occurs by the

engine management system to help

decelerate the vehicle.

- Your vehicle speed may decelerate

moderately.

- The FCA system limitedly controls

the brakes to preemptively mitigate

impact in a collision.

Emergency braking

warning)

This warning message appears on

the LCD display with a warning

chime.

Additionally, some vehicle system

intervention occurs by the engine

management system to help decel-

erate the vehicle.

- The FCA system limitedly controls

the brakes to preemptively mitigate

impact in a collision. The brake

control is maximized just before a

collision.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058263L/OAEE058244L

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058263L/OAEE058244L

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058264L/OAE058030L

5-47

Driving your vehicle

Brake operation

• In an urgent situation, the braking

system enters into the ready status

for prompt reaction against the dri-

ver's depressing the brake pedal.

• The FCA provides additional brak-

ing power for optimum braking per-

formance, when the driver

depresses the brake pedal.

• The braking control is automatical-

ly deactivated, when the driver

sharply depresses the accelerator

pedal, or when the driver abruptly

operates the steering wheel.

• The FCA brake control is automat-

ically canceled, when risk factors

disappear.

FCA Sensor

In order for the FCA system to oper-

ate properly, always make sure the

radar sensor cover is clean and free

of dirt, snow, and debris. Dirt, snow,

or foreign substances on the lens

may adversely affect the sensing

performance of the sensor.

The driver should always use

extreme caution while operating

the vehicle,whether or not there

is a warning message or alarm

from the FCA system.

CAUTION

The braking control cannot

completely stop the vehicle nor

avoid all collisions. The driver

should hold the responsibility

to safely drive and control the

vehicle.

WARNING

Never deliberately drive danger-

ously to activate the system.

WARNING

The FCA system logic operates

within certain parameters, such

as the distance from the vehicle

or pedestrian ahead, the speed

of the vehicle ahead, and the

driver's vehicle speed. Certain

conditions such as inclement

weather and road conditions

may affect the operation of the

FCA system.

WARNING

OAE056028N

5-48

Driving your vehicle

• Do not apply license plate frame

or foreign objects such as a

bumper sticker or a bumper

guard near the radar sensor.

Doing so may adversely affect

the sensing performance of the

radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor

and cover clean and free of dirt

and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash the

vehicle. Do not spray pressur-

ized water directly on the sensor

or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unneces-

sary force on the radar sensor or

sensor cover. If the sensor is

forcibly moved out of proper

alignment, the FCA system may

not operate correctly. In this

case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

• If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around the

radar sensor, the FCA system

may not operate properly. Have

the vehicle inspected by author-

ized HYUNDAI.

• Use only genuine parts to repair

or replace a damaged sensor or

sensor cover. Do not apply paint

to the sensor cover.

• NEVER install any accessories

or stickers on the front wind-

shield, nor tint the front wind-

shield.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera out of water.

• NEVER disassemble the camera

assembly, nor apply any impact

on the camera assembly.

• Playing the vehicle audio sys-

tem at high volume may offset

the system warning sounds.

Information

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer when:

• The windshield glass is replaced.

• The front bumper is replaced.

• The sensor cover or sensor gets

damaged or replaced.

NOTICENOTICE

5-49

Driving your vehicle

Warning message and warning

light

Forward Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor cover is blocked

with dirt, snow, or debris, the FCA

system operation may stop tem-

porarily. If this occurs, a warning

message will appear on the LCD dis-

play.

Remove any dirt, snow, or debris and

clean the radar sensor cover before

operating the FCA system. The sys-

tem will operate normally when such

dirt, snow or debris is removed.

The FCA may not properly operate in

an area (e.g. open terrain), where

any substances are not detected

after turning ON the vehicle.

System Malfunction

Check Forward Collision Avoidance

Assist system

• When the FCA is not working prop-

erly, the FCA warning light ( )

will illuminate and the warning

message will appear for a few sec-

onds. After the message disap-

pears, the master warning light

( ) will illuminate. In this case,

have the vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• The FCA warning message may

appear along with the illumination

of the ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) warning light.

OAE058216L

OAE058265L

5-50

Driving your vehicle

(Continued)

• Even if there is any problem

with the brake control func-

tion of the FCA system, the

vehicle's basic braking per-

formance will operate normal-

ly. However, brake control

function for avoiding collision

will not activate.

• If the vehicle in front stops

suddenly, you may have less

control of the brake system.

Therefore, always keep a safe

distance between your vehicle

and the vehicle in front of you.

• The FCA system may activate

during braking and the vehi-

cle may stop suddenly shift-

ing loose objects toward the

passengers. Always keep

loose objects secured.

• The FCA system may not acti-

vate if the driver applies the

brake pedal to avoid a colli-

sion.

(Continued)

• The brake control may be

insufficient, possibly causing

a collision, if a vehicle in front

abruptly stops. Always pay

extreme caution.

• Occupants may get injured, if

the vehicle abruptly stops by

the activated FCA system.Pay

extreme caution.

• The FCA system operates

only to help detect vehicles or

pedestrians in front of the

vehicle.

• The FCA system does not

operate when the vehicle is in

reverse.

• The FCA system is not

designed to detect other

objects on the road such as

animals.

• The FCA system does not

detect vehicles in the oppo-

site lane.

(Continued)

WARNING

• The FCA is only a supplemen-

tal system for the driver's con-

venience. The driver should

hold the responsibility to con-

trol the vehicle operation. Do

not solely depend on the FCA

system. Rather, maintain a

safe braking distance, and, if

necessary, depress the brake

pedal to reduce the driving

speed.

• In certain instances and

under certain driving condi-

tions, the FCA system may

activate unintentionally. This

initial warning message

appears on the LCD display

with a warning chime.

Also, in certain instances the

front radar sensor or camera

recognition system may not

detect the vehicle or pedestri-

an ahead. The FCA system

may not activate and the

warning message will not be

displayed.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-51

Driving your vehicle

Limitations of the System

The Forward Collision-Avoidance

Assist (FCA) system is designed to

help monitor the vehicle ahead or a

pedestrian in the roadway through

radar signals and camera recognition

to warn the driver that a collision is

imminent, and if necessary, apply

emergency braking.

In certain situations, the radar sen-

sor or the camera may not be able to

detect the vehicle or pedestrian

ahead. In these cases, the FCA sys-

tem may not operate normally. The

driver must pay careful attention in

the following situations where the

FCA operation may be limited.

Detecting vehicles

The sensor may be limited when:

• The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or

debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the radar sensor or camera

• There is interference by electro-

magnetic waves

• There is severe irregular reflection

from the radar sensor

• The radar/camera sensor recogni-

tion is limited

• The vehicle in front is too small to

be detected (for example a motor-

cycle or a bicycle, etc.)

• The vehicle in front is an oversize

vehicle or trailer that is too big to

be detected by the camera recog-

nition system (for example a tractor

trailer, etc.)

• The driver's field of view is not well

illuminated (either too dark or too

much reflection or too much back-

light that obscures the field of view)

• The vehicle in front does not have

their rear lights properly turned ON

• The outside brightness changes

suddenly, for example when enter-

ing or exiting a tunnel

• Light coming from a street light or

an oncoming vehicle is reflected on

a wet road surface such as a pud-

dle in the road

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up;a

clear view of the road is obstructed

(Continued)

• The FCA system does not

detect cross traffic vehicles

that are approaching.

• The FCA system cannot

detect the driver approaching

the side view of a parked vehi-

cle (for example on a dead

end street.)

In these cases, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance,

and if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce the driv-

ing speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

5-52

Driving your vehicle

• The vehicle in front is driving errat-

ically

• The vehicle is on unpaved or

uneven rough surfaces, or road

with sudden gradient changes.

• The vehicle is driven near areas

containing metal substances as a

construction zone, railroad, etc.

• The vehicle drives inside a build-

ing, such as a basement parking

lot

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations while

driving

• The sensor recognition changes

suddenly when passing over a

speed bump

• The vehicle in front is moving verti-

cally to the driving direction

• The vehicle in front is stopped ver-

tically

• The vehicle in front is driving

towards your vehicle or reversing

- Driving on a curve

The performance of the FCA system

may be limited when driving on a

curved road.

On curved roads, the other vehicle

on the same lane is not recognized

and the FCA system's performance

may be degraded.This may result in

unnecessary alarm or braking or no

alarm or braking when necessary.

Also, in certain instances the front

radar sensor or camera recognition

system may not detect the vehicle

traveling on a curved road.

In these cases, the driver must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056100

5-53

Driving your vehicle

The FCA system may recognize a

vehicle in the next lane when driving

on a curved road.

In this case, the system may unnec-

essarily alarm the driver and apply

the brake.

Always pay attention to road and

driving conditions, while driving. If

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

Also, when necessary depress the

accelerator pedal to prevent the sys-

tem from unnecessarily decelerating

your vehicle.

Check the surrounding traffic condi-

tions before use.

- Driving on a slope

The performance of the FCA decreas-

es while driving upward or downward

on a slope, not recognizing the vehi-

cle in front in the same lane. It may

unnecessarily produce the warning

message and the warning alarm, or it

may not produce the warning mes-

sage and the warning alarm at all.

When the FCA suddenly recognizes

the vehicle in front while passing

over a slope, you may experience

sharp deceleration.

Always keep your eyes forward while

driving upward or downward on a

slope, and, if necessary, depress the

brake pedal to reduce your driving

speed in order to maintain distance.

- Changing lanes

When a vehicle changes lanes in

front of you, the FCA system may not

immediately detect the vehicle, espe-

cially if the vehicle changes lanes

abruptly. In this case, you must main-

tain a safe braking distance, and if

necessary, depress the brake pedal

to reduce your driving speed in order

to maintain a safe distance.

OAE056103OAE056101 OAE056102

5-54

Driving your vehicle

When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a stopped vehicle in front of you

merges out of the lane, the FCA sys-

tem may not immediately detect the

new vehicle that is now in front of

you. In this case, you must maintain

a safe braking distance, and if nec-

essary, depress the brake pedal to

reduce your driving speed in order to

maintain a safe distance.

- Detecting the vehicle in front of you

If the vehicle in front of you has cargo

that extends rearward from the cab,

or when the vehicle in front of you

has higher ground clearance, addi-

tional special attention is required.

The FCA system may not be able to

detect the cargo extending from the

vehicle. In these instances, you must

maintain a safe braking distance

from the rearmost object, and if nec-

essary, depress the brake pedal to

reduce your driving speed in order to

maintain distance.

Detecting pedestrians

(if equipped)

The sensor may be limited when:

• The pedestrian is not fully detected

by the camera recognition system,

for example, if the pedestrian is

leaning over or is not fully walking

upright

• The pedestrian is moving very

quickly or appears abruptly in the

camera detection area

• The pedestrian is wearing clothing

that easily blends into the back-

ground, making it difficult to be

detected by the camera recogni-

tion system

• It is difficult to detect and distin-

guish the pedestrian from other

objects in the surroundings, for

example, when there is a group of

pedestrians or a large crowd

• There is an item similar to a per-

son’s body structure

• The pedestrian is small

• The pedestrian has impaired

mobility

• The sensor recognition is limited

OAE056109 OAE056105

5-55

Driving your vehicle

• The radar sensor or camera is

blocked with a foreign object or

debris

• Inclement weather such as heavy

rain or snow obscures the field of

view of the radar sensor or camera

• The outside lighting is too bright

(e.g.when driving in bright sunlight

or in sun glare) or too dark (e.g.

when driving on a dark rural road

at night)

• When light coming from a street

light or an oncoming vehicle is

reflected on a wet road surface

such as a puddle in the road

• The field of view in front is

obstructed by sun glare

• The windshield glass is fogged up;

a clear view of the road is obstruct-

• The adverse road conditions cause

excessive vehicle vibrations while

driving

Information

In some instances, the FCA system

may be canceled when subjected to

electromagnetic interference.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

(Continued)

• Never try to test the operation

of the FCA system. Doing so

may cause severe injury or

death.

• Do not use the Forward

Collision-Avoidance Assist

(FCA) system when towing a

vehicle. Application of the

FCA system while towing may

adversely affect the safety of

your vehicle or the towing

vehicle.

• Use extreme caution when the

vehicle in front of you has

cargo that extends rearward

from the cab, or when the

vehicle in front of you has

higher ground clearance.

• The FCA system is designed

to help detect and monitor the

vehicle ahead or help detect a

pedestrian in the roadway

through radar signals and

camera recognition. It is not

designed to detect bicycles,

motorcycles, or smaller

wheeled objects such as lug-

gage bags, shopping carts, or

strollers.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-56

Driving your vehicle

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System helps detect lane markers on

the road with a camera at the front

windshield, and assists the driver's

steering to help keep the vehicle

between lanes.

When the system detects the vehicle

straying from its lane, it alerts the

driver with a visual and audible warn-

ing, while applying a slight counter-

steering torque, to try to prevent the

vehicle from moving out of its lane.

LLAANNEE KKEEEEPPIINNGG AASSSSIISSTT ((LLKKAA)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE056048N

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System is not a substitute for

safe driving practices, but a

convenience function only. It is

the responsibility of the driver

to always be aware of the sur-

rounding and steer the vehicle.

WARNING

Take the following precautions

when using the Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) System:

• Do not steer the steering

wheel suddenly when the

steering wheel is being assist-

ed by the system.

• LKA system helps to prevent

the driver from moving out of

the lane unintentionally by

assisting the driver's steering.

However, the driver should not

solely rely on the system but

always pay attention on the

steering wheel to stay in the

lane.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• The operation of the LKA sys-

tem can be canceled or not

work properly according to

road condition and surround-

ings. Always be cautious

when driving.

• Do not disassemble the LKA

system camera temporarily to

tint the window or attach any

types of coatings and acces-

sories. If you disassemble the

camera and assemble it again,

take your vehicle to an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer and

have the system checked for

calibration.

• When you replace the wind-

shield glass, LKA system

camera or related parts of the

steering wheel, take your

vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the

system checked for calibra-

tion.

(Continued)

5-57

Driving your vehicle

LKA System Operation

To activate/deactivate the LKA sys-

tem:

With the Engine Start/Stop button in

the ON position, press the LKA sys-

tem button located on the instrument

panel on the left hand side of the

steering wheel. The indicator in the

cluster display will initially illuminate

white.This indicates the LKA system

is in the READY but NOT ENABLED

state.

(Continued)

After then, if you drive with

your hands on the steering

wheel, the control will be acti-

vated again.

• The steering wheel is not con-

tinuously controlled so if the

vehicle speed is at a higher

speed when leaving a lane the

vehicle may not be able to be

controlled by the system. The

driver must always follow the

speed limit when using the

system.

• If you attach objects to the

steering wheel, the system

may not assist steering or the

hands off alarm may not work

properly.

• While other beeps such as the

seat belt warning sound are in

operation and override the

LKA alarming system, LKA

system beeps may not occur.

OAE056050L

(Continued)

• The system detects lane

markers and controls the

steering wheel by a camera,

therefore, if the lane markers

are hard to detect, the system

may not work properly.

Please refer to "Limitations of

the system".

• Do not remove or damage the

related parts of LKA system.

• You may not hear a warning

sound of LKA system because

of excessive audio sound.

• Do not place objects on the

dashboard that reflects light

such as mirrors, white paper,

etc.The system may malfunc-

tion if the sunlight is reflected.

• Always have your hands on

the steering wheel while the

LKA system is activated. If

you continue to drive with

your hands off the steering

wheel after the "Keep hands

on steering wheel" warning

message appears, the system

will turn off automatically.

(Continued)

5-58

Driving your vehicle

Information

If the indicator (white) is activated

from the previous ignition cycle, the

system will turn ON without any addi-

tional control. If you press the LKA

system button again, the indicator on

the cluster goes off.

The color of indicator will

change depending on the

condition of LKA system.

- White : Sensor does not detect

lane markers or vehicle

speed is under 40 mph (64

km/h).

- Green : Sensor detects lane mark-

ers and the system is able

to control vehicle steering.

LKA system activation

• To see the LKA system screen on

the LCD display in the cluster,

select SCC/LKA mode ( ) for

cluster type A or ASSIST mode

( ) for cluster type B. For more

information, refer to "LCD Display

Modes" in chapter 3.

• When both lane markers are

detected and all the conditions to

activate the LKA system are satis-

fied, a green steering wheel indica-

tor will illuminate and the LKA sys-

tem indicator light will change from

white to green. This indicates that

the LKA system is in the

ENABLED state and the steering

wheel will be able to be controlled.

OAE058122L

The Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

System is a system to prevent

the driver from leaving the lane.

However, the driver should not

solely rely on the system but

always check the road condi-

tions when driving.

WARNING

5-59

Driving your vehicle

• If vehicle speed is over 40 mph (64

km/h) and the system detects lane

markers, the color changes from

gray to white.

• If the system detects the left lane

marker, the left lane marker color

will change from gray to white.

• If the system detects the right

marker line, the right lane marker

color will change from gray to

white.

• Both lane markers must be detect-

ed for the system to fully activate.

• If your vehicle speed exceeds 40

mph (64 km/h) and the LKA sys-

tem button is ON, the system is

enabled. If your vehicle departs

from the projected lane in front of

you, the LKA system operates as

follows:

A visual warning appears on the

cluster LCD display. Either the left

lane marker or the right lane marker

in the cluster LCD display will blink

depending on which direction the

vehicle is veering.

If the steering wheel appears, the

system will control the vehicle's

steering to prevent the vehicle from

crossing the lane marker.

Keep hands on steering wheel

If the driver takes their hands off the

steering wheel for several seconds

while the LKA system is activated,

the system will warn the driver.

Information

If the steering wheel is held very light-

ly the message may still appear

because the LKA system may not rec-

ognize that the driver has their hands

on the wheel.

■ Lane marker

undetected

■ Lane marker

detected

OAE058123L/OAE058124L

■ Left lane marker ■ Right lane marker

OAE058127L/OAE058128L

OAEE056129L

5-60

Driver's grasp not detected. LKA

system will be disabled temporarily

If the driver still does not have their

hands on the steering wheel after the

message "Keep hands on steering

wheel", the system will not control

the steering wheel and warn the driv-

er only when the driver crosses the

lane markers.

However, if the driver has their hands

on the steering wheel again, the sys-

tem will start controlling the steering

wheel.

Information

• Even though the steering is assisted

by the system, the driver can still

steer to control the steering wheel.

• The steering wheel may feel heavier

when the steering wheel is assisted

by the system than when it is not.

Driving your vehicle

OAE058224L

• The driver is responsible for

accurate steering.

• Turn off the system in below

situations.

- In bad weather

- In bad road condition

- When the steering wheel

needs to be controlled by the

driver frequently.

WARNING

The warning message may

appear late according to road

conditions. Therefore, always

have your hands on the steering

wheel while driving.

WARNING

5-61

Driving your vehicle

Warning Light and Message

Check Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system

If there is a problem with the system

a message will appear for a few sec-

onds. If the problem continues the

LKA system failure indicator will illu-

minate.

LKA system failure indicator

The LKA system failure

indicator (yellow) will illu-

minate if the LKA system

is not working properly.

Have your vehicle

checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

When there is a problem with the

system do one of the following:

• Turn the system on after turning

the engine off and on again.

• Check if the ignition switch is in the

ON position.

• Check if the system is affected by

the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain,

etc.)

• Check if there is foreign matter on

the camera lens.

If the problem is not solved, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE058225L

5-62

The system will be cancelled when:

• You change lanes with the turn sig-

nal.

- Using the turn signal to change

lanes.

- If you change lanes without the

turn signal on, the steering wheel

might be controlled.

• LKA system can transit to steering

assist mode when the car is near

to middle of the lane after system

on or the lane was changed. LKA

system can not assist steering if

the vehicle follows lane marker too

close continuously before transi-

tion to steering assist mode.

• The control of ESC (Electronic

Stability Control) or VSM (Vehicle

Stability Management) is activated.

• The steering will not be assisted

when your drive fast on a sharp

curve.

• The steering will not be assisted

when vehicle speed is below 40

mph (64 km/h) and over 110 mph

(177 kph).

• The steering will not be assisted

when you change lanes fast.

• The steering will not be assisted

when you brake suddenly.

• The steering will not be assisted

when the lane is very wide or nar-

row.

• The steering will not be assisted

when only one side lane marker is

detected.

• There are more than two lane

markers such as a construction

area.

• Radius of a curve is too small.

• When you turn steering wheel sud-

denly, the LKA system will be dis-

abled temporarily.

• Driving on a steep slope or hill.

DRIVER'S ATTENTION

The driver must be cautious in the

below situations may not work prop-

erly when recognition of the lane

marker is poor or limited :

When lane and road condition is

poor

• It is difficult to distinguish the lane

marker from road when the lane

marker is covered with dust or

sand.

• It is difficult to distinguish the color

of the lane marker from road.

• There is something looks like a

lane marker.

• The lane marker is indistinct or

damaged.

• The number of lanes increases/

decreases or the lane lines are

crossing (Driving through a toll

plaza/toll gate, merged/divided

lane).

• There are more than two lane

markers.

• The lane marker is very thick or

thin.

Driving your vehicle

5-63

Driving your vehicle

• The lane marker is not visible due

to snow, rain, stain, a puddle or

other factors.

• A shadow is on the lane marker

because of a median strip,

guardrail, noise barriers and oth-

ers.

• When the lane markers are compli-

cated or a structure substitutes for

the lines such as a construction

area.

• There are crosswalk signs or other

symbols on the road.

• The lane suddenly disappears

such as at the intersection.

• The lane marker in a tunnel is cov-

ered with dirt or oil and etc.

• The lane is very wide or narrow.

When external condition is inter-

vened

• The brightness of outside changes

suddenly when entering/existing a

tunnel or passing under a bridge.

• The headlamps are not on at night

or in a tunnel, or light level is low.

• There is a boundary structure in

the roadway.

• The light of street, sun, oncoming

vehicle and so on reflects from the

water on the road.

• When light shines brightly in the

reverse direction you drive.

• The distance from the vehicle

ahead is very short or the vehicle

ahead drives hiding the lane line.

• You drive on a steep grade or a

sharp curve.

• The vehicle vibrates heavily.

• The temperature near inside mirror

is very high due to direct sun light

and etc.

When front visibility is poor

• The lens or windshield is covered

by strange materials.

• The sensor cannot detect the lane

because of fog, heavy rain or snow.

• The windshield is fogged by humid

air in the vehicle.

• Putting something on the crash

pad and etc.

5-64

LKA System Function Change

Driving your vehicle

OAE058268N

OAE058269N

■ Type A

■ Type B

The driver can change LKA to Lane Departure Warning (LDW) System or

change the LKA system mode between Active LKA and Standard LKA from

the User Settings Mode on the LCD display.

The Lane Keeping Assist

System is a system to help pre-

vent the driver from leaving the

lane. However,the driver should

not solely rely on the system

but always take the necessary

actions for safe driving prac-

tices.

WARNING

5-65

Driving your vehicle

Lane Departure Warning

LDW alerts the driver with a visual

and acoustic warning when the sys-

tem detects the vehicle leaving the

lane.In this mode, the steering wheel

will not be controlled.When the vehi-

cle’s front wheel contacts the inside

edge of lane line, LKA issues the

lane departure warning.

Standard LKA

The Standard LKA mode guides the

driver to help keep the vehicle within

the lanes. It rarely controls the steer-

ing wheel, when the vehicle drives

well inside the lanes. However, it

starts to control the steering wheel,

when the vehicle is about to deviate

out of the lanes.

Active LKA

The Active LKA mode provides more

frequent steering wheel control in

comparison with the Standard LKA

mode.Active LKA can reduce the dri-

ver’s fatigue to assist the steering for

maintaining the vehicle in the middle

of the lane.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

5-66

Driving your vehicle

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

System is designed as a safety fea-

ture to help reduce drowsy or inat-

tentive driving. The DAW displays a

bar graph that is intended to repre-

sent the driver's attention and fatigue

level while driving.

System Setting and Activation

System setting

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is set to be in the

OFF position, when your vehicle is

first delivered to you from the fac-

tory.

• To turn ON the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system, turn on

the engine, and then select 'User

Settings → Driver Assistance →

Driver Attention Warning → High

Sensitivity/Normal Sensitivity' on

the LCD display.

• The driver can select the mode of

the Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system.

- High Sensitivity : The Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system

helps alert the driver of his/her

fatigue level or inattentive driving

practices faster than Normal

mode.

- Normal Sensitivity : The Driver

Attention Warning (DAW) system

helps alert the driver of his/her

fatigue level or inattentive driving

practices.

- Off :The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is deactivated.

• The set-up of the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system will be

maintained, as selected, when the

engine is re-started.

Driver's attention level

DDRRIIVVEERR AATTTTEENNTTIIOONN WWAARRNNIINNGG ((DDAAWW)) SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

OAE048569L

OPDE056061

■ System off

■ Attentive driving

5-67

Driving your vehicle

• The driver can monitor their driving

conditions on the LCD display.

The DAW screen will appear when

you select the Assist mode tab ( )

on the LCD display if the system is

activated. (For more information,

refer to "LCD Display Modes" in

chapter 3.)

• The driver's attention level is dis-

played on the scale of 1 to 5. The

lower the number is, the more inat-

tentive the driver is.

• The number decreases when the

driver does not take a break for a

certain period of time.

• The number increases when the

driver attentively drives for a cer-

tain period of time.

• When the driver turns on the sys-

tem while driving, it displays 'Last

Break time' and level.

Take a break

• The "Consider taking a break"

message appears on the LCD dis-

play and a warning sounds in order

to suggest the driver to take a

break, when the driver’s attention

level is below 1.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system does not suggest

the driver to take a break, when the

total driving time is shorter than 10

minutes.

OPDE056063

OPDE056062

5-68

Driving your vehicle

Resetting the System

• The last break time is set to 00:00

and the driver's attention level is

set to 5 (very attentive) when the

driver resets the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system resets in the follow-

ing situations.

- The engine is turned OFF.

- The driver unfastens the seat belt

and then opens the driver's door.

- The vehicle is stopped for more

than 10 minutes.

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system operates again,

when the driver restarts driving.

System Standby

The Driver Attention Warning (DAW)

system enters the ready status and

displays the 'Standby' screen in the

following situations.

- The camera does not detect the

lanes.

- Driving speed remains under 40

mph (64 km/h) or over 110 mph

(177 km/h).

OAEE058259L

While other beeps such as the

seat belt warning sound are in

operation and override DAW

alarming system, DAW beeps

may not occur.

CAUTION

5-69

Driving your vehicle

System Malfunction

Check Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system

When the warning message

appears, the system is not working

properly. In this case, have the vehi-

cle inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

The Driver Attention Warning sys-

tem utilizes the camera sensor on

the front windshield for its opera-

tion.To keep the camera sensor in

the best condition, you should

observe the followings:

• NEVER install any accessories

or stickers on the front wind-

shield, nor tint the front wind-

shield.

• NEVER locate any reflective

objects (i.e. white paper, mirror)

over the dashboard. Any light

reflection may cause a malfunc-

tion of the Driver Attention Alert

(DAW) system.

• Pay extreme caution to keep the

camera sensor out of water.

• NEVER arbitrarily disassemble

the camera assembly, nor apply

any impact on the camera

assembly.

NOTICE

• The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system is not a substi-

tute for safe driving practices,

but a convenience function

only. It is the responsibility of

the driver to always drive cau-

tiously to prevent unexpected

and sudden situations from

occurring. Pay attention to the

road conditions at all times.

• The system may suggest a

break according to the dri-

ver's driving pattern or habits

even if the driver doesn't feel

fatigue.

• The driver, who feels fatigued,

should take a break, even

though there is no break sug-

gestion by the Driver Attention

Warning (DAW) system.

WARNING

OOS057087L

5-70

Driving your vehicle

The Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system may not properly

operate with limited alerting in

the following situations:

• The lane detection perform-

ance is limited. (For more infor-

mation, refer to "Lane Keeping

Assist (LKA) system" in this

chapter.)

• The vehicle is violently driven

or is abruptly turned for obsta-

cle avoidance (e.g. construc-

tion area, other vehicles, fallen

objects, bumpy road).

• Forward drivability of the vehi-

cle is severely undermined

(possibly due to wide variation

in tire pressures, uneven tire

wear-out, toe-in/toe-out align-

ment).

• The vehicle drives on a curvy

road.

• The vehicle drives on a bumpy

road.

(Continued)

• The vehicle drives through a

windy area.

• The vehicle is controlled by the

following driving assist sys-

tems:

- Lane Keeping Assist (LKA)

system

- Forward Collision-avoidance

Assist (FCA) system

- Smart Cruise Control (SCC)

system

CAUTION

Playing the vehicle audio sys-

tem at high volume may offset

the Driver Attention Warning

(DAW) system warning sounds.

CAUTION

5-71

Driving your vehicle

Cruise Control Operation

1. Cruise indicator

2. SET indicator

The Cruise Control system allows

you to drive at speeds above 20 mph

(30 km/h) without depressing the

accelerator pedal.

CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL

(Continued)

- When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions

make it difficult to drive at a

constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or

snow-covered roads

- When driving on hilly or

windy roads

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad

weather such as fog, snow,

rain and sandstorm)

OAE056067N

Take the following precautions:

• Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit.

• If the Cruise Control is left on,

(cruise ( ) indicator

light in the instrument cluster

is illuminated) the Cruise

Control can be activated unin-

tentionally. Keep the Cruise

Control system off (cruise

( ) indicator light

OFF) when the Cruise Control

is not in use, to avoid inadver-

tently setting a speed.

• Use the Cruise Control sys-

tem only when traveling on

open highways in good

weather.

• Do not use the Cruise Control

when it may be unsafe to keep

the vehicle at a constant

speed:

(Continued)

WARNING

5-72

Driving your vehicle

Information

• During normal cruise control opera-

tion, when the SET switch is activat-

ed or reactivated after applying the

brakes, the cruise control will ener-

gize after approximately 3 seconds.

This delay is normal.

• Before activating the cruise control

function, the system will check to

verify that the brake switch is oper-

ating normally. Depress the brake

pedal at least once after turning ON

the ignition or starting the engine.

To set Cruise Control speed

1. Press the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system

on. The cruise ( ) indi-

cator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed,

which must be more than 20 mph

(30 km/h).

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it. The SET

indicator light will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

Information

On a steep slope, the vehicle may

slightly slow down or speed up, while

driving uphill or downhill.

OAE056068

OAE056069

5-73

Driving your vehicle

To increase Cruise Control

speed

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will increase 1.0

mph (1.6 km/h) each time the tog-

gle switch is operated in this man-

ner.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+)

and hold it, while monitoring the

SET speed on the instrument clus-

ter.

Release the toggle switch when

the desired speed is shown and

the vehicle will accelerate to that

speed.

• Depress the accelerator pedal.

When the vehicle attains the

desired speed, push the toggle

switch down (SET-).

To decrease Cruise Control

speed

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will decrease 1.0

mph (1.6 km/h) each time the toggle

switch is operated in this manner.

• Push the toggle switch down (SET-)

and hold it.Your vehicle will gradual-

ly slow down. Release the toggle

switch at the speed you want to

maintain.

• Lightly tap the brake pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired

speed, push the toggle switch

down (SET-).

OAE056069OAE056070

5-74

Driving your vehicle

To temporarily accelerate with

the Cruise Control ON

Depress the accelerator pedal.When

you take your foot off the accelerator,

the vehicle will return to the previ-

ously set speed.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at the increased speed, the

Cruise Control will maintain the

increased speed.

Cruise Control will be canceled

when:

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL button

located on the steering wheel.

• Pressing the CRUISE button. Both

the " " indicator and the

"SET" indicator will turn OFF.

• Moving the shift lever into N

(Neutral).

• Decreasing the vehicle speed to

less than approximately 20 mph

(30 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control) is operating.

• Downshifting to 2

gear when in

Manual Shift mode.

Information

Each of the above actions will cancel

Cruise Control operation (the "SET"

indicator in the instrument cluster will

go off), but only pressing the CRUISE

button will turn the system off. If you

wish to resume Cruise Control opera-

tion, push the toggle switch up (RES+)

located on your steering wheel. You

will return to your previously preset

speed, unless the system was turned off

using the CRUISE button.

OAE056071

5-75

Driving your vehicle

To resume preset Cruising

speed

Push the toggle switch up (RES+). If

the vehicle speed is over 20 mph (30

km/h), the vehicle will resume the

preset speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

• Press the CRUISE button (the

cruise ( ) indicator light

will go off).

• Turn the vehicle OFF.

OAE056068

OAE056070

5-76

Driving your vehicle

➀ Cruise indicator

➁ Set speed

➂ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance

To see the SCC screen on the LCD

display in the cluster, select SCC/

LKA mode ( ) for cluster type A or

ASSIST mode ( ) for cluster type

B. For more information, refer to

"LCD Display Modes" in chapter 3.

The Smart Cruise Control System

allows you to program the vehicle to

maintain constant speed and mini-

mum distance between the vehicle

ahead.

The Smart Cruise Control System

will automatically adjust your vehicle

speed to maintain your programmed

speed and following distance without

requiring you to depress the acceler-

ator or brake pedals.

SSMMAARRTT CCRRUUIISSEE CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM ((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

For your safety, please read the

owner's manual before using the

Smart Cruise Control system.

WARNING

The Smart Cruise Control

System is not a substitute for

safe driving practices, but a

convenience function only. It is

the responsibility of the driver

to always check the speed and

distance to the vehicle ahead.

WARNING

Take the following precautions :

• Always set the vehicle speed

under the speed limit.

• If the Smart Cruise Control is

left on, (cruise ( )

indicator light in the instru-

ment cluster is illuminated)

the Smart Cruise Control can

be activated unintentionally.

Keep the Smart Cruise

Control System off (cruise

( ) indicator light

OFF) when the Smart Cruise

Control is not in use, to avoid

inadvertently setting a speed.

• Use the Smart Cruise Control

System only when traveling

on open highways in good

weather.

(Continued)

WARNING

■ Type A ■ Type B

OLF054430N/OAE056097N

5-77

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control Speed

To set Smart Cruise Control

speed

1. Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system

on. The cruise ( ) indi-

cator will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed.

The Smart Cruise Control speed

can be set as follows:

• 20 – 110 mph (30 -180 km/h) :

when there is no vehicle in front

• 5 – 110 mph (10 -180 km/h) :

when there is a vehicle in front

3. Push the toggle switch down

(SET-). The Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance on the

LCD display will illuminate.

4. Release the accelerator pedal.

The desired speed will automati-

cally be maintained.

If there is a vehicle in front of you, the

speed may decrease to maintain the

distance to the vehicle ahead.

On a steep grade, the vehicle may

slow down or speed up slightly while

going uphill or downhill.

(Continued)

• Do not use the Smart Cruise

Control when it may not be

safe to keep the vehicle at a

constant speed:

- When driving in heavy traffic

or when traffic conditions

make it difficult to drive at a

constant speed

- When driving on rainy, icy, or

snow-covered roads

- When driving on a steep

downhill or uphill

- When driving in windy areas

- When driving in parking lots

- When driving near crash

barriers

- When driving on a sharp

curve

- When driving with limited

view (possibly due to bad

weather, such as fog, snow,

rain or sandstorm)

- When the vehicle sensing

ability decreases due to

vehicle modification result-

ing level difference of the

vehicle's front and rear

OAE056068

OAE056069

5-78

Driving your vehicle

Information

Vehicle speed may decrease on an

upward slope and increase on a down-

ward slope.

To increase Smart Cruise

Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and release it immediately. The

cruising speed will increase by

1 mph (1 km/h) each time you

move the toggle switch up in this

manner.

• Push the toggle switch up (RES+),

and hold it.Your vehicle set speed

will increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).

Release the toggle switch at the

speed you want.

When vehicle speed is under 5

mph (10 km/h), the Smart Cruise

Control is canceled. The driver

must adjust the vehicle speed

by depressing the accelerator

or brake pedal according to the

road condition ahead and driv-

ing condition.

CAUTION

OAE056070

Check the driving condition

before using the toggle switch.

Driving speed sharply increas-

es, when you push up and hold

the toggle switch.

CAUTION

5-79

Driving your vehicle

To decrease the Smart Cruise

Control set speed

Follow either of these procedures:

• Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and release it immediately.

The cruising speed will decrease

by 1 mph (1 km/h) each time you

move the toggle switch down in

this manner.

• Push the toggle switch down

(SET-), and hold it.Your vehicle set

speed will decrease by 5 mph (10

km/h). Release the toggle switch

at the speed you want.

• You can set the speed to 20 mph

(30 km/h).

To temporarily accelerate with

the Smart Cruise Control on

If you want to speed up temporarily

when the Smart Cruise Control is on,

depress the accelerator pedal.

Increased speed will not interfere

with Smart Cruise Control operation

or change the set speed.

To return to the set speed, take your

foot off the accelerator pedal.

If you push the toggle switch down

(SET-) at increased speed, the cruis-

ing speed will be set again pedal.

Information

Be careful when accelerating tem-

porarily, because the speed is not con-

trolled automatically at this time even

if there is a vehicle in front of you.

Smart Cruise Control set speed

will be temporarily canceled

when:

Canceled manually

• Depressing the brake pedal.

• Pressing the CANCEL button

located on the steering wheel.

• Depress the brake pedal and press

the CANCEL button at the same

time, when the vehicle is at a stand-

still.

OAE056069

OAE056071

5-80

Driving your vehicle

The Smart Cruise Control turns off

temporarily when the Set Speed and

Vehicle-to-Vehicle Distance indicator

on the LCD display turns off.

The cruise ( ) indicator is

illuminated continuously.

Canceled automatically

• The driver's door is opened.

• The vehicle is shifted to N

(Neutral), R (Reverse) or P (Park).

• The vehicle speed is over 120 mph

(190 km/h).

• The ESC (Electronic Stability

Control), TCS (Traction Control

System) or ABS is operating.

• The ESC is turned off.

• The sensor or the cover is dirty or

blocked with foreign matter.

• The accelerator pedal is continu-

ously depressed for more than one

minute.

• The SCC system has malfunc-

tioned.

• The engine RPM enters the red

zone.

• The FCA is activated.

Each of these actions will cancel

the Smart Cruise Control opera-

tion.The Set Speed and Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance on the LCD dis-

play will go off.

In a condition the Smart Cruise

Control is canceled automatically,

the Smart Cruise Control will not

resume even though the RES+ or

SET- toggle switch is pushed.

Information

If the Smart Cruise Control is canceled

by other than the reasons mentioned,

have the system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

5-81

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control canceled

If the system is canceled, the warn-

ing chime will sound and a message

will appear for a few seconds.

You must adjust the vehicle speed by

depressing the accelerator or brake

pedal according to the road condition

ahead and driving condition.

Always check the road conditions.

Do not rely on the warning chime.

To resume Smart Cruise Control

set speed

If any method other than the cruise

toggle switch was used to cancel

cruising speed and the system is still

activated, the cruising speed will

automatically resume when you

push the toggle switch up (RES+) or

down (SET-).

If you push the toggle switch up

(RES+), the speed will resume to the

recently set speed. However, if vehi-

cle speed drops below 20 mph (30

km/h), it will resume when there is a

vehicle in front of your vehicle.

Information

Always check the road conditions

when you push the toggle switch up

(RES+) to resume speed.

To turn Cruise Control off

• Press the CRUISE button (the

cruise ( ) indicator light

will go off).

OAEE056165N

OAE056068

5-82

Driving your vehicle

Smart Cruise Control Vehicle-

to-Vehicle Distance

To set Vehicle-to-Vehicle

Distance

When the Smart Cruise Control

System is ON, you can set and main-

tain the distance from the vehicle

ahead of you without pressing the

accelerator or brake pedal.

Each time the button is pressed, the

vehicle to vehicle distance changes

as follows:

For example, if you drive at 56 mph

(90 km/h), the distance is maintained

as follows:

Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet

Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet

Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet

Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet

Information

The distance is set to the last set dis-

tance when the system is used for the

first time after the vehicle is in the

ready ( ) mode.

When the lane ahead is clear:

The vehicle speed will maintain the

set speed.

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE056178N/OAE056177N

OAE056076

Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2

Distance 1

5-83

Driving your vehicle

Distance 4

■ Type A

Distance 3 Distance 4 Distance 3

Distance 1

Distance 2

OAE056180N/OAE056179N/OAE056182N/OAE056181N

OAE056184N/OAE056183N/OAE056186N/OAE056185N

■ Type B

When there is a vehicle ahead of you in your lane:

Distance 1

Distance 2

• Your vehicle speed will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected

distance.

• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruis-

ing speed after accelerating to the set speed.

When using the Smart Cruise

Control System:

• The warning chime sounds

and the Vehicle-to Vehicle

Distance indicator blinks if

the vehicle is unable to main-

tain the selected distance

from the vehicle ahead.

• If the warning chime sounds,

depress the brake pedal or

use the steering wheel toggle

switch to actively adjust the

vehicle speed, and the dis-

tance to the vehicle ahead.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAEE056140R

5-84

Driving your vehicle

Sensor to Detect Distance to

the Vehicle Ahead

The Smart Cruise Control uses a

sensor to detect distance to the vehi-

cle ahead.

(Continued)

• Even if the warning chime is

not activated, always pay

attention to the driving condi-

tions to prevent dangerous

situations from occurring.

• Playing the vehicle audio sys-

tem at high volume may offset

the system warning sounds.

If the vehicle ahead (vehicle

speed: less than 20 mph (30

km/h)) disappears to the next

lane, the warning chime will

sound and a message "Watch

for surrounding vehicles" will

appear. Adjust your vehicle

speed for vehicles or objects

that can suddenly appear in

front of you by depressing the

brake pedal.

Always pay attention to the road

condition ahead.

CAUTION

OAE056168L

OAE056028N

5-85

Driving your vehicle

Warning message

Smart Cruise Control disabled.

Radar blocked

When the sensor lens cover is

blocked with dirt, snow, or debris, the

Smart Cruise Control System opera-

tion may stop temporarily. If this

occurs, a warning message will

appear on the LCD display. Remove

any dirt, snow, or debris and clean

the radar sensor lens cover before

operating the Smart Cruise Control

System. The Smart Cruise Control

system may not properly activate, if

the radar is totally contaminated, or if

any substance is not detected after

the vehicle is in the ready ( )

mode (e.g. in an open terrain).

OAE056166L

(Continued)

• If the front bumper becomes

damaged in the area around

the radar sensor, the Smart

Cruise Control System may

not operate properly. Have the

vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Use only genuine HYUNDAI

parts to repair or replace a

damaged sensor or sensor

cover. Do not apply paint to

the sensor cover.

• Do not apply license plate

frame or foreign objects such

as a bumper sticker or a

bumper guard near the radar

sensor. Doing so may

adversely affect the sensing

performance of the radar.

• Always keep the radar sensor

and lens cover clean and free

of dirt and debris.

• Use only a soft cloth to wash

the vehicle.Do not spray pres-

surized water directly on the

sensor or sensor cover.

• Be careful not to apply unnec-

essary force on the radar sen-

sor or sensor cover.If the sen-

sor is forcibly moved out of

proper alignment, the Smart

Cruise Control System may

not operate correctly. In this

case, a warning message may

not be displayed. Have the

vehicle inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

(Continued)

CAUTION

5-86

Driving your vehicle

Check Smart Cruise Control System

The message will appear when the

vehicle to vehicle distance control

system is not functioning normally.

Take your vehicle to an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer and have the sys-

tem checked.

To Adjust the Sensitivity of

Smart Cruise Control

The sensitivity of vehicle speed

when following the front vehicle to

maintain the set distance can be

adjusted on the LCD display.

Cluster type A

'User Settings → Driver Assistance

→ Smart Cruise Control →

Response → Fast/Normal/Slow'

Cluster type B

'User Settings → Driver Assistance

→ SCC reaction → Fast/Normal/

Slow'

You may select one of the three

stages you prefer.

• Fast:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is faster than normal speed.

• Normal:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is normal.

• Slow:

Vehicle speed following the front

vehicle to maintain the set distance

is slower than normal speed.

Information

The last selected speed sensitivity of

the smart cruise control is remained in

the system.

OAE056167L

■ Type A ■ Type B

OAE058099L/OAE058267L

5-87

Driving your vehicle

To Convert to Cruise Control

Mode

The driver may choose to switch to

use the conventional Cruise Control

mode (speed only control function)

by following these steps:

1. Push the CRUISE button on the

steering wheel to turn the system

on. The cruise ( ) indi-

cator will illuminate.

2. Push and hold the Vehicle-to-

Vehicle Distance button for more

than 2 seconds.

3. Choose between "SCC Mode

(Smart Cruise Control)" and "CC

Mode (Cruise Control)".

When the system is canceled using

the CRUISE button or the CRUISE

button is used after the vehicle is in

the ready ( ) mode, the Smart

Cruise Control mode will turn on.

Limitations of the System

The Smart Cruise Control System

may have limits to its ability to detect

distance to the vehicle ahead due to

road and traffic conditions.

On curves

• The Smart Cruise Control System

may not detect a moving vehicle in

your lane, and then your vehicle

could accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will

decrease when the vehicle ahead

is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed

on curves and apply the brakes or

accelerator pedal if necessary.

OAE056100

When using the conventional

Cruise Control mode, you must

manually adjust the distance to

other vehicles by depressing

the accelerator or brake pedal.

The system does not automati-

cally adjust the distance to vehi-

cles in front of you.

WARNING

5-88

Driving your vehicle

Your vehicle speed can be reduced

due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane.

Apply the accelerator pedal and

select the appropriate set speed.

Check to be sure that the road con-

ditions permit safe operation of the

Smart Cruise Control.

On inclines

• During uphill or downhill driving,

the Smart Cruise Control System

may not detect a moving vehicle in

your lane, and cause your vehicle

to accelerate to the set speed.

Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly

decrease when the vehicle ahead

is recognized suddenly.

• Select the appropriate set speed

on inclines and apply the brake or

accelerator pedal if necessary.

Lane changing

• A vehicle which moves into your

lane from an adjacent lane cannot

be recognized by the sensor until it

is in the sensor's detection range.

• The radar may not detect immedi-

ately when a vehicle cuts in sud-

denly. Always pay attention to the

traffic, road and driving conditions.

• If a slower vehicle moves into your

lane, your speed may decrease to

maintain the distance to the vehicle

ahead.

• If a faster vehicle which moves into

your lane, your vehicle will acceler-

ate to the set speed.

OAE056103OAE056102

OAE056101

5-89

Driving your vehicle

Detecting vehicles

Some vehicles in your lane cannot

be recognized by the sensor:

- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-

cles or bicycles

- Vehicles offset to one side

- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-

decelerating vehicles

- Stopped vehicles

- Vehicles with small rear profile such

as trailers with no loads

A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-

nized correctly by the sensor if any of

following occurs:

- When the vehicle is pointing

upwards due to overloading in the

luggage compartment

- While the steering wheel is operat-

ing

- When driving to one side of the lane

- When driving on narrow lanes or on

curves

Apply the brake or accelerator pedal

if necessary.

• Your vehicle may accelerate when

a vehicle ahead of you disappears.

• When you are warned that the

vehicle ahead of you is not detect-

ed, drive with caution.

OAE056108

OAE056104

5-90

Driving your vehicle

• When driving in stop-and-go traffic,

and a stopped vehicle in front of

you merges out of the lane, the

system may not immediately

detect the new vehicle that is now

in front of you. In this case, you

must maintain a safe braking dis-

tance, and if necessary, depress

the brake pedal to reduce your

driving speed in order to maintain a

safe distance.

• Always look out for pedestrians

when your vehicle is maintaining a

distance with the vehicle ahead.

• Always be cautious for vehicles

with higher height or vehicles car-

rying loads that sticks out from the

back of the vehicle.

OAE056105OAE056110OAE056109

5-91

Driving your vehicle

The Smart Cruise Control System

may not operate temporarily due

to:

• Electrical interference

• Modifying the suspension

• Differences of tire abrasion or

tire pressure

• Installing different type of tires

NOTICE

(Continued)

• The Smart Cruise Control

System cannot recognize a

stopped vehicle, pedestrians

or an oncoming vehicle.

Always look ahead cautiously

to prevent unexpected and

sudden situations from occur-

ring.

• Vehicles moving in front of you

with a frequent lane change

may cause a delay in the sys-

tem's reaction or may cause

the system to react to a vehicle

actually in an adjacent lane.

Always drive cautiously to pre-

vent unexpected and sudden

situations from occurring.

• Always be aware of the select-

ed speed and vehicle to vehi-

cle distance. The driver

should not solely rely on the

system but always pay atten-

tion to driving conditions and

control your vehicle speed.

(Continued)

• The Smart Cruise Control

System may not recognize

complex driving situations so

always pay attention to driv-

ing conditions and control

your vehicle speed.

When using the Smart Cruise

Control take the following pre-

cautions:

• If an emergency stop is nec-

essary, you must apply the

brakes.The vehicle cannot be

stopped at every emergency

situation by using the Smart

Cruise Control System.

• Keep a safe distance accord-

ing to road conditions and

vehicle speed. If the vehicle to

vehicle distance is too close

during a high-speed driving, a

serious collision may result.

• Always maintain sufficient

braking distance and deceler-

ate your vehicle by applying

the brakes if necessary.

(Continued)

WARNING

5-92

Driving your vehicle

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user's authority to operate

the device.

Information

Radio frequency radiation exposure

information:

This equipment complies with FCC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

an uncontrolled environment.

This equipment should be installed

and operated with minimum distance

of 8 in. (20 cm) between the radiator

(antenna) and your body.

This transmitter must not be co-locat-

ed or operating in conjunction with

any other antenna or transmitter.

5-93

Driving your vehicle

Hazardous Driving Conditions

When hazardous driving elements

are encountered such as water,

snow, ice, mud and sand, take the

below suggestions:

• Drive cautiously and keep a longer

braking distance.

• Avoid abrupt braking or steering.

• When your vehicle is stuck in snow,

mud, or sand, use second gear.

Accelerate slowly to avoid unnec-

essary wheel spin.

• Put sand, rock salt, tire chains or

other non-slip materials under the

wheels to provide additional trac-

tion while the vehicle becomes

stuck in ice, snow, or mud.

Rocking the Vehicle

If it is necessary to rock the vehicle

to free it from snow, sand, or mud,

first turn the steering wheel right and

left to clear the area around your

front wheels. Then, shift back and

forth between R (Reverse) and a for-

ward gear.

Try to avoid spinning the wheels, and

do not race the engine.

To prevent transmission wear, wait

until the wheels stop spinning before

shifting gears. Release the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting, and press

lightly on the accelerator pedal while

the transmission is in gear. Slowly

spinning the wheels in forward and

reverse directions causes a rocking

motion that may free the vehicle.

SSPPEECCIIAALL DDRRIIVVIINNGG CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNSS

Downshifting with an dual

clutch transmission while driv-

ing on slippery surfaces can

cause an accident. The sudden

change in tire speed could

cause the tires to skid. Be care-

ful when downshifting on slip-

pery surfaces.

WARNING

If the vehicle is stuck and

excessive wheel spin occurs,

the temperature in the tires can

increase very quickly. If the tires

become damaged, a tire blow

out or tire explosion can occur.

This condition is dangerous -

you and others may be injured.

Do not attempt this procedure if

people or objects are anywhere

near the vehicle.

If you attempt to free the vehicle,

the vehicle can overheat quickly,

possibly causing an engine

compartment fire or other dam-

age. Try to avoid spinning the

wheels as much as possible to

prevent overheating of either the

tires or the engine. DO NOT

allow the vehicle to spin the

wheels above 35 mph (56 km/h).

WARNING

5-94

Driving your vehicle

Information

The ESC system must be turned OFF

before rocking the vehicle.

If you are still stuck after rocking

the vehicle a few times, have the

vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle

to avoid engine overheating, pos-

sible damage to the transmission,

and tire damage. See "Towing" in

chapter 6.

Smooth Cornering

Avoid braking or gear changing in

corners, especially when roads are

wet. Ideally, corners should always

be taken under gentle acceleration.

Driving at Night

Night driving presents more hazards

than driving in the daylight. Here are

some important tips to remember:

• Slow down and keep more dis-

tance between you and other vehi-

cles, as it may be more difficult to

see at night, especially in areas

where there may not be any street

lights.

• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the

glare from other driver's head-

lamps.

• Keep your headlamps clean and

properly aimed. Dirty or improperly

aimed headlamps will make it

much more difficult to see at night.

• Avoid staring directly at the head-

lamps of oncoming vehicles. You

could be temporarily blinded, and it

will take several seconds for your

eyes to readjust to the darkness.

Driving in the Rain

Rain and wet roads can make driving

dangerous. Here are a few things to

consider when driving in the rain or

on slick pavement:

• Slow down and allow extra follow-

ing distance. A heavy rainfall

makes it harder to see and increas-

es the distance needed to stop

your vehicle.

• Turn OFF your Cruise Control. (if

equipped)

• Replace your windshield wiper

blades when they show signs of

streaking or missing areas on the

windshield.

• Tires should be properly main-

tained with at least 2/32nds of an

inch of tread depth. If your tires do

not have enough tread, making a

quick stop on wet pavement can

cause a skid and possibly lead to

an accident. See "Tire Tread" in

chapter 7.

• Turn on your headlamps to make it

easier for others to see you.

NOTICE

5-95

Driving your vehicle

• Driving too fast through large pud-

dles can affect your brakes. If you

must go through puddles, try to

drive through them slowly.

• If you believe your brakes may be

wet, apply them lightly while driv-

ing until normal braking operation

returns.

Hydroplaning

If the road is wet enough and you are

going fast enough, your vehicle may

have little or no contact with the road

surface and actually ride on the

water. The best advice is SLOW

DOWN when the road is wet.

The risk of hydroplaning increas-

es as the depth of tire tread

decreases, refer to "Tire Tread" in

chapter 7.

Driving in Flooded Areas

Avoid driving through flooded areas

unless you are sure the water is no

higher than the bottom of the wheel

hub. Drive through any water slowly.

Allow adequate stopping distance

because brake performance may be

reduced.

After driving through water, dry the

brakes by gently applying them sev-

eral times while the vehicle is moving

slowly.

Highway Driving

Tires

Adjust the tire inflation, as specified.

Under-inflation may overheat or

damage the tires.

Do not install worn-out or damaged

tires, which may reduce traction or

adversely affect vehicle handling.

This could lead to sudden tire failure

that may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

Information

Never over-inflate your tires above the

maximum inflation pressure, as speci-

fied on your tires.

Fuel, engine coolant and engine

oil

Driving at higher speeds on the high-

way consumes more fuel and is less

efficient than driving at a slower,

more moderate speed. Maintain a

moderate speed in order to conserve

fuel when driving on the highway.

Be sure to check both the engine

coolant level and the engine oil

before driving.

Drive belt

A loose or damaged drive belt may

overheat the engine.

In a rollover crash, an unbelted

person is significantly more

likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Make sure all

passengers are wearing their

seat belts.

WARNING

5-96

Driving your vehicle

WWIINNTTEERR DDRRIIVVIINNGG

The severe weather conditions of

winter quickly wear out tires and

cause other problems. To minimize

winter driving problems, you should

take the following suggestions:

Snow or Icy Conditions

You need to keep sufficient distance

between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you.

Apply the brakes gently. Speeding,

rapid acceleration, sudden brake

applications, and sharp turns are

potentially very hazardous practices.

During deceleration, use engine

braking to the fullest extent. Sudden

brake applications on snowy or icy

roads may cause the vehicle to skid.

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it

may be necessary to use snow tires

or to install tire chains on your tires.

Always carry emergency equipment.

Some of the items you may want to

carry include tire chains, tow straps

or chains, a flashlight, emergency

flares, sand, a shovel, jumper cables,

a window scraper, gloves, ground

cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

Snow tires

If you mount snow tires on your vehi-

cle, make sure to use radial tires of

the same size and load range as the

original tires. Mount snow tires on all

four wheels to balance your vehicle’s

handling in all weather conditions.

The traction provided by snow tires

on dry roads may not be as high as

your vehicle's original equipment

tires. Check with the tire dealer for

maximum speed recommendations.

Information

Do not install studded tires without

first checking local, state and munici-

pal regulations for possible restric-

tions against their use.

Tire chains

Since the sidewalls of radial tires are

thinner than other types of tires, they

may be damaged by mounting some

types of tire chains on them.

Therefore, the use of snow tires is

recommended instead of tire chains.

If tire chains must be used, use gen-

uine HYUNDAI parts and install the

tire chain after reviewing the instruc-

tions provided with the tire chains.

Damage to your vehicle caused by

improper tire chain use is not cov-

ered by your vehicle manufacturer’s

warranty.

Snow tires should be equivalent

in size and type to the vehicle's

standard tires. Otherwise, the

safety and handling of your

vehicle may be adversely affect-

ed.

WARNING

OAE056091

5-97

Driving your vehicle

Information

• Install tire chains on both left and

right front tires. It should be noted

that installing tire chains on the

tires will provide a greater driving

force, but will not prevent side

skids.

• Do not install studded tires without

first checking local, state and

municipal regulations for possible

restrictions against their use.

Chain installation

When installing tire chains, follow the

manufacturer's instructions and

mount them as tightly possible. Drive

slowly (less than 20 mph (30 km/h))

with chains installed. If you hear the

chains contacting the body or chas-

sis, stop and tighten them.If they still

make contact, slow down until the

noise stops. Remove the tire chains

as soon as you begin driving on

cleared roads.

When mounting snow chains, park

the vehicle on level ground away

from traffic. Turn on the vehicle

Hazard Warning Flasher and place a

triangular emergency warning device

behind the vehicle (if available).

Always place the vehicle in P (Park),

apply the parking brake and turn off

the engine before installing snow

chains.

The use of tire chains may

adversely affect vehicle han-

dling:

• Drive less than 20 mph

(30 km/h) or the chain manu-

facturer's recommended speed

limit, whichever is lower.

• Drive carefully and avoid

bumps, holes, sharp turns,

and other road hazards, which

may cause the vehicle to

bounce.

• Avoid sharp turns or locked

wheel braking.

WARNING

5-98

Driving your vehicle

- When using tire chains:

• Wrong size chains or improperly

installed chains can damage

your vehicle's brake lines, sus-

pension, body and wheels.

• Use SAE "S" class or wire

chains.

• If you hear noise caused by

chains contacting the body,

retighten the chain to prevent

contact with the vehicle body.

• To prevent body damage,

retighten the chains after driving

0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).

• Do not use tire chains on vehi-

cles equipped with aluminum

wheels. If unavoidable, use a

wire type chain.

• Use wire chains less than 0.47

inch (12 mm) wide to prevent

damage to the chain's connec-

tion.

Winter Precautions

Use high quality ethylene glycol

coolant

Your vehicle is delivered with high

quality ethylene glycol coolant in the

cooling system. It is the only type of

coolant that should be used because

it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-

ing system, lubricates the water

pump and prevents freezing.Be sure

to replace or replenish your coolant

in accordance with the maintenance

schedule in chapter 7. Before winter,

have your coolant tested to assure

that its freezing point is sufficient for

the temperatures anticipated during

the winter.

Change to "winter weight" oil if

necessary

In some climates it is recommended

that a lower viscosity "winter weight"

oil be used during cold weather. See

chapter 8 for recommendations. If

you aren't sure what weight oil you

should use, consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Check battery and cables

Winter puts additional burdens on

the battery system. Visually inspect

the battery and cables as described

in chapter 7. The level of charge in

your battery can be checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a

service station.

NOTICE

5-99

Driving your vehicle

Check spark plugs and ignition

system

Inspect your spark plugs as

described in chapter 7 and replace

them if necessary. Also check all

ignition wiring and components to be

sure they are not cracked, worn or

damaged in any way.

Use approved window washer

anti-freeze in system

To keep the water in the window

washer system from freezing, add an

approved window washer anti-freeze

solution in accordance with instruc-

tions on the container.Window wash-

er anti-freeze is available from an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

most auto parts outlets. Do not use

engine coolant or other types of anti-

freeze as these may damage the

paint finish.

Do not let your parking brake

freeze

Under some conditions your parking

brake can freeze in the engaged

position.This is most likely to happen

when there is an accumulation of

snow or ice around or near the rear

brakes or if the brakes are wet. If

there is a risk the parking brake may

freeze, apply it only temporarily while

you put the gear selector lever in P

and block the rear wheels so the car

cannot roll.Then release the parking

brake.

Do not let ice and snow accu-

mulate underneath

Under some conditions, snow and

ice can build up under the fenders

and interfere with the steering.When

driving in severe winter conditions

where this may happen, you should

periodically check underneath the

car to be sure the movement of the

front wheels and the steering com-

ponents is not obstructed.

Don't place foreign objects or

materials in the engine com-

partment

Placement of foreign object or mate-

rials which prevent cooling of the

engine, in the engine compartment,

may cause a failure or combustion.

The manufacturer is not responsible

for the damage caused by such

placement.

To keep locks from freezing

To keep the locks from freezing,

squirt an approved de-icer fluid or

glycerine into the key opening. If a

lock is covered with ice, squirt it with

an approved de-icing fluid to remove

the ice.If the lock is frozen internally,

you may be able to thaw it out by

using a heated key. Handle the heat-

ed key with care to avoid injury.

5-100

Driving your vehicle

Two labels on your driver's door sill

show how much weight your vehicle

was designed to carry: the Tire and

Loading Information Label and the

Certification Label.

Before loading your vehicle, familiar-

ize yourself with the following terms

for determining your vehicle's weight

ratings, from the vehicle's specifica-

tions and the Certification Label:

Base Curb Weight

This is the weight of the vehicle

including a full tank of fuel and all

standard equipment. It does not

include passengers, cargo, or option-

al equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight

This is the weight of your new vehicle

when you picked it up from your deal-

er plus any aftermarket equipment.

Cargo Weight

This figure includes all weight added

to the Base Curb Weight, including

cargo and optional equipment.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight)

This is the total weight placed on

each axle (front and rear) - including

vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight that can be carried by a single

axle (front or rear). These numbers

are shown on the Certification Label.

The total load on each axle must

never exceed its GAWR.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

This is the Base Curb Weight plus

actual Cargo Weight plus passen-

gers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating)

This is the maximum allowable

weight of the fully loaded vehicle

(including all options, equipment,

passengers and cargo). The GVWR

is shown on the Certification Label

located on the driver’s door sill.

VVEEHHIICCLLEE LLOOAADD LLIIMMIITT

5-101

Driving your vehicle

Tire Loading Information Label

Vehicle capacity weight

849 lbs. (385 kg)

Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-

mum combined weight of occupants

and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped

with a trailer, the combined weight

includes the tongue load.

Seating capacity

Total : 5 persons

(Front seat : 2 persons,

Rear seat : 3 persons)

Seating capacity is the maximum

number of occupants including a

driver, your vehicle may carry.

However, the seating capacity may

be reduced based upon the weight of

all of the occupants, and the weight

of the cargo being carried or towed.

Do not overload the vehicle as there

is a limit to the total weight, or load

limit including occupants and cargo,

the vehicle can carry.

The label located on the driver's door

sill gives the original tire size, cold

tire pressures recommended for

your vehicle, the number of people

that can be in your vehicle and vehi-

cle capacity weight.

OAE067034N

OAE066035N

OAEPH067035

- Type B

■ 15 inch tire

- Type A

■ 16 inch tire

■ 17 inch tire

- Type A

- Type B

OAE066036N

OAE067032N

5-102

Driving your vehicle

Towing capacity

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

Cargo capacity

The cargo capacity of your vehicle

will increase or decrease depending

on the weight and the number of

occupants and the tongue load, if

your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement "The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's

placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will

be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and lug-

gage load capacity.For example, if

the "XXX" amount equals 1400

lbs. and there will be five 150 lb

passengers in your vehicle, the

amount of available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

5. Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded

on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

calculated in Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trail-

er, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle.Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and

luggage load capacity of your vehi-

cle.

Do not overload the vehicle as

there is a limit to the total

weight, or load limit, including

occupants and cargo, the vehi-

cle can carry. Overloading can

shorten the life of the vehicle. If

the GVWR or the GAWR is

exceeded, parts on the vehicle

can break, and it can change the

handling of your vehicle. These

could cause you to lose control

and result in an accident.

WARNING

5-103

Driving your vehicle

Example 1

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150 lbs. × 2 = 300 lbs.)

(68 kg × 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight

(1100 lbs.)

(499 kg)

Example 2

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Passenger Weight

(150 lbs. × 5 = 750 lbs.)

(68 kg × 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight

(650 lbs.)

(295 kg)

Example 3

Maximum Load

(1400 lbs.)

(635 kg)

Passenger Weight

(172 lbs. × 5 = 860 lbs.)

(78 kg × 5 = 390 kg)

Cargo Weight

(540 lbs.)

(245 kg)

≥≥

5-104

Driving your vehicle

Certification label

The certification label is located on

the driver's door sill at the center pil-

lar and shows the maximum allow-

able weight of the fully loaded vehi-

cle. This is called the GVWR (Gross

Vehicle Weight Rating). The GVWR

includes the weight of the vehicle, all

occupants, fuel and cargo.

This label also tells you the maxi-

mum weight that can be supported

by the front and rear axles, called

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).

The total weight of the vehicle,

including all occupants, accessories,

cargo, and trailer tongue load must

not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out

the actual loads on your front and

rear axles, you need to go to a weigh

station and weigh your vehicle. Be

sure to spread out your load equally

on both sides of the centerline.

OBH059070

Overloading

• Never exceed the GVWR for

your vehicle, the GAWR for

either the front or rear axle

and vehicle capacity weight.

Exceeding these ratings can

affect your vehicle's handling

and braking ability, and cause

an accident.

• Do not overload your vehicle.

Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in your

vehicle's tires and possible

tire failure, increased stop-

ping distances and poor vehi-

cle handling-all of which may

result in a crash.

WARNING

5-105

Driving your vehicle

Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would not

be covered by your warranty. Do

not overload your vehicle.

We do not recommend using this

vehicle for trailer towing.

NOTICE

TTRRAAIILLEERR TTOOWWIINNGG

If you carry items inside your

vehicle (e.g., suitcases, tools,

packages, or anything else),

they are moving as fast as the

vehicle. If you have to stop or

turn quickly, or if there is a

crash, the items will keep going

and can cause an injury if they

strike the driver or a passenger.

• Put items in the cargo area of

your vehicle.Try to spread the

weight evenly.

• Do not stack items, like suit-

cases, inside the vehicle

above the tops of the seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured

child restraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something

inside the vehicle, secure it.

WARNING

What to do in an emergency

Hazard Warning Flasher .......................................6-2

In Case of an Emergency While Driving.............6-2

If the Engine Stalls While Driving .................................6-2

If the Vehicle Stalls at a Crossroad or Crossing .......6-2

If You Have a Flat Tire While Driving ..........................6-3

If the Vehicle will not Start ..................................6-3

If the 12 Volt Battery is Discharged

(Hybrid Vehicle) .....................................................6-5

Before Jump Starting .......................................................6-5

Jump Starting......................................................................6-6

If the 12 Volt Battery is Discharged

(Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle).......................................6-9

Jump Starting......................................................................6-9

If the Engine Overheats......................................6-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).......6-14

Check Tire Pressure .......................................................6-14

Tire Pressure Monitoring System...............................6-15

Low Tire Pressure Telltale ............................................6-16

Low Tire Pressure LCD Display with

Position Indicator ............................................................6-16

TPMS Malfunction Indicator ........................................6-17

Changing a Tire with TPMS..........................................6-18

If You Have a Flat Tire........................................6-20

With Spare Tire................................................................6-20

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type A......................6-25

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) - Type B......................6-33

Towing ...................................................................6-40

Towing Service.................................................................6-40

Removable Towing Hook ...............................................6-41

Emergency Towing..........................................................6-42

If an Accident Occurs..........................................6-44

6-2

The hazard warning flasher serves

as a warning to other drivers to exer-

cise extreme caution when approach-

ing, overtaking, or passing your vehi-

cle.

It should be used whenever emer-

gency repairs are being made or

when the vehicle is stopped near the

edge of a roadway.

To turn the hazard warning flasher

on or off, press the hazard warning

flasher button both the left and right.

The button is located in the center

fascia panel. All turn signal lights will

flash simultaneously.

• The hazard warning flasher oper-

ates whether your vehicle is run-

ning or not.

• The turn signals do not work when

the hazard flasher is on.

If the Engine Stalls While

Driving

• Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place.

• Turn on your hazard warning flash-

er.

• Try to start the hybrid system

again. If your vehicle will not start,

contact an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer or seek other qualified

assistance.

If the Vehicle Stalls at a

Crossroad or Crossing

If the vehicle stalls at a crossroad or

crossing, if safe to do so, move the

shift lever to the N (Neutral) position

and then push the vehicle to a safe

location.

HHAAZZAARRDD WWAARRNNIINNGG FFLLAASSHHEERR

What to do in an emergency

IINN CCAASSEE OOFF AANN EEMMEERRGGEENNCCYY

WWHHIILLEE DDRRIIVVIINNGG

OAE066001

6-3

What to do in an emergency

If You Have a Flat Tire While

Driving

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

• Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal and let the vehicle slow

down while driving straight ahead.

Do not apply the brakes immedi-

ately or attempt to pull off the road

as this may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

When the vehicle has slowed to

such a speed that it is safe to do

so, brake carefully and pull off the

road. Drive off the road as far as

possible and park on firm, level

ground. If you are on a divided

highway, do not park in the median

area between the two traffic lanes.

• When the vehicle is stopped, press

the hazard warning flasher button,

move the shift lever into P (Park),

and apply the parking brake, and

place the Engine Start/Stop button

in the OFF position.

• Have all passengers get out of the

vehicle. Be sure they all get out on

the side of the vehicle that is away

from traffic.

• When changing a flat tire, follow

the instructions provided later in

this chapter.

Hybrid vehicle

• Be sure the shift lever is in P

(Park). The vehicle starts only

when the shift lever is in P (Park).

• This vehicle does not have a regu-

lar 12V battery that needs periodic

replacement. It is lithium ion poly-

mer type integrated into the HEV

high voltage battery. The vehicle

has a 12V battery protection sys-

tem that cuts 12V battery from

vehicle draw to prevent full dis-

charge. If vehicle will not start, first

try pressing the 12V Battery Reset

switch (left side of the steering

wheel near the fuel door open

switch) to reconnect the 12V bat-

tery, but you must start vehicle

within 15 seconds of pressing the

12V Battery Reset switch. After

starting vehicle, operate the vehi-

cle safely outdoors in ready mode

stopped and/or drive it for 30 min-

utes total to charge the 12V battery

fully.

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the vehicle still does not start, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

IIFF TTHHEE VVEEHHIICCLLEE WWIILLLL NNOOTT SSTTAARRTT

Push or pull starting the vehicle

may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overload which can

lead to damage to the emission

control system.

CAUTION

6-4

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

• Be sure the shift lever is in P

(Park). The engine starts only

when the shift lever is in P (Park).

• Check the battery connections to

be sure they are clean and tight.

• Turn on the interior light. If the light

dims or goes out when you operate

the starter, the battery is drained.

Do not push or pull the vehicle to

start it. This could cause damage to

your vehicle. See instructions for

"Jump Starting" provided in this

chapter.

• Check the fuel level and add fuel if

necessary.

If the engine still does not start, have

your vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

What to do in an emergency

Push or pull starting the vehicle

may cause the catalytic con-

verter to overload which can

lead to damage to the emission

control system.

CAUTION

6-5

What to do in an emergency

Before Jump Starting

This vehicle does not have a regular

12V battery that needs periodic

replacement. It is lithium ion polymer

type integrated into the HEV high

voltage battery. The vehicle has a

12V battery protection system that

cuts 12V battery from vehicle draw to

prevent full discharge.

Using the 12V Battery Reset

Switch

1. Press the 12V Battery Reset

switch to reconnect the 12V bat-

tery.

2. Start the vehicle within 15 sec-

onds of pressing the 12V Battery

Reset switch.

3. After starting vehicle ( indica-

tor on), operate the vehicle safely

outdoors in ready mode stopped

and/or drive it for 30 minutes total

to charge the 12V battery fully.

If you do not start the vehicle imme-

diately after pressing the 12V Battery

Reset switch, the power of 12V bat-

tery is automatically disconnected

after few seconds to save the 12V

battery from additional discharge. If

the 12V battery is disconnected prior

to starting the vehicle, press the 12V

Battery Reset switch again and then

immediately start the vehicle as

explained.

Repeated use of the 12V Battery

Reset switch without a sufficient

engine ON cycle (30 Min+) may

cause over discharge of the 12V bat-

tery, which will prevent the vehicle

from starting. If the 12V battery is

over discharged to a point that the

reset does not work, try to jump-start

the vehicle.

Information

After starting the vehicle ( indica-

tor on), the 12V battery is being

charged whether the engine is running

or not. Although there is no engine-

sound, it is unnecessary to depress the

accelerator pedal.

IIFF TTHHEE 1122 VVOOLLTT BBAATTTTEERRYY IISS DDIISSCCHHAARRGGEEDD ((HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

OAE046037N

6-6

What to do in an emergency

The following items may need to be

reset after the battery has been dis-

charged or the battery has been dis-

connected. See chapter 3 or 4 for:

• Power Windows

• Trip Computer

• Climate Control System

• Clock

• Audio System

• Sunroof

• Driver Position Memory System

External power source using 12V

battery

The use of external power acces-

sories may reduce performance

and function of the vehicle.

Especially, the use of dash cam-

eras may shut off the power of the

vehicle prior to the dash camera's

automatic shut-down.

If the power of the vehicle is shut

off, start the vehicle as explained.

(refer to "Using the 12V Battery

Switch")

Jump Starting

In the event vehicle still does not

have a functional 12V battery (check

if interior lights will not turn on) then

you can try a jump start to the engine

compartment jumper terminals using

a 12V booster pack or jumper cables

from another vehicle's 12V battery

according to the following instruc-

tions.

1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)

and set the parking brake. Turn

both vehicles OFF.

NOTICE

Jump starting can be danger-

ous if done incorrectly. Follow

the jump starting procedure in

this section to avoid serious

injury or damage to your vehi-

cle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehi-

cle, we strongly recommend

that you have a service techni-

cian or towing service do it for

you.

CAUTION

6-7

What to do in an emergency

4. Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+)

jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery/

chassis ground of the assisting

vehicle (3).

7. Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the black,

negative (-) chassis ground of

your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the cor-

rect battery or jumper terminals or

the correct ground. Do not lean

over the battery when making

connections.

8. Press the 12V Battery Reset

switch.

9. Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run for a few min-

utes.

10. Start your vehicle as soon as

possible. After starting vehicle

( indicator on), operate the

vehicle safely outdoors in ready

mode stopped and/or drive it for

30 minutes total to charge the

12V battery fully.

OAE066004N OAE046037N

6-8

What to do in an emergency

If your vehicle will not start after a

few attempts, it probably requires

servicing. In this event please seek

qualified assistance. If the cause of

your battery discharging is not

apparent, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, neg-

ative (-) battery/chassis ground of

the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper

cable from the red, positive (+)

battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

Information

The voltage range of the charger

should be 13.3~14V and its current

range should be less than 60A. (13.8V

is recommended).

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose of the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulations.

To prevent damage to your vehi-

cle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to

jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

NOTICE

• The use of an improper charg-

er with a voltage and current

range higher than specified

may cause overheating and

damage to the 12V battery.

• The use of an incorrect charg-

er will lead to a power shut-off

to save the 12V battery. Stop

using the incorrect charger

once the power of the vehicle

is shut off.

CAUTION

6-9

What to do in an emergency

Jump Starting

Jump starting can be dangerous if

done incorrectly. Follow the jump

starting procedure in this section to

avoid serious injury or damage to

your vehicle. If in doubt about how to

properly jump start your vehicle, we

strongly recommend that you have a

service technician or towing service

do it for you.

IIFF TTHHEE 1122 VVOOLLTT BBAATTTTEERRYY IISS DDIISSCCHHAARRGGEEDD ((PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always

present in battery cells,

is highly combustible,

and may explode if ignit-

ed.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

(Continued)

6-10

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to the

environment and human

health. Dispose of the battery

according to your local law(s)

or regulations.

To prevent damage to your vehicle:

• Only use a 12-volt power supply

(battery or jumper system) to

jump start your vehicle.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle by push-starting.

Jump starting procedure

1. Position the vehicles close enough

that the jumper cables will reach,

but do not allow the vehicles to

touch.

2. Avoid fans or any moving parts in

the engine compartment at all

times, even when the vehicles are

turned off.

3. Turn off all electrical devices such

as radios, lights, air conditioning,

etc. Put the vehicles in P (Park)

and set the parking brake. Turn

both vehicles OFF.

Information

Your vehicle has a battery in the lug-

gage compartment, but when you

jump start your vehicle, use the

jumper terminal in the engine com-

partment.

NOTICE

What to do in an emergency

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle's

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

6-11

What to do in an emergency

4. Connect the jumper cables in the

exact sequence shown in the illus-

tration. First connect one jumper

cable to the red, positive (+)

jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

5. Connect the other end of the

jumper cable to the red, positive

(+) battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

6. Connect the second jumper cable

to the black, negative (-) battery/

chassis ground of the assisting

vehicle (3).

7. Connect the other end of the sec-

ond jumper cable to the black,

negative (-) chassis ground of

your vehicle (4).

Do not allow the jumper cables to

contact anything except the cor-

rect battery or jumper terminals or

the correct ground. Do not lean

over the battery when making

connections.

8. Start the engine of the assisting

vehicle and let it run at approxi-

mately 2,000 rpm for a few min-

utes.Then start your vehicle.

If your vehicle will not start after a

few attempts, it probably requires

servicing. In this event please seek

qualified assistance. If the cause of

your battery discharging is not

apparent, have your vehicle checked

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Disconnect the jumper cables in the

exact reverse order you connected

them:

1. Disconnect the jumper cable from

the black, negative (-) chassis

ground of your vehicle (4).

2. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the black, neg-

ative (-) battery/chassis ground of

the assisting vehicle (3).

3. Disconnect the second jumper

cable from the red, positive (+)

battery/jumper terminal of the

assisting vehicle (2).

4. Disconnect the other end of the

jumper cable from the red, positive

(+) jumper terminal of your vehicle

(1).

OAE066004N

6-12

What to do in an emergency

If your engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, you

experience a loss of power, or hear

loud pinging or knocking, the engine

may be overheating. If this happens,

you should:

1. Turn ON the hazard warning flash-

er, pull off the road and stop as

soon as it is safe to do so.

2. Place the shift lever in P (Park)

and set the parking brake.

3. Make sure that there is no hot

steam gushing out of the engine

compartment. When it is safe to

do so, open the engine compart-

ment, and check the water-pump

connector. When the water-pump

connector is disconnected, stop

the engine, re-connect the water-

pump connector, and then re-start

the engine.

4. Set the temperature and the air

flow to the maximum, and turn ON

the air conditioner.

5. When the Service warning light

( ) illuminates on the instru-

ment cluster, immediately stop the

engine, and contact an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer. When the

engine warning light ( ) illumi-

nates, or when the coolant or hot

steams gush out of the engine

compartment, leave the engine

compartment opened, while run-

ning the engine.This is to ventilate

the engine compartment and to

cool down the engine.

6. Check the coolant temperature

gauge on the instrument cluster to

make sure the coolant temperature

is sufficiently cooled down. Check

the coolant level.When it is insuffi-

cient, check its connection with the

radiator, the heater hose, and the

water pump for any leakage.When

there is no leakage, add the

coolant. However, if the problems

persists, such as the illumination of

the warning lights, leakages, or the

cooling-fan malfunction, which may

overheat the engine, immediately

stop the engine, and have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

IIFF TTHHEE EENNGGIINNEE OOVVEERRHHEEAATTSS

The electric motor for

the cooling fan may

continue to operate

or start up when the

engine is not running

and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the rotating fan

blades of the cooling fan.

WARNING

6-13

What to do in an emergency

7. If you cannot find the cause of the

overheating, wait until the engine

temperature has returned to nor-

mal. Then, if coolant has been

lost, carefully add coolant to the

reservoir to bring the fluid level in

the reservoir up to the halfway

mark.

8. Proceed with caution, keeping

alert for further signs of overheat-

ing. If overheating happens again,

call an authorized HYUNDAI deal-

er for assistance.

Serious loss of coolant indi-

cates a leak in the cooling sys-

tem and should be checked as

soon as possible by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

CAUTION

Your vehicle is

equipped with a pres-

surized coolant

reserve tank. NEVER

remove the coolant

reserve tank cap or the radiator

drain plug while the engine and

radiator are HOT. Hot coolant

and steam may blow out under

pressure, causing serious

injury.

Turn the engine off and wait

until the engine cools down.

Use extreme care when remov-

ing the coolant reserve tank

cap. Wrap a towel or thick rag

around it, and turn it counter-

clockwise slowly to release

some of the pressure from the

system. Step back while the

pressure is released.

When you are sure all the pres-

sure has been released, contin-

ue turning the cap counter-

clockwise to remove it.

WARNING

6-14

What to do in an emergency

TTIIRREE PPRREESSSSUURREE MMOONNIITTOORRIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM ((TTPPMMSS))

(1) Low Tire Pressure / TPMS

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

(2) Low Tire Pressure /

Tire Pressure Monitor /

TPMS Malfunction Display

(shown on the cluster LCD dis-

play)

Check Tire Pressure

• You can check the tire pressure in

the Information Mode (for cluster

type A) or Assist Mode (for cluster

type B) on the cluster.

Refer to the "LCD Display

Modes" in chapter 3.

• Tire pressure is displayed after a

few minutes of driving after initial

engine start up.

• If tire pressure is not displayed

when the vehicle is stopped, "Drive

to display" message will appear.

After driving, check the tire pres-

sure.

• The displayed tire pressure values

may differ from those measured

with a tire pressure gauge.

• You can change the tire pressure

unit in the User Settings mode on

the cluster.

- psi, kpa, bar (Refer to the "User

Settings Mode" section in

chapter 3).

OAE066006N

■ Type A

■ Type A ■ Type B

■ Type B

OAE046460L/OAE066030L

OAE046114L/OAE046115L

6-15

What to do in an emergency

Tire Pressure Monitoring

System

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehi-

cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-

ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If

your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-

sure label, you should determine the

proper tire inflation pressure for

those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your

vehicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS)

that illuminates a low tire pressure

telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pres-

sure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-

cantly underinflated tire causes the

tire to overheat and can lead to tire

failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel effi-

ciency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle's handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a

substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver's responsi-

bility to maintain correct tire pres-

sure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumina-

tion of the TPMS low tire pressure

telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS malfunction indicator to

indicate when the system is not

operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure

telltale. When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated.This

sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be

able to detect or signal low tire pres-

sure as intended. TPMS malfunc-

tions may occur for a variety of rea-

sons, including the installation of

replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS from functioning properly.

Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle to

ensure that the replacement or alter-

nate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function proper-

ly.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

6-16

What to do in an emergency

Always check the TPMS malfunction

LCD display after replacing one or

more tires or wheels on your vehicle

to ensure that the replacement or

alternate tires and wheels allow the

TPMS to continue to function proper-

ly.

If any of the below happens, have

the system checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

1. The Low Tire Pressure TPMS

Malfunction Indicator does not

illuminate for 3 seconds when

the Engine Start/Stop button is

placed to the ON position or

engine is running.

2. The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

remains illuminated after blink-

ing for approximately 1 minute.

3. The Low Tire Pressure LCD dis-

play remains illuminated

Low Tire Pressure

Telltale

Low Tire Pressure LCD

Display with Position Indicator

When the tire pressure monitoring

system warning indicators are illumi-

nated and the warning message is

displayed on the cluster LCD display,

one or more of your tires is signifi-

cantly under-inflated. The LCD posi-

tion indicator will indicate which tire

is significantly under-inflated by illu-

minating the corresponding position

light.

If any of your tire pressures are indi-

cated as being low, immediately

reduce your speed, avoid hard cor-

nering, and anticipate increased

stopping distances. You should stop

and check your tires as soon as pos-

sible. Inflate the tires to the proper

pressure as indicated on the vehi-

cle's placard or tire inflation pressure

label located on the driver's side cen-

ter pillar outer panel.

If you cannot reach a service station

or if the tire cannot hold the newly

added air, replace the low pressure

tire with the spare tire.

The Low Tire Pressure LCD position

indicator will remain on and the

TPMS Malfunction Indicator may

blink for one minute and then remain

illuminated until you have the low

pressure tire repaired and replaced

on the vehicle.

The spare tire is not equipped with

a tire pressure sensor.

NOTICE

OAE046114L OAE046115L

■ Type A ■ Type B

6-17

What to do in an emergency

TPMS Malfunction

Indicator

The TPMS Malfunction

Indicator will illuminate after it blinks

for approximately one minute when

there is a problem with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System.

Have the system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer as soon

as possible.

If there is a malfunction with the

TPMS, the individual tire pres-

sures in the cluster LCD display

will not be available. Have the sys-

tem checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer as soon as possi-

ble.

NOTICE

During winter or cold weather,

the TPMS indicator may illumi-

nate if the tire pressures were

set when the outside tempera-

ture was warm. As the outside

air becomes colder, the pres-

sure in the tires will decrease.

Similarly, if the outside air

becomes warmer, the pressure

in the tires will increase. As you

drive your vehicle, the tempera-

ture of the tires will heat up,

therefore the tire pressures will

increase. Check and adjust your

tire pressures regularly before

driving to make sure your vehi-

cle is operating at the correct

pressures as designed.

CAUTION

Low pressure damage

Significantly low tire pressure

makes the vehicle unstable and

can contribute to loss of vehicle

control and increased braking

distances.

Continued driving on low pres-

sure tires can cause the tires to

overheat and fail.

WARNING

6-18

What to do in an emergency

The TPMS Malfunction Indicator

may illuminate after blinking for

one minute if the vehicle is near

electric power supply cables or

radio transmitters such as police

stations, government and public

offices, broadcasting stations,

military installations, airports,

transmitting towers, etc.

Additionally, the TPMS Malfunction

Indicator may illuminate if snow

chains are used or electronic

devices such as computers, charg-

ers, remote starters, navigation,

etc.This may interfere with normal

operation of the TPMS.

Changing a Tire with TPMS

If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire

Pressure and LCD position indicator

will come on. Have the flat tire

repaired by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible or

replace the flat tire with the spare

tire.

The spare tire does not come with a

tire pressure monitoring sensor.

When the low pressure tire or the flat

tire is replaced with the spare tire,

the Low Tire Pressure LCD position

indicator will remain on. Also, the

TPMS Malfunction Indicator will illu-

minate after blinking for one minute if

the vehicle is driven at speed above

15.5 mph (25 km/h) for approximate-

ly 20 minutes.

Once the original tire equipped with

a tire pressure monitoring sensor is

reinflated to the recommended pres-

sure and reinstalled on the vehicle,

the Low Tire Pressure LCD position

indicator and TPMS Malfunction

Indicator will go off within a few min-

utes of driving.

If the indicators do not disappear

after a few minutes, please visit an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Each wheel is equipped with a tire

pressure sensor mounted inside the

tire behind the valve stem (except for

the spare tire). You must use TPMS

specific wheels. It is recommended

that you always have your tires serv-

iced by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

NOTICE

Never use a puncture-repairing

agent not approved by HYUNDAI

dealer to repair and/or inflate a

low pressure tire. Tire sealant

not approved by HYUNDAI deal-

er may damage the tire pressure

sensor.

CAUTION

6-19

What to do in an emergency

You may not be able identify a tire

with low pressure by simply looking

at it. Always use a good quality tire

pressure guage to measure the tire's

inflation pressure. Please note that a

tire that is hot (from being driven) will

have a higher pressure measure-

ment than a tire that is cold.

A cold tire means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

Information

This device complies with Part 15 of

the FCC rules.

Operation is subject to the following

three conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any inter-

ference received, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired

operation.

3. Changes or modifications not

expressly approved by the party

responsible for compliance could

void the user’s authority to operate

the equipment.

• The TPMS cannot alert you to

severe and sudden tire dam-

age caused by external fac-

tors such as nails or road

debris.

• If you feel any vehicle instabil-

ity, immediately take your foot

off the accelerator, apply the

brakes gradually with light

force, and slowly move to a

safe position off the road.

WARNING

Tampering with, modifying, or

disabling the Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS)

components may interfere with

the system's ability to warn the

driver of low tire pressure con-

ditions and/or TPMS malfunc-

tions. Tampering with, modify-

ing, or disabling the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) components may void

the warranty for that portion of

the vehicle.

WARNING

6-20

What to do in an emergency

With Spare Tire (if equipped)

Jack and tools

➀ Jack handle

② Jack

③ Wheel lug nut wrench

The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug

nut wrench are stored in the luggage

compartment under the luggage box

cover.

The jack is provided for emergency

tire changing only.

Turn the winged hold down bolt

counterclockwise to remove the

spare tire.

Store the spare tire in the same com-

partment by turning the winged hold

down bolt clockwise.

To prevent the spare tire and tools

from "rattling", store them in their

proper location.

IIFF YYOOUU HHAAVVEE AA FFLLAATT TTIIRREE

Changing a tire can be danger-

ous. Follow the instructions in

this section when changing a

tire to reduce the risk of serious

injury or death.

WARNING

OAD065027

OAD065026

Be careful as you use the jack

handle to stay clear of the flat

end. The flat end has sharp

edges that could cause cuts.

CAUTION

6-21

What to do in an emergency

If it is hard to loosen the tire hold-

down wing bolt by hand, you can

loosen it easily using the jack handle.

1. Put the jack handle (1) inside of

the tire hold-down wing bolt.

2. Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt

counterclockwise with the jack

handle.

Changing tires

Follow these steps to change your

vehicle's tire:

1. Park on a level, firm surface.

2. Move the shift lever into P (Park),

apply the parking brake, and place

the Engine Start/Stop button in the

OFF position.

3. Press the hazard warning flasher

button.

4. Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,

jack, jack handle, and spare tire

from the vehicle.

5. Block both the front and rear of the

tire diagonally opposite of the tire

you are changing.

A vehicle can slip or roll off of a

jack causing serious injury or

death to you or those nearby.

Take the following safety pre-

cautions:

• Never place any portion of

your body under a vehicle that

is supported by a jack.

• NEVER attempt to change a

tire in the lane of traffic.

ALWAYS move the vehicle

completely off the road on

level, firm ground away from

traffic before trying to change

a tire. If you cannot find a level,

firm place off the road, call a

towing service for assistance.

• Be sure to use the jack pro-

vided with the vehicle.

• ALWAYS place the jack on the

designated jacking positions

on the vehicle and NEVER on

the bumpers or any other part

of the vehicle for jacking sup-

port.

(Continued)

• Do not start or run the engine

while the vehicle is on the

jack.

• Do not allow anyone to remain

in the vehicle while it is on the

jack.

• Keep children away from the

road and the vehicle.

WARNING

OLF064005

6-22

What to do in an emergency

6. Loosen the wheel lug nuts coun-

terclockwise one turn each in the

order shown above, but do not

remove any lug nuts until the tire

has been raised off of the ground.

7. Place the jack at the designated

jacking position under the frame

closest to the tire you are chang-

ing. The jacking positions are

plates welded to the frame with

two notches. Never jack at any

other position or part of the vehi-

cle. Doing so may damage the

side seal molding or other parts of

the vehicle.

8. Insert the jack handle into the jack

and turn it clockwise, raising the

vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Make sure the vehicle is

stable on the jack.

OAE066010

OAE066011 OAE066012

■ Front ■ Rear

6-23

What to do in an emergency

9. Loosen the lug nuts with the wheel

lug nut wrench and remove them

with your fingers. Remove the

wheel from the studs and lay it flat

on the ground out of the way.

Remove any dirt or debris from

the studs, mounting surfaces, and

wheel.

10. Install the spare tire onto the

studs of the hub.

11.Tighten the lug nuts with your fin-

gers onto the studs with the

smaller end of the lug nuts clos-

est to the wheel.

12. Lower the vehicle to the ground

by turning the jack handle coun-

terclockwise.

13. Use the wheel lug nut wrench to

tighten the lug nuts in the order

shown. Double-check each lug

nut until they are tight. After

changing tires, have an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer tighten the

lug nuts to their proper torque as

soon as possible. The wheel lug

nut should be tightened to

79~94 lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).

If you have a tire gauge, check the

tire pressure (see "Tires and

Wheels" in chapter 8 for tire pressure

instructions.). If the pressure is lower

or higher than recommended, drive

slowly to the nearest service station

and adjust it to the recommended

pressure. Always reinstall the valve

cap after checking or adjusting tire

pressure. If the cap is not replaced,

air may leak from the tire. If you lose

a valve cap, buy another and install it

as soon as possible. After changing

tires, secure the flat tire and return

the jack and tools to their proper stor-

age locations.

OAE066013 OLF064013

■ Rear

6-24

What to do in an emergency

Check the tire pressure as soon

as possible after installing a spare

tire. Adjust it to the recommended

pressure.

If any of the equipment such as the

jack, lug nuts, studs, or other equip-

ment is damaged or in poor condi-

tion, do not attempt to change the

tire and call for assistance.

Use of compact spare tires

(if equipped)

Compact spare tires are designed for

emergency use only. Drive carefully

on the compact spare tire and

always follow the safety precautions.

When driving with the compact spare

tire mounted to your vehicle:

• Check the tire pressure after

installing the compact spare tire.

The compact spare tire should be

inflated to 60 psi (420 kPa).

• Do not take this vehicle through an

automatic car wash while the com-

pact spare tire is installed.

• Do not use the compact spare tire

on any other vehicle because this

tire has been designed especially

for your vehicle.

• The compact spare tire’s tread life

is shorter than a regular tire.

Inspect your compact spare tire

regularly and replace worn com-

pact spare tires with the same size

and design, mounted on the same

wheel.

• Do not use more than one compact

spare tire at a time.

NOTICE

Your vehicle has metric threads

on the studs and lug nuts. Make

certain during tire changing

that the same nuts that were

removed are reinstalled. If you

have to replace your lug nuts

make sure they have metric

threads to avoid damaging the

studs and ensure the wheel is

properly secured to the hub.

Consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

To prevent compact spare tire

failure and loss of control pos-

sibly resulting in an accident:

• Use the compact spare tire

only in an emergency.

• NEVER operate your vehicle

over 50 mph (80 km/h).

• Do not exceed the vehicle's

maximum load rating or the

load carrying capacity shown

on the sidewall of the com-

pact spare tire.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire continuously. Repair or

replace the original tire as

soon as possible to avoid fail-

ure of the compact spare tire.

WARNING

6-25

What to do in an emergency

When the original tire and wheel

are repaired and reinstalled on the

vehicle,the lug nut torque must be

set correctly. The correct lug nut

tightening torque is 79~94 lbf·ft

(11~13 kgf·m).

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)

- Type A

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

NOTICE

To prevent damaging the com-

pact spare tire and your vehicle:

• Drive slowly enough for the

road conditions to avoid all

hazards, such as a potholes

or debris.

• Avoid driving over obstacles.

The compact spare tire diame-

ter is smaller than the diame-

ter of a conventional tire and

reduces the ground clearance

approximately 1 inch (25 mm).

• Do not use tire chains on the

compact spare tire. Because

of the smaller size, a tire chain

will not fit properly.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire on any other wheels, nor

should standard tires, snow

tires, wheel covers or trim

rings be used with the com-

pact spare wheel.

CAUTION

OAE066037N

6-26

What to do in an emergency

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix

to the tire and the tire should be

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tire

puncture.

The compressor and sealing com-

pound system effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tire caused by nails

or similar objects and reinflates the

tire.

After you ensure that the tire is prop-

erly sealed you can drive cautiously

on the tire (distance up to 120 miles

(200 km)) at a max. speed of (50

mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach a

service station or tire dealer for the

tire replacement.

It is possible that some tires, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may

adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

maneuvers, especially if the vehicle

is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in

use.

One sealant bottle for one tire

When two or more tires are flat,

do not use the tire mobility kit

because the supported one

sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is

only used for one flat tire.

CAUTION

Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tire

walls.This can result in an acci-

dent due to tire failure.

WARNING

Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon

as possible. The tire may lose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit.

WARNING

6-27

What to do in an emergency

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tire

repair method and is to be used for

one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the

Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car

tires.Only punctured areas located

within the tread region of the tire

can be sealed using the tire mobil-

ity kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tire damage larger

than approximately 0.24 inch (6

mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tire

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a

tire is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit

unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a

time or it may overheat.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below

-22°F (-30°C).

• In case of skin contact with the-

sealant, wash the area thoroughly-

with plenty of water.If the irritation-

persists, seek medical attention.

• In case of eye contact with the

sealant,flush your eyes for at least

15 min-utes.If the irritation persists,

seekmedical attention.

• In case of swallowing the

sealant,rinse the mouth and drink

plenty ofwater.However, never give

anythingto an unconscious person

and seekmedical attention immedi-

ately.

• Long time exposure to the sealant-

may cause damage to bodily tis-

suesuch as kidney, etc.

6-28

What to do in an emergency

1. Speed restriction label

2. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

4. Connectors and cable for power

outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. ON/OFF switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tire inflation

pressure

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

OAE067039

6-29

What to do in an emergency

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence,

otherwise the sealant may escape

under high pressure.

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).

2. Screw the filling hose (3) onto the

connector of the sealant bottle (2).

3. Insert the sealant bottle into the

housing of the compressor (5) so

that the bottle is upright.

4. Ensure that the button (9) on the

compressor is not pressed.

Do not use the tire sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

WARNING

Detach the speed restriction

label (1) from the sealant bottle

(2), and place it in a highly visi-

ble place inside the vehicle

such as on the steering wheel

to remind the driver not to drive

too fast.

CAUTION

OAE066014

OAEPH067041L

6-30

What to do in an emergency

5. Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective wheel and

screw the filling hose (3) of the

sealant bottle onto the valve.

6. Ensure that the compressor is

switched OFF.

7. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

8. With the vehicle ON ( indica-

tor ON), switch on the compressor

and let it run for approximately

5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up

to proper pressure. (refer to the

Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The

inflation pressure of the tire after

filling is unimportant and will be

checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the

tire and stay away from the tire

when filling it.

OAEPH067016

Securely install the sealant fill-

ing hose to the valve. If not,

sealant may flow backward,

possibly clogging the filling

hose.

CAUTION

OAE066027

OAE067040

6-31

What to do in an emergency

9. Switch off the compressor.

10. Detach the hoses from the

sealant bottle connector and

from the tire valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

11. Immediately drive approximately

4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10

minutes) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Checking the tire inflation pres-

sure

1. After driving approximately 4~6

miles (7~10 km or about

10 minutes), stop at a safe loca-

tion.

2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct-

ly into the compressor.

OLMF064106

OAEPH067041

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tire pressure is

below 29 psi (200 kpa). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tire failure.

CAUTION

Do not the filling leave your

vehicle running in a poorly ven-

tilated area for extended peri-

ods of time. Carbon monoxide

poisoning and suffocation can

occur.

WARNING

6-32

What to do in an emergency

3. Connect the other end of the filling

hose (3) directly into the tire valve.

4. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

5. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the recommended tire inflation.

With the ignition switched on, pro-

ceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure:

Switch on the compressor. To

check the current inflation pres-

sure setting, briefly switch off the

compressor.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure:

Press the button (9) on the com-

pressor.

Information

The pressure gauge may show higher

than actual reading when the com-

pressor is running. To get an accurate

tire pressure, the compressor needs to

be turned off.

Information

When reinstalling the repaired or

replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle,

tighten the wheel lug nut to 79~94

lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit

including sealant not approved by

HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sen-

sors may be damaged by sealant.

The sealant on the tire pressure

sensor and wheel should be

removed when you replace the

tire with a new one and inspect

the tire pressure sensors at an

authorized dealer.

CAUTION

The tire inflation pressure must

be at least 32 psi (220 kPa). If it

is not, do not continue driving.

Call for road side service or

towing.

WARNING

OAE067040

6-33

What to do in an emergency

With Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)

- Type B

For safe operation, carefully read

and follow the instructions in this

manual before use.

(1) Compressor

(2) Sealant bottle

The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix

to the tire and the tire should be

inspected by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer as soon as possible.

OAEPH067008

One sealant bottle for one tire

When two or more tires are flat,

do not use the tire mobility kit

because the supported one

sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is

only used for one flat tire.

CAUTION

Tire wall

Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit

to repair punctures in the tire

walls.This can result in an acci-

dent due to tire failure.

WARNING

Temporary fix

Have your tire repaired as soon

as possible. The tire may lose

air pressure at any time after

inflating with the Tire Mobility

Kit.

WARNING

6-34

Introduction

With the Tire Mobility Kit you stay

mobile even after experiencing a tire

puncture.

The compressor and sealing com-

pound system effectively and com-

fortably seals most punctures in a

passenger car tire caused by nails

or similar objects and reinflates the

tire.

After you ensure that the tire is prop-

erly sealed you can drive cautiously

on the tire (distance up to 120 miles

(200 km)) at a max. speed of (50

mph (80 km/h)) in order to reach a

service station or tire dealer for the

tire replacement.

It is possible that some tires, espe-

cially with larger punctures or dam-

age to the sidewall, cannot be sealed

completely.

Air pressure loss in the tire may

adversely affect tire performance.

For this reason, you should avoid

abrupt steering or other driving

maneuvers, especially if the vehicle

is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in

use.

The Tire Mobility Kit is not designed

or intended as a permanent tire

repair method and is to be used for

one tire only.

This instruction shows you step by

step how to temporarily seal the

puncture simply and reliably.

Read the section "Notes on the safe

use of the Tire Mobility Kit".

Notes on the safe use of the

Tire Mobility Kit

• Park your car at the side of the

road so that you can work with the

Tire Mobility Kit away from moving

traffic.

• To be sure your vehicle will not

move, even when you're on fairly

level ground, always set your park-

ing brake.

• Only use the Tire Mobility Kit for

sealing/inflation passenger car

tires.Only punctured areas located

within the tread region of the tire

can be sealed using the tire mobil-

ity kit.

• Do not use on motorcycles, bicy-

cles or any other type of tires.

• When the tire and wheel are dam-

aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit

for your safety.

• Use of the Tire Mobility Kit may not

be effective for tire damage larger

than approximately 0.24 inch (6

mm).

Please contact the nearest

HYUNDAI dealership if the tire

cannot be made roadworthy with

the Tire Mobility Kit.

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if a

tire is severely damaged by driving

run flat or with insufficient air pres-

sure.

• Do not remove any foreign objects

such as nails or screws that have

penetrated the tire.

• Provided the car is outdoors, leave

the engine running. Otherwise

operating the compressor may

eventually drain the car battery.

• Never leave the Tire Mobility Kit

unattended while it is being used.

• Do not leave the compressor run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a

time or it may overheat.

What to do in an emergency

6-35

What to do in an emergency

• Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit if

the ambient temperature is below

-22°F (-30°C).

• In case of skin contact with the-

sealant, wash the area thoroughly-

with plenty of water.If the irritation-

persists, seek medical attention.

• In case of eye contact with the

sealant,flush your eyes for at least

15 min-utes.If the irritation persists,

seekmedical attention.

• In case of swallowing the

sealant,rinse the mouth and drink

plenty ofwater.However, never give

anythingto an unconscious person

and seekmedical attention immedi-

ately.

• Long time exposure to the sealant-

may cause damage to bodily tis-

suesuch as kidney, etc.

Components of the Tire Mobility Kit

ODE067044

1. Speed restriction label

2. Sealant bottle and label with

speed restriction

3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to

wheel

4. Connectors and cable for power

outlet direct connection

5. Holder for the sealant bottle

6. Compressor

7. ON/OFF switch

8. Pressure gauge for displaying the

tire inflation pressure

9. Button for reducing tire inflation

pressure

6-36

Connectors, cable and connection

hose are stored in the compressor

housing.

Strictly follow the specified sequence,

otherwise the sealant may escape

under high pressure.

Using the Tire Mobility Kit

1. Shake the sealant bottle (2).

2. Connect the filling hose (3) to the

sealant bottle (2) in the direction of

(A) and connect the sealant bottle

to the compressor (5) in the direc-

tion of (B).

3. Ensure that the compressor is

switched OFF.

What to do in an emergency

Do not use the tire sealant after

the sealant has expired (i.e.

pasted the expiration date on

the sealant container). This can

increase the risk of tire failure.

WARNING

• Keep out of reach of children.

• Avoid contact with eyes.

• Do not swallow.

WARNING

Detach the speed restriction

label (1) from the sealant bottle

(2), and place it in a highly visi-

ble place inside the vehicle

such as on the steering wheel

to remind the driver not to drive

too fast.

CAUTION

OAE066014

OIGH067042

6-37

What to do in an emergency

4. Unscrew the valve cap from the

valve of the defective wheel and

screw the filling hose (3) of the

sealant bottle onto the valve.

5. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

6. With the vehicle ON ( indica-

tor ON), switch on the compressor

and let it run for approximately

5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up

to proper pressure. (refer to the

Tire and Wheels, chapter 8). The

inflation pressure of the tire after

filling is unimportant and will be

checked/corrected later.

Be careful not to overinflate the

tire and stay away from the tire

when filling it.

OAE067040

OAEPH067016

Securely install the sealant fill-

ing hose to the valve. If not,

sealant may flow backward,

possibly clogging the filling

hose.

CAUTION

OAE066027

6-38

What to do in an emergency

7. Switch off the compressor.

8. Detach the hoses from the sealant

bottle connector and from the tire

valve.

Return the Tire Mobility Kit to its stor-

age location in the vehicle.

Distributing the sealant

9. Immediately drive approximately

4~6 miles (7~10 km or about 10

minutes) to evenly distribute the

sealant in the tire.

Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph

(80 km/h). If possible, do not fall

below a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

While driving, if you experience any

unusual vibration, ride disturbance or

noise, reduce your speed and drive

with caution until you can safely pull

off of the side of the road.

Checking the tire inflation pres-

sure

1. After driving approximately 4~6

miles (7~10 km or about

10 minutes), stop at a safe loca-

tion.

2. Connect the filling hose (3) direct-

ly into the compressor.

Do not attempt to drive your

vehicle if the tire pressure is

below 29 psi (200 kpa). This

could result in an accident due

to sudden tire failure.

CAUTION

Do not the filling leave your

vehicle running in a poorly ven-

tilated area for extended peri-

ods of time. Carbon monoxide

poisoning and suffocation can

occur.

WARNING

OLMF064106

OAEPH067042

6-39

What to do in an emergency

3. Connect the other end of the filling

hose (3) directly into the tire valve.

4. Plug the compressor power cord

(4) into the vehicle power outlet.

5. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to

the recommended tire inflation.

With the ignition switched on, pro-

ceed as follows.

- To increase the inflation pres-

sure:

Switch on the compressor. To

check the current inflation pres-

sure setting, briefly switch off the

compressor.

- To reduce the inflation pres-

sure:

Press the button (9) on the com-

pressor.

Information

The pressure gauge may show higher

than actual reading when the com-

pressor is running. To get an accurate

tire pressure, the compressor needs to

be turned off.

Information

When reinstalling the repaired or

replaced tire and wheel on the vehicle,

tighten the wheel lug nut to 79~94

lbf·ft (11~13 kgf·m).

OAE067040

When you use the Tire Mobility Kit

including sealant not approved by

HYUNDAI, the tire pressure sen-

sors may be damaged by sealant.

The sealant on the tire pressure

sensor and wheel should be

removed when you replace the

tire with a new one and inspect

the tire pressure sensors at an

authorized dealer.

CAUTION

The tire inflation pressure must

be at least 32 psi (220 kPa). If it

is not, do not continue driving.

Call for road side service or

towing.

WARNING

6-40

What to do in an emergency

Towing Service

If emergency towing is necessary,

we recommend having it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a

commercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing procedures

are necessary to prevent damage to

the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies

or flatbed is recommended.

It is acceptable to tow the vehicle

with the rear wheels on the ground

(without dollies) and the front wheels

off the ground.

If any of the loaded wheels or sus-

pension components are damaged

or the vehicle is being towed with the

front wheels on the ground, use a

towing dolly under the front wheels.

When being towed by a commercial

tow truck and wheel dollies are not

used, the front of the vehicle should

always be lifted, not the rear.

TTOOWWIINNGG

OAE066018

Dolly

• Do not tow the vehicle with

the front wheels on the

ground as this may cause

damage to the vehicle.

• Do not tow with sling-type

equipment. Use wheel lift or

flatbed equipment.

CAUTION

OAEE066016

OAE066019

6-41

What to do in an emergency

When towing your vehicle in an

emergency without wheel dollies :

1. Place the Engine Start/Stop but-

ton in the ACC position.

2. Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

3. Release the parking brake.

Removable Towing Hook

1. Open the liftgate, and take the

towing hooks out from the tool

case.

2. Remove the hole cover by press-

ing the lower part of the cover on

the front or rear bumper.

3. Install the towing hook by turning it

clockwise into the hole until it is

fully secured.

4. Remove the towing hook and

install the cover after use.

Failure to place the transmis-

sion shift lever in N (Neutral)

may cause internal damage to

the transmission.

CAUTION

OAE066021N

OAE066022N

OAE066028N

■ Front

■ Rear

6-42

What to do in an emergency

Emergency Towing

(if equipped)

If towing is necessary, we recom-

mend you to have it done by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer or a

commercial tow truck service.

If a towing service is not available in

an emergency, your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or

chain secured to the emergency tow-

ing hook at the rear of the vehicle.

Use extreme caution when towing

the vehicle with a cable or chain. A

driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing should be done only on a

solid ground for a short distance and

at a low speed.

Also, the wheels, axles, power train,

steering and brakes must all be in

good condition.

Always follow these emergency tow-

ing precautions:

• Place the Engine Start/Stop button

in the ACC position so the steering

wheel is not locked.

• Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).

• Release the parking brake.

• Depress the brake pedal with more

force than normal since you will

have reduced braking perform-

ance.

• More steering effort will be required

because the power steering system

will be disabled.

• Use a vehicle heavier than your

own to tow your vehicle.

• The drivers of both vehicles should

communicate with each other fre-

quently.

• Before emergency towing, check

that the hook is not broken or dam-

aged.

• Fasten the towing cable or chain

securely to the hook.

• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady

and even force.

OAE066024N

OAE066023N

■ Front

■ Rear

6-43

What to do in an emergency

• Use a towing cable or chain less

than 16 feet (5 m) long. Attach a

white or red cloth (about 12 inches

(30 cm) wide) in the middle of the

cable or chain for easy visibility.

• Drive carefully so the towing cable

or chain remains tight during tow-

ing.

• Before towing, check the dual

clutch transmission for fluid leaks

under your vehicle. If the dual

clutch transmission fluid is leaking,

flatbed equipment or a towing dolly

must be used.

OAE066025

To avoid damage to your vehicle

and vehicle components when

towing:

• Always pull straight ahead

when using the towing hooks.

Do not pull from the side or at

a vertical angle.

• Do not use the towing hooks

to pull a vehicle out of mud,

sand or other conditions from

which the vehicle cannot be

driven out under its own

power.

• Limit the vehicle speed to 10

mph (15 km/h) and drive less

than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-

ing to avoid serious damage

to the dual clutch transmis-

sion.

CAUTION

6-44

What to do in an emergency

IIFF AANN AACCCCIIDDEENNTT OOCCCCUURRSS

• For your safety, do not touch

high voltage cables, connec-

tors and package modules.

High voltage components are

orange in color.

• Exposed cables or wires may

be visible inside or outside of

the vehicle. Never touch the

wires or cables, because an

electrical shock,an injury, or a

death may occur.

• Any gas or electrolyte leakage

from your vehicle is not only

poisonous but also flammable.

Upon witnessing one of those,

open the windows, and remain

a safe distance from the vehi-

cle out of the road. Immediately

contact an authorized Hyundai

dealer and advise them that a

hybrid vehicle is involved.

• If you need towing, refer to

"Towing" in the previous pages.

(Continued)

• When the vehicle is severely

damaged, remain a safe dis-

tance of 50 feet (15 meter) or

more between your vehicle

and other vehicles/flamma-

bles.

WARNING

If a fire occurs :

Upon witnessing any sparks,

gases, flames, or fuel leakage of

your vehicle, immediately call

911 or contact an authorized

HYNDAI dealer. Also, advise

them that a hybrid vehicle is

involved.

WARNING

When a submersion in water

occurs:

When your vehicle is flooded in

water, a high-voltage battery

may cause shock or may catch

on fire. Thus, turn the hybrid

system OFF, take the key in

your possession and move to a

safe place. Never attempt phys-

ical contact with your flooded

vehicle. Immediately contact an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer and

advise them that a hybrid vehi-

cle is involved.

WARNING

Maintenance

Engine Compartment .............................................7-3

Maintenance Services ...........................................7-5

Owner's Responsibility.....................................................7-5

Owner Maintenance Precautions..................................7-5

Owner Maintenance ..............................................7-6

How to Disconnect the (-) Cable for

Regular Maintenance (Hybrid vehicle) ........................7-7

Owner Maintenance Schedule.......................................7-7

Scheduled Maintenance Services........................7-8

Normal Maintenance Schedule......................................7-9

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions........7-12

Severe driving conditions..............................................7-13

Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance

Items ......................................................................7-14

Engine Oil..............................................................7-16

Checking the Engine Oil Level .....................................7-16

Checking the Engine Oil and Filter.............................7-17

Engine Coolant/Inverter Coolant.......................7-18

Checking the Coolant Level..........................................7-18

Changing Coolant ............................................................7-21

Hybrid Starter & Generator (HSG) Belt ...........7-22

Checking the Hybrid Starter &

Generator (HSG) Belt .....................................................7-22

Brake Fluid............................................................7-22

Checking the Brake Fluid Level...................................7-22

Washer Fluid.........................................................7-23

Checking the Washer Fluid Level................................7-23

Parking Brake.......................................................7-24

Checking the Parking Brake.........................................7-24

Air Cleaner ............................................................7-24

Filter Replacement..........................................................7-24

Climate Control Air Filter....................................7-26

Filter Inspection...............................................................7-26

Wiper Blades.........................................................7-28

Blade Inspection ..............................................................7-28

Blade Replacement .........................................................7-28

Battery (12 Volt, Plug-In Hybrid Vehicle)........7-31

For Best Battery Service ..............................................7-32

Battery Recharging ........................................................7-32

Reset Features.................................................................7-33

Tires and wheels..................................................7-34

Tire Care............................................................................7-34

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressures...........7-35

Check Tire Inflation Pressure ......................................7-36

Tire Rotation.....................................................................7-37

Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............................7-38

Tire Replacement ............................................................7-38

Wheel Replacement........................................................7-39

Tire Traction .....................................................................7-39

Tire Maintenance............................................................7-40

Tire Sidewall Labeling ....................................................7-40

Tire Terminology and Definitions................................7-44

All Season Tires...............................................................7-47

Summer Tires ...................................................................7-47

Snow Tires ........................................................................7-47

Radial-Ply Tires...............................................................7-47

Low Aspect Ratio Tires..................................................7-48

Fuses......................................................................7-49

Instrument Panel Fuse Replacement..........................7-50

Engine Compartment Panel Fuse Replacement.......7-51

Fuse/Relay Panel Description......................................7-53

Light Bulbs ............................................................7-55

Headlamp, Parking Lamp, Turn Signal Lamp

and Side Marker..............................................................7-55

Daytime Running Light (DRL).......................................7-60

Side Repeater Lamp Replacement..............................7-61

Rear Combination Light Bulb Replacement ..............7-61

High Mounted Stop Lamp Replacement....................7-64

License Plate Light Bulb Replacement ......................7-65

Interior Light Bulb Replacement .................................7-65

Appearance Care..................................................7-67

Exterior Care....................................................................7-67

Interior Care .....................................................................7-71

Emission Control System ....................................7-74

Crankcase Emission Control System ..........................7-74

Evaporative Emission Control System Including

Onboard Refueling Vapor Recovery (ORVR)............7-74

Exhaust Emission Control System ..............................7-75

California Perchlorate Notice.............................7-78

7-3

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOMMPPAARRTTMMEENNTT

OAE076001

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Engine coolant cap

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Inverter coolant reservoir

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8.Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Fuse box

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■

Hybrid vehicle

7-4

Maintenance

OAEPH076001

1. Engine oil filler cap

2. Engine oil dipstick

3. Engine coolant cap

4. Engine coolant reservoir

5. Inverter coolant reservoir

6. Brake fluid reservoir

7. Air cleaner

8.Windshield washer fluid reservoir

9. Fuse box

The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.

■■

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

7-5

Maintenance

MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE SSEERRVVIICCEESS

You should exercise the utmost care

to prevent damage to your vehicle

and injury to yourself whenever per-

forming any maintenance or inspec-

tion procedures.

We recommend you have your vehi-

cle maintained and repaired by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer. An

authorized HYUNDAI dealer meets

HYUNDAI's high service quality

standards and receives technical

support from HYUNDAI in order to

provide you with a high level of serv-

ice satisfaction.

Owner's Responsibility

Maintenance service and record

retention are the owner's responsibil-

ity.

You should retain documents that

show proper maintenance has been

performed on your vehicle in accor-

dance with the scheduled mainte-

nance service charts shown on the

following pages. You need this infor-

mation to establish your compliance

with the servicing and maintenance

requirements of your vehicle war-

ranties.

Detailed warranty information is pro-

vided in your Owner's Handbook &

Warranty Information booklet.

Repairs and adjustments required as

a result of improper maintenance or

a lack of required maintenance are

not covered.

Owner Maintenance

Precautions

Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-

cient servicing may result in opera-

tional problems with your vehicle that

could lead to vehicle damage, an

accident, or personal injury. This

chapter provides instructions only for

the maintenance items that are easy

to perform. Several procedures can

be done only by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer with special tools.

Your vehicle should not be modified

in any way. Such modifications may

adversely affect the performance,

safety or durability of your vehicle

and may, in addition, violate condi-

tions of the limited warranties cover-

ing the vehicle.

Certain modifications may also be in

violation of regulations established by

the U.S.Department of Transportation

and other federal or state agencies.

Improper owner maintenance dur-

ing the warranty period may affect

warranty coverage. For details, read

the separate Owner's Handbook &

Warranty Information booklet pro-

vided with the vehicle. If you're

unsure about any service or main-

tenance procedure, have it done

by an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

NOTICE

7-6

Maintenance

OOWWNNEERR MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

The following lists are vehicle checks

and inspections that should be per-

formed by the owner or an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer at the frequen-

cies indicated to help ensure safe,

dependable operation of your vehi-

cle.

Any adverse conditions should be

brought to the attention of your deal-

er as soon as possible.

These Owner Maintenance vehicle

checks are generally not covered by

warranties and you may be charged

for labor, parts and lubricants used.

Performing maintenance work

on a vehicle can be dangerous.

If you lack sufficient knowledge

and experience or the proper

tools and equipment to do the

work, have it done by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

ALWAYS follow these precau-

tions for performing mainte-

nance work:

• Park your vehicle on level

ground, move the shift lever

into the P (Park), apply the

parking brake, and place the

Engine Start/Stop button in

the OFF position.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

• Block the tires (front and

back) to prevent the vehicle

from moving.

Remove loose clothing or jew-

elry that can become entan-

gled in moving parts.

• If you must run the engine

during maintenance, do so

out doors or in an area with

plenty of ventilation.

• Keep flames, sparks, or smok-

ing materials away from the

battery and fuel-related parts.

7-7

Maintenance

How to Disconnect the (-)

Cable for Regular Maintenance

(Hybrid vehicle)

When the vehicle is under regular

maintenance, make sure to separate

the (-) cable before maintenance.

Separate the (-) cable following the

below instructions.

1. Fold the rear left side seat.

2. Remove the service cover (A) on

the luggage trim.

3. Separate the (-) cable (B).

Reassemble in the reverse order.

Owner Maintenance Schedule

When you stop for fuel:

• Check the engine oil level.

• Check the coolant level in the

engine coolant reservoir.

• Check the windshield washer fluid

level.

• Check for low or under-inflated

tires.

While operating your vehicle:

• Note any changes in the sound of

the exhaust or any smell of

exhaust fumes in the vehicle.

• Check for vibrations in the steering

wheel. Notice if there is any

increased steering effort or loose-

ness in the steering wheel, or

change in its straight-ahead posi-

tion.

• Notice if your vehicle constantly

turns slightly or "pulls" to one side

when traveling on smooth, level

road.

• When stopping, listen and check

for unusual sounds, pulling to one

side, increased brake pedal travel

or "hard-to-push" brake pedal.

• If any slipping or changes in the

operation of your transmission

occurs, check the transmission

fluid level.

• Check the dual clutch transmission

P (Park) function.

• Check the parking brake.

• Check for fluid leaks under your

vehicle (water dripping from the air

conditioning system during or after

use is normal).

Be careful when checking your

engine coolant/inverter coolant

level when the engine is hot.

This may result in coolant being

blown out of the opening and

cause serious burns and other

injuries.

WARNING

OAE076073N

7-8

Maintenance

At least monthly:

• Check coolant level in the engine

coolant reservoir.

• Check the operation of all exterior

lights, including the brake lights,

turn signals and hazard warning

flashers.

• Check the inflation pressures of all

tires including the spare for tires

that are worn, show uneven wear,

or are damaged.

• Check for loose wheel lug nuts.

At least twice a year:

(i.e., every Spring and Fall)

• Check radiator, heater and air con-

ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-

age.

• Check windshield washer spray

and wiper operation. Clean wiper

blades with a clean cloth damp-

ened with washer fluid.

• Check headlamp alignment.

• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,

shields and clamps.

• Check the seat belts for wear and

function.

At least once a year:

• Clean body and door drain holes.

• Lubricate door hinges and hood

hinges.

• Lubricate door and hood locks and

latches.

• Lubricate door rubber weather

strips.

• Lubricate door checker.

• Check the air conditioning system.

• Inspect and lubricate transmission

linkage and controls.

• Clean the battery and terminals.

• Check the brake fluid level.

Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule

if the vehicle is usually operated where

none of the following conditions apply.

If any of the following conditions apply,

you must follow the Maintenance

Under Severe Usage Conditions.

• Repeated short distance driving.

• Driving in dusty conditions or

sandy areas.

• Extensive use of brakes.

• Driving in areas where salt or other

corrosive materials are used.

• Driving on rough or muddy roads.

• Driving in mountainous areas.

• Extended periods of idling or low

speed operation.

• Driving for a prolonged period in

cold temperatures and/or extreme-

ly humid climates.

• More than 50% driving in heavy

city traffic during hot weather

above 90°F (32°C).

For additional information or assis-

tance see your authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE

SSEERRVVIICCEESS

7-9

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance.

Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the

frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 83 90 98 105 113

Km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

HSG belts *

Inspect every 7,500 miles or 12 months,

and replace every 67,500 miles or 48 months

Engine oil and engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Fuel additives *

Add fuel additives every 7,500 miles or 12months

Air cleaner filter I I R I I R I I R I I R I I R

Spark plugs Replace every 97,500 miles

Rotate tires Rotate tires every 7,500 miles

Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R

Vacuum hose I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Engine coolant / Inverter coolant

At first, replace at 120,000 miles or 10 years :

after that, replace every 30,000 miles or 24 months

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

: Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive wear or oil saturation and replace if necessary. If drive belt noise

occurred, readjust drive belt tension before replace.

: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are available from your

authorized HYUNDAI dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other additives.

7-10

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 83 90 98 105 113

Km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Battery condition I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Engine clutch actuator hoses and lines I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Disc brakes and pads I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Driveshaft and boots I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Suspension mounting bolts I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner refrigerant I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Air conditioner compressor I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I

Exhaust pipe and muffler I I I I I I I

Dual clutch transmission fluid I I I

Vapor hose, fuel filler cap and fuel tank I I I

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

7-11

Maintenance

Normal Maintenance Schedule (CONT.)

Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first

Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60 67.5 75 83 90 98 105 113

Km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 108 120 132 144 156 168 180

Fuel tank air filter *

I I I I I I I

Fuel filter *

I I I I I I I

Fuel lines, hoses and connections I I I

Parking brake I I I I I I I

Brake fluid I I I I I I I

Engine clutch actuator fluid Inspect every 7,500 miles, and replace every 22,500 miles

MAINTENANCE

INTERVALS

MAINTENANCE

ITEM

I : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace.

R : Replace or change.

: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be maintenance free but periodic inspection is recommended for this mainte-

nance schedule depends on fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of

power, hard starting problem, etc. replace the fuel filter immediately regardless of maintenance schedule and consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer for details.

7-12

Maintenance

Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions.

Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

Maintenance item

Maintenance

operation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

HSG (Hybrid Starter&Generator) belt

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)

or 24 months

C, D, E, L

I Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

Engine oil and filter R Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months

A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, H, I, K

Air cleaner filter R More frequently C, E

Spark plugs R More frequently B, H

Climate control air filter

(for evaporator and blower unit)

R More frequently C, E

Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H

7-13

Maintenance

Severe driving conditions

A-Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles (8 km)

in normal temperature or less than 10 miles (16 km) in freez-

ing temperature

B-Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long dis-

tances

C-Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-

spread roads

D-Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in

very cold weather

E-Driving in sandy areas

F-Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)

G-Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road

H-Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack

I -Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle

towing

J -Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)

K-Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

Maintenance item

Maintenance

operation

Maintenance intervals Driving condition

Rear brake disc/pads I More frequently C, D, G, F

Steering gear box, linkage & boots/

lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint

I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I

Drive shafts and boots I

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

or 6 months

C, D, E, F,

G, H, I, J

Dual clutch transmission fluid R Every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H

7-14

Maintenance

EEXXPPLLAANNAATTIIOONN OOFF SSCCHHEEDDUULLEEDD MMAAIINNTTEENNAANNCCEE IITTEEMMSS

Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be

changed at the intervals specified in

the maintenance schedule. If the

vehicle is being driven in severe con-

ditions, more frequent oil and filter

changes are required.

Fuel Filter

A clogged-up fuel filter may limit the

vehicle driving speed, damage the

emission system, and cause the

hard starting. When a considerable

amount of foreign substances are

accumulated in the fuel tank, the fuel

filter should be replaced.

Upon installing a new fuel filter, oper-

ate the engine for several minutes,

and check the connections for any

leakages. Fuel filters should be

installed by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and

Connections

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and

connections for leakage and dam-

age. Have an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer replace any damaged or leak-

ing parts immediately.

Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler

Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap

should be inspected at those inter-

vals specified in the maintenance

schedule. Make sure a new vapor

hose or fuel filler cap is correctly

replaced.

HSG (Hybrid Starter &

Generator) Belt

The HSG belt should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Air Cleaner Filter

A genuine HYUNDAI air cleaner filter

is recommended when the filter is

replaced.

Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs

of the correct heat range.

Cooling System

Check cooling system components,

such as radiator, coolant reservoir,

hoses and connections for leakage

and damage. Replace any damaged

parts.

Engine Coolant / Inverter

Coolant

The coolant should be changed at

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

7-15

Maintenance

Dual Clutch Transmission

Fluid

The dual clutch transmission fluid

should be inspected according to the

intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Engine Clutch Actuator Fluid

The engine clutch actuator fluid level

should be inspected or replaced to

the intervals specified in the mainte-

nance schedule.

Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation,

chafing, cracks, deterioration and

any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-

ed or damaged parts immediately.

Brake Fluid

Check the brake fluid level in the

brake the fluid reservoir. The level

should be between the MIN and the

MAX marks on the side of the reser-

voir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid

conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 spec-

ification.

Parking Brake

Inspect the parking brake system

including the parking brake pedal

and cables.

Brake Discs, Pads, Calipers

and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear,

discs for run out and wear, and

calipers for fluid leakage.

Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,

muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-

rioration, or damage.Start the engine

and listen carefully for any exhaust

gas leakage. Tighten connections or

replace parts as necessary.

Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections

for looseness or damage. Retighten

to the specified torque.

Steering Gear Box, Linkage &

Boots / Lower Arm Ball Joint

With the vehicle stopped and the

engine off, check for excessive free-

play in the steering wheel. Check the

linkage for bends or damage. Check

the dust boots and ball joints for

deterioration, cracks, or damage.

Replace any damaged parts.

Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and

clamps for cracks, deterioration, or

damage. Replace any damaged

parts and, if necessary, repack the

grease.

Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and

connections for leakage and dam-

age.

7-16

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE OOIILL

Checking the Engine Oil Level

1. Follow all of the oil manufacturer’s

precautions.

2. Be sure the vehicle is on the level

ground in P (Park) with the park-

ing brake set.If possible, block the

wheels.

3. Turn the engine on and allow the

engine to reach normal operating

temperature.

4. Turn the engine off and wait about

five minutes for the oil to return to

the oil pan.

5. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,

and re-insert it fully.

6. Pull the dipstick out again and

check the level. The level should

be between F (Full) and L (Low).

7. If it is near or at L, add enough oil

to bring the level to F.

To prevent damage to your

engine:

• Do not overfill with engine oil.

Add oil in small quantities and

recheck level to ensure engine

is not overfilled.

• Do not spill engine oil when

adding or changing engine oil.

Use a funnel to help prevent oil

from being spilled on engine

components. Wipe off spilled oil

immediately.

NOTICE

OAE076002 OAEPH076003

7-17

Maintenance

Information

Use only the specified engine oil (refer

to "Recommended Lubricants and

Capacities" in chapter 8).

Checking the Engine Oil and

Filter

Have engine oil and filter changed by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer

according to the Maintenance

Schedule at the beginning of this

chapter.

The electric motor for

the cooling fan may

continue to operate

or start up when the

engine is not running

and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the rotating fan

blades of the cooling fan.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine oil contains chemicals

known to the State of California

to cause cancer, birth defects

and reproductive harm. Used

engine oil may cause irritation

or cancer of the skin if left in

contact with the skin for pro-

longed periods of time. Always

protect your skin by washing

your hands thoroughly with

soap and warm water as soon

as possible after handling used

oil.

WARNING

7-18

Maintenance

EENNGGIINNEE CCOOOOLLAANNTT//IINNVVEERRTTEERR CCOOOOLLAANNTT

The high-pressure cooling system

has a reservoir filled with year-round

antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is

filled at the factory.

Check the antifreeze protection and

coolant level at least once a year, at

the beginning of the winter season

and before traveling to a colder cli-

mate.

Checking the Coolant Level

Check the condition and connections

of all cooling system hoses and

heater hoses. Replace any swollen

or deteriorated hoses.

The coolant level should be filled

between the MAX and the MIN

marks on the side of the coolant

reservoir when the engine is cool.

If the coolant level is low, add enough

distilled (deionized) water to bring

the level to the MAX mark, but do not

overfill. If frequent additions are

required, see an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer for a cooling system inspection.

OAE076005

OAE076004

■ Engine coolant

■ Inverter coolant

7-19

Maintenance

Information

The engine coolant and/or inverter

coolant level is influenced by the

hybrid system temperature. Before

checking or refilling the engine

coolant and/or inverter coolant, turn

the hybrid vehicle off.

OAE076006

OAE076007

■ Engine coolant cap

■ Inverter coolant cap

Never remove the

engine coolant cap

and/or inverter coolant

cap or the drain plug

while the engine and

radiator are hot. Hot coolant and

steam may blow out under pres-

sure, causing serious injury.

Turn the hybrid system off and

wait until the engine cools

down. Use extreme care when

removing the engine coolant

cap and/or inverter coolant cap.

Wrap a thick towel around it,

and turn it counterclockwise

slowly to the first stop. Step

back while the pressure is

released from the cooling sys-

tem. When you are sure all the

pressure has been released,

press down on the cap, using a

thick towel, and continue turn-

ing counterclockwise to remove

it.

WARNING

The electric motor for

the cooling fan may

continue to operate

or start up when the

engine is not running

and can cause serious injury.

Keep hands, clothing and tools

away from the rotating fan

blades of the cooling fan.

WARNING

7-20

Maintenance

The electric motor for the cooling fan

is controlled by engine coolant tem-

perature, refrigerant pressure and

vehicle speed.As the engine coolant

temperature decreases, the electric

motor will automatically shut off.This

is a normal condition. If your vehicle

is equipped with GDI, the electric

motor for the cooling fan may begin

to operate at any time and continue

to operate until you disconnect the

negative battery cable.

Make sure the coolant cap is

properly closed after refilling

coolant. Otherwise the engine

could be overheated while driv-

ing.

1. Check if the coolant cap label

is straight In front.

(Continued)

WARNING

OTL075062

■ Engine room front view

(Continued)

2. Make sure that the tiny pro-

trusions inside the coolant

cap is securely interlocked.

OAE076050

■ Engine compartment rear view

7-21

Maintenance

Recommended coolant

• When adding coolant, use only

distilled (deionized) water for your

vehicle and never mix hard water in

the coolant filled at the factory.

• An improper coolant mixture can

result in severe malfunction or

engine/ hybrid system damage.

• The engine in your vehicle has alu-

minum engine parts and must be

protected by an phosphate-based

ethylene glycol coolant to prevent

corrosion and freezing.

• Do not use alcohol or methanol

coolant or mix them with the spec-

ified coolant.

• Do not use a solution that contains

more than 60% antifreeze or less

than 35% antifreeze, which would

reduce the effectiveness of the

solution.

For mixing percentage, refer to the

following table:

Information

If in doubt about the mix ratio, a 50%

water and 50% antifreeze mix is the

easiest to mix together as it will be the

same quantity of each. It is suitable to

use for most temperature ranges of

-31°F (-35 °C) and higher.

Changing Coolant

Have coolant changed by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer according to

the Maintenance Schedule at the

beginning of this chapter.

To prevent damage to engine

parts, put a thick towel around the

radiator cap before refilling the

coolant to prevent the coolant

from overflowing into engine

parts, such as the alternator.

NOTICE

Ambient

Temperature

Mixture Percentage

(volume)

Antifreeze Water

5°F (-15°C) 35 65

-13°F (-25°C) 40 60

-31°F (-35°C) 50 50

-49°F (-45°C) 60 40

Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when sprayed

on the windshield and may

cause loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident.

Engine coolant may also cause

damage to paint and body trim.

WARNING

7-22

Maintenance

Checking the Hybrid Starter &

Generator (HSG) Belt

Have the hybrid starter & generator

(HSG) belt inspected or replaced

according to the Maintenance

Schedule in this chapter by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

Check the fluid level in the reservoir

periodically. The fluid level should be

between MAX and MIN marks on the

side of the reservoir.

Before removing the reservoir cap

and adding brake fluid, clean the

area around the reservoir cap thor-

oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-

ination.

If the level is low, add the specified

brake fluid to the MAX level.The level

will fall with accumulated mileage.

This is a normal condition associated

with the wear of the brake linings. If

the fluid level is excessively low, have

the brake system checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Turn the vehicle off while you

inspect the engine or hybrid

starter & generator(HSG) belt.

Otherwise it may result in

serious injury.

• Keep hands, clothing etc.

away from the hybrid starter &

generator (HSG) belt.

WARNING

When the HSG belt is worn out

or damaged, replace the belt.

Otherwise, it may cause engine

overheating or battery dis-

charge.

CAUTION

HHYYBBRRIIDD SSTTAARRTTEERR &&

GGEENNEERRAATTOORR ((HHSSGG)) BBEELLTT

BBRRAAKKEE FFLLUUIIDD

OAE076008

If the brake system requires fre-

quent additions of fluid this

could indicate a leak in the

brake system. Have the vehicle

inspected by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

WARNING

Do not allow brake fluid to come

in contact with your eyes. If

brake fluid comes in contact

with your eyes, flush your eyes

with clean water for at least 15

minutes and get immediate

medical attention.

WARNING

7-23

Maintenance

• Do not allow brake fluid to con-

tact the vehicle’s body paint, as

paint damage will result.

• Brake fluid, which has been

exposed to open air for an

extended time should NEVER be

used as its quality cannot be

guaranteed. It should be dis-

posed of properly.

• Do not use the wrong kind of

brake fluid. A few drops of miner-

al based oil,such as engine oil, in

your brake system can damage

brake system parts.

Information

Use only the specified brake fluid

(refer to "Recommended Lubricants

and Capacities" in chapter 8).

Checking the Washer Fluid

Level

Check the fluid level in the washer

fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-

sary. Plain water may be used if

washer fluid is not available.

However, use washer solvent with

antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-

mates to prevent freezing.

NOTICE

WWAASSHHEERR FFLLUUIIDD

OAE076009

To prevent serious injury or

death, take the following safety

precautions when using washer

fluid:

• Do not use engine coolant or

antifreeze in the washer fluid

reservoir.

Engine coolant can severely

obscure visibility when

sprayed on the windshield and

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident or

damage to paint and body trim.

• Do not allow sparks or flames

to contact the washer fluid or

the washer fluid reservoir.

Washer fluid may contain alco-

hol and can be flammable.

• Do not drink washer fluid and

avoid contact with skin.

Washer fluid is harmful to

humans and animals.

• Keep washer fluid away from

children and animals.

WARNING

7-24

Maintenance

PPAARRKKIINNGG BBRRAAKKEE

Checking the Parking Brake

Check whether the stroke is within

specification when the parking brake

pedal is depressed with 44 lb (20 kg,

196 N) of force. Also, the parking

brake alone should securely hold the

vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the

stroke is more or less than specified,

have the parking brake adjusted by

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Stroke : 4~5 notch

Filter Replacement

The air cleaner filter can be cleaned

for inspection using compressed air.

Do not attempt to wash or to rinse it,

as water will damage the filter.

If soiled, the air cleaner filter must be

replaced.

1. Loosen the air cleaner cover

attaching clips and open the

cover.

OAE056014

AAIIRR CCLLEEAANNEERR

OAEPH076010

OAEPH076011

7-25

Maintenance

2. Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.

3. Replace the air cleaner filter.

4. Lock the cover with the cover

attaching clips.

5. Check that the cover is firmly

installed.

Information

If the vehicle is operated in extremely

dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele-

ment more often than the usual rec-

ommended intervals (refer to

"Maintenance Under Severe Usage

Conditions" in this chapter).

• Do not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed.This will result in

excessive engine wear.

• When removing the air cleaner

filter, be careful that dust or dirt

does not enter the air intake, or

damage may result.

• Use HYUNDAI genuine parts.

Use of non-genuine parts could

damage the air flow sensor.

NOTICE

OAE076012

7-26

Maintenance

CCLLIIMMAATTEE CCOONNTTRROOLL AAIIRR FFIILLTTEERR

Filter Inspection

The climate control air filter should

be replaced according to the

Maintenance Schedule.If the vehicle

is operated in severely air-polluted

cities or on dusty rough roads for a

long period, it should be inspected

more frequently and replaced earlier.

When you replace the climate control

air filter, replace it performing the fol-

lowing procedure, and be careful to

avoid damaging other components.

1. With the glove box open, remove

the stoppers on both sides.

2. Remove the support rod (1).

OAE076013

OAE076014

7-27

Maintenance

3. Press and hold the lock (1) on

both sides of the cover.

4. Pull out (2) the cover.

5. Replace the climate control air fil-

ter.

6. Reassemble in the reverse order

of disassembly.

Install a new climate control air fil-

ter in the correct direction with the

arrow symbol (

↓↓

) facing down-

wards, otherwise, it may be noisy

and the effectiveness of the filter

may be reduced.

NOTICE

OHG075041OAE076015

7-28

Maintenance

WWIIPPEERR BBLLAADDEESS

Blade Inspection

Contamination of either the wind-

shield or the wiper blades with for-

eign matter can reduce the effective-

ness of the windshield wiper func-

tionality. Common sources of con-

tamination are insects, tree sap, and

hot wax treatments used by some

commercial car washes.If the blades

are not wiping properly, clean both

the window and the blades with a

clean cloth dampened with washer

fluid.

To prevent damage to the wiper

blades, arms or other compo-

nents, do not:

• Use gasoline, kerosene, paint

thinner, or other solvents on or

near them.

• Attempt to move the wipers

manually.

• Use non-specified wiper blades.

Information

Commercial hot waxes applied by

automatic car washes have been

known to make the windshield diffi-

cult to clean.

Blade Replacement

When the wipers no longer clean

adequately, the blades may be worn

or cracked, and require replacement.

To prevent damage to the wiper

arms or other components, do not

attempt to move the wipers manu-

ally.

The use of a non-specified wiper

blade could result in wiper mal-

function and failure.

NOTICE

7-29

Maintenance

Type A

1. Raise the wiper arm and slightly

rotate the wiper blade assembly to

expose the plastic locking clip.

Do not allow the wiper arm to fall

against the windshield, since it

may chip or crack the windshield.

2. Press the clip (1) and slide the

blade assembly downward (2).

3. Lift it off the arm.

4. Install the blade assembly in the

reverse order of removal.

5. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

Type B

1. Raise the wiper arm.

NOTICE

OLMB073020

OLMB073021

OLMB073022

OLF074017

7-30

Maintenance

2. Lift up the wiper blade clip (1).

Then lift up the wiper blade (2).

3. While pushing the lock (3), pull

down the wiper blade (4).

4. Remove the wiper blade from the

wiper arm (5).

5. Install a new wiper blade assem-

bly in the reverse order of removal.

6. Return the wiper arm on the wind-

shield.

OAD075074L

OAD075075L OAD075076L

BBAATTTTEERRYY ((1122 VVOOLLTT,, PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE))

7-31

Maintenance

To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH to you or bystanders,

always follow these precautions

when working near or handling

the battery:

Always read and follow

instructions carefully

when handling a battery.

Wear eye protection

designed to protect the

eyes from acid splashes.

Keep all flames, sparks,

or smoking materials

away from the battery.

Hydrogen is always pres-

ent in battery cells, is

highly combustible, and

may explode if ignited.

Keep batteries out of

reach of children.

(Continued)

WARNING

(Continued)

Batteries contain sulfu-

ric acid which is highly

corrosive. Do not allow

acid to contact your

eyes, skin or clothing.

If acid gets into your eyes, flush

your eyes with clean water for at

least 15 minutes and get imme-

diate medical attention. If acid

gets on your skin, thoroughly

wash the area. If you feel pain or

a burning sensation, get med-

ical attention immediately.

• When lifting a plastic-cased

battery, excessive pressure

on the case may cause battery

acid to leak. Lift with a battery

carrier or with your hands on

opposite corners.

• Do not attempt to jump start

your vehicle if your battery is

frozen.

(Continued)

• NEVER attempt to recharge

the battery when the vehicle’s

battery cables are connected

to the battery.

• The electrical ignition system

works with high voltage.

NEVER touch these compo-

nents with the engine running

or when the Engine Start/Stop

button is in the ON position.

• When you do not use the vehicle

for a long time in a low tempera-

ture area, disconnect the battery

and keep it indoors.

• Always charge the battery fully

to prevent battery case damage

in low temperature areas.

For Best Battery Service

• Keep the battery securely mount-

ed.

• Keep the battery top clean and dry.

• Keep the terminals and connec-

tions clean, tight, and coated with

petroleum jelly or terminal grease.

• Rinse any spilled acid from the bat-

tery immediately with a solution of

water and baking soda.

Battery Recharging

NOTICE

7-32

Maintenance

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, and

related accessories contain

lead and lead compounds,

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer, birth

defects and reproductive harm.

Batteries also contain other

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer.

Wash hands after handling.

WARNING

Always follow these instruc-

tions when recharging your

vehicle's battery to avoid the

risk of SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH from explosions or acid

burns:

• Before performing mainte-

nance or recharging the bat-

tery, turn off all accessories

and place the Engine Start/

Stop button in the OFF posi-

tion.

• Keep all flames, sparks, or

smoking materials away from

the battery.

• Always work outdoors or in an

area with plenty of ventilation.

• Wear eye protection when

checking the battery during

charging.

• The battery must be removed

from the vehicle and placed in

a well ventilated area.

(Continued)

WARNING

OAE076016

By jump starting

After a jump start from a good bat-

tery, drive the vehicle for 20-30 min-

utes before it is shutoff. The vehicle

may not restart if you shut it off

before the battery had a chance to

adequately recharge. See "Jump

Starting" in chapter 6 for more infor-

mation on jump starting procedures.

Information

An inappropriately disposed

battery can be harmful to

the environment and human

health. Dispose of the bat-

tery according to your local

law(s) or regulations.

Reset Features

The following items may need to be

reset after the battery has been dis-

charged or the battery has been dis-

connected. See chapter 3 or 4 for:

• Power Windows

• Trip Computer

• Climate Control System

• Clock

• Audio System

• Sunroof

• Driver Position Memory System

7-33

Maintenance

(Continued)

• Watch the battery during

charging, and stop or reduce

the charging rate if the battery

cells begin boiling violently.

• The negative battery cable

must be removed first and

installed last when the battery

is disconnected. Disconnect

the battery charger in the fol-

lowing order:

(1) Turn off the battery charg-

er main switch.

(2) Unhook the negative

clamp from the negative

battery terminal.

(3) Unhook the positive clamp

from the positive battery

terminal.

•

Always use a genuine

HYUNDAI approved battery

when you replace the battery.

7-34

Maintenance

TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS

Tire Care

For proper maintenance, safety, and

maximum fuel economy, you must

always maintain recommended tire

inflation pressures and stay within

the load limits and weight distribution

recommended for your vehicle.

(Continued)

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear,or are dam-

aged. Worn tires can cause

loss of braking effectiveness,

steering control, or traction.

• ALWAYS replace tires with the

same size as each tire that

was originally supplied with

this vehicle. Using tires and

wheels other than the recom-

mended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle's Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

Tire failure may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident. To reduce risk of

SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH,

take the following precautions:

• Inspect your tires monthly for

proper inflation as well as

wear and damage.

• The recommended cold tire

pressure for your vehicle can

be found in this manual and on

the tire label located on the dri-

ver’s side center pillar. Always

use a tire pressure gauge to

measure tire pressure. Tires

with too much or too little

pressure wear unevenly caus-

ing poor handling.

• Check the pressure of the

spare every time you check

the pressure of the other tires

on your vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING

7-35

Maintenance

All specifications (sizes and pres-

sures) can be found on a label

attached to the driver's side center

pillar.

Recommended Cold Tire

Inflation Pressures

All tire pressures (including the

spare) should be checked when the

tires are cold. "Cold tires" means the

vehicle has not been driven for at

least three hours or has been driven

less than one mile (1.6 km).

Warm tires normally exceed recom-

mended cold tire pressures by 4 to 6

psi (28 to 41 kPa). Do not release air

from warm tires to adjust the pres-

sure or the tires will be under-inflat-

ed. For recommended inflation pres-

sure, refer to "Tire and Wheels" in

chapter 8.

Recommended pressures must

be maintained for the best ride,

vehicle handling, and minimum

tire wear.

Over-inflation or under-inflation

can reduce tire life, adversely

affect vehicle handling, and

lead to sudden tire failure that

could result in loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

Severe under-inflation can lead

to severe heat build-up, causing

blowouts, tread separation and

other tire failures that can result

in the loss of vehicle control

resulting in an accident. This

risk is much higher on hot days

and when driving for long peri-

ods at high speeds.

WARNING

OAE086002L

7-36

Maintenance

Check Tire Inflation Pressure

Check your tires, including the spare

tire, once a month or more.

How to check

Use a good quality tire pressure

gauge to check tire pressure. You

can not tell if your tires are properly

inflated simply by looking at them.

Radial tires may look properly inflat-

ed when they are under-inflated.

Remove the valve cap from the tire

valve stem.Press the tire gauge firm-

ly onto the valve to get a pressure

measurement.If the cold tire inflation

pressure matches the recommended

pressure on the tire label located on

the driver's side center pillar or in this

manual. No further adjustment is

necessary. If the pressure is low, add

air until you reach the recommended

pressure. Make sure to put the valve

caps back on the valve stems.

Without the valve cap, dirt or mois-

ture could get into the valve core and

cause air leakage. If a valve cap is

missing, install a new one as soon as

possible.

If you overfill the tire, release air by

pushing on the metal stem in the

center of the tire valve. Recheck the

tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be

sure to put the valve caps back on

the valve stems. Without the valve

cap, dirt or moisture could get into

the valve core and cause air leakage.

If a valve cap is missing, install a new

one as soon as possible.

A cold tire means the vehicle has

been sitting for 3 hours and driven for

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3

hour period.

Allow the tire to cool before measur-

ing the inflation pressure. Always be

sure the tire is cold before inflating to

the recommended pressure.

• Under-inflation results in

excessive wear,poor handling

and reduced fuel economy.

Wheel deformation is also

possible. Keep your tire pres-

sures at the proper levels. If a

tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Over-inflation produces a

harsh ride, excessive wear at

the center of the tire tread,

and a greater possibility of

damage from road hazards.

CAUTION

7-37

Maintenance

Tire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, HYUNDAI

recommends that the tires be rotated

every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or

sooner if irregular wear develops.

During rotation, check the tires for

correct balance.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage.Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out-

of-balance wheels, severe braking or

severe cornering. Look for bumps or

bulges in the tread or side of the tire.

Replace the tire if you find any of

these conditions. Replace the tire if

fabric or cord is visible.After rotation,

be sure to bring the front and rear tire

pressures to specification and check

lug nut tightness (proper torque is

79~94 lbf·ft [11~13 kgf·m]).

Disc brake pads should be inspected

for wear whenever tires are rotated.

Information

Tires that are asymmetrical or direc-

tional can only be installed on the

wheel in one direction. The outside

and inside of an asymmetrical tire is

not easily distinguishable. Pay careful

attention to the markings on the side-

walls of the tires, noting the "outside"

marking and also the rotating direc-

tion before installing them on the

vehicle.

• Do not use the compact spare

tire for tire rotation.

• Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances. This may cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics that may cause loss of

vehicle control resulting in an

accident.

WARNING

ODH073802

■ Without a spare tire

7-38

Maintenance

Wheel Alignment and Tire

Balance

The wheels on your vehicle were

aligned and balanced carefully at the

factory to give you the longest tire life

and best overall performance.

In most cases, you will not need to

have your wheels aligned again.

However, if you notice unusual tire

wear or your vehicle pulling one way

or the other, the alignment may need

to be reset.

If you notice your vehicle vibrating

when driving on a smooth road, your

wheels may need to be rebalanced.

Improper wheel weights can dam-

age your vehicle's aluminum

wheels. Use only approved wheel

weights.

Tire Replacement

If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear

indicator will appear as a solid band

across the tread.This shows there is

less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread

left on the tire.Replace the tire when

this happens.

Do not wait for the tread surface to

become level with the tread wear

indicators before replacing the tire.

NOTICE

OLMB073027

Tread wear indicator

To reduce the risk of DEATH or

SERIOUS INJURY:

• Replace tires that are worn,

show uneven wear, or are

damaged. Worn tires can

cause loss of braking effec-

tiveness, steering control, and

traction.

• Always replace tires with the

same size as each tire that

was originally supplied with

this vehicle. Using tires and

wheels other than the recom-

mended sizes could cause

unusual handling characteris-

tics, poor vehicle control, or

negatively affect your vehi-

cle’s Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) resulting in a serious

accident.

(Continued)

WARNING

7-39

Maintenance

Compact spare tire replacement

(if equipped)

A compact spare tire has a shorter

tread life than a regular size tire.

Replace it when you can see the

tread wear indicator bars on the tire.

The replacement compact spare tire

should be the same size and design

tire as the one provided with your

new vehicle and should be mounted

on the same compact spare tire

wheel. The compact spare tire is not

designed to be mounted on a regular

size wheel, and the compact spare

tire wheel is not designed for mount-

ing a regular size tire.

Wheel Replacement

When replacing the metal wheels for

any reason, make sure the new

wheels are equivalent to the original

factory units in diameter, rim width

and offset.

Tire Traction

Tire traction can be reduced if you

drive on worn tires, tires that are

improperly inflated or on slippery

road surfaces. Tires should be

replaced when the tread depth is at

least 1/16 inch (1.6 mm). To reduce

the possibility of losing control, slow

down whenever there is rain, snow or

ice on the road.

(Continued)

• Tires degrade over time, even

when they are not being used.

Regardless of the remaining

tread, HYUNDAI recommends

that tires be replaced after six

(6) years of normal service.

• When replacing tires (or

wheels), it is recommended to

replace the two front or two

rear tires (or wheels) as a pair.

Replacing just one tire can

seriously affect your vehicle's

handling. If only replacing one

pair of tires, it is recommend-

ed to install the pair of new

tires on the rear axle.

• Heat caused by hot climates

or frequent high loading con-

ditions can accelerate the

aging process. Failure to fol-

low this warning may cause

sudden tire failure, which

could lead to a loss of vehicle

control resulting in an acci-

dent.

The original tire should be

repaired or replaced as soon as

possible to avoid failure of the

spare and loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.The

compact spare tire is for emer-

gency use only. Do not operate

your vehicle over 50 mph (80

km/h) when using the compact

spare tire.

WARNING

7-40

Maintenance

Tire Maintenance

In addition to proper inflation, correct

wheel alignment helps to decrease

tire wear. If you find a tire is worn

unevenly, have your dealer check the

wheel alignment.

When you have new tires installed,

make sure they are balanced. This

will increase vehicle ride comfort and

tire life. Additionally, a tire should

always be rebalanced if it is removed

from the wheel.

Tire Sidewall Labeling

This information identifies and

describes the fundamental charac-

teristics of the tire and also provides

the tire identification number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

1. Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

2.Tire size designation

A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire

size designation. You will need this

information when selecting replace-

ment tires for your car. The following

explains what the letters and num-

bers in the tire size designation

mean.

Example tire size designation:

(These numbers are provided as an

example only; your tire size designa-

tor could vary depending on your

vehicle.)

195/65R15 91H

195 - Tire width in millimeters.

65 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section

height as a percentage of its

width.

R - Tire construction code (Radial).

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

91 - Load Index, a numerical code

associated with the maximum

load the tire can carry.

H - Speed Rating Symbol. See the

speed rating chart in this section

for additional information.

OLMB073028

5,6

7-41

Maintenance

Wheel size designation

Wheels are also marked with impor-

tant information that you need if you

ever have to replace one.The follow-

ing explains what the letters and

numbers in the wheel size designa-

tion mean.

Example wheel size designation:

6.5J X 15

6.5 - Rim width in inches.

J - Rim contour designation.

15 - Rim diameter in inches.

Tire speed ratings

The chart below lists many of the dif-

ferent speed ratings currently being

used for passenger vehicle tires.The

speed rating is part of the tire size

designation on the sidewall of the

tire.This symbol corresponds to that

tire's designed maximum safe oper-

ating speed.

3. Checking tire life (TIN :Tire

Identification Number)

Any tires that are over six years old,

based on the manufacturing date,

(including the spare tire) should be

replaced by new ones. You can find

the manufacturing date on the tire

sidewall (possibly on the inside of the

wheel), displaying the DOT Code.

The DOT Code is a series of num-

bers on a tire consisting of numbers

and English letters. The manufactur-

ing date is designated by the last four

digits (characters) of the DOT code.

DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO

The front part of the DOT shows a

plant code number, tire size and

tread pattern and the last four num-

bers indicate week and year manu-

factured.

For example:

DOT XXXX XXXX 1417 represents

that the tire was produced in the 14th

week of 2017.

Speed

Rating

Symbol

Maximum Speed

S 112 mph (180 km/h)

T 118 mph (190 km/h)

H 130 mph (210 km/h)

V 149 mph (240 km/h)

W 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y 186 mph (300 km/h)

7-42

Maintenance

4.Tire ply composition and

material

The number of layers or plies of rub-

ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate the

materials in the tire, which include

steel, nylon, polyester, and others.

The letter "R" means radial ply con-

struction; the letter "D" means diago-

nal or bias ply construction; and the

letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-

struction.

5. Maximum permissible infla-

tion pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure. Refer

to the Tire and Loading Information

label for recommended inflation

pressure.

6. Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maximum

load in kilograms and pounds that

can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle,

always use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

7. Uniform tire quality grading

Quality grades can be found where

applicable on the tire sidewall

between tread shoulder and maxi-

mum section width.

For example:

TREADWEAR 200

TRACTION AA

TEMPERATURE A

Tread wear

The tread wear grade is a compara-

tive rating based on the wear rate of

the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified govern-

ment test course. For example, a tire

graded 150 would wear one-and-a-

half times (1½) as well on the gov-

ernment course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires

depends upon the actual conditions

of their use, however, and may

depart significantly from the norm

due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in

road characteristics and climate.

These grades are molded on the

sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires.

The tires available as standard or

optional equipment on your vehicle

may vary with respect to grade.

7-43

Maintenance

Traction - AA, A, B & C

The traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those

grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement as measured

under controlled conditions on spec-

ified government test surfaces of

asphalt and concrete. A tire marked

C may have poor traction perform-

ance.

Temperature - A, B & C

The temperature grades are A (the

highest), B and C representing the

tire’s resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can

cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. Grade C

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor

Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.

Grades B and A represent higher

levels of performance on the labora-

tory test wheel than the minimum

required by law.

The traction grade assigned to

this tire is based on straight-

ahead braking traction tests,

and does not include accelera-

tion, cornering, hydroplaning,

or peak traction characteristics.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this

tire is established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not

overloaded. Excessive speed,

under-inflation, over-inflation,

or excessive loading, either

separately or in combination,

can cause heat build-up and

possible sudden tire failure.

This may cause loss of vehicle

control resulting in an accident.

WARNING

7-44

Maintenance

Tire Terminology and

Definitions

Air Pressure

The amount of air inside the tire

pressing outward on the tire. Air

pressure is expressed in pounds per

square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight

This means the combined weight of

optional accessories. Some exam-

ples of optional accessories are

automatic transmission, power

seats, and air conditioning.

Aspect Ratio

The relationship of a tire's height to

its width.

Belt

A rubber coated layer of cords that is

located between the plies and the

tread.Cords may be made from steel

or other reinforcing materials.

Bead

The tire bead contains steel wires

wrapped by steel cords that hold the

tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the plies

are laid at alternate angles less than

90 degrees to the centerline of the

tread.

Cold Tire Pressure

The amount of air pressure in a tire,

measured in pounds per square inch

(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire

has built up heat from driving.

Curb Weight

This means the weight of a motor

vehicle with standard and optional

equipment including the maximum

capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but

without passengers and cargo.

DOT Markings

A code molded into the sidewall of a

tire signifying that the tire is in com-

pliance with the U.S. Department of

Transportation motor vehicle safety

standards. The DOT code includes

the Tire Identification Number (TIN),

an alphanumeric designator which

can also identify the tire manufactur-

er, production plant, brand and date

of production.

GVWR

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

GAWR FRT

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Front Axle.

GAWR RR

Gross Axle Weight Rating for the

Rear axle.

Intended Outboard Sidewall

The side of an asymmetrical tire, that

must always face outward when

mounted on a vehicle.

7-45

Maintenance

Kilopascal (kPa)

The metric unit for air pressure.

Light truck(LT) tire

A tire designated by its manufacturer

as primarily intended for use on light-

weight trucks or multipurpose pas-

senger vehicles.

Load ratings

The maximum load that a tire is rated

to carry for a given inflation pressure.

Load Index

An assigned number ranging from 1

to 279 that corresponds to the load

carrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum air pressure to which

a cold tire may be inflated.The max-

imum air pressure is molded onto the

sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating

The load rating for a tire at the maxi-

mum permissible inflation pressure

for that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle

Weight

The sum of curb weight; accessory

weight; vehicle capacity weight; and

production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight

The number of occupants a vehicle

is designed to seat multiplied by 150

pounds (68 kg).

Occupant Distribution

Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall

An asymmetrical tire has a particular

side that faces outward when mount-

ed on a vehicle. The outward facing

sidewall bears white lettering or

bears manufacturer, brand, and/or

model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same moldings on

the inner facing sidewall.

Passenger (P-Metric) tire

A tire used on passenger cars and

some light duty trucks and multipur-

pose vehicles.

Ply

A layer of rubber-coated parallel

cords.

Pneumatic tire

A mechanical device made of rubber,

chemicals, fabric and steel or other

materials, that, when mounted on an

automotive wheel provides the trac-

tion and contains the gas or fluid that

sustains the load.

Pneumatic options weight

The combined weight of installed

regular production options weighing

over 5 lb. (2.3 kg) in excess of the

standard items which they replace,

not previously considered in curb

weight or accessory weight, includ-

ing heavy duty breaks, ride levelers,

roof rack, heavy duty battery, and

special trim.

7-46

Maintenance

Recommended Inflation

Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-

ed tire inflation pressure as shown

on the tire placard.

Radial Ply Tire

A pneumatic tire in which the ply

cords that extend to the beads are

laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of

the tread.

Rim

A metal support for a tire and upon

which the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall

The portion of a tire between the

tread and the bead.

Speed Rating

An alphanumeric code assigned to a

tire indicating the maximum speed at

which a tire can operate.

Traction

The friction between the tire and the

road surface.The amount of grip pro-

vided.

Tread

The portion of a tire that comes into

contact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators

Narrow bands, sometimes called

"wear bars", that show across the

tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch of

tread remains.

UTQGS

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Standards is a tire information sys-

tem that provides consumers with

ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-

ture and treadwear. Ratings are

determined by tire manufacturers

using government testing proce-

dures. The ratings are molded into

the sidewall of the tire.

Vehicle Capacity Weight

The number of designated seating

positions multiplied by 150 lbs. (68

kg) plus the rated cargo and luggage

load.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the

Tire

Load on an individual tire due to curb

and accessory weight plus maximum

occupant and cargo weight.

Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire

Load on an individual tire that is

determined by distributing to each

axle its share of the curb weight,

accessory weight, and normal occu-

pant weight and dividing by 2.

Vehicle Placard

A label permanently attached to a

vehicle showing the original equip-

ment tire size and recommended

inflation pressure.

7-47

Maintenance

All Season Tires

HYUNDAI specifies all season tires

on some models to provide good

performance for use all year round,

including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All season tires are identified

by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud

and Snow) on the tire sidewall.Snow

tires have better snow traction than

all season tires and may be more

appropriate in some areas.

Summer Tires

HYUNDAI specifies summer tires on

some models to provide superior

performance on dry roads. Summer

tire performance is substantially

reduced in snow and ice. Summer

tires do not have the tire traction rat-

ing M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tire

side wall. If you plan to operate your

vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,

HYUNDAI recommends the use of

snow tires or all season tires on all

four wheels.

Snow Tires

If you equip your car with snow tires,

they should be the same size and

have the same load capacity as the

original tires. Snow tires should be

installed on all four wheels; other-

wise, poor handling may result.Snow

tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)

more air pressure than the pressure

recommended for the standard tires

on the tire label on the driver’s side of

the center pillar, or up to the maxi-

mum pressure shown on the tire

sidewall, whichever is less. Do not

drive faster than 75 mph (120 km/h)

when your vehicle is equipped with

snow tires.

Radial-Ply Tires

Radial-ply tires provide improved

tread life, road hazard resistance and

smoother high speed ride. The radi-

al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of

belted construction, and are selected

to complement the ride and handling

characteristics of your vehicle.

Radial-ply tires have the same load

carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias

belted tires of the same size, and use

the same recommended inflation

pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires

with bias-ply or bias belted tires is

not recommended. Any combina-

tions of radial-ply and bias-ply or bias

belted tires when used on the same

vehicle will seriously deteriorate

vehicle handling.The best rule to fol-

low is: Identical pairs of radial-ply

tires should always be used as a set

for the front tires and a set for the

rear tires.

Longer wearing tires can be more

susceptible to irregular tread wear. It

is very important to follow the tire

rotation interval in this chapter to

achieve the tread life potential of

these tires. Cuts and punctures in

radial-ply tires are repairable only in

the tread area, because of sidewall

flexing. Consult your tire dealer for

radial-ply tire repairs.

7-48

Maintenance

Low Aspect Ratio Tires

(if equipped)

The aspect ratio is lower than 50 on

low aspect ratio tires.

Because low aspect ratio tires are

optimized for handling and braking,

their sidewall is a little stiffer than a

standard tire. Also low aspect ratio

tires tend to be wider and conse-

quently have a greater contact patch

with the road surface. In some

instances they may generate more

road noise compared with standard

tires.

Do not mix bias ply and radial

ply tires under any circum-

stances.This may cause unusu-

al handling characteristics that

may cause loss of vehicle con-

trol resulting in an accident.

WARNING

Because the sidewall of a low

aspect ratio tire is shorter than

a standard tire, the rim of the

wheel and the tire itself is more

easily susceptible to damage.

Use caution when driving and

follow the guidelines below to

help minimize damage to the

wheel and tire:

• When driving on a rough road

or off road, drive cautiously

because tires and wheels may

be damaged. And after driv-

ing, inspect tires and wheels.

• When passing over a pothole,

speed bump, manhole, or

curb stone, drive slowly so

that the tires and wheels are

not damaged.

• If the tire is subjected to a

severe impact, have the tire

and wheel inspected by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Inspect the tire condition and

pressure every 1,800 miles

(3,000km).

CAUTION

• It is not easy to recognize tire

damage with your own eyes.

But if there is the slightest

hint of tire damage, have the

tire checked or replaced

because the tire damage may

cause air leakage from the

tire.

• If the tire is damaged by driv-

ing on a rough road, off road,

pothole, manhole, or curb

stone, it will not be covered by

the warranty.

CAUTION

7-49

Maintenance

FFUUSSEESS

A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-

tected from electrical overload dam-

age by fuses.

This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels,

one located in the driver's side panel

bolster, the other in the engine com-

partment near the battery.

If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-

sories, or controls do not work, check

the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse

has blown, the element inside the

fuse will be melted or broken.

If the electrical system does not

work, first check the driver's side

fuse panel. Before replacing a blown

fuse, turn the engine and all switches

off, and then disconnect the negative

battery cable. Always replace a

blown fuse with one of the same rat-

ing.

If the replacement fuse blows, this

indicates an electrical problem.Avoid

using the system involved and imme-

diately consult an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Do not use a screwdriver or any

other metal object to remove

fuses because it may cause a

short circuit and damage the sys-

tem.

NOTICE

NEVER replace a fuse with any-

thing but another fuse of the

same rating.

• A higher capacity fuse could

cause damage and possibly

cause a fire.

• Do not install a wire or alu-

minum foil instead of the

proper fuse - even as a tem-

porary repair. It may cause

extensive wiring damage and

possibly a fire.

WARNING

■ Blade type

Normal

■ Cartridge type

Blown

Normal

Blown

■ Multi fuse

Normal

Blown

■ Battery fuse terminal

Normal

Blown

OLF074075

7-50

Maintenance

Instrument Panel Fuse

Replacement

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Open the fuse panel cover.

4. Refer to the label on the inside of

the fuse panel cover to locate the

suspected fuse location.

5. Pull the suspected fuse straight

out. Use the removal tool provided

in the engine compartment fuse

panel.

6. Check the removed fuse; replace

it if it is blown. Spare fuses are

provided in the instrument panel

fuse panels (or in the engine com-

partment fuse panel).

7. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

In an emergency, if you do not have

a spare fuse, use a fuse of the same

rating from a circuit you may not

need for operating the vehicle.

If the headlamps or other electrical

components do not work and the

fuses are undamaged, check the

fuse panel in the engine compart-

ment. If a fuse is blown, it must be

replaced with the same rating.

OAE076018

OAE076017

7-51

Maintenance

Fuse switch

Always, place the fuse switch to the

ON position.

If you move the switch to the OFF

position, some items such as the

audio system and digital clock must

be reset and the smart key may not

work properly.

Information

If the fuse switch is OFF, "Turn on

FUSE SWITCH" or "Turn FUSE

SWTICH On" message will appear.

• Always place the fuse switch in

the ON position while driving the

vehicle.

• Do not move the fuse switch

repeatedly. The fuse switch may

be damaged.

Engine Compartment Panel

Fuse Replacement

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Turn all other switches OFF.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tap and pulling up.

NOTICE

OAE076019

OAE076023

OAE076024

■ Blade type fuse

■ Cartridge type fuse

OLFH044149L/OAEPH047564N

7-52

Maintenance

4. Check the removed fuse; replace

it if it is blown.To remove or insert

the fuse, use the fuse puller in the

engine compartment fuse panel.

5. Push in a new fuse of the same

rating, and make sure it fits tightly

in the clips.If it fits loosely, consult

an authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Multi fuse

If the multi fuse is blown, it must be

removed as follows:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the fuse panel cover by

pressing the tab and pulling it up.

4. Remove the nuts shown in the pic-

ture above.

5. Replace the fuse with a new one

of the same rating.

6. Reinstall in the reverse order of

removal.

Information

If the multi fuse is blown, consult an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

OAE076022

After checking the fuse box in

the engine compartment

securely close the fuse box

cover inside the engine com-

partment, until it clicks.

If the fuse box is not closed

properly, water may leak in side,

possibly causing a malfunction

with the electrical system.

CAUTION

7-53

Maintenance

Fuse/Relay Panel Description

Instrument panel fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-

ing fuse/relay names and ratings.

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your

vehicle; the information is accurate at

the time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse box on your vehicle, refer to

the fuse box label.

OAE076025

OAE076053N

7-54

Maintenance

Engine compartment fuse panel

Inside the fuse/relay box cover, you

can find the fuse/relay label describ-

ing fuse/relay names and ratings.

Information

Not all fuse panel descriptions in this

manual may be applicable to your

vehicle; the information is accurate at

the time of printing. When you inspect

the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to

the fuse panel label.

OAE076026

OAE076069N

7-55

Maintenance

LLIIGGHHTT BBUULLBBSS

Consult an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer to replace most vehicle light

bulbs. It is difficult to replace vehicle

light bulbs because other parts of the

vehicle must be removed before you

can get to the bulb.This is especially

true for removing the headlamp

assembly to get to the bulb(s).

Removing/installing the headlamp

assembly can result in damage to

the vehicle.

Information

After heavy driving rain or washing,

lamps could appear frosty. This condi-

tion is caused by the temperature dif-

ference between the lamp inside and

the outside temperature. This is simi-

lar to the condensation on your win-

dows inside your vehicle when raining

and doesn't indicate a problem with

your vehicle. If the water leaks into

the lamp bulb circuitry, have your

vehicle checked by an authorized

HYUNDAI dealer.

Headlamp, Parking Lamp,Turn

Signal Lamp and Side Marker

Type A – Standard type

(1) Headlamp (Low)

(2) Headlamp (High)

(3) Turn signal lamp

(4) Parking lamp

(5) Side marker

• Prior to replacing a lamp,

depress the foot brake, move

the shift lever into P (Park)

apply the parking brake, place

the Engine Start/Stop button

to the OFF position, and take

the key with you when leaving

the vehicle to avoid sudden

movement of the vehicle and

to prevent possible electric

shock.

• Be aware the bulbs may be

hot and may burn your fin-

gers.

WARNING

OAE076028

7-56

Maintenance

• Always handle them carefully, and

avoid scratches and abrasions. If

the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with

liquids.

• Never touch the glass with bare

hands. Residual oil may cause the

bulb to overheat and burst when lit.

• A bulb should be operated only

when installed in a headlamp.

• If a bulb becomes damaged or

cracked, replace it immediately

and carefully dispose of it.

Headlamp and parking lamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the headlamp bulb cover

(1) by turning it counterclockwise.

4. Disconnect the headlamp bulb

socket-connector. (for low beam

and high beam)

5. Remove the bulb from the head-

lamp assembly.

6. Install a new bulb.

Halogen bulb

• Handle halogen bulbs with

care. Halogen bulbs contain

pressurized gas that will pro-

duce flying pieces of glass

that could cause injuries if

broken.

• Wear eye protection when

changing a bulb. Allow the

bulb to cool down before han-

dling it.

WARNING

OAE076052

OAE076030

Parking lamp

Low beam

High beam

7-57

Maintenance

7. Connect the headlamp bulb sock-

et-connector. (for low beam and

high beam)

8. Install the hbulb cover (1) by turn-

ing it clockwise.

Information

The headlamp aiming should be

adjusted after an accident or after the

headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

6. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the assem-

bly.

7. Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

OAE076031

7-58

Maintenance

Side marker

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pulling out the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb.

Type B– HID headlamp type

(1) Headlamp (Low/High)

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Parking lamp

(4) Side marker

Headlamp

If the light bulb does not operate,

have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Information

If your vehicle is equipped with High

Intensity Discharge (HID) headlamps,

these headlamps contain mercury. So

if you need to have your vehicle dis-

posed, you should remove the HID

Headlamps before disposal. The

removed HID headlamps should be

recycled, re-used or disposed as haz-

ardous waste.

OAE076029

HID headlamp

Do not attempt to replace or

inspect the headlamp (XENON

bulb) due to electric shock dan-

ger. If the headlamp (XENON

bulb) is not working, have your

vehicle checked by an author-

ized HYUNDAI Dealer.

WARNING

OAEPH077075N

7-59

Maintenance

Information

HID lamps have superior perform-

ance vs. halogen bulbs.

HID lamps are estimated by the man-

ufacturer to last twice as long or

longer than halogen bulbs depending

on their frequency of use. They will

probably require replacement at some

point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling

the headlamps on and off more than

typical use will shorten HID lamps

life. HID lamps do not fail in the same

manner as halogen incandescent

lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a

period of operation but will immedi-

ately relight when the headlamp

switch is cycled it is likely the HID

lamp needs to be replaced. HID light-

ing components are more complex

than conventional halogen bulbs thus

have higher replacement cost.

Information

The headlamp aiming should be

adjusted after an accident or after the

headlamp assembly is reinstalled at an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

Turn signal lamp

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

OAE076032

7-60

Maintenance

5. Install a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

6. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the assem-

bly.

7. Push the socket into the assembly

and turn the socket clockwise.

Side marker

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect the negative battery

cable.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pulling out the bulb.

5. Insert a new bulb.

Daytime Running Light (DRL)

Your vehicle is equipped with LED

lamps. LED lamps do not have

replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp

does not operate, have the vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

OAEE076030N

OAEPH077074N

7-61

Maintenance

Side Repeater Lamp

Replacement

Your vehicle is equipped with LED

lamps. LED lamps do not have

replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp

does not operate, have the vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

Rear Combination Light Bulb

Replacement

Type A

(1) Tail/Stop lamp

(2) Turn signal lamp

(3) Tail lamp

(4) Back-up lamp

(5) Side marker

Tail/Stop lamp, turn signal lamp

and side marker lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Open the lamp assembly retaining

screw covers.

3. Loosen the lamp assembly retain-

ing screws with a cross-tip screw-

driver.

OAE077035N

OAE076037

OAE076034

7-62

Maintenance

4. Remove the rear combination

lamp assembly from the body of

the vehicle.

5. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

6. Remove the bulb from the socket

by pressing it in and rotating it

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the bulb align with the slots in the

socket. Pull the bulb out of the

socket.

7. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

8. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the assem-

bly. Push the socket into the

assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

9. Reinstall the lamp assembly to the

body of the vehicle.

OAE076039

OTLA075071

Turn signal lamp

Tail/Stop lamp

Side marker

OAE076038

7-63

Maintenance

Tail lamp and back-up lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Pull the bulb out of the socket.

5. Insert a new bulb into the socket.

6. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots on the

assembly and turning the socket

clockwise.

7. Reinstall the service cover.

Type B

(1) Tail lamp

(2) Stop lamp, tail lamp and turn sig-

nal lamp

(3) Tail lamp

(4) Back-up lamp

(5) Side marker

Stop lamp, tail lamp, turn signal

lamp and side marker

Your vehicle is equipped with LED

lamps. LED lamps do not have

replaceable bulbs. If the LED lamp

does not operate, have the vehicle

checked by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer.

OAE076042

OAE076036

OAEE076025

7-64

Maintenance

Backup lamp

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Remove the service cover using a

flat-blade screwdriver.

3. Remove the socket from the

assembly by turning the socket

counterclockwise until the tabs on

the socket align with the slots on

the assembly.

4. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it

into the socket and rotating it until

it locks into place.

6. Install the socket into the assem-

bly by aligning the tabs on the

socket with the slots in the assem-

bly. Push the socket into the

assembly and turn the socket

clockwise.

7. Reinstall the service cover.

High Mounted Stop Lamp

Replacement

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Gently remove the cover of the lift-

gate trim.

3. Remove the spoiler plug hole.

4. Disconnect the electrical connec-

tor.

5. Loosen the mounting bolts and

remove the spoiler.

6. Remove the high mounted stop

light assembly after disconnecting

the connector.

7. Reinstall a new light assembly in

the reverse order of removal.

OAEE076025 OAEE076038

OAE076043

7-65

Maintenance

License Plate Light Bulb

Replacement

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens cover from the

lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb.

4. Reinstall in the reverse order.

Map lamp and room lamp

OAE076044

Interior Light Bulb Replacement

OAEE076026

■ Map lamp (LED type)

OAEE076027

■ Room lamp (LED type)

Your vehicle is equipped with LED lamps. LED lamps do not have replace-

able bulbs.If the LED lamp does not operate, have the vehicle checked by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

7-66

Maintenance

1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver,

gently pry the lens from the interi-

or lamp housing.

2. Remove the bulb by pulling it

straight out.

3. Install a new bulb into the socket.

4. Align the lens tabs with the interi-

or lamp housing notches and snap

the lens into place.

Use care not to dirty or damage

lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-

ings.

NOTICE

Prior to working on the Interior

Lights, ensure that the lamp is

off to avoid burning your fingers

or receiving an electric shock.

WARNING

■ Map lamp (Bulb type)

OAE076045

OAE076046

■ Vanity mirror lamp

■ Luggage compartment lamp

OAE076048

OAE076047

■ Room lamp (Bulb type)

Map lamp, room lamp, vanity mirror lamp and

luggage compartment lamp

7-67

Maintenance

AAPPPPEEAARRAANNCCEE CCAARREE

Exterior Care

Exterior general caution

It is very important to follow the label

directions when using any chemical

cleaner or polish. Read all warning

and caution statements that appear

on the label.

High-pressure washing

• When using high-pressure wash-

ers, make sure to maintain suffi-

cient distance from the vehicle.

Insufficient clearance or excessive

pressure can lead to component

damage or water penetration.

• Do not spray the camera, sensors

or its surrounding area directly with

a high pressure washer. Shock

applied from high pressure water

may cause the device to not oper-

ate normally.

• Do not bring the nozzle tip close to

boots (rubber or plastic covers)or

connectors as they may be dam-

aged if they come into contact with

high pressure water.

• Do not use any high-pressure noz-

zles, which induce either one-direct

water stream or water swirling.

Protecting your vehicle's finish

Washing

To help protect your vehicle’s finish

from rust and deterioration, wash it

thoroughly and frequently at least

once a month with lukewarm or cold

water.

If you use your vehicle for off-road

driving, you should wash it after each

off-road trip. Pay special attention to

the removal of any accumulation of

salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign

materials. Make sure the drain holes

in the lower edges of the doors and

rocker panels are kept clear and

clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,

industrial pollution and similar

deposits can damage your vehicle’s

finish if not removed immediately.

Even prompt washing with plain

water may not completely remove all

these deposits. A mild soap, safe for

use on painted surfaces, should be

used.

After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-

oughly with lukewarm or cold water.

Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-

ish.

• Do not use strong soap, chemi-

cal detergents or hot water, and

do not wash the vehicle in direct

sunlight or when the body of the

vehicle is warm.

• Be careful when washing the

side windows of your vehicle.

Especially, with high-pressure

water, water may leak through

the windows and wet the interi-

or.

• To prevent damage to the plastic

parts, do not clean with chemi-

cal solvents or strong deter-

gents.

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water before getting on the

road. If braking performance is

impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly while

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

WARNING

7-68

Maintenance

• Water washing in the engine

compartment including high

pressure water washing may

cause the failure of electrical cir-

cuits located in the engine com-

partment.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

Waxing

A good coat of wax provides a barri-

er between your paint and environ-

mental contamination.

Keeping a good coat of wax on your

vehicle will help protect it.

Wax the vehicle when water will no

longer bead on the paint.

Always wash and dry the vehicle

before waxing. Use a good quality

liquid or paste wax, and follow the

manufacturer's instructions. Wax all

metal trim to protect it and to main-

tain its luster.

Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-

als with a spot remover will usually

strip the wax from the finish. Be sure

to re-wax these areas even if the rest

of the vehicle does not yet need wax-

ing.

• Wiping dust or dirt off the body

with a dry cloth will scratch the

finish.

• Do not use steel wool, abrasive

cleaners, or strong detergents

containing highly alkaline or

caustic agents on chrome-plat-

ed or anodized aluminum parts.

This may result in damage to the

protective coating and cause

discoloration or paint deteriora-

tion.

Repairing your vehicle’s finish

Deep scratches or stone chips in the

painted surface must be repaired

promptly. Exposed metal will quickly

rust and may develop into a major

repair expense.

If your vehicle is damaged and

requires any metal repair or

replacement, be sure the body

shop applies anti-corrosion mate-

rials to the parts repaired or

replaced.

NOTICE

OAE076051

7-69

Maintenance

Bright-metal maintenance

• To remove road tar and insects,

use a tar remover, not a scraper or

other sharp object.

• To protect the surfaces of bright-

metal parts from corrosion, apply a

coating of wax or chrome preser-

vative and rub to a high luster.

• During winter weather or in coastal

areas, cover the bright metal parts

with a heavier coating of wax or

preservative. If necessary, coat the

parts with non-corrosive petroleum

jelly or other protective compound.

Underbody maintenance

Corrosive materials used for ice and

snow removal and dust control may

collect on the underbody. If these

materials are not removed, acceler-

ated rusting can occur on underbody

parts such as the fuel lines, frame,

floor pan and exhaust system, even

though they have been treated with

rust protection.

Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-

body and wheel openings with luke-

warm or cold water once a month,

after off-road driving and at the end

of each winter. Pay special attention

to these areas because it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to wet down

the road grime without removing it.

The lower edges of doors, rocker

panels, and frame members have

drain holes that should not be

allowed to clog with dirt; trapped

water in these areas can cause rust-

ing.

Aluminum wheel maintenance

The aluminum wheels are coated

with a clear protective finish.

• Do not use abrasive cleaner, pol-

ishing compound, solvent, or

wire brushes on aluminum

wheels.

• Clean the wheel when it has

cooled.

• Use only a mild soap or neutral

detergent, and rinse thoroughly

with water. Also, clean the

wheels after driving on salted

roads.

• Do not wash the wheels with

high-speed car wash brushes.

• Do not use any cleaners con-

taining acid or alkaline deter-

gents.

NOTICE

After washing the vehicle, test

the brakes while driving slowly

to see if they have been affected

by water.If braking performance

is impaired, dry the brakes by

applying them lightly while

maintaining a slow forward

speed.

WARNING

7-70

Maintenance

Corrosion protection

Protecting your vehicle from corro-

sion

By using the most advanced design

and construction practices to combat

corrosion, HYUNDAI produces vehi-

cles of the highest quality. However,

this is only part of the job.To achieve

the long-term corrosion resistance

your vehicle can deliver, the owner's

cooperation and assistance is also

required.

Common causes of corrosion

The most common causes of corro-

sion on your vehicle are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is

allowed to accumulate underneath

the vehicle.

• Removal of paint or protective

coatings by stones, gravel, abra-

sion or minor scrapes and dents

which leave unprotected metal

exposed to corrosion.

High-corrosion areas

If you live in an area where your vehi-

cle is regularly exposed to corrosive

materials, corrosion protection is

particularly important. Some of the

common causes of accelerated cor-

rosion are road salts, dust control

chemicals, ocean air and industrial

pollution.

Moisture breeds corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in

which corrosion is most likely to

occur. For example, corrosion is

accelerated by high humidity, partic-

ularly when temperatures are just

above freezing. In such conditions,

the corrosive material is kept in con-

tact with the vehicle surfaces by

moisture that is slow to evaporate.

Mud is particularly corrosive

because it is slow to dry and holds

moisture in contact with the vehicle.

Although the mud appears to be dry,

it can still retain moisture and pro-

mote corrosion.

High temperatures can also acceler-

ate corrosion of parts that are not

properly ventilated so the moisture

can be dispersed. For all these rea-

sons, it is particularly important to

keep your vehicle clean and free of

mud or accumulations of other mate-

rials.This applies not only to the vis-

ible surfaces but particularly to the

underside of the vehicle.

To help prevent corrosion

Keep your vehicle clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is

to keep your vehicle clean and free

of corrosive materials. Attention to

the underside of the vehicle is partic-

ularly important.

• If you live in a high-corrosion area

— where road salts are used, near

the ocean, areas with industrial

pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you

should take extra care to prevent

corrosion. In winter, hose off the

underside of your vehicle at least

once a month and be sure to clean

the underside thoroughly when

winter is over.

7-71

Maintenance

• When cleaning underneath the

vehicle, pay particular attention to

the components under the fenders

and other areas that are hidden

from view. Do a thorough job; just

dampening the accumulated mud

rather than washing it away will

accelerate corrosion rather than

prevent it. Water under high pres-

sure and steam are particularly

effective in removing accumulated

mud and corrosive materials.

• When cleaning lower door panels,

rocker panels and frame members,

be sure that drain holes are kept

open so that moisture can escape

and not be trapped inside to accel-

erate corrosion.

Keep your garage dry

Don't park your vehicle in a damp,

poorly ventilated garage. This cre-

ates a favorable environment for cor-

rosion. This is particularly true if you

wash your vehicle in the garage or

drive it into the garage when it is still

wet or covered with snow, ice or

mud.Even a heated garage can con-

tribute to corrosion unless it is well

ventilated so moisture is dispersed.

Keep paint and trim in good condition

Scratches or chips in the finish

should be covered with "touch-up"

paint as soon as possible to reduce

the possibility of corrosion. If bare

metal is showing through, the atten-

tion of a qualified body and paint

shop is recommended.

Bird droppings are highly corrosive

and may damage painted surfaces in

just a few hours. Always remove bird

droppings as soon as possible.

Interior Care

Interior general precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as

perfume and cosmetic oil, from con-

tacting the interior parts because

they may cause damage or discol-

oration. If they do contact the interior

parts, wipe them off immediately.

See the instructions for the proper

way to clean vinyl.

• Never allow water or other liq-

uids to come in contact with

electrical/electronic compo-

nents inside the vehicle as this

may damage them.

• When cleaning leather products

(steering wheel, seats etc.), use

neutral detergents or low alco-

hol content solutions. If you use

high alcohol content solutions

or acid/alkaline detergents, the

color of the leather may fade or

the surface may get stripped off.

NOTICE

7-72

Maintenance

Cleaning the upholstery and

interior trim

Vinyl (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from

vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a

vinyl cleaner.

Fabric (if equipped)

Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-

ric with a whisk broom or vacuum

cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-

tion recommended for upholstery or

carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-

diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If

fresh spots do not receive immediate

attention, the fabric can be stained

and its color can be affected.Also, its

fire-resistant properties can be

reduced if the material is not proper-

ly maintained.

Using anything but recommended

cleaners and procedures may

affect the fabric's appearance and

fire-resistant properties.

Leather (if equipped)

• Features of seat leather

- Leather is made from the outer

skin of an animal, which goes

through a special process to be

available for use.Since it is a nat-

ural product, each part differs in

thickness or density.

Wrinkles may appear as a natural

result of stretching and shrinking

depending on the temperature

and humidity.

- The seat is made of stretchable

fabric to improve comfort.

- The parts contacting the body are

curved and the side supporting

area is high which provides driv-

ing comfort and stability.

- Wrinkles may appear naturally

from usage. It is not a fault of the

products.

• Wrinkles or abrasions which

appear naturally from usage are

not covered by warranty.

• Belts with metallic accessories,

zippers or keys inside the back

pocket may damage the seat

fabric.

• Make sure not to wet the seat. It

may change the nature of natu-

ral leather.

• Jeans or clothes which could

bleach may contaminate the sur-

face of the seat covering fabric.

NOTICE

7-73

Maintenance

• Caring for the leather seats

- Vacuum the seat periodically to

remove dust and sand on the seat.

It will prevent abrasion or damage

of the leather and maintain its qual-

ity.

- Wipe the natural leather seat cover

often with dry or soft cloth.

- Use of proper leather protector

may prevent abrasion of the cover

and helps maintain the color. Be

sure to read the instructions and

consult a specialist when using

leather coating or protective agent.

- Light colored (beige, cream beige)

leather is easily contaminated and

the stain is noticeable. Clean the

seats frequently.

- Avoid wiping with wet cloth. It may

cause the surface to crack.

• Cleaning the leather seats

- Remove all contaminations instant-

ly. Refer to instructions below for

removal of each contaminant.

- Cosmetic products (sunscreen,

foundation, etc.)

Apply cleansing cream on a cloth

and wipe the contaminated spot.

Wipe off the cream with a wet cloth

and remove water with a dry cloth.

- Beverages (coffee, soft drink, etc.)

Apply a small amount of neutral

detergent and wipe until contami-

nations do not smear.

- Oil

Remove oil instantly with

absorbable cloth and wipe with

stain remover used only for natu-

ral leather.

- Chewing gum

Harden the gum with ice and

remove gradually.

Cleaning the seat belt webbing

Clean the belt webbing with any mild

soap solution recommended for

cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow

the instructions provided with the

soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the

webbing because this may weaken

the seat belt.

Cleaning the interior window

glass

If the interior glass surfaces of the

vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-

ered with an oily, greasy or waxy

film), they should be cleaned with

glass cleaner. Follow the directions

on the glass cleaner container.

Do not scrape or scratch the

inside of the rear window. This

may result in damage to the rear

window defroster grid.

NOTICE

7-74

Maintenance

The emission control system of your

vehicle is covered by a written limited

warranty. Please see the warranty

information contained in the Owner's

Handbook & Warranty Information

booklet in your vehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with an

emission control system to meet all

applicable emission regulations.

There are three emission control

systems, as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control sys-

tem

(2) Evaporative emission control sys-

tem

(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to ensure the proper func-

tion of the emission control systems,

it is recommended that you have

your vehicle inspected and main-

tained by an authorized HYUNDAI

dealer in accordance with the main-

tenance schedule in this manual.

For the Inspection and

Maintenance Test (with Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system)

• To prevent the vehicle from mis-

firing during dynamometer test-

ing, turn the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) system off by

pressing the ESC switch (ESC

OFF light illuminated).

• After dynamometer testing is

completed, turn the ESC system

back on by pressing the ESC

switch again.

1. Crankcase Emission Control

System

The positive crankcase ventilation

system is employed to prevent air

pollution caused by blow-by gases

being emitted from the crankcase.

This system supplies fresh filtered air

to the crankcase through the air

intake hose. Inside the crankcase,

the fresh air mixes with blow-by

gases, which then pass through the

PCV valve into the induction system.

2. Evaporative Emission Control

System Including Onboard

Refueling Vapor Recovery

(ORVR)

The Evaporative Emission Control

System is designed to prevent fuel

vapors from escaping into the atmos-

phere. The ORVR system is

designed to allow the vapors from

the fuel tank to be loaded into a can-

ister while refueling at the gas sta-

tion, preventing the escape of fuel

vapors into the atmosphere.

NOTICE

EEMMIISSSSIIOONN CCOONNTTRROOLL SSYYSSTTEEMM

7-75

Maintenance

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel

tank are absorbed and stored in the

onboard canister.When the engine is

running, the fuel vapors absorbed in

the canister are drawn into the surge

tank through the purge control sole-

noid valve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve

(PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is

controlled by the Engine Control

Module (ECM); when the engine

coolant temperature is low during

idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-

orated fuel is not taken into the

engine. After the engine warms-up

during ordinary driving, the PCSV

opens to introduce evaporated fuel to

the engine.

3. Exhaust Emission Control

System

The Exhaust Emission Control

System is a highly effective system

which controls exhaust emissions

while maintaining good vehicle per-

formance.

When the engine starts or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to the

emission system.

Engine exhaust (carbon monox-

ide) precautions

• Carbon monoxide can be present

with other exhaust fumes. If you

smell exhaust fumes of any kind in

your vehicle, drive with all the win-

dows fully open. Have your vehicle

checked and repaired immediately.

Engine exhaust gases contain

carbon monoxide (CO). Though

colorless and odorless, it is

dangerous and could be lethal if

inhaled. Follow the instructions

on this page to avoid CO poi-

soning.

WARNING

• Do not operate the engine in con-

fined or closed areas (such as

garages) any more than what is

necessary to move the vehicle in or

out of the area.

• When the vehicle is stopped in an

open area for more than a short

time with the engine running,

adjust the ventilation system (as

needed) to draw outside air into the

vehicle.

• Never sit in a parked or stopped

vehicle for any extended time with

the engine running.

• When the engine stalls or fails to

start, excessive attempts to restart

the engine may cause damage to

the emission control system.

Operating precautions for cat-

alytic converters (if equipped)

The exhaust system and cat-

alytic converter are very hot

during and immediately after

the engine has been running.To

avoid SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH:

• Do not park, idle, or drive the

vehicle over or near flamma-

ble objects, such as grass,

vegetation, paper, leaves, etc.

A hot exhaust system can

ignite flammable items under

your vehicle.

• Keep away from the exhaust

system and catalytic convert-

er or you may get burned.

Also, Do not remove the heat

sink around the exhaust sys-

tem, do not seal the bottom of

the vehicle, and do not coat

the vehicle for corrosion con-

trol. It may present a fire risk

under certain conditions.

WARNING

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust and a wide vari-

ety of automobile components

and parts, including compo-

nents found in the interior fur-

nishings in a vehicle, contain or

emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects and repro-

ductive harm. In addition, cer-

tain fluids contained in vehicles

and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain or emit chem-

icals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm.

WARNING

Maintenance

7-76

Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-

alytic converter emission control

device.

To prevent damage to the catalytic

converter and to your vehicle, take

the following precautions:

• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for

gasoline engines.

• Do not operate the vehicle when

there are signs of engine malfunc-

tion, such as misfire or a noticeable

loss of performance.

• Do not misuse or abuse the

engine. Examples of misuse are

coasting with the engine off and

descending steep grades in gear

with the engine off.

• Do not operate the engine at high

idle speed for extended periods (5

minutes or more).

• Do not modify or tamper with any

part of the engine or emission con-

trol system. All inspections and

adjustments must be made by an

authorized HYUNDAI dealer.

• Avoid driving with extremely low

fuel level.If you run out of gasoline,

it could cause the engine to misfire

and result in excessive loading of

the catalytic converter.

Maintenance

7-77

CCAALLIIFFOORRNNIIAA PPEERRCCHHLLOORRAATTEE NNOOTTIICCEE

Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See: www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:

Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag inflators, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry batteries,

must be disposed of according to Title 22 California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).

Maintenance

7-78

888

Specifications & Consumer information

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Dimensions..............................................................8-2

Engine......................................................................8-2

Bulb Wattage ..........................................................8-3

Tires and Wheels ...................................................8-5

Volume and Weight................................................8-6

Air Conditioning System........................................8-6

Recommended Lubricants and Capacities..........8-7

Recommended SAE Viscosity Number.........................8-8

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ...................8-9

Vehicle Certification Label....................................8-9

Tire Specification and Pressure Label .............8-10

Engine Number.....................................................8-10

Refrigerant Label.................................................8-10

Consumer Information.........................................8-11

Reporting Safety Defects ...................................8-12

DDIIMMEENNSSIIOONNSS

8-2

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

EENNGGIINNEE

Items in (mm)

Overall length 175.9 (4,470)

Overall width 71.6 (1,820)

Overall height 56.8 (1,445)

Front tread

195/65 R15 *

61.5 (1,563)

205/55 R16 *

61.2 (1,555)

225/45 R17 *

60.0 (1,549)

Rear tread

195/65 R15 *

62.0 (1,577)

205/55 R16 *

61.8 (1,569)

225/45 R17 *

61.5 (1,563)

Wheelbase 106.3 (2,700)

Engine Displacement cu in. (cc) Bore X Stroke in. (mm) Firing Order No. of Cylinders

Kappa 1.6 GDI 96.4 (1,580) 2.8 X 3.8 (72 X 97) 1-3-4-2 In-line 4 cylinder

: Hybrid vehicle

: Plug-in hybrid vehicle

BBUULLBB WWAATTTTAAGGEE

8-3

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage

Front

Type A

Headlamp

Low H7 55

High HB3 60

Parking lamp W5W 5

Turn signal lamp 28/8W 28/8

Side marker W5W 5

Type B

Headlamp Low/High D3S 35

Parking lamp LED LED

Turn signal lamp 28/8W 28/8

Side marker W5W 5

Daytime running light (DRL) LED LED

Side repeater lamp

Outside mirror LED LED

Vehicle side WY5W 5

Rear

Type A

Tail/Stop lamp P21/5W 21/5

Turn signal lamp PY27W 27

Tail lamp W5W 5

Backup lamp W16W 16

Side marker W5W 5

Type B

Tail/Stop lamp LED LED

Turn signal lamp LED LED

Tail lamp LED LED

Backup lamp W16W 16

Side marker LED LED

High mounted stop lamp LED LED

License plate lamp W5W 5

8-4

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Light Bulb Bulb Type Wattage

Interior

Map lamp

Type A W10W 10

Type B LED LED

Room lamp

Type A FESTOON 8

Type B LED LED

Vanity mirror lamp FESTOON 5

Luggage compartment lamp FESTOON 5

TTIIRREESS AANNDD WWHHEEEELLSS

8-5

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

If your vehicle is not equipped with a compact spare tire, your vehicle will be equipped with a Tire Mobility Kit.

Items Tire Size Wheel Size

Inflation Pressure

kPa (psi)

WheelLug Nut

Torque

kgf•m

(lbf•ft, N•m)

Normal Load Maximum Load

Front Rear Front Rear

Full size tire

195/65 R15 *

6.0J X 15 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)

11~13

(79~94,

107~127)

205/55 R16 *

6.5J X 16 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)

225/45 R17 *

7.0J X 17 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36) 250 (36)

Compact spare tire

(if equipped)

T125/80 D15 4.0T X 15 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)

• It is permissible to add 3 psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expect-

ed soon.

Tires typically loose 1psi (7kPa) for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are

expected, recheck your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.

• An air pressure generally decreases, as you drive up to a high-altitude area above sea level. Thus, if you

plan to drive a high-altitude area, check the tire pressures in advance. If necessary, inflate them to a prop-

er level. (Air inflation per altitude : +2.4 psi/1 mile)

NOTICE

When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.

Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or not work properly.

NOTICE

: Hybrid vehicle

: Plug-in hybrid vehicle

8-6

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

VVOOLLUUMMEE AANNDD WWEEIIGGHHTT

AAIIRR CCOONNDDIITTIIOONNIINNGG SSYYSSTTEEMM

Contact an authorized HYUNDAI dealer for more details.

Items Weight of Volume Classification

Refrigerant

oz. (g)

21.16±0.88 (600±25) R-134a

Compressor lubricant

oz. (cc)

4.58±0.35±0.88 (130±10) POE

Gross Vehicle Weight lbs. (kg)

Luggage Volume cu ft (l)

Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle Hybrid vehicle Plug-in hybrid vehicle

3,935 (1,785)*

/ 4,079 (1,850) 4,343 (1,970) 26.5 (750) 23.0 (650)

: For echo pack vehicles

8-7

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.

The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.

RREECCOOMMMMEENNDDEEDD LLUUBBRRIICCAANNTTSS AANNDD CCAAPPAACCIITTIIEESS

Lubricant Volume Classification

Engine oil *

(drain and refill)

Recommends

4.0 US qt. (3.8 l)

0W-20 (SAE Viscosity Number),

API SN (or above) or ACEA C2 *

Dual clutch transmission fluid

1.69 ~ 1.79 US qt. (1.6 ~ 1.7 l)

HK SYN DCTF 70W (SK)

SPIRAX S6 GHME 70W DCTF (H.K.SHELL)

GS DCTF HD 70W (GS CALTEX)

(API GL-4, SAE 70W)

Engine clutch actuator fluid 0.08 ~ 0.13 US qt. (80 ~ 120 cc) FMVSS116 DOT3

Engine coolant

7.07 US qt. (6.7 l)

Mixture of antifreeze and water

(Phosphate-based Ethylene glycol coolant for

aluminum radiator)

Inverter coolant

3.38 US qt. (3.2 l)

Brake fluid

0.74~0.85 US qt. (0.7 ~ 0.8 l)

FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4

Fuel

Hybrid vehicle

11.9 US gal. (45 l)

Refer to "Fuel requirements" in the Foreword

chapter.

Plug-in hybrid vehicle

11.4 US gal. (43 l)

: Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.

: Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel econ-

omy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure

in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.

: If the ACEA C2 engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use ILSAC GF-3 (or above) or ACEA A3 (or above).

8-8

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Recommended SAE Viscosity

Number

Always be sure to clean the area

around any filler plug, drain

plug, or dipstick before check-

ing or draining any lubricant.

This is especially important in

dusty or sandy areas and when

the vehicle is used on unpaved

roads. Cleaning the plug and

dipstick areas will prevent dirt

and grit from entering the

engine and other mechanisms

that could be damaged.

CAUTION

Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers

Temperature

-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120

Engine Oil

°C

(°F)

: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil

of a viscosity grade SAE 0W-20 (API SN (or above) or ACEA

C2). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country,

select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.

10W-30

0/5W-20, 0/5W-30

Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold

weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowability). Lower viscosity

engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance,

however, higher viscosity engine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication

in hot weather.

Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in

engine damage.

When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be

operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended

oil viscosity from the chart.

8-9

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the number used in register-

ing your car and in all legal matters

pertaining to its ownership, etc.

The number is punched on the floor

under the passenger seat. To check

the number, open the cover.

The VIN is also on a plate attached

to the top of the dashboard. The

number on the plate can easily be

seen through the windshield from

outside.

The vehicle certification label

attached on the driver's side center

pillar gives the Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).

VVEEHHIICCLLEE IIDDEENNTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN NNUUMMBBEERR ((VVIINN))

OAE086004L

■ VIN label

OAE086001

■ Frame number

OAE086002

VVEEHHIICCLLEE CCEERRTTIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN

LLAABBEELL

8-10

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

The tires supplied on your new vehi-

cle are chosen to provide the best

performance for normal driving.

The tire label located on the driver's

side center pillar gives the tire pres-

sures recommended for your car.

The engine number is stamped on

the engine block as shown in the

drawing.

The refrigerant label provides infor-

mation such as refrigerant type and

amount.

The label is located on the underside

of the hood.

EENNGGIINNEE NNUUMMBBEERR RREEFFRRIIGGEERRAANNTT LLAABBEELL

((IIFF EEQQUUIIPPPPEEDD))

TTIIRREE SSPPEECCIIFFIICCAATTIIOONN AANNDD

PPRREESSSSUURREE LLAABBEELL

OAE086002L

OAEE086005N

OAEPH086001

8-11

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

Eastern Region:

Connecticut, Delaware,

Maine, Massachusetts, New

Hampshire, New Jersey, New York,

Pennsylvania, Rhode Island,

Vermont.

Eastern Region

1122 Cranbury South River Road

Jamesburg, NJ 08831

(800) 633-5151

Southern Region:

Florida, Georgia, Maryland, North

Carolina, South Carolina, Virginia,

West Virginia.

Southern Region

3025 Chastain Meadows Parkway

Suite 100 Marietta, GA 30066

(800) 633-5151

South Central Region:

Alabama, Arkansas, Louisiana,

Mississippi, New Mexico, Oklahoma,

Tennessee, Texas.

South Central Region

1421 South Beltline Road, Suite 400

Coppell, TX 75019

(800) 633-5151

Central Region:

Illinois, Indiana, lowa, Kentucky,

Michigan, Minnesota, Nebraska,

North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,

Wisconsin, Kansas, Missouri.

Central Region

2 Trans Am Plaza Dr #500 Oakbrook

Terrace, IL 60181

(800) 633-5151

Western Region:

Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, California,

Colorado, Idaho, Montana, Nevada,

Oregon, Utah, Washington,

Wyoming.

Western Region

10550 Talbert Avenue P.O.Box

20850 Fountain Valley, California

92728-0850

(800) 633-5151

CCOONNSSUUMMEERR IINNFFOORRMMAATTIIOONN

This consumer information has been prepared in accordance with regulations issued by the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration of the U.S.Department of Transportation.Your HYUNDAI dealer will help answer any questions you

may have as you read this information.

HYUNDAI motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read and follow all directions in this Owner’s Manual, particularly the

information under the headings "NOTICE", "CAUTION" and "WARNING".

If, after reading this manual, you have any questions regarding the operation of your vehicle, please contact your nearest

HYUNDAI Motor America Regional Office as listed in the following:

8-12

Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should

immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying HYUNDAI

MOTOR AMERICA.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888- 327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov;

download the SaferCar mobile application;

or write to: Administrator, NHTSA

1200 New Jersey Ave, SE,

West Building Washington, D.C. 20590.

You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group

of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual prob-

lems between you, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA.

RREEPPOORRTTIINNGG SSAAFFEETTYY DDEEFFEECCTTSS

HHyybbrriidd SSyysstteemm OOvveerrvviieeww

HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) System..................H2

Hybrid Vehicle......................................................................H2

PHEV (Plug-in Electric Vehicle) System..............H3

Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle.......................................................H3

Charging the Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle....................H4

Charging Information .........................................................H4

Charging Types....................................................................H4

Charging Time Information...............................................H4

Charging Status ...................................................................H5

Charging Connector AUTO/LOCK Mode .......................H6

Scheduled Charging............................................................H7

Charging Precautions.........................................................H8

Normal Charge.....................................................................H9

Trickle Charge....................................................................H15

Driving the Hybrid/Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle .......H27

Starting the Vehicle..........................................................H27

Special Features................................................................H28

Hybrid System Gauge ......................................................H30

Plug-in Hybrid Mode (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)..........H31

Aux. Battery Saver+ (Plug-in hybrid vehicle)...........H32

Warning and Indicator Lights ........................................H34

LCD Display Messages.....................................................H35

Energy flow........................................................................H43

Safety Precautions for Hybrid System ..............H47

High Voltage Battery System.........................................H47

Safety Plug.........................................................................H50

High Voltage Battery Cooling Duct ..............................H50

If an Accident Occurs......................................................H52

When the Hybrid Vehicle Shuts Off ............................H53

Hybrid Vehicle

HHEEVV ((HHYYBBRRIIDD EELLEECCTTRRIICC VVEEHHIICCLLEE)) SSYYSSTTEEMM

The HYUNDAI Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) uses both the gasoline engine and the electric motor for power.The elec-

tric motor is run by a high-voltage HEV battery.

Depending on the driving conditions, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor

or even both at the same time.

Fuel efficiency increases when the engine is off at idle, or when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor with the HEV

battery.

The HEV battery charge must be maintained, so at times the engine will come on even at idle to act as a generator.

Charging also occurs when decelerating or by regenerative braking.

OAE056066

Startup/Low speed cruise

Electric motor

Acceleration

Electric motor + Engine

High speed cruise

Engine

Deceleration

Charging

Stop

Engine OFF

PPHHEEVV ((PPLLUUGG--IINN EELLEECCTTRRIICC VVEEHHIICCLLEE)) SSYYSSTTEEMM

Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle

The HYUNDAI Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) shares the characteristics of both a conventional hybrid elec-

tric vehicle and an all-electric vehicle.

When used as a conventional hybrid electric vehicle, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and

the electric motor or even both at the same time.

When it is operating in the electric vehicle mode, the vehicle is driven only using the electric motor over a certain dis-

tance until the hybrid battery becomes low.The driving distance in EV mode depends on customer driving style and

road conditions. Aggressive driving maneuvers may at times temporarily enable the engine to operate for maximum

power.

The hybrid battery can be fully charged by connecting a plug to an external electric power source.

OAEPH057200L

Electric Vehicle Mode

Startup/Low speed

Acceleration High speed Deceleration External charging

Electric motor

CD (Charge Depleting) Mode

CS (Charge Sustaining) Mode

Charging

Motor Engine+Motor Engine+Motor

Charging

Battery charging

Charging Information

• Normal Charge :

The plug-in hybrid vehicle is

charged by plugging into a normal

charger installed in your home or a

public charging station. (For further

details, refer to the 'Normal

Charge'.)

• Trickle Charge :

The plug-in hybrid vehicle can be

charged by using household elec-

tricity. The electrical outlet in your

home must comply with regulations

and can safely accommodate the

Voltage / Current (Amps) / Power

(Watts) ratings specified on the

portable charge.

Charging Time Information

• Normal Charge :

Takes approximately 2 hours 15

minutes at room temperature.(Can

be charged to 100%.)

• Trickle Charge :

For charging at home. Please note

that Trickle Charger is slower than

the Normal Charger.

CCHHAARRGGIINNGG TTHHEE PPLLUUGG--IINN HHYYBBRRIIDD VVEEHHIICCLLEE

Charging Types

Hyundai 2019 Ioniq Hybrid

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Hyundai 2019 IONIQ HYBRID Questions and Answers

Related Products

Vevor L17040C101&L17040T101 Truck Cargo Mat & Backrest Mat TPE Custom Fit for Hyundai Palisade 2020-2024

Hyundai HYSW1500E 1500W 32cm Electric Artificial Grass Sweeper and Lawn Brush

Vevor HP121 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Kia Hyundai Santa 35320-2G720 35320-2G740

Vevor HP156 High Pressure Fuel Pump for Hyundai Accent/Sonata Tucson Veloster Kia Rio

Pyle PHYELANT16 2016 Hyundai Elantra Replacement Stereo

Hyundai HY-T26 True Wireless Earphones